- Ninguna Categoria
ASME Ferrous Material Specifications - Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code
Anuncio
2004 ASME BOILER & PRESSURE VESSEL CODE II Part A – Ferrous Material Specifications A N I N T E R N AT I O N A L C O D E MATERIALS Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE AN INTERNATIONAL CODE MATERIALS II Part A – Ferrous Material Specifications 2004 Edition July 1, 2004 THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS NEW YORK, NEW YORK Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL COMMITTEE SUBCOMMITTEE ON MATERIALS Date of Issuance: July 1, 2004 (Includes all Addenda dated July 2003 and earlier) This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large. ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity. ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility. Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government or industry endorsement of this code or standard. ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals. The footnotes in this document are part of this American National Standard. ASME collective membership mark The above ASME symbols are registered in the U.S. Patent Office. “ASME” is the trademark of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. The Specifications published and copyrighted by the American Society for Testing and Materials are reproduced with the Society’s permission. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934 Printed in the United States of America Adopted by the Council of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914. Revised 1940, 1941, 1943, 1946, 1949, 1952, 1953, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, 1968, 1971, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1989, 1992, 1995, 1998, 2001, 2004 The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990 Copyright © 2004 by THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS All Rights Reserved Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 2004 ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE SECTIONS I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers II Materials Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals Part D — Properties (Customary) Part D — Properties (Metric) III Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2 III Division 1 Subsection NB — Class 1 Components Subsection NC — Class 2 Components Subsection ND — Class 3 Components Subsection NE — Class MC Components Subsection NF — Supports Subsection NG — Core Support Structures Subsection NH — Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service Appendices III Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments III Division 3 — Containments for Transport and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level Radioactive Material and Waste IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers V Nondestructive Examination VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 Division 2 — Alternative Rules Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks iii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 ADDENDA Beginning with the 2004 Edition, Interpretations of the Code will be distributed annually in July with the issuance of the edition and subsequent addenda. Interpretations previously distributed in January will be posted in January at www.cstools.asme.org/interpretations and included in the July distribution. Colored-sheet Addenda, which include additions and revisions to individual Sections of the Code, are published annually and will be sent automatically to purchasers of the applicable Sections up to the publication of the 2007 Code. The 2004 Code is available only in the loose-leaf format; accordingly, the Addenda will be issued in the loose-leaf, replacement-page format. CODE CASES The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules for materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases which have been adopted will appear in the appropriate 2004 Code Cases book: (1) Boilers and Pressure Vessels and (2) Nuclear Components. Supplements will be sent automatically to the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2007 Code. INTERPRETATIONS ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretation of technical aspects of the Code. The Interpretations for each individual Section will be published separately and will be included as part of the update service to that Section. They will be issued semiannually (July and December) up to the publication of the 2004 Code. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 and 2, will be included with the update service to Subsection NCA. iv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale CONTENTS Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Statements of Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii ASTM Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix Specifications Listed by Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi Specification Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix Preparation of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xli Guideline on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xliii Acceptable ASTM Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvii Guidelines on Multiple Marking of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lvii Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix Specifications SA-6/SA-6M SA-20/SA-20M SA-29/SA-29M SA-36/SA-36M SA-47/SA-47M SA-53/SA-53M SA-105/SA-105M SA-106 SA-134 SA-135 SA-178/SA-178M SA-179/SA-179M SA-181/SA-181M SA-182/SA-182M SA-192/SA-192M SA-193/SA-193M SA-194/SA-194M SA-202/SA-202M SA-203/SA-203M SA-204/SA-204M SA-209/SA-209M General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless . . . . Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat Exchanger and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service. . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or HighTemperature Service, or Both. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1 83 127 153 159 167 195 205 221 227 237 243 247 253 275 279 297 315 319 323 327 SA-210/SA-210M SA-213/SA-213M SA-214/SA-214M SA-216/SA-216M SA-217/SA-217M SA-225/SA-225M SA-231/ SA-231M SA-232/ SA-232M SA-234/SA-234M SA-240 SA-249/SA-249M SA-250/SA-250M SA-263 SA-264 SA-265 SA-266/SA-266M SA-268/SA-268M SA-275/SA-275M SA-276 SA-278 SA-283/SA-283M SA-285/SA-285M SA-299/SA-299M SA-302/SA-302M SA-307 SA-311/SA-311M SA-312/SA-312M SA-320/SA-320M SA-325 SA-333/SA-333M SA-334/SA-334M SA-335/SA-335M SA-336/SA-336M SA-350/SA-350M SA-351/SA-351M Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and HeatExchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel . . . . . . . . . Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . . Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel Forgings, for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperature Up to 650°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low- and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120 /105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 333 337 349 351 355 361 365 371 375 387 397 407 413 425 437 443 449 459 467 477 483 487 491 495 499 507 513 525 537 549 563 573 585 595 607 SA-352/SA-352M SA-353/SA-353M SA-354 SA-358/SA-358M SA-369/SA-369M SA-370 SA-372/SA-372M SA-376/SA-376M SA-387/SA-387M SA-388/SA-388M SA-395 SA-403/SA-403M SA-409/SA-409M SA-414/SA-414M SA-420/SA-420M SA-423/SA-423M SA-426 SA-430/SA-430M SA-435/SA-435M SA-437/SA-437M SA-449 SA-450/SA-450M SA-451 SA-453/SA-453M SA-455/SA-455M SA-476/SA-476M SA-479/SA-479M SA-480/SA-480M SA-484/SA-484M SA-487/SA-487M SA-494/SA-494M SA-508/SA-508M SA-513 SA-515/SA-515M SA-516/SA-516M Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure Containing Parts, Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for LowTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . High-Temperature Bolting Materials, With Expansion Coefficients Comparable to Austenitic Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese . . . . . . . . . . . Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . . Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and LowerTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 615 623 629 639 649 655 715 721 731 739 747 759 769 779 783 793 799 805 811 815 821 829 841 847 857 861 867 879 911 929 937 939 949 975 979 SA-517/SA-517M SA-522/SA-522M SA-524 SA-530/SA-530M SA-533/SA-533M SA-537/SA-537M SA-540/SA-540M SA-541/SA-541M SA-542/SA-542M SA-543/SA-543M SA-553/SA-553M SA-556/SA-556M SA-557/SA-557M SA-562/SA-562M SA-563 SA-564/SA-564M SA-568/SA-568M SA-572/SA-572M SA-574 SA-577/SA-577M SA-578/SA-578M SA-587 SA-592/SA-592M SA-609/SA-609M SA-612/SA-612M SA-638/SA-638M SA-645/SA-645M SA-649/SA-649M SA-660 SA-662/SA-662M SA-666 SA-667/SA-667M SA-671 Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High Strength, Quenched and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . . General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel. . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel. . . . . Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered, Chromium-Molybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, NickelChromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9 Percent Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged Fittings and Parts for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic Examination Thereof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylinders . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 983 987 993 1003 1013 1019 1025 1035 1043 1049 1053 1059 1065 1071 1075 1087 1097 1131 1137 1145 1149 1155 1163 1167 1179 1183 1187 1193 1197 1203 1207 1217 1219 SA-672 SA-675/ SA-675M SA-688/SA-688M SA-691 SA-693 SA-695 SA-696 SA-703/SA-703M SA-705/SA-705M SA-723/SA-723M SA-724/SA-724M SA-727/SA-727M SA-731/SA-731M SA-736/SA-736M SA-737/SA-737M SA-738/SA-738M SA-739 SA-745/SA-745M SA-747/SA-747M SA-748/SA-748M SA-749/SA-749M SA-751 SA-765/SA-765M SA-770/SA-770M SA-781/SA-781M SA-788 SA-789/SA-789M SA-790/SA-790M SA-803/SA-803M SA-813/SA-813M SA-814/SA-814M SA-815/SA-815M Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts. . . . . . . Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components With Inherent Notch Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-CopperChromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls for Pressure Vessel Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component Forgings With Mandatory Toughness Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1229 1239 1245 1257 1265 1273 1277 1281 1301 1309 1315 1319 1325 1331 1337 1341 1347 1351 1357 1363 1365 1377 1385 1393 1401 1419 1433 1441 1453 1465 1475 1483 SA-832/SA-832M SA-834 SA-836/SA-836M SA-841/SA-841M SA-905 SA-941 SA-960 SA-961 SA-962/SA-962M SA-995 SA-999/SA-999M SA-1008/SA-1008M SA-1011/SA-1011M SA-1016/SA-1016M SA-1017/SA-1017M SF-568M SA/AS 1548 SA/CSA-G40.21 SA/EN 10028-2 SA/EN 10028-3 SA/JIS G3118 Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-MolybdenumVanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use . . . . . . . Forgings, Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel, for Glass-Lined Piping and Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves and Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Steel Fasteners or Fastener Materials, or Both, Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Plates for Pressure Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Quality Steels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes Part 3: Weldable Fine Grain Steels, Normalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels for Intermediate and Moderate Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 1501 1505 1511 1521 1527 1535 1547 1559 1569 1573 1587 1597 1605 1619 1623 1635 1637 1639 1641 1643 MANDATORY APPENDIX Appendix I Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 x Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale FOREWORD The American Society of Mechanical Engineers set up a committee in 1911 for the purpose of formulating standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. This committee is now called the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety, relating only to pressure integrity, governing the construction1 of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks and nuclear components, and inservice inspection for pressure integrity of nuclear components and transport tanks, and to interpret these rules when questions arise regarding their intent. This code does not address other safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nuclear components and transport tanks. The user of the Code should refer to other pertinent codes, standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents. With few exceptions, the rules do not, of practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or external operating environments. Recognizing this, the Committee has approved a wide variety of construction rules in this Section to allow the user or his designee to select those which will provide a pressure vessel having a margin for deterioration in service so as to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Accordingly, it is not intended that this Section be used as a design handbook; rather, engineering judgment must be employed in the selection of those sets of Code rules suitable to any specific service or need. This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those aspects which are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgment refers to technical judgments made by knowledgeable designers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must be consistent with Code philosophy and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific prohibitions of the Code. The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying with Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and they are responsible for the application of these programs to their design. The Code does not fully address tolerances. When dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified with tolerances, the values of these parameters are considered nominal and allowable tolerances or local variances may be considered acceptable when based on engineering judgment and standard practices as determined by the designer. The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee deals with the care and inspection of boilers and pressure vessels in service only to the extent of providing suggested rules of good practice as an aid to owners and their inspectors. The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any form of construction that conforms to the Code rules. The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development, Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Mandatory Appendix covering preparation of technical inquiries). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries 1 Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, certification, and pressure relief. xi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 will be presented to the Main Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Main Committee becomes effective only after confirmation by letter ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted to the American National Standards Institute and published at http://cstools.asme.org/wbpms/ public/index.cfm?PublicReviewpRevisions to invite comments from all interested persons. After the allotted time for public review and final approval by ASME, revisions are published annually in Addenda to the Code. Code Cases may be used in the construction of components to be stamped with the ASME Code symbol beginning with the date of their approval by ASME. After Code revisions are approved by ASME, they may be used beginning with the date of issuance shown on the Addenda. Revisions, except for revisions to material specifications in Section II, Parts A and B, become mandatory six months after such date of issuance, except for boilers or pressure vessels contracted for prior to the end of the six-month period. Revisions to material specifications are originated by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and other recognized national or international organizations, and are usually adopted by ASME. However, those revisions may or may not have any effect on the suitability of material, produced to earlier editions of specifications, for use in ASME construction. ASME material specifications approved for use in each construction Code are listed in the Guidelines for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Parts A and B. These Guidelines list, for each specification, the latest edition adopted by ASME, and earlier and later editions considered by ASME to be identical for ASME construction. The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee in the formulation of its rules and in the establishment of maximum design and operating pressures considers materials, construction, methods of fabrication, inspection, and safety devices. The Code Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code. The Scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee in formulating the Code rules. Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of an ASME Code symbol. The specifications for materials given in Section II are identical with or similar to those of specifications published by ASTM, AWS, and other recognized national or international organizations. When reference is made in an ASME material specification to a non-ASME specification for which a companion ASME specification exists, the reference shall be interpreted as applying to the ASME material specification. Not all materials included in the material specifications in Section II have been adopted for Code use. Usage is limited to those materials and grades adopted by at least one of the other Sections of the Code for application under rules of that Section. All materials allowed by these various Sections and used for construction within the scope of their rules shall be furnished in accordance with material specifications contained in Section II or referenced in the Guidelines for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Parts A and B, except where otherwise provided in Code Cases or in the applicable Section of the Code. Materials covered by these specifications are acceptable for use in items covered by the Code Sections only to the degree indicated in the applicable Section. Materials for Code use should preferably be ordered, produced, and documented on this basis; Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Part A and Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Part B list editions of ASME and year dates of specifications that meet ASME requirements and which may be used in Code construction. Material produced to an acceptable specification with requirements different from the requirements of the corresponding specifications listed in the Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Part A or Part B may also be used in accordance with the above, provided the material manufacturer or vessel manufacturer certifies with evidence acceptable to the Authorized Inspector that the corresponding requirements of specifications listed in the Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Part A or Part B have been met. Material produced to an acceptable material specification is not limited as to country of origin. When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice-versa; and the feminine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate. Either U.S. Customary units or SI units may be used for compliance with all requirements of this edition, but one system shall be used consistently throughout for all phases of construction. Either the U.S. Customary units or SI units that are listed in Mandatory Appendix I are identified in the text, or are identified in the nomenclature for equations, shall be used consistently for all phases of construction (e.g. materials, design, fabrication, and reports). Since values in the two systems are not exact equivalents, each system shall be used independently of the other without mixing U.S. Customary units and SI units. xii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale When SI units are selected, U.S. Customary values in referenced specifications that do not contain SI units shall be converted to SI values to at least three significant figures for use in calculations and other aspects of construction. With the publication of the 2004 Edition, Section II, Part D is published as two separate publications. One publication contains values only in U.S. Customary units and the other contains values only in SI units. The selection of the version to use is dependent on the set of units selected for construction. xiii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale xiv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF CODE SYMBOLS AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition of organizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with the requirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature. Organizations that are authorized to use Code Symbols for marking items or constructions that have been constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the Code Symbols for the benefit of the users, the enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the symbols who comply with all requirements. Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the symbols, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there shall be no statements or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding a Code Symbol and /or a Certificate of Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are built (produced or performed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,” or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.” The ASME Symbol shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However, facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an association or a society, or by a holder of a Code Symbol who may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that clearly specified items will carry the symbol. General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturer’s items are constructed under the rules. The ASME logo, which is the cloverleaf with the letters ASME within, shall not be used by any organization other than ASME. STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS Symbols shall not be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code. Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply that all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully complying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME requirements. The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official Code Symbol Stamp described in the governing Section of the Code. Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME” or the various Code xv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale xvi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PERSONNEL ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee Subcommittees, Subgroups, and Working Groups As of January 1, 2004 MAIN COMMITTEE G. G. Karcher, Chair J. G. Feldstein, Vice Chair J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary R. W. Barnes J. E. Batey D. L. Berger M. N. Bressler D. A. Canonico F. C. Cherny D. A. Douin R. E. Gimple M. Gold T. E. Hansen C. L. Hoffmann D. F. Landers MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP J. Tiratto, Chair L. W. Douthwaite W. M. Lundy J. R. MacKay U. R. Miller R. A. Moen P. A. Molvie C. C. Neely T. P. Pastor C. J. Pieper M. D. Rana B. W. Roberts F. J. Schaaf, Jr. A. Selz R. W. Swayne D. E. Tanner S. V. Voorhees CONFERENCE COMMITTEE D. A. Douin — Illinois (Chair) R. D. Reetz — North Dakota (Vice Chair) D. E. Tanner — Ohio (Secretary) R. J. Aben, Jr. — Michigan J. S. Aclaro — California J. T. Amato — Minnesota E. A. Anderson — Chicago, Illinois F. R. Andrus — Oregon R. D. Austin — Colorado M. M. Barber — Michigan R. Barlett — Arizona F. P. Barton — Virginia W. K. Brigham — New Hampshire D. E. Burns — Nebraska J. H. Burpee — Maine C. Castle — Nova Scotia, Canada R. R. Cate — Louisiana D. C. Cook — California R. A. Coomes — Kentucky D. Eastman — Newfoundland and Labrador, Canada G. L. Ebeyer — New Orleans, Louisiana E. Everett — Georgia J. M. Given, Jr. — North Carolina P. C. Hackford — Utah J. B. Harlan — Delaware M. L. Holloway — Oklahoma K. Hynes — Prince Edward Island, Canada EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE (MAIN COMMITTEE) J. G. Feldstein, Chair G. G. Karcher, Vice Chair J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary R. W. Barnes D. A. Canonico R. E. Gimple M. Gold J. R. MacKay T. P. Pastor A. Selz A. J. Spencer D. E. Tanner HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE) R. D. Bonner R. J. Bosnak R. J. Cepluch L. J. Chockie W. D. Doty J. R. Farr R. C. Griffin E. J. Hemzy M. H. Jawad J. LeCoff F. N. Moschini W. E. Somers L. P. Zick, Jr. HONORS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE J. R. MacKay, Chair J. N. Shih, Secretary J. E. Batey D. L. Berger J. G. Feldstein M. Gold F. E. Gregor W. L. Haag, Jr. M. H. Jawad D. P. Jones T. P. Pastor C. J. Pieper R. R. Stevenson D. T. Jagger — Ohio D. J. Jenkins — Kansas S. Katz — British Columbia, Canada M. Kotb — Quebec, Canada K. T. Lau — Alberta, Canada S. E. Lyons — Arkansas M. A. Malek — Florida G. F. Mankel — Alaska R. D. Marvin II — Washington I. W. Mault — Manitoba, Canada H. T. McEwen — Mississippi R. Mile — Ontario, Canada M. F. Mooney — Massachusetts Y. Nagpaul — Hawaii T. Parks — Texas J. D. Payton — Pennsylvania M. R. Peterson — Alaska H. D. Pfaff — South Dakota D. C. Price — Yukon Territory, Canada R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin D. E. Ross — New Brunswick, Canada M. Shuff — West Virginia N. Surtees — Saskatchewan, Canada M. R. Toth — Tennessee M. J. Verhagen — Wisconsin M. Washington — New Jersey R. B. West — Iowa M. J. Wheel — Vermont D. J. Willis — Indiana INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP V. Felix S. H. Leong xvii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS J. L. Jones Not for Resale P. Williamson SUBCOMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (SC I) J. R. MacKay, Chair D. L. Berger, Vice Chair J. N. Shih, Secretary D. A. Canonico K. K. Coleman P. D. Edwards J. Hainsworth T. E. Hansen J. S. Hunter C. F. Jeerings J. P. Libbrecht H. Lorenz Heat Recovery Steam Generators Task Group (SC I & SC VIII) T. E. Hansen, Chair R. W. Anderson G. L. Bostick I. J. Cotton L. R. Douglas J. D. Fishburn E. M. Ortman A. L. Plumley W. L. Lowry T. C. McGough R. E. McLaughlin P. A. Molvie J. T. Pillow R. G. Presnak B. W. Roberts R. D. Schueler, Jr. J. P. Swezy J. M. Tanzosh R. V. Wielgoszinski D. J. Willis SUBCOMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (SC II) M. Gold, Chair R. A. Moen, Vice Chair N. Lobo, Secretary D. C. Agarwal W. R. Apblett, Jr. M. N. Bressler H. D. Bushfield J. Cameron D. A. Canonico D. W. Gandy M. H. Gilkey J. F. Grubb J. F. Henry Honorary Members (SC I) D. N. French W. E. Somers R. L. Williams Subgroup on Design (SC I) P. A. Molvie, Chair M. L. Coats J. D. Fishburn C. F. Jeerings J. C. Light R. D. Schueler, Jr. J. L. Seigle N. Surtees J. P. Swezy S. V. Torkildson R. V. Wielgoszinski A. P. Ahrendt T. M. Cullen R. Dirscherl W. D. Doty W. D. Edsall R. E. McLaughlin Y. Oishi R. D. Schueler, Jr. J. P. Swezy R. V. Wielgoszinski R. W. Mikitka, Chair J. A. Morrow, Secretary S. R. Frost D. S. Griffin J. F. Grubb W. L. Lowry T. C. McGough J. T. Pillow R. P. Sullivan R. V. Wielgoszinski D. J. Willis E. G. Nisbett, Chair A. Appleton R. M. Davison B. M. Dingman M. J. Dosdourian T. Graham J. F. Grubb K. M. Hottle D. Janikowski J. F. Henry J. P. Libbrecht F. Masuyama J. M. Tanzosh H. N. Titer, Jr. W. M. Lundy, Chair J. P. Glaspie, Secretary D. C. Agarwal H. D. Bushfield D. A. Canonico W. D. Doty D. M. Fryer A. F. Garbolevsky J. P. Glaspie F. Massi T. C. McGough M. W. Smith E. A. Whittle xviii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS D. C. Krouse L. J. Lavezzi W. C. Mack J. K. Mahaney A. S. Melilli K. E. Orie E. Upitis R. Zawierucha A. W. Zeuthen Subgroup on International Material Specifications (SC II) Subgroup on Piping (SC I) T. E. Hansen, Chair D. L. Berger P. D. Edwards W. L. Lowry M. Katcher E. Michalopoulos D. Nadel D. F. Shaw C. H. Sturgeon Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (SC II) Subgroup on Materials (SC I) B. W. Roberts, Chair J. S. Hunter, Secretary D. A. Canonico K. K. Coleman K. L. Hayes J. J. Heger G. C. Hsu C. E. Spaeder, Jr. A. W. Zeuthen Subgroup on External Pressure (SC II & SC-D) Subgroup on General Requirements (SC I) R. E. McLaughlin, Chair J. Hainsworth, Secretary D. L. Berger P. D. Edwards C. F. Jeerings J. C. Light C. L. Hoffmann F. Masuyama R. K. Nanstad M. L. Nayyar E. G. Nisbett D. W. Rahoi B. W. Roberts E. Shapiro R. C. Sutherlin R. W. Swindeman J. M. Tanzosh B. E. Thurgood J. C. Vaillant Honorary Members (SC II) Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (SC I) D. L. Berger, Chair J. T. Pillow, Secretary J. Hainsworth T. E. Hansen T. C. McGough D. W. Rahoi R. D. Scheuler, Jr. R. H. Sirois J. C. Steverman, Jr. J. K. Tercey S. R. Timko S. V. Torkildson Not for Resale M. Gold D. O. Henry M. Higuchi H. Lorenz F. Osweiller R. D. Schueler, Jr. E. A. Steen E. Upitis Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (SC II) D. W. Rahoi, Chair M. Katcher, Secretary W. R. Apblett, Jr. H. D. Bushfield L. G. Coffee M. H. Gilkey E. L. Hibner G. C. Hsu Honorary Member (SC III) A. G. Kireta, Jr. J. Kissell O. Miyahara D. T. Peters E. Shapiro R. C. Sutherlin R. Zawierucha F. R. Drahos Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel and High-Level Waste Transport Packagings (SC III) G. M. Foster, Chair G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair D. K. Morton, Secretary W. H. Borter J. T. Conner E. L. Farrow J. M. Floyd R. S. Hill III H. W. Lee P. E. McConnell I. D. McInnes A. B. Meichler G. C. Mok Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (SC II) C. L. Hoffmann, Chair J. M. Tanzosh, Secretary W. R. Apblett, Jr. D. A. Canonico K. K. Coleman M. Gold F. Masuyama O. Miyahara R. A. Moen H. Murakami D. W. Rahoi B. W. Roberts M. S. Shelton R. W. Swindeman B. E. Thurgood T. P. Vassallo R. E. Nickell T. J. O’Connell E. L. Pleins T. Saegusa H. P. Shrivastava N. M. Simpson R. H. Smith J. D. Stevenson C. J. Temus P. Turula A. D. Watkins S. Yukawa Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (SC II & SC IX) J. M. Tanzosh, Chair K. K. Coleman W. D. Doty K. L. Hayes J. F. Henry Subgroup on Design (SC III) D. W. Rahoi B. W. Roberts W. J. Sperko B. E. Thurgood R. P. Deubler, Chair C. W. Bruny, Vice Chair A. N. Nguyen, Secretary T. M. Adams E. B. Branch M. N. Bressler D. L. Caldwell J. R. Cole R. E. Cornman, Jr. A. A. Dermenjian D. H. Hanrath R. S. Hill III R. I. Jetter Subgroup on Toughness (SC II & SC VIII) W. S. Jacobs, Chair J. L. Arnold R. J. Basile J. Cameron W. D. Doty H. E. Gordon C. D. Lamb K. Mokhtarian C. C. Neely T. T. Phillips M. D. Rana D. A. Swanson E. Upitis S. Yukawa Special Working Group on Nonmetallic Materials (SC II) C. W. Rowley, Chair F. L. Brown P. S. Hill Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (SC III) F. R. Volgstadt R. H. Walker F. Worth R. J. Masterson, Chair F. J. Birch, Secretary U. S. Bandyopadhyay R. P. Deubler J. C. Finneran, Jr. A. N. Nguyen SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR POWER (SC III) R. W. Barnes, Chair R. M. Jessee, Vice Chair C. A. Sanna, Secretary Y. Asada W. H. Borter E. B. Branch M. N. Bressler F. C. Cherny R. E. Cornman, Jr. W. D. Doty R. P. Deubler B. A. Erler G. M. Foster D. H. Hanrath R. S. Hill III C. L. Hoffmann C. C. Kim D. F. Landers W. C. LaRochelle K. A. Manoly E. A. Mayhew W. N. McLean R. A. Moen C. J. Pieper R. F. Reedy B. B. Scott J. D. Stevenson C. H. Walters K. R. Wichman P. R. Olson I. Saito J. R. Stinson D. V. Walshe C.-I. Wu Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (SC III) J. T. Land Working Group on Dynamic and Extreme Load Conditions (SG-D) (SC III) D. L. Caldwell, Chair P. L. Anderson, Secretary M. K. Au-Yang R. D. Blevins xix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS H. Kobayashi J. T. Land D. F. Landers K. A. Manoly R. J. Masterson W. N. McLean J. C. Minichiello T. Nakamura W. Z. Novak I. Saito G. C. Slagis J. D. Stevenson K. R. Wichman Not for Resale P.-Y. Chen W. S. LaPay H. Lockert P. R. Olson Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (SC III) J. R. Cole, Chair P. Hirschberg, Secretary T. M. Adams G. A. Antaki J. Catalano C. Y. Chern J. T. Conner R. J. Gurdal R. W. Haupt R. S. Hill III D. F. Landers V. Matzen Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (SC III) J. F. McCabe J. C. Minichiello F. F. Naguib A. N. Nguyen O. O. Oyamada R. D. Patel E. C. Rodabaugh M. S. Sills G. C. Slagis V. K. Verma E. A. Wais C.-I. Wu C. L. Hoffmann, Chair G. P. Milley, Secretary B. H. Berg W. H. Borter D. M. Doyle G. M. Foster G. B. Georgiev R. M. Jessee C. C. Kim Subgroup on Pressure Relief (SC III) S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair F. C. Cherny E. M. Petrosky Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design (SG-D) (SC III) R. S. Hill III, Chair J. T. Conner, Secretary T. Asayama B. M. Ayyub K. R. Balkey A. A. Dermenjian I. Saito M. E. Schmidt J. P. Tucker R. F. Reedy, Chair W. H. Borter M. N. Bressler D. L. Caldwell R. P. Deubler J. E. Livingston J. R. Rajan D. B. Spencer, Jr. G. K. Vaghasia M. F. Hessheimer, Chair T. C. Inman, Vice Chair A. J. Roby, Secretary J. F. Artuso A. C. Eberhardt B. A. Erler J. Gutierrez H. R. Sonderegger J. C. Tsacoyeanes J. P. Tucker R. G. Visalli P. A. Molvie, Chair S. V. Voorhees, Vice Chair G. Moino, Secretary R. Bartlett T. L. Bedeaux D. C. Bixby J. Calland B. G. French W. L. Haag, Jr. J. D. Hoh D. J. Jenkins K. M. McTague R. B. Keating D. E. Matthews G. K. Miller W. Z. Novak E. Pelling H. S. Thornton Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (SC III) W. Z. Novak, Chair Y. Asada R. S. Hill III C. L. Hoffmann R. A. Moen S. Yukawa S. V. Voorhees, Chair T. L. Bedeaux K. J. Hoey M. R. Minick B. B. Scott H. K. Sharma D. M. Vickery D. V. Walshe C. H. Walters J. D. Hoh K. M. McTague P. A. Molvie Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (SC IV) K. M. McTague, Chair T. L. Bedeaux C. P. McQuiggan xx Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS K. R. Moskwa E. A. Nordstrom J. L. Seigle R. V. Wielgoszinski F. P. Barton, Honorary Member R. B. Duggan, Honorary Member R. H. Weigel, Honorary Member J. I. Woodward, Honorary Member Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (SC IV) Subgroup on General Requirements (SC III & SC 3C) W. C. LaRochelle, Chair C. A. Lizotte, Secretary A. Appleton B. H. Berg E. A. Mayhew R. P. McIntyre R. Mile D. C. Jeng T. E. Johnson N.-H. Lee B. B. Scott R. E. Shewmaker J. D. Stevenson A. Y. C. Wong SUBCOMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (SC IV) Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (SC III) C. W. Bruny, Chair F. F. Naguib, Secretary D. H. Hanrath M. Hartzman W. J. Heilker A. Kalnins B. A. Erler D. H. Hanrath W. C. LaRochelle J. D. Stevenson JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR NUCLEAR SERVICE (SC 3C) Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (SC III) W. N. McLean, Chair R. R. Brodin R. Koester J. D. Page S. N. Shields A. L. Szeglin D. G. Thibault Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC III) Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (SC III) R. E. Cornman, Jr., Chair A. A. Fraser M. Higuchi G. R. Jones J. W. Leavitt M. Lau R. A. Moen H. Murakami C. J. Pieper N. M. Simpson W. J. Sperko K. B. Stuckey S. Yukawa Not for Resale K. R. Moskwa R. H. Weigel J. I. Woodworth Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (SC V) Subgroup on Water Heaters (SC IV) W. L. Haag, Jr., Chair J. Calland T. D. Gantt F. M. Lucas K. M. McTague N. Y. Faransso O. F. Hedden R. Kellerhall R. W. Kruzic E. Robinson F. J. Schreiner M. A. Taylor T. E. Trant J. F. Manning W. C. McGaughey F. J. Sattler SUBCOMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (SC VIII) T. P. Pastor, Chair K. Mokhtarian, Vice Chair S. J. Rossi, Secretary R. J. Basile V. Bogosian J. Cameron R. M. Elliott J. G. Feldstein J. P. Glaspie M. J. Houle W. S. Jacobs G. G. Karcher K. T. Lau R. Mahadeen Subgroup on Welded Boilers (SC IV) J. L. Seigle, Chair R. Bartlett T. L. Bedeaux J. Calland B. G. French E. A. Nordstrom R. P. Sullivan R. V. Wielgoszinski SUBCOMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (SC V) J. E. Batey, Chair F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary S. J. Akrin A. S. Birks N. Y. Faransso G. W. Hembree R. W. Kruzic J. F. Manning W. C. McGaughey R. D. McGuire D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr. F. J. Sattler E. F. Summers, Jr. M. J. Wheel Subgroup on Design (SC VIII) U. R. Miller, Chair R. E. Knoblock, Secretary O. A. Barsky R. J. Basile M. R. Bauman M. R. Breach S. M. Caldwell J. R. Farr J. P. Glaspie W. S. Jacobs R. W. Mikitka Subgroup on General Requirements/ Personnel Qualifications and Inquiries (SC V) R. D. McGuire, Chair J. E. Batey A. S. Birks N. Y. Faransso G. W. Hembree J. R. MacKay J. P. Swezy Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (SC V) S. J. Akrin, Chair A. S. Birks N. Y. Faransso G. W. Hembree R. W. Kruzic C. D. Rodery, Chair E. A. Steen, Vice Chair J. L. Arnold W. J. Bees H. E. Gordon M. J. Houle W. S. Jacobs R. W. Kruzic J. F. Manning W. C. McGaughey F. J. Sattler E. F. Summers, Jr. J. P. Swezy S. C. Roberts, Chair D. B. Demichael, Secretary V. Bogosian R. M. Elliott J. P. Glaspie K. T. Lau J. Cameron, Chair E. E. Morgenegg, Secretary D. C. Agarwal W. D. Doty J. F. Grubb E. L. Hibner M. Katcher F. B. Kovacs R. W. Kruzic E. F. Summers, Jr. J. P. Swezy xxi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS A. S. Mann C. C. Neely A. S. Olivares K. J. Schneider K. K. Tam Subgroup on Materials (SC VIII) J. F. Manning Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (SC V) G. W. Hembree, Chair S. J. Akrin J. E. Batey N. Y. Faransso D. J. Kreft D. C. Lamb J. S. Lee B. R. Morelock M. J. Pischke B. F. Shelley Subgroup on General Requirements (SC VIII) Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V) J. E. Batey K. Mokhtarian T. P. Pastor M. D. Rana G. B. Rawls, Jr. C. D. Rodery A. Selz S. C. Shah C. H. Sturgeon K. K. Tam E. L. Thomas, Jr. Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC VIII) D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr. F. J. Sattler E. F. Summers, Jr. M. J. Wheel Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (SC V) G. W. Hembree, Chair S. J. Akrin J. E. Batey N. Y. Faransso R. Kellerhall F. B. Kovacs R. W. Mikitka U. R. Miller C. C. Neely M. J. Pischke M. D. Rana S. C. Roberts C. D. Rodery K. J. Schneider A. Selz J. R. Sims, Jr. E. A. Steen K. K. Tam E. L. Thomas, Jr. E. Upitis Not for Resale H. Lorenz W. M. Lundy E. G. Nisbett K. E. Orie D. W. Rahoi E. Upitis Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment (SC VIII) M. D. Johnson, Chair U. D’Urso, Secretary G. Braussen F. L. Brown S. W. Hairston Subgroup on General Requirements (SC IX) B. R. Newmark, Chair P. R. Evans R. M. Jessee A. S. Olivares S. Malone M. R. Minick T. A. Pindroh E. Soltow A. A. Stupica Subgroup on Materials (SC IX) M. L. Carpenter, Chair M. Bernasek L. P. Connor R. M. Jessee C. C. Kim S. D. Reynolds, Jr. Special Working Group on Heat Transfer Equipment (SC VIII) R. Mahadeen, Chair G. Aurioles, Secretary O. A Barsky S. M. Caldwell M. J. Holtz U. R. Miller T. W. Norton F. Osweiller R. J. Stastny S. Yokell R. P. Zoldak D. A. Bowers, Chair V. A. Bell L. P. Connor R. B. Corbit P. R. Evans P. D. Flenner K. L. Hayes J. A. Kapp J. Keltjens D. P. Kendall A. K. Khare S. C. Mordre G. J. Mraz K. D. Murphy S. N. Pagay E. H. Perez E. D. Roll J. F. Sullivan F. W. Tatar S. Tereda D. A. Bowers, Chair M. J. Rice, Secretary R. K. Brown, Jr. A. S. Olivares F. C. Ouyang S. D. Reynolds, Jr. D. Eisberg, Chair P. J. Conlisk, Vice Chair A. J. Roby, Secretary F. L. Brown J. L. Bustillos T. W. Cowley T. J. Fowler L. E. Hunt J. C. Murphy R. D. McGuire B. R. Newmark A. S. Olivares M. J. Pischke S. D. Reynolds, Jr. M. J. Rice G. W. Spohn III M. J. Stanko P. L. Van Fosson R. R. Young W. K. Scattergood, Honorary Member R. E. Gimple, Chair G. C. Park, Vice Chair O. Martinez, Secretary W. H. Bamford, Jr. R. L. Beverly T. J. Conner D. D. Davis R. L. Dyle E. L. Farrow F. E. Gregor D. O. Henry R. D. Kerr D. F. Landers J. T. Lindberg M. J. Houle C. F. Jeerings J. P. Swezy xxii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS D. J. Painter D. J. Pinell G. Ramirez J. R. Richter B. F. Shelley F. W. Van Name D. O. Yancey, Jr. P. H. Ziehl SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (SC XI) Subgroup on Brazing (SC IX) M. J. Pischke, Chair F. Beckman L. F. Campbell M. L. Carpenter M. B. Sims W. J. Sperko J. P. Swezy P. L. Van Fosson T. C. Wiesner SUBCOMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (SC X) J. E. Didlake, Jr. T. A. Duffey B. L. Haroldsen H. L. Heaton E. A. Rodriguez J. R. Sims, Jr. SUBCOMMITTEE ON WELDING (SC IX) J. G. Feldstein, Chair W. J. Sperko, Vice Chair M. R. Aranzamendez, Secretary D. A. Bowers M. L. Carpenter L. P. Connor W. D. Doty P. D. Flenner M. J. Houle J. S. Lee W. M. Lundy M. J. Houle J. S. Lee W. M. Lundy R. D. McGuire M. B. Sims G. W. Spohn III Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (SC IX) Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (SC VIII) R. B. Nickell, Chair S. J. Rossi, Secretary G. A. Antaki D. D. Barker R. C. Biel D. W. Bowman D. L. Caldwell H. A. Sadler C. E. Sainz W. J. Sperko M. J. Stanko R. R. Young Subgroup on Performance Qualification (SC IX) Special Working Group on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII) J. R. Sims, Jr., Chair D. T. Peters, Vice Chair P. A. Reddington, Secretary L. P. Antalffy R. C. Biel D. J. Burns P. N. Chaku R. E. Feigel J. L. Heck, Jr. A. H. Honza V. T. Hwang M. M. James P. Jansson H. B. Porter R. A. Weiss K. R. Willens Not for Resale K. Miya W. E. Norris A. T. Roberts III W. R. Rogers III L. Sage D. A. Scarth F. J. Schaaf, Jr. J. C. Spanner, Jr. J. E. Staffiera R. W. Swayne E. W. Throckmorton C. S. Withers R. A. Yonekawa K. K. Yoon Honorary Members (SC XI) S. H. Bush L. J. Chockie C. D. Cowfer O. F. Hedden Subgroup on Liquid-Metal–Cooled Systems (SC XI) C. G. McCargar, Chair W. L. Chase J. P. Houstrup L. R. Katz P. C. Riccardella Working Group on Liquid-Metal Reactor Covers (SG-LMCS) (SC XI) Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SC XI) W. H. Bamford, Jr., Chair J. M. Bloom R. C. Cipolla S. Coffin G. H. De Boo R. M. Gamble T. J. Griesbach K. Hasegawa P. J. Hijeck D. N. Hopkins Y. Imamura K. Koyama W. L. Chase, Chair D. R. Lee S. Ranganath D. A. Scarth W. L. Server G. L. Stevens C. A. Tomes A. Van Der Sluys K. R. Wichman G. M. Wilkowski K. K. Yoon S. Yukawa Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SC XI) J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair C. J. Wirtz, Secretary F. L. Becker N. R. Bentley B. Bevins T. L. Chan C. B. Cheezem C. D. Cowfer F. J. Dodd D. O. Henry Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI) R. C. Cipolla, Chair G. H. De Boo, Secretary W. H. Bamford, Jr. M. Basol J. M. Bloom E. Friedman T. J. Griesbach F. D. Hayes D. N. Hopkins Y. Imamura K. Koyama D. R. Lee H. S. Mehta M. A. Mitchell J. E. O’Sullivan R. K. Qashu S. Ranganath D. A. Scarth T. S. Schurman W. L. Server F. A. Simonen K. R. Wichman G. M. Wilkowski K. K. Yoon S. Yukawa V. A. Zilberstein J. J. McArdle III, Chair M. F. Sherwin, Secretary D. R. Cordes B. L. Curtis G. B. Georgiev D. W. Lamond, Chair J. M. Boughman, Secretary T. M. Anselmi J. J. Churchwell R. J. Cimoch S. Coffin G. L. Fechter K. W. Hall R. E. Hall J. K. McClanahan A. McNeill III B. L. Montgomery Working Group on Procedure Qualification and Volumetric Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI) D. W. Peltola J. R. Pfefferle S. Ranganath S. T. Rosinski W. L. Server E. A. Siegel F. A. Simonen G. L. Stevens K. K. Yoon S. Yukawa C. Santos, Jr., Alternate N. R. Bentley, Chair B. Bevins, Secretary F. L. Becker C. B. Cheezem C. D. Cowfer S. R. Doctor F. J. Dodd M. E. Gothard D. A. Jackson R. Kellerhall D. B. King D. Kurek G. L. Lagleder G. A. Lofthus S. M. Walker C. E. Moyer, Alternate Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SC XI) R. W. Swayne, Chair J. T. Conner, Secretary D. E. Boyle M. N. Bressler R. E. Cantrell E. V. Farrell, Jr. P. D. Fisher E. B. Gerlach R. E. Gimple R. A. Hermann T. E. Hiss K. Hasegawa D. N. Hopkins K. K. Kashima H. S. Mehta K. Miyazaki J. S. Panesar K. K. Yoon S. Yukawa V. A. Zilberstein xxiii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS D. O. Henry A. S. Reed J. C. Spanner, Jr. S. H. Von Fuchs C. J. Wirtz Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-NDE) (SC XI) Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI) D. A. Scarth, Chair G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary W. H. Bamford, Jr. R. C. Cipolla N. G. Cofie S. K. Daftuar G. H. De Boo E. Friedman L. F. Goyette M. R. Hum G. L. Lagleder J. T. Lindberg G. A. Lofthus J. J. McArdle III M. C. Modes A. S. Reed F. J. Schaaf, Jr. M. F. Sherwin Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface, Visual, and Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI) Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (SC XI) T. J. Griesbach, Chair W. H. Bamford, Jr. H. Behnke B. A. Bishop E. Friedman S. R. Gosselin P. J. Hijeck S. N. Malik P. Manbeck H. S. Mehta R. Pace J. S. Panesar R. W. King Not for Resale E. V. Imbro R. D. Kerr S. L. McCracken M. S. McDonald B. R. Newton W. R. Rogers III R. R. Stevenson D. E. Waskey C. S. Withers R. A. Yonekawa Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (SC XI) T. E. Hiss, Chair E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary D. E. Boyle S. B. Brown J. T. Conner S. K. Fisher E. B. Gerlach D. R. Graham E. V. Imbro Working Group on Implementation of Risk-Based Examination (SG-WCS) (SC XI) D. F. Landers M. S. McDonald W. R. Rogers III R. R. Stevenson R. W. Swayne A. H. Taufique T. P. Vassallo, Jr. R. A. Yonekawa S. D. Kulat, Chair J. M. Agold, Secretary S. A. Ali K. R. Balkey B. A. Bishop H. Q. Do R. Fougerousse M. R. Graybeal M. L. Herrera J. T. Lindberg I. Mach Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Process (SG-RRA) (SC XI) D. E. Waskey, Chair R. E. Cantrell, Secretary J. A. Davis S. J. Findlan P. D. Fisher A. J. Giannuzzi R. P. Indap R. D. Kerr Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components (SG-WCS) (SC XI) C. C. Kim M. Lau S. L. McCracken B. R. Newton J. E. O’Sullivan J. G. Weicks K. R. Willens E. V. Andruskiewicz, Alternate K. B. Thomas, Chair G. E. Whitman, Secretary V. L. Armentrout G. L. Belew H. Q. Do R. Fougerousse M. R. Hum S. D. Kulat J. T. Lindberg Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SC XI) E. W. Throckmorton, Chair G. E. Whitman, Secretary J. M. Agold G. L. Belew J. M. Boughman W. J. Briggs R. E. Ciemiewicz D. D. Davis E. L. Farrow O. F. Hedden M. L. Herrera S. D. Kulat D. W. Lamond M. P. Lintz W. E. Norris J. E. Staffiera H. M. Stephens, Jr. K. B. Thomas S. M. Walker R. A. West H. L. Graves III, Alternate A. T. Roberts III, Chair K. Rhyne, Secretary T. L. Chan J. W. Crider E. L. Farrow R. W. Swayne, Chair R. L. Beverly M. P. Lintz H. L. Graves III H. T. Hill R. D. Hough C. N. Krishnaswamy M. P. Lintz D. Naus S. C. Petitgout W. E. Norris, Alternate L. Sage J. E. Staffiera C. J. Wirtz Special Working Group on Plant Life Extension (SC XI) F. E. Gregor, Chair M. P. Lintz, Secretary T. M. Anselmi D. D. Davis P.-T. Kuo T. A. Meyer SUBCOMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (SC XII) A. Selz, Chair P. D. Stumpf, Secretary A. N. Antoniou C. Becht IV M. L. Coats M. A. Garrett C. H. Hochman G. G. Karcher G. McRae R. E. Hall D. G. Naujock M. F. Sherwin K. B. Thomas G. E. Whitman xxiv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS D. W. Kinley III R. K. Mattu L. Sage S. R. Scott C. S. Withers Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC XI) Working Group on ISI Optimization (SG-WCS) (SC XI) E. A. Siegel, Chair R. L. Turner, Secretary W. H. Bamford, Jr. N. R. Bentley J. M. Boughman I. Mach D. G. Naujock C. Pendleton C. M. Ross D. Song E. W. Throckmorton R. L. Turner R. A. West Working Group on General Requirements (SC XI) Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (SC XI) J. E. Staffiera, Chair H. M. Stephens, Jr., Secretary H. Ashar W. J. Briggs S. G. Brown K. K. N. Chao R. E. Ciemiewicz R. C. Cox M. J. Ferlisi R. K. Mattu A. McNeill III J. T. Mitman P. J. O’Regan M. J. Paterak J. H. Phillips M. A. Pyne F. A. Simonen R. A. West A. T. Keim, Alternate Not for Resale M. R. Minick M. D. Rana C. M. Serratella S. Staniszewski G. R. Stoeckinger M. R. Toth A. P. Varghese S. V. Voorhees C. H. Walters Subgroup on Design and Materials (SC XII) M. D. Rana, Chair C. Becht IV D. A. Canonico W. D. Doty G. G. Karcher M. Manikkam S. L. McWilliams T. P. Pastor SUBCOMMITTEE ON DESIGN (SC-D) R. J. Basile, Chair E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary R. W. Barnes M. R. Breach R. P. Deubler G. G. Graven R. I. Jetter M. D. Pham J. L. Rademacher T. A. Rogers C. M. Serratella A. P. Varghese M. R. Ward E. A. Whittle D. P. Jones R. W. Mikitka U. R. Miller W. J. O’Donnell R. D. Schueler, Jr. A. Selz Subgroup on Design Analysis (SC-D) M. R. Breach P. J. Conlisk R. J. Gurdal G. L. Hollinger D. P. Jones A. Kalnins Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC XII) S. V. Voorhees, Chair J. A. Byers D. A. Canonico M. L. Coats J. J. Engelking B. L. Gehl L. D. Holsinger D. J. Kreft G. McRae M. R. Minick W. J. Koves O. Maekawa G. Taxacher E. L. Thomas, Jr. R. A. Whipple Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (SC-D) Subgroup on General Requirements (SC XII) C. H. Hochman, Chair T. W. Alexander D. M. Allbritten C. A. Betts J. F. Cannon J. L. Freiler W. L. Garfield M. A. Garrett R. I. Jetter, Chair C. Becht IV J. Cervenka D. S. Griffin M. H. Jawad K. L. Gilmore T. B. Lee N. J. Paulick G. R. Stoeckinger M. R. Toth C. H. Walters L. Wolpert Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (SC-D) W. J. O’Donnell, Chair P. R. Donavin R. J. Gurdal J. A. Hayward P. Hirschberg P. Hsu D. P. Jones SUBCOMMITTEE ON BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL ACCREDITATION (SC-BPVA) K. I. Baron, Secretary M. B. Doherty P. D. Edwards R. M. Elliott P. C. Hackford W. C. LaRochelle B. B. MacDonald L. E. McDonald K. M. McTague R. K. Reamey M. L. Sisk N. Surtees D. E. Tanner B. C. Turczynski D. E. Tuttle W. J. O’Donnell D. A. Osage J. S. Porowski D. F. Shaw M. S. Shelton V. Bogosian, Alternate M. A. DeVries, Alternate C. E. Ford, Alternate J. W. Frey, Alternate T. E. Hansen, Alternate L. J. Kuchera, Alternate K. T. Lau, Alternate G. P. Milley, Alternate B. R. Morelock, Alternate J. D. O’Leary, Alternate J. A. West, Alternate R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate A. J. Spencer, Honorary Member G. Kharshafdjian C. Lawton S. Majumdar M. J. Manjoine T. Nakamura G. Taxacher H. H. Ziada Subgroup on Openings (SC-D) M. R. Breach, Chair R. W. Mikitka, Secretary G. G. Graven V. T. Hwang J. C. Light R. B. Luney J. P. Madden D. R. Palmer J. A. Pfeifer M. D. Rana E. C. Rodabaugh Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (SC-D) R. W. Mikitka, Chair G. D. Bibel E. Michalopoulos S. N. Pagay P. G. Scheckermann R. W. Schneider R. D. Schueler, Jr. A. Selz M. S. Shelton SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR ACCREDITATION (SC-NA) R. R. Stevenson, Chair W. C. LaRochelle, Vice Chair M. C. Tromba, Secretary V. Bogosian M. N. Bressler G. Deily S. M. Goodwin K. A. Huber M. Kotb R. P. McIntyre M. R. Minick SUBCOMMITTEE ON SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (SC-SVR) H. B. Prasse T. E. Quaka A. T. Roberts III P. D. Edwards, Alternate B. G. Kovarik, Alternate C. Lizotte, Alternate D. E. Tanner, Alternate R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate H. L. Wiger, Alternate O. E. Trapp, Staff Representative S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair J. A. West, Vice Chair U. D’Urso, Secretary J. F. Ball S. Cammeresi J. A. Cox R. D. Danzy D. B. Demichael R. J. Doelling xxv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale H. I. Gregg P. C. Hackford W. F. Hart C. A. Neumann D. J. Scallan A. J. Spencer J. C. Standfast Z. Wang Subgroup on Design (SC-SVR) J. A. West, Chair R. D. Danzy R. J. Doelling H. I. Gregg Subgroup on Testing (SC-SVR) D. Miller A. J. Spencer T. R. Tarbay J. A. Cox, Chair S. Cammeresi J. E. Cierpiot G. D. Goodson Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR) D. B. Demichael, Chair J. F. Ball G. Brazier J. P. Glaspie P. C. Hackford C. A. Neumann J. W. Ramsey J. W. Richardson J. C. Standfast xxvi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale W. F. Hart K. C. Roy D. J. Scallan Z. Wang PERSONNEL Officers of ASTM Committees (Cooperating in the Development of the Specifications Herein) As of December 31, 2003 A1 COMMITTEE ON STEEL, STAINLESS STEEL, AND RELATED ALLOYS J. K. Mahaney, Jr., Chair F. M. Christensen, Producer Vice Chair R. M. Davison, Producer Vice Chair D. C. Krouse, Producer Vice Chair W. H. Childs, User Vice Chair A4 COMMITTEE ON IRON CASTINGS R. W. Bonds, Chair H. R. Sonderegger, Vice Chair W. H. Le Van, Recording Secretary G. M. Cobb, User Vice Chair A. S. Melilli, User Vice Chair G. A. Hayden, Secretary T. E. Murphy, Membership Secretary G. Luciw, Staff Manager xxvii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale T. L. Way, Membership Secretary D. Rehiel, Staff Manager xxviii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PREFACE Pressure Vessel Code Committees, then subsequently, by cooperative action, modified and identified as ASTM specifications. Section II, Parts A and B, currently contain many material specifications which are identical with the corresponding ASTM specifications and some which have been modified for Code usage. In 1969, the American Welding Society began publication of specifications for welding rods, electrodes, and filler metals, hitherto issued by ASTM. The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee has recognized this new arrangement, and is now working with AWS on these specifications. Section II, Part C, contains the welding material specifications approved for Code use. In 1992, the ASME Board of Pressure Technology Codes and Standards endorsed the use of non-ASTM material for Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications. It is the intent to follow the procedures and practices currently in use to implement the adoption of non-ASTM materials. All identical specifications are indicated by the ASME /originating organization symbols. The specifications prepared and copyrighted by ASTM, AWS, and other originating organizations are reproduced in the Code with the permission of the respective Society. The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee has given careful consideration to each new and revised specification, and has made such changes as they deemed necessary to make the specification adaptable for Code usage. In addition, ASME has furnished ASTM with the basic requirements that should govern many proposed new specifications. Joint action will continue an effort to make the ASTM, AWS, and ASME specifications identical. To assure that there will be a clear understanding on the part of the users of Section II, ASME publishes both the identical specifications and those amended for Code usage in three parts every three years, in the same page size to match the other sections of the Code, and Addenda are issued annually to provide the latest changes in Section II specifications. The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code has been adopted into law by 49 states and many municipalities in the United States and by all of the Canadian provinces. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) have cooperated for more than fifty years in the preparation of material specifications adequate for safety in the field of pressure equipment for ferrous and nonferrous materials, contained in Section II (Part A — Ferrous and Part B — Nonferrous) of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The evolution of this cooperative effort is contained in Professor A. M. Greene’s “History of the ASME Boiler Code,” which was published as a series of articles in Mechanical Engineering from July 1952 through August 1953 and is now available from ASME in a special bound edition. The following quotations from this history, which was based upon the minutes of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee, will help focus on the cooperative nature of the specifications found in Section II, Material Specifications. “General discussion of material specifications comprising Paragraphs 1 to 112 of Part 2 and the advisability of having them agree with ASTM specifications,” (1914). “ASME Subcommittee appointed to confer with ASTM,” (1916). “Because of this cooperation the specifications of the 1918 Edition of the ASME Boiler Code were more nearly in agreement with ASTM specifications. In the 1924 Edition of the Code, 10 specifications were in complete agreement with ASTM specifications, 4 in substantial agreement and 2 covered materials for which ASTM had no corresponding specifications.” “In Section II, Material Specifications, the paragraphs were given new numbers beginning with S-1 and extending to S-213,” (1925). “Section II was brought into agreement with changes made in the latest ASTM specifications since 1921,” (1932). “The Subcommittee on Material Specifications arranged for the introduction of the revisions of many of the specifications so that they would agree with the latest form of the earlier ASTM specifications...,” (1935). From the preceding, it is evident that many of the material specifications were prepared by the Boiler and xxix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale xxx Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATIONS LISTED BY MATERIALS Steel Plate, Sheets and Strip SA-568/SA-568M Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097 SA-749/SA-749M Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Steel Pipe SA-53/SA-53M SA-106 SA-134 SA-135 SA-312 /SA-312M SA-333 /SA-333M SA-335 /SA-335M SA-358 /SA-358M SA-369 /SA-369M SA-376 /SA-376M SA-409 /SA-409M SA-426 SA-430/SA-430M SA-451 SA-524 SA-530/SA-530M SA-587 SA-660 SA-671 SA-672 SA-691 SA-727/SA-727M SA-731/SA-731M SA-790/SA-790M SA-813/SA-813M SA-814/SA-814M Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . . General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components With Inherent Notch Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 167 205 221 227 515 549 573 639 649 721 769 799 805 841 993 1003 1155 1197 1219 1229 1257 1319 1325 1441 1465 1475 SA-941 SA-961 SA-999/SA-999M Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527 Common Requirements for Steel, Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547 General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573 Steel Tubes SA-178/SA-178M SA-179/SA-179M SA-192/SA-192M SA-209/SA-209M SA-210/SA-210M SA-213/SA-213M SA-214/SA-214M SA-249/SA-249M SA-250/SA-250M SA-268/SA-268M SA-334/SA-334M SA-423/SA-423M SA-450/SA-450M SA-513 SA-556/SA-556M SA-557/SA-557M SA-688/SA-688M SA-789/SA-789M SA-803/SA-803M SA-941 SA-1016/SA-1016M Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat Exchanger and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service. . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Electric Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. . . . Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 243 275 327 333 337 349 397 407 449 563 759 829 949 1059 1065 1245 1433 1453 1527 1605 Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts SA-105/SA-105M SA-181/SA-181M SA-182/SA-182M SA-216/SA-216M SA-217/SA-217M Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure Containing Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 195 247 253 351 355 SA-231/ SA-231M SA-232/SA-232M SA-234/SA-234M SA-350/SA-350M SA-351/SA-351M SA-352/SA-352M SA-403/SA-403M SA-420/SA-420M SA-522/SA-522M SA-592/SA-592M SA-815/SA-815M SA-905 SA-960 SA-961 SA-995 Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy for Moderate and High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure Containing Parts, Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for LowTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged Fittings and Parts for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves and Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Plates, Sheets, and Strip for Pressure Vessels SA-20/SA-20M General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-202/SA-202M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . SA-203/SA-203M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-204/SA-204M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-225/SA-225M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel . . . . . . . . . SA-240 Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-263 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . . SA-264 Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-265 Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-285/SA-285M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-299/SA-299M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-302/SA-302M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-353/SA-353M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-387/SA-387M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-414/SA-414M Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-455/SA-455M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese . . . . . . . . . . . SA-480/SA-480M General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-515/SA-515M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-516/SA-516M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and LowerTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 365 371 375 595 607 615 759 783 987 1163 1483 1521 1535 1547 1569 83 315 319 323 361 387 413 425 437 487 491 495 623 731 779 857 879 975 979 SA-517/SA-517M SA-533/SA-533M SA-537/SA-537M SA-542/SA-542M SA-543/SA-543M SA-553/SA-553M SA-562/SA-562M SA-612/SA-612M SA-645/SA-645M SA-662/SA-662M SA-666 SA-693 SA-724/SA-724M SA-736/SA-736M SA-737/SA-737M SA-738/SA-738M SA-770/SA-770M SA-832/SA-832M SA-841/SA-841M SA-1017/SA-1017M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High Strength, Quenched and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel. . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel. . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered, Chromium-Molybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, NickelChromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, 8 and 9 Percent Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-CopperChromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-MolybdenumVanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten . . . . . 983 1013 1019 1043 1049 1053 1071 1179 1187 1203 1207 1265 1315 1331 1337 1341 1393 1495 1511 1619 Structural Steel SA-6/SA-6M SA-36/SA-36M SA-283/SA-283M SA-572/SA-572M SA-1008/SA-1008M SA-1011/SA-1011M General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low- and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1 153 483 1131 1587 1597 Steel Bars SA-6/SA-6M General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-29/SA-29M General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-311/SA-311M Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-479/SA-479M Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-484/SA-484M General Requirements for Stainless and Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-564/SA-564M Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-638/SA-638M Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-675/SA-675M Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-695 Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-696 Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-739 Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Bolting Materials SA-193/SA-193M Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-194/SA-194M Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-320/SA-320M Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120 /105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-354 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-437/SA-437M Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-449 Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-453/SA-453M High-Temperature Bolting Materials, With Expansion Coefficients Comparable to Austenitic Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-540/SA-540M Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-574 Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-962/SA-962M Common Requirements for Steel Fasteners or Fastener Materials, or Both, Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF-568M Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Billets and Forgings SA-105/SA-105M Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-181/SA-181M Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-266/SA-266M Carbon Steel Forgings, for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-336/SA-336M Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1 127 467 507 867 911 1087 1183 1239 1273 1277 1347 279 297 499 525 537 629 815 821 847 1025 1075 1137 1559 1623 195 247 443 585 SA-350/SA-350M SA-372/SA-372M SA-484/SA-484M SA-508/SA-508M SA-541/SA-541M SA-638/SA-638M SA-649/SA-649M SA-705/SA-705M SA-723/SA-723M SA-745/SA-745M SA-765/SA-765M SA-788 SA-836/SA-836M Steel Castings SA-216/SA-216M SA-217/SA-217M SA-351/SA-351M SA-352/SA-352M SA-487/SA-487M SA-494/SA-494M SA-609/SA-609M SA-667/SA-667M SA-703/SA-703M SA-747/SA-747M SA-781/SA-781M SA-995 Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component Forgings With Mandatory Toughness Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forgings, Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel, for Glass-Lined Piping and Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic Examination Thereof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylinders . . . . . . Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts. . . . . . . Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion-Resisting and Heat-Resisting Steels SA-182/SA-182M Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-193/SA-193M Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-194/SA-194M Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or HighTemperature Service, or Both. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-213/SA-213M Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-216/SA-216M Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 595 715 911 939 1035 1183 1193 1301 1309 1351 1385 1419 1505 351 355 607 615 929 937 1167 1217 1281 1357 1401 1569 253 279 297 337 351 SA-217/SA-217M SA-240 SA-249/SA-249M SA-263 SA-264 SA-265 SA-268/SA-268M SA-312/SA-312M SA-320/SA-320M SA-336/SA-336M SA-351/SA-351M SA-358/SA-358M SA-369/SA-369M SA-376/SA-376M SA-403/SA-403M SA-409/SA-409M SA-426 SA-430/SA-430M SA-437/SA-437M SA-451 SA-479 /SA-479M SA-484/SA-484M SA-515/SA-515M SA-564/SA-564M SA-638/SA-638M SA-660 SA-666 SA-691 SA-705/SA-705M SA-789/SA-789M SA-790/SA-790M SA-814/SA-814M SA-815/SA-815M Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure Containing Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . . Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . . Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Age-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 355 387 397 413 425 437 449 513 525 585 607 639 649 721 759 769 799 803 815 841 867 911 975 1087 1183 1197 1207 1257 1301 1433 1441 1475 1483 SA-995 Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 Wrought Iron, Cast Iron, and Malleable Iron SA-47/SA-47M Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-278 Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures Up to 650°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-395 Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-476/SA-476M Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-748/SA-748M Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls for Pressure Vessel Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA-834 Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use . . . . . . . Methods SA-275/SA-275M SA-370 SA-388/SA-388M SA-435/SA-435M SA-577/SA-577M SA-578/SA-578M SA-745/SA-745M SA-751 Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . . Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 159 477 747 861 1363 1501 459 655 739 811 1145 1149 1351 1377 SPECIFICATION REMOVAL From time to time, it becomes necessary to remove specifications from this Part of Section II. This occurs because the sponsoring society (e.g., ASTM, AWS, CEN) has notified ASME that the specification has either been replaced with another specification, or that there is no known use and production of a material. Removal of a specification from this Section also results in concurrent removal of the same specification from Section IX and from all of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Construction Codes that reference the material. This action effectively prohibits further use of the material in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel construction. The following specification will be dropped from this Section in the next Addenda, unless information concerning current production and use of the material is received before December 1 of this year: SA-430/SA-430M-91 (discontinued by ASTM in 1995, not replaced) If you are currently using and purchasing new material to this specification for ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code construction, and if discontinuance of this specification would present a hardship, please notify the Secretary of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee, at the address shown below: Secretary ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 Tel: (212) 591-8533 Fax: (212) 591-8501 xxxix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 xl Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PREPARATION OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL COMMITTEE 1-100 INTRODUCTION (b) Background. State the purpose of the inquiry, which would be either to obtain an interpretation of Code rules, or to propose consideration of a revision to the present rules. Provide concisely the information needed for the Committee’s understanding of the inquiry, being sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda, paragraphs, figures, and tables. If sketches are provided, they shall be limited to the scope of the inquiry. (c) Inquiry Structure. Prepare statements in a condensed and precise question format, omitting superfluous background information, and, where appropriate, composed in such a way that “yes” or “no” (perhaps with provisos) would be an acceptable reply. This inquiry statement should be technically and editorially correct. (d) Proposed Reply. State what it is believed that the Code requires. If in the inquirer’s opinion a revision to the Code is needed, recommended wording shall be provided. The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regularly to consider written requests for interpretations and revisions to the Code rules, and to develop new rules as dictated by technological development. The Committee’s activities in this regard are limited strictly to interpretations of the rules or to the consideration of revisions to the present rules on the basis of new data or technology. As a matter of published policy, ASME does not approve, certify, rate, or endorse any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity, and, accordingly, inquiries requiring such consideration will be returned. Moreover, ASME does not act as a consultant on specific engineering problems or on the general application or understanding of the Code rules. If, based on the inquiry information submitted, it is the opinion of the Committee that the inquirer should seek assistance, the inquiry will be returned with the recommendation that such assistance be obtained. All inquiries that do not provide the information needed for the Committee’s full understanding will be returned. 1-300 1-200 Inquiries shall preferably be submitted in typewritten form; however, legible handwritten inquiries will also be considered. They shall include the name and mailing address of the inquirer, and be mailed to the following address: Secretary ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 INQUIRY FORMAT Inquiries shall be limited strictly to interpretations of the rules or to the consideration of revisions to the present rules on the basis of new data or technology. Inquiries shall be submitted in the following format. (a) Scope. Involve a single rule or closely related rules. An inquiry letter concerning unrelated subjects will be returned. xli Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SUBMITTAL Not for Resale xlii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale GUIDELINE ON THE APPROVAL OF NEW MATERIALS UNDER THE ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE Code Policy. It is the policy of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to adopt for inclusion in Section II only such specifications as have been adopted by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), by the American Welding Society (AWS), and by other recognized national or international organizations. It is expected that requests for Code approval will normally be for materials for which there is a recognized national or international specification. For materials made to a recognized national or international specification other than those of ASTM or AWS, the inquirer shall give notice to the standards developing organization that a request has been made to ASME for adoption of their specification under the ASME Code and shall request that the organization grant ASME permission to reprint the specification. For other materials, a request shall be made to ASTM, AWS, or a recognized national or international organization to develop a specification that can be presented to the Code Committee. It is the policy of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to consider requests to adopt new materials only from boiler, pressure vessel, or nuclear power plant component Manufacturers or end users. Further, such requests should be for materials for which there is a reasonable expectation of use in a boiler, pressure vessel, or nuclear power plant component constructed to the rules of one of the Sections of this Code. Application. The inquirer shall identify to the Committee the Section or Sections and Divisions of the Code in which the new material is to be incorporated, the temperature range of application, whether cyclic service is to be considered, and whether external pressure service is to be considered. The inquirer shall identify all product forms, size ranges, and specifications for which incorporation is desired. Mechanical Properties. Together with the specification for the material, the inquirer shall furnish the Committee with adequate data on which to base design values for inclusion in the applicable tables. The data shall include values of ultimate tensile strength, yield strength, reduction of area, and elongation, at 100°F (or 50°C) intervals, from room temperature to 100°F (or 50°C) above the maximum intended use temperature, unless the maximum intended use temperature does not exceed 100°F. Any heat treatment that is required to produce the mechanical properties should be fully described. If adoption is desired at temperatures at which timedependent behavior may be expected to control design values, stress-rupture and creep rate data for these timedependent properties shall be provided, starting at temperatures about 50°F (or 25°C) below the temperature where time-dependent properties may govern (see Appendix 1 of Section II, Part D) and extending to about 100°F (or 50°C) above the maximum intended use temperature. The longest rupture time at each test temperature must be in excess of 6000 hr and the shortest about 100 hr, with at least three additional tests at stresses selected to provide rupture times nominally equally spaced in log (time); i.e., times nominally of 100, 300, 800, 2200, and 6000 hr at each test temperature. Obviously, longer times and additional tests are beneficial. The interval between successive test temperatures shall be chosen such that rupture lives shall not differ by more than a factor of about 10 at any given stress for two adjacent temperatures. In general, test temperatures should be in about 50°F (or 25°C) intervals if maximum test times are no longer than 6000 hr. The goal of the testing is to facilitate data analysis to estimate the average and minimum stresses for rupture in 100,000 hr and an average creep rate of 10−5 %/hr for each temperature where design stresses are established. Alternative test plans that deviate from the prior description but achieve the overall objective may be considered. Minimum creep rate data shall be provided over the same range of temperatures as above, with the lowest stress at each temperature selected, to achieve a minimum creep rate of 1.0 to 2.0 ⴛ 10− 4 %/hr or less. Creep rate data may be obtained in the course of stress-rupture testing or may be obtained on additional specimens. If it can be conclusively demonstrated that creep rate does xliii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale not control the design stresses, the creep rate data may be sparse in relation to the stress-rupture data. Submission of creep curves for evaluation of creep rate behavior is acceptable and encouraged. For materials that will be used in welded applications, sufficient time-dependent data shall be provided for weldments and filler metals to allow ASME to assess the properties in comparison with the base material. In the time-dependent range, this includes providing stress-rupture data for specimen tests in excess of 6000 hr at each temperature and for each welding process. In addition, minimum creep rate data on filler metals shall also be provided to rates below 1.0 to 2.0 ⴛ 10− 4 %/hr. If adoption at temperatures below room temperature is requested, and if it is desired to take design advantage of increased strength at lower temperatures, data on the time-independent properties shall be provided at 100°F (or 50°C) intervals to and including the lowest intended use temperature. Notch toughness data shall be provided for materials for which Code toughness rules would be expected to apply. The data shall include test results for the intended lowest service metal temperature and for the range of material thicknesses desired. For welded construction, the notch toughness data shall include the results of Code toughness tests for weld metal and heat-affected zone for weldments made by the intended welding processes. If the material is to be used in components that operate under external pressure, stress–strain curves (tension or compression) shall be furnished, at 100°F (or 50°C) intervals over the range of design temperatures desired. External pressure charts are based on the early portion (up to 1% strain) of the stress–strain curve. The stress–strain curve (not load versus extension) shall be determined using a Class B-2 or better accuracy extensometer as defined in ASTM E 83. Numerical data, when available, should be submitted. The data should include the original cross-sectional area of the test specimen and stress–strain curves with units marked on them. If the material is to be used in cyclic service and the construction Code in which adoption is desired requires explicit consideration of cyclic behavior, fatigue data shall also be furnished over the range of design temperatures desired. In general, for all mechanical properties, data shall be provided from at least three heats of material meeting all of the requirements of a specification for at least one product form for which adoption is desired, for each test at each test temperature. When adoption for both cast and wrought product forms is desired, data from at least three heats each of a wrought and of a cast product form shall be submitted. It is desired that the data represent all product forms for which adoption is desired. For product forms for which the properties may be size dependent, data from products of different sizes, including the largest size for which adoption is desired, shall be provided. Test methods employed shall be those referenced in or by the material specifications, or shall be appropriate ASTM test methods or recommended practices for the properties tested. Information describing service experience in the temperature range contemplated will be useful to the Committee. Other Properties. The inquirer shall furnish to the Committee adequate data necessary to establish values for coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal conductivity and diffusivity, Young’s modulus, shear modulus, and Poisson’s ratio, when the construction Code in which adoption is desired requires explicit consideration of these properties. Data shall be provided over the range of temperatures for which the material is to be used. Weldability. The inquirer shall furnish complete data on the weldability of material intended for welding, including data on procedure qualification tests made in accordance with the requirements of Section IX. Welding tests shall be made over the full range of thickness in which the material is to be used. Pertinent information, such as postweld heat treatment required, susceptibility to air hardening, effect of welding procedure and heataffected zone and weld metal notch toughness, and the amount of experience in welding the material shall be given. Physical Changes. For new materials, it is important to know the structural stability characteristics and the degree of retention of properties with exposure at temperature. The influence of fabrication practices, such as forming, welding, and thermal treatment, on the mechanical properties, ductility, and microstructure of the material are important, particularly where degradation in properties may occur. Where particular temperature ranges of exposure or heat treatment, cooling rates, combinations of mechanical working and thermal treatments, fabrication practices, exposure to particular environments, etc., cause significant changes in the mechanical properties, microstructure, resistance to brittle fracture, etc., it is of prime importance to call attention to those conditions that should be avoided in service or in manufacture of parts or vessels from the material. Requests for Additional Data. The Committee may request additional data, including data on properties or material behavior not explicitly treated in the construction Code in which adoption is desired. New Materials Checklist. To assist inquirers desiring Code coverage for new materials, or extending coverage of existing materials, the Committee has developed the following checklist of items that ought to be addressed xliv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Requirements for Requests for ASME Acceptance of Material Specifications of Recognized National or International Organizations Other Than ASTM or AWS. The Committee will consider only requests for specifications in the English language and in U.S. or SI/metric units. The Committee will consider accepting specifications of recognized national or international organizations, such as, but not limited to, American Petroleum Institute (API), ASTM, AWS, Canadian Standards Association (CSA), European Committee for Standardization (CEN), and Japanese Standards Association (JIS). Material specifications of other than national or international organizations, such as those of material producers and suppliers, will not be considered for acceptance. Requirements for Recognized National or International Specifications. Acceptable material specifications will be identified by date or edition. Approved edition(s) will be stated in the subtitle of the ASME specification. Eventually, acceptable previous editions will be maintained in guidelines to Section II, Parts A and B. Minimum requirements that must be contained in a material specification for which acceptance is being requested include such items as name of national or international organization, scope, reference documents, process, manufacture, conditions for delivery, heat treatment, chemical and tensile requirements, forming properties, testing specifications and requirements, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection, and rejection. Publication of Recognized National or International Specifications. Specifications for which ASME has not been given permission to publish by the originating organization will be on a cover sheet in Section II, Parts A and B. Information on obtaining a copy of those documents will be maintained in those Parts. Documents that are referenced in accepted national or international material specifications will not be published by ASME. However, information on obtaining a copy of those documents will be maintained in Section II, Parts A and B. Additions and exceptions to the material specification will be noted in the subtitle of the specification. Code Case. The Code Committee will consider the issuance of an ASME Code Case, to be effective for a period of 3 years, permitting the use of a new material, provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the inquirer provides evidence that a request for coverage of the material in a specification has been made to ASTM or a recognized national or international organization; (b) the material is commercially available and can be purchased within the proposed specification requirements; by each inquiry. The Committee reserves the right to request additional data and application information when considering new materials. (a) Has a qualified inquirer request been provided? (b) Has a request either for revision to existing Code requirements or for a Code Case been defined? (c) Has a letter to ASTM or AWS been submitted requesting coverage of the new material in a specification, and has a copy been submitted to the Committee? Alternatively, is this material already covered by a specification issued by a recognized national or international organization and has an English language version been provided? (d) Has the construction Code and Division coverage been identified? (e) Has the material been defined as ferrous or nonferrous and has the application (product forms, size range, and specification) been defined? (f) Has the range (maximum/minimum) of temperature application been defined? (g) Has mechanical property data been submitted (ultimate tensile strength, yield strength, reduction of area, and elongation at 100°F or 50°C intervals, from room temperature to 100°F or 50°C above the maximum intended use temperature for three heats of appropriate product forms and sizes)? (h) If requested temperatures of coverage are above those at which time-dependent properties begin to govern design values, has appropriate time-dependent property data for base metal, weld metal, and weldments been submitted? (i) If coverage below room temperature is requested, has appropriate mechanical property data below room temperature been submitted? (j) Have toughness considerations required by the construction Code been defined and has appropriate data been submitted? (k) Have external pressure considerations been defined and have stress–strain curves been submitted for the establishment of external pressure charts? (l) Have cyclic service considerations and service limits been defined and has appropriate fatigue data been submitted? (m) Has physical properties data (coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal conductivity and diffusivity, Young’s modulus, shear modulus, Poisson’s ratio) been submitted? (n) Have welding requirements been defined and has procedure qualification test data been submitted? (o) Has influence of fabrication practices on material properties been defined? xlv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale (c) the inquirer shows that there will be a reasonable demand for the material by industry and that there exists an urgency for approval by means of a Code Case; (d) the requests for approval of the material shall clearly describe it in specification form, including such items as scope, process, manufacture, conditions for delivery, heat treatment, chemical and tensile require- ments, forming properties, testing specifications and requirements, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection, and rejection; (e) all other requirements identified previously under Code Policy and Application apply; and (f) the inquirer shall furnish the Code Committee with all the data specified in this Guideline. xlvi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ACCEPTABLE ASTM EDITIONS All materials allowed by the various Code Sections and used for construction within the scope of their rules shall be furnished in accordance with the Material Specifications contained within Section II and this guideline except where otherwise provided in Code Cases or in the applicable Section of the Code. Materials covered by these Specifications are acceptable for use in items covered by the Code Sections only to the degree indicated in the applicable Section. Materials for Code use should preferably be ordered, produced, and documented on this basis; however, material produced under an ASTM Specification may be used in lieu of the corresponding ASME Specification as listed in this Appendix. Material produced to an ASME or ASTM Specification with requirements different from the requirements of the corresponding Specification may also be used in accordance with the above, provided the material manufacturer or vessel manufacturer certifies with evidence acceptable to the Authorized Inspector that the corresponding Specification requirements have been met. This guideline lists the Specifications and acceptable dates of issue as well as the Book sections of the ASME Boiler Code in which the specification is approved for use. Book Section Specifications I III IV VIII-1 04 VIII-2 Non Nuc. Code Case Latest Adopted ASTM VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case Other Acceptable ASTM Editions ... ... ⴛ ... 99b 88c through 99b SA-6/SA-6M Identical -General Requirements, Rolled Products SA-20/SA-20M -General Requirements, Plates ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... ⴛ 01 88 through 01 Identical SA-29/SA-29M -General Requirements, Bars . . . ... ... ... ... ⴛ 99⑀1 88 through 99⑀1 ⴛ 00a 88 through 00a SA-47/SA-47M ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... Identical except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and 11.3 and mandatory certification in 14.1 99 84 through 99 SA-53/SA-53M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ Identical except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1, and editorial corrections to Table X4.1 01 88a through 01 ⴛ 98 87a through 98 SA-106 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for editorial differences in 8.1, 13.4, and 24.1 and deletion of ASTM caveat 1.5 95 88a through 95 Identical except for an editorial correction to the Mo content for Grade 94B17 in Table 2 SA-36/SA-36M Identical SA-105/SA-105M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ SA-134 ... ... ⴛ ... ... Identical except for additional requirement as shown in the specification ... xlvii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... 96(R01) 85 through 96(R01) Book Section Non Nuc. Code Case I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case SA-135 Identical ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 01 88 through 01 SA-178/SA-178M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 95 89 through 95 SA-179/SA-179M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 90a 88a through 90a ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 95b 87 through 95b Specifications SA-181/SA-181M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for editorial differences in 7.3.2 and 12.6 Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions SA-182/SA-182M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99 87a through 99 Identical except for the inclusion of Grades S33228 and S30815 in the parenthetical section of 5.3.1 disallowing direct heat treatment. Editorial changes have been made in 1.2, 2.1, and Table 2 SA-192/SA-192M Identical ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 91 88 through 91 SA-193/SA-193M ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 98a Identical except for editorial differences in 3.1.1, 19.4, Note 6, Table 1, and editorial differences in Table 2 87 through 98a SA-194/SA-194M ... ⴛ Identical except for the addition of 6.7 ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... 01a 87 through 01a SA-202/SA-202M Identical ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... 93 82 through 93 SA-203/SA-203M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 97 82 through 97 SA-204/SA-204M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 93 88 through 93 SA-209/SA-209M Identical ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 98 88 through 98 ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 95 88 through 95 SA-210/SA-210M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for editorial differences in Table 2 88a through 99a⑀1 SA-213/SA-213M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99a⑀1 Identical except for the additional H Grade heat treatment requirements in 6.4, the editorial deletion of 11.5, and the editorial addition of Grade T92 to 6.1.3 ... ⴛ ... ... 90a 88 through 90a SA-216/SA-216M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... Identical except for addition of 2.3 and editorial differences in 2.1 and 10.1 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 93 84b through 93 SA-217/SA-217M ⴛ ⴛ ... Identical except for the addition of a new para. 6.2 ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 02 93 through 02 SA-225/SA-225M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... 93 86 through 93 SA-231/SA-231M ... ... ... ... ... Identical except that certification requirements in 13.1 are mandatory ⴛ ... ... ... 96 ... SA-232/SA-232M Identical ⴛ ... ... ... 91 ... SA-214/SA-214M Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... xlviii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Book Section Specifications SA-234/SA-234M Identical Non Nuc. Code Case I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 97 82a through 97 ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 97a 88c through 97a SA-240 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for editorial differences in Tables 1 and 2 Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions SA-249/SA-249M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 02 88b through 02 Identical except for the deletion of S5, which addresses unstraightened tubes, and editorial correction to UNS designation in Table 4 SA-250/SA-250M ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 95 Identical except that Supplementary Requirement S1 is mandatory when 100% weld joint efficiency is required 88a through 95 SA-263 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 94 88 through 94 SA-264 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 94a 88 through 94a SA-265 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 94a 88 through 94a SA-266/SA-266M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99 87 through 99 SA-268/SA-268M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... Identical except for editorial corrections to the Ti equations in Table 1 for Grades S44660, S44735, and S46800. Also editorial correction to Table 3 for Grade S42900. ⴛ 01 88b through 01 SA-275/SA-275M Identical ... 98 86 through 98 - Magnetic Particle Examination of Forgings ... ... ... SA-276 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... 97 ... SA-278 Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ⴛ 93 85 through 93 SA-283/SA-283M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 00 88 through 00 SA-285/SA-285M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 90 82(R87) through 90 SA-299/SA-299M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 97 82(R87) through 97 SA-302/SA-302M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 97⑀1 82 through 97⑀1 00 84 through 00 SA-307 ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... Identical except for the addition of 5.2 providing chemical requirements for Grade C anchor bolts SA-311/SA-311M ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ 95(R00) Identical except for the deletion of 5.1.11, revision of Table 1 footnote A, and editorial corrections to Table 2 90b through 95(R00) SA-312/SA-312M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for the deletion of 5.2, revision to 6.2 to add “H” Grade heat treatment requirements, and editorial differences in 7.1 and Table 1 01a 88a through 01a 99 85 through 99 SA-320/SA-320M Identical ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ xlix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ⴛ ⴛ ... Book Section Specifications I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case SA-325 ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 16.1 and 16.5 Non Nuc. Code Case ... Latest Adopted ASTM 00 Other Acceptable ASTM Editions 86a through 00 SA-333/SA-333M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99 94 through 99 Identical except for the deletion of 12.2 that conflicts with 15, and the editorial addition of 2.2 to the Referenced Documents section, and editorial differences in 15.6.1 and 16.1 SA-334/SA-334M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 99 88⑀1 through 99 SA-335/SA-335M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99 88a through 99 Identical except for the addition of a maximum hardness requirements of 250 HB for Grades P91 and P92 in 9.3. In 9.4, reference has been made to Grade P92 in two locations under the heading Direction of Test. The headings for Tables 3 and 4 have been corrected such that all three Grades P91, P92, and P122 have been included. In 5.3.4, reference to Grade T92 has been changed editorially to P92. In 13.2 on hardness test requirements, reference to P91 and P92 has been made SA-336/SA-336M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ SA-350/SA-350M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ Identical except for the deletion of 6.1.2 and 14.1, revision to 14.2.5, and test reports have been made mandatory 87 through 02b ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 00 86 through 00 SA-352/SA-352M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ Identical except for editorial differences in 2.3 and 9.1 ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 93⑀1 88 through 93⑀1 ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 93 87 through 93 SA-354 ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 15.1 and 15.3.5 ... 00a 86 through 00a ... ⴛ ⴛ 02b ⴛ SA-353/SA-353M Identical ⴛ 87a through 96 ⴛ SA-351/SA-351M Identical ⴛ 96 ... ⴛ SA-358/SA-358M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 01 88 through 01 Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.3.1, the deletion of 6.3.2.2 for HT-O pipe and 6.3.2.3 for HT-SO pipe, an editorial difference in 1.2, and the following additional requirements apply as shown in the specification. SA-369/SA-369M Identical SA-370 Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ - Mechanical Testing of Steel Products ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 92 88 through 92 ... ... ⴛ ⴛ 02⑀1 77 through 02⑀1 SA-372/SA-372M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ 95 ... Identical except for a new para. 4.3.1 on the timing of heat treatment and renumbering of the existing paras. 4.3.1 through 4.3.4 SA-376/SA-376M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for the deletion of Grade HT-O and clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.2 SA-387/SA-387M Identical SA-388/SA-388M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ - Ultrasonic Testing of Forgings 88 through 02 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99⑀1 88 through 99⑀1 ... ... ... ... ⴛ 95 86 through 95 Identical l Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 02 Not for Resale Book Section Specifications SA-395 Identical I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ Non Nuc. Code Case Latest Adopted ASTM ⴛ 88(R93)⑀1 Other Acceptable ASTM Editions 80 through 88(R93)⑀1 SA-403/SA-403M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 00a 86 through 00a Identical except for changes to 6.1 and the addition of 6.5.1 requiring separate heat treatment of the H grades and S33228 SA-409/SA-409M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 95a⑀1 88 through 95a⑀1 Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements for H grade stainless steels and S30815 editorial corrections in 5.3.1 and Tables 1, 2, and 3, deletion of 5.3.2.2 and 5.3.2.3 for the non-heat treated pipe provisions, and the inclusion of a grain size requirement in 5.1.1 for H grade stainless steels. A requirement for ASME Stamping has been added and editorial requirements apply as shown in the subtitle of the specification SA-414/SA-414M ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 01 Identical except for the deletion of Note A under para. 1.3 and the addition of para. 6.2 on thickness tolerances SA-420/SA-420M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ Identical except for editorial corrections to Tables 4 and 5 88 through 01 ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 99 85a through 99 ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... ... 95 89 through 95 SA-426 ... ⴛ ... ... Identical except for deletion of Grade CP7 in Table 3 ... ... ... ⴛ ... 92 80 through 92 SA-430/SA-430M ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 5.4.1 ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 91 88⑀1 through 91 SA-435/SA-435M Identical ... ... ... ... ... 90 82(R87) through 90 ... ... ⴛ ... ... 01a 84b through 01a SA-449 ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... Identical except for requiring all mating fastener components to be coated by the same zinc-coating process in 5.1.4 and the deletion of private label distributor in 15.1 and 15.4 00 87 through 00 ⴛ SA-423/SA-423M Identical ... - Straight Beam Ultrasonic of Plates SA-437/SA-437M Identical SA-450/SA-450M Identical ... ... ⴛ ... ... - General Requirements for Tubes SA-451 ... ⴛ ... Identical except for editorial differences in 15.1 ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ 96 88a through 96 ... ... ... ... ... 93 80(R85) through 93 SA-453/SA-453M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... 99 86 through 99 Identical except for addition of Table 10 on threading and the editorial revision of 5.2.2 on threading. Editorial revision of 13. Certification Section to clarify that the bolting Grade, Class, and Type must be included ... ⴛ 90(R96)⑀1 SA-476 ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... Identical except for editorial changes in 4.1.6 and 13.1 to make certification mandatory ... 00 82 through 00 SA-455/SA-455M Identical ... ⴛ SA-479/SA-479M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ 82(R87) through 90(R96)⑀1 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 99a 87b through 99a SA-480/SA-480M Identical - General Requirements - Flat Products ... ... ... ... 99b 88 through 99b SA-484/SA-484M Identical - General Requirements Wrought SS Products ... ... ... ... 98 87 through 98 li Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Book Section Specifications SA-487/SA-487M Identical SA-494/SA-494M SA-508/SA-508M Identical Non Nuc. Code Case I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 93 88 through 93 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 95 87 through 95 - See Section II, Part B ... ⴛ ... SA-513 ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ... 00 ... Identical except that Supplementary Requirements S6 and either S7 or S8 at the manufacturer’s option are mandatory SA-515/SA-515M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 93 82 through 93 SA-516/SA-516M Identical ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 90 86 through 90 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... 93 87a⑀1 through 93 SA-517/SA-517M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for Grades A, B, E, F, J, P, and deletion of fusion in 1.1 SA-522/SA-522M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 01 87 through 01 SA-524 Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 93 88 through 93 ... ... ... ... 99 88a through 99 SA-530/SA-530M Identical - General Requirements for Pipe SA-533/SA-533M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... 95(R00) 87 through 95(R00) SA-537/SA-537M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 95(R00) 86 through 95(R00) ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 00 84a through 00 SA-540/SA-540M ... ⴛ ... Identical except for correction to the title in section 3 SA-541/SA-541M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 95 87a through 95 SA-542/SA-542M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ 99⑀1 88 through 99⑀1 SA-543/SA-543M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... 93 87 through 93 SA-553/SA-553M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 95(R00) SA-556/SA-556M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... SA-557/SA-557M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 90a 88 through 90a SA-562/SA-562M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 90 82(R87) through 90 SA-563 Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... 94 84 through 94 lii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 87b through 95(R00) 90a(R95)⑀1 88 through 90a(R95)⑀1 Book Section Specifications SA-564/SA-564M Identical SA-568/SA-568M Identical I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... 02 87b through 02 ... ... ... ... 02 ... ... ⴛ ... ... 01 ... - General Requirements for Steel Sheet SA-572/SA-572M Identical Non Nuc. Code Case Nuc. Code Case ... ... ... ... ... Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions SA-574 ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 97a 82 through 97a Identical except that Table 1 on chemical requirements has been deleted and Supplementary Requirement S1 is now mandatory. Paragraphs 6.1 and 6.2 have been revised to refer to Table S1.1 and 6.3 has been deleted. The yield strength value in 7.3 has been corrected editorially. SA-577/SA-577M Identical - Ultrasonic Angle Beam of Plates ... ... ... ... 90 86 through 90 SA-578/SA-578M Identical - Ultrasonic Straight Beam of Plates ... ... ... ... 96 85 through 96 88 through 93 SA-587 ... Identical except for deletion of 1.5 ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 93 SA-592/SA-592M Identical ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... 89(R94)⑀1 ... ... ... ... 91 83 through 91 SA-609/SA-609M Identical ... - Ultrasonic Longitudinal Beam - Castings ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 01 87 through 01 SA-638/SA-638M ... ⴛ ... Identical except for an editorial correction in 6.2 ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ 00 87 through 00 SA-645/SA-645M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 99a 87(R91) through 99a SA-649/SA-649M Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ 99 91a through 99 SA-660 Identical ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 91a 88 through 91a SA-662/SA-662M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 93 86 through 93 SA-666 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... 00 90 through 00 SA-667/SA-667M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... 87 87(R93) SA-671 ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... Identical except for additional requirements that apply as shown in Specification ... ... ⴛ 94 85 through 94 SA-612/SA-612M Identical ... ⴛ 85 through 89(R94)⑀1 SA-672 ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 94 Identical except for the deletion of pipe Grade K. The additional requirements apply as shown in the Specification. SA-675/SA-675M ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for an editorial difference in Table 2 ⴛ ⴛ ... liii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ⴛ ⴛ ... 81 through 94 90a(R95)⑀1 85 through 90a(R95)⑀1 Book Section Specifications I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case Non Nuc. Code Case Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions SA-688/SA-688M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 01a 88a through 01a Identical except that in the case of the -96 and -98 ASTM revisions, solution treatment of Grade UNS N08367 is mandatory SA-691 ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... Identical except that the additional requirements apply as shown in the Specification ⴛ ... SA-693 ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Identical except for aligning the elongation requirements for Gr. XM-16 and correction of the max. hardness for Gr. XM-12 and 630 in Table 5. Also a revision to Note B of Table 1. 98 85a through 98 02⑀1 88 through 02⑀1 90b 84 through 90b SA-695 ... Identical for Type B only ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... SA-696 Identical ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 01b ... SA-703/SA-703M - General Requirements for Castings Identical except for editorial corrections to Table 1 87b through 01b ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... 95(R00) SA-723/SA-723M ... ⴛ ... ... Identical except for editorial differences in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3 ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... 94 86a through 94 SA-724/SA-724M ... ... ... ⴛ Identical except for an editorial correction to Note B in Table 1 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... 99 88 through 99 ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 96 87 through 96 SA-731/SA-731M ... ... ... Identical except for an editorial correction in Table 2 ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ... 91 88 through 91 SA-736/SA-736M Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 88(R94). . . SA-737/SA-737M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 87(R91). . . SA-738/SA-738M Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ 00 SA-739 Identical ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... ... 90a(R95) ... ... ... 94 ... SA-747/SA-747M ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... Identical except for the revision of the mandatory ordering requirements of 4.1.6 and the mandatory use of Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781/SA-781M 99 86 through 99 SA-705/SA-705M Identical SA-727/SA-727M Identical ... ... ⴛ 90a(R95)⑀1 85 through 90a(R95)⑀1 ⴛ ... ... SA-745/SA-745M - Ultrasonic of Stainless Steel Forgings Identical except for deletion of 1.5 SA-748/SA-748M Identical SA-749/SA-749M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... - General Requirements for Steel Strip 87a through 00 81a through 90a(R95) ... ... ... ... 87 ... ... ... ... ... 97 ... ... 01 89a through 01 SA-751 - Chemical Analysis Test Methods for Steel ... ... Identical except for editorial corrections to an element designation in Tables 1 and 2 liv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS ... 87a through 95(R00) Not for Resale ... Book Section Specifications SA-765/SA-765M Identical Non Nuc. Code Case I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 01 94 through 01 SA-770/SA-770M Identical - Tension Testing of Steel Plates ... ... ... ⴛ 86 86(R90)e1 SA-781/SA-781M Identical - Common Requirements for Castings ... ... ... ... 99a 87a through 99a SA-788 Identical - General Requirements for Forgings ... ... ... ... 02⑀1 87 through 02⑀1 ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 01a 88a through 01a 99 88 through 99 02 96 through 02 SA-789/SA-789M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... SA-790/SA-790M ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ Identical except for the editorial revision to move the alternate heat treatment provisions from para. 6.1 to para. 5.3 SA-803/SA-803M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... SA-813/SA-813M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ ... ⴛ ... ... 95 88a through 95 Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements for the H grade stainless steels and S30815 in 4.2.2, editorial corrections in Tables 2 and 3 and deletion of the provision for non-heat treated pipe in 4.2.5, 4.2.6, 4.2.7 and 13.2, as well as an added requirement for grain size limitation for the H grade stainless steels and S30815 in 4.1.4. In Table 2 the carbon requirement for S30815 has been corrected. SA-814/SA-814M ... ⴛ ... ⴛ ⴛ Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 4.2.2 ... ⴛ ... ... 01a 88a through 01a SA-815/SA-815M Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... 99 86 through 99 SA-832/SA-832M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ... ... ... 99⑀1 84(R89) through 99⑀1 ... ... ... ... 95(R01) SA-834 Identical - Common Requirements for Iron Castings 84 through 95(R01) SA-836/SA-836M Identical ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... ⴛ 95b 87a through 95b SA-841/SA-841M Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 01 88 through 01 SA-905 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... 93 91 through 93 SA-941 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 99b ... SA-960 Identical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 99b ... SA-961 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Identical except for the deletion of the time requirement for purchaser rejection of material in para. 18.1 02 99 through 02 SA-962/SA-962M Identical 99 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... lv Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ... ... ... Book Section Non Nuc. Code Case ⴛ 98 ... SA-999/SA-999M - General Requirements, Pipes ... ... ... ... ... Identical except for the addition of para. 5.4 on grade substitution and editorial corrections in 3.3, 8.1, 25.5, and 27.3 01 ... SA-1008/SA-1008M ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ⴛ ... Identical except for the addition of 8.1.1.1 on mechanical properties for pressure vessel design ... 01a 00 through 01a SA-1011/SA-1011M Identical Specifications SA-995 Identical SA-1016/SA-1016M Identical SA-1017/SA-1017M Identical SF-568M Identical I III IV VIII-1 VIII-2 VIII-3 XII Nuc. Code Case ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ⴛ ... ... ... ... ... - General Requirements, Tubes ... ... ... - Threaded Metric Fasteners ... ... ... Latest Adopted ASTM Other Acceptable ASTM Editions ... ... ... ... 01a ... ... ... ... ... 01 ... ... ... ... ⴛ 01 ... ... ... ... ... 98 93a through 98 NOTE: (1) SA-350/SA-350M Grade LF2 forgings, made to revisions earlier than the 2001 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or to ASTM Specification A 350/A 350M with year dates from 1987 through 1997 are acceptable for either Class 1 or Class 2 applications, unless Supplementary Requirement S4 was used to test forgings at a higher test temperature. lvi Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale GUIDELINES ON MULTIPLE MARKING OF MATERIALS B-100 BACKGROUND than one specification, grade, class, or type. Examples are SA-53 and SA-106 (some grades and classes); SA-213 TP304L and TP304; SA-213 TP304 and 304H; and SA-106 B and SA-106 C. A common inquiry topic is the permissibility of using material that is identified with two or more specifications (or grades, classes, or types), even if they have different strengths, or even if one of them is not permitted for use in the construction code of application. The Committee has addressed variants of these questions in several interpretations: I-89-11, IIA-92-08, VIII-1-89-269, and VIII1-89-197. B-200 B-220 Dual or multiple marking is not acceptable if two or more specifications to which the material is marked have mutually exclusive requirements. This prohibition includes more than just chemistry and property requirements. Examples are SA-515 and SA-516; the former requires melting to coarse grain practice while the latter requires melting to fine grain practice. Another example is SA-213 TP304L and TP304H; the carbon content ranges of these grades have no overlap. GUIDELINES The construction codes individually define what materials may be used in boilers, vessels, and components constructed in compliance to their rules. If a material meets all of the requirements for a specification for which it is marked, including documentation, if any, and if it meets all requirements for use imposed by the construction code, it may be used. The construction codes, in general, do not address the case of materials marked with more than one specification, grade, class, or type, so these guidelines are offered for clarification. B-210 B-230 GRADE SUBSTITUTION Grade substitution is not permitted. Grade substitution occurs when: (1) the material contains an element (other than nitrogen) that is unspecified for one of the grades marked; and (2) the amount of that element present in the material meets the minimum and maximum composition limits for that element in another grade of a specification contained in Section II, Part A or Part B, whether or not it is also so marked. For example, a material meets all of the composition limits for SA-240 304, contains 0.06C and 0.02N, but also contains 0.45% Ti. This material cannot be marked or provided as meeting SA-240 304 because the Ti content meets the requirements of SA-240 321 [which is, Ti greater than 5 ⴛ (C + N) but less than 0.7.]. Another material, with identical composition, except 0.35% Ti, may be marked SA-240 304 because the Ti content does not meet the minimum requirement for 321. The Ti content is just a residual. ACCEPTABILITY OF MULTIPLE MARKING Dual or multiple marking is acceptable, as long as the material so marked meets all of the requirements of all the specifications, grades, classes, and types with which it is marked. All of the measured and controlled attributes of the multiply-marked grades or specifications must overlap (e.g., chemistry, mechanical properties, dimensions, and tolerances) and the material so marked must exhibit values that fall within the overlaps. Further, the controlled but unmeasured attributes of the specifications or grades must overlap (e.g., melting practices, heat treatments, and inspection.) Many specifications or grades have significant overlap of chemistry ranges or properties. It is common for material manufacturers to produce materials that satisfy more B-240 MARKING SELECTION If a material is marked with specifications, grades, classes, or types, it may be used with the allowable lvii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS PROHIBITION ON MULTIPLE MARKING Not for Resale stresses, design stress intensities, or ratings appropriate for any of the markings on the material, as long as the material specification, grade, class, and type is permitted by the code of construction governing the boiler, vessel, or component in which the material is to be used. However, once the designer has selected which marking applies (specification, grade, class types, etc.), the designer must use all the design values appropriate for that selection and may not mix and match values from any other specifications, grades, classes, types, etc., with which the material may be marked. B-250 Any other markings, such as marking of non-ASME or non-ASTM material specifications, have no relevance, even if those markings are for materials explicitly prohibited by the construction code being used. That is, as long as the one marking, and the documentation required by the material and by the construction code, shows that it meets all the requirements for use of that material in that construction code, any additional markings are irrelevant. lviii Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS OTHER MARKINGS Not for Resale SUMMARY OF CHANGES The 2004 Edition of this Code contains revisions in addition to the 2001 Edition with 2002 and 2003 Addenda. The revisions are identified with the designation 04 in the margin and, as described in the Foreword, become mandatory six months after the publication date of the 2004 Edition. To invoke these revisions before their mandatory date, use the designation “2004 Edition” in documentation required by this Code. If you choose not to invoke these revisions before their mandatory date, use the designation “2001 Edition through the 2003 Addenda” in documentation required by this Code. Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, 04, placed next to the affected area. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Location Page Change List of Sections iii Updated to reflect 04 Foreword xi–xiii Editorially revised Specification Removal xxxix Added Acceptable ASTM Editions xlvii–lvi Revised in its entirety, and columns for Sections VIII-3 and XII added SA-47/SA-47M 159–165 SA-47 redesignated as SA-47/SA-47M and revised in its entirety SA-53/SA-53M 167–193 Revised in its entirety SA-134 221–225 Revised in its entirety SA-135 227–235 Revised in its entirety SA-194/SA-194M 297–313 Revised in its entirety SA-209/SA-209M 327–331 Revised in its entirety SA-217/SA-217M 355–359 Revised in its entirety SA-268/SA-268M 449–457 Revised in its entirety SA-302/SA-302M 495–498 Revised in its entirety SA-312/SA-312M 513–524 Revised in its entirety SA-334/SA-334M 563–572 Revised in its entirety SA-350/SA-350M 595–605 Revised in its entirety SA-358/SA-358M 639–647 Revised in its entirety SA-376/SA-376M 721–730 Revised in its entirety SA-387/SA-387M 731–737 Revised in its entirety SA-437/SA-437M 815–819 Revised in its entirety SA-449 821–828 Revised in its entirety SA-476/SA-476M 861–866 SA-476 redesignated as SA-476/SA476M and revised in its entirety SA-537/SA-537M 1019–1023 Revised in its entirety SA-540/SA-540M 1025–1034 Revised in its entirety lix Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Location Page Change SA-553/SA-553M 1053–1057 Revised in its entirety SA-564/SA-564M 1087–1095 Revised in its entirety SA-572/SA-572M 1131–1135 Added SA-666 1207–1216 Revised in its entirety SA-671 1219 Paragraph 1.3.3 corrected by errata SA-688/SA-688M 1245–1255 Revised in its entirety SA-691 1257–1264 Revised in its entirety SA-693 1265–1272 Revised in its entirety SA-703/SA-703M 1281–1300 Revised in its entirety SA-705/SA-705M 1301–1308 (1) Title revised (2) Revised in its entirety SA-724/SA-724M 1315–1318 (1) Title revised (2) Revised in its entirety SA-747/SA-747M 1357–1361 (1) Title revised (2) Revised in its entirety SA-751 1377–1383 Revised in its entirety SA-790/SA-790M 1441–1451 Revised in its entirety SA-803/SA-803M 1453–1463 Revised in its entirety SA-814/SA-814M 1475–1482 Revised in its entirety SA-832/SA-832M 1495–1500 Revised in its entirety SA-961 1547–1557 Revised in its entirety SA-999/SA-999M 1573–1585 Added SA-1008/SA-1008M 1587–1596 Revised in its entirety SA-1017/SA-1017M 1619–1622 Added Mandatory Appendix I 1645 Added NOTE: Volume 54 of the Interpretations to Section II, Part A of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code follows the last page of the Edition to Section II, Part A. lx --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROLLED STRUCTURAL STEEL BARS, PLATES, SHAPES, AND SHEET PILING SA-6 /SA-6M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 6 /A 6M-99b.) ASTM Designation 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers a group of common requirements that, unless otherwise specified in the material specification, apply to rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars under each of the following specifications issued by ASTM: ASTM Designation A 36 /A 36M A 131 /A 131M A 242 /A 242M A 283 /A 283M A 328 /A 328M A 514 /A 514M A 529 /A 529M A 572 /A 572M A 573 /A 573M A 588 /A 588M A 633 /A 633M A 656 /A 656M A 678 /A 678M A 690 /A 690M A 709 /A 709M Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy Structural Steel Plates for Bridges A 710 /A 710M Age-Hardening Low-Carbon NickelCopper-Chromium-MolybdenumColumbium Alloy Structural Steel Plates A 769 /A 769M Carbon and High-Strength Electric Resistance Welded Steel Structural Shapes A 786 /A 786M Rolled Steel Floor Plates A 808 /A 808M High-Strength Low-Alloy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality with Improved Notch Toughness A 827 /A 827M Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and Similar Applications A 829 /A 829M Plates, Alloy Steel, Structural Quality A 830 /A 830M Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality, Furnished to Chemical Composition Requirements A 852 /A 852M Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi [485 MPa] Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in. [100 mm] Thick A 857 /A 857M Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light Gage A 871 /A 871M High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel Plate With Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance A 913 /A 913M Specification for High-Strength LowAlloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST) Title of Specification Carbon Structural Steel Structural Steel for Ships High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates Steel Sheet Piling High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate Suitable for Welding High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Steel Structural Carbon Steel Plates of Improved Toughness High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. [100 mm] Thick Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, HighStrength Low-Alloy Plate with Improved Formability Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling for Use in Marine Environments Title of Specification 1 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II ASTM Designation A 945 /A 945M A 992 /A 992M the limiting values in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29. Title of Specification Specification for High-Strength LowAlloy Structural Steel Plate with Low Carbon and Restricted Sulfur for Improved Weldability, Formability, and Toughness Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing 1.12 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system is to be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way. 1.2 Annex A1 lists permissible variations in dimensions and mass (Note 1) in SI (metric) units. The values listed are not exact conversions of the values in Tables 1 through 31 inclusive but are, instead, rounded or rationalized values. Conformance to Annex A1 is mandatory when the “M” specification designation is used. 1.13 This specification and the applicable material specifications are expressed in both inch-pound units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 1.14 The text of this specification contains notes and/ or footnotes that provide explanatory material. Such notes and footnotes, excluding those tables and figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements. NOTE 1 — The term “weight” is used when inch-pound units are the standard; however, under SI, the preferred term is “mass.” 1.3 Annex A2 lists the dimensions of some shape profiles. 1.4 Appendix X1 provides information on coiled product as a source of structural plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 673 /A 673M Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 829 Specification for Plates, Alloy Steel, Structural Quality E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size E 208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels 1.5 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of tensile properties in plates and structural shapes. 1.6 Appendix X3 provides information on weldability. 1.7 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of plates, including suggested minimum inside radii for cold bending. 1.8 This specification also covers a group of supplementary requirements that are applicable to several of the above specifications as indicated therein. Such requirements are provided for use where additional testing or additional restrictions are required by the purchaser, and apply only when specified individually in the purchase order. 1.9 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the individual material specification shall prevail over those of this general specification. 2.2 American Welding Society Standards: A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes A5.5 Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes 1.10 Additional requirements that are specified in the purchase order and accepted by the supplier are permitted, provided that such requirements do not negate any of the requirements of this general specification or the individual material specification. 2.3 U.S. Military Standards: MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage 1.11 For purposes of determining conformance with this specification and the various material specifications referenced in 1.1, values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing 2.4 U.S. Federal Standard: Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies) 2 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M 2.5 AIAG Standard: B-1 Bar Code Symbology Standard 3.1.2.8 “MC” shapes — channels that cannot be classified as “C” shapes. 3. Terminology 3.1 Descriptions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 3.1.2.9 “L” shapes — shapes having equal-leg and unequal-leg angles. 3.1.1 Plates (other than floor plates or coiled product) — Flat, hot-rolled steel, classified as follows: 3.1.3 sheet piling — rolled steel sections that are capable of being interlocked, forming a continuous wall when individual pieces are driven side by side. 3.1.1.1 When Ordered to Thickness: (1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 0.230 in. [over 6 mm] or over in thickness. (2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 0.180 in. [over 4.5 mm] or over in thickness. 3.1.1.2 When Ordered to Weight [Mass]: (1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 9.392 lb /ft2 [47.10 kg /m2] or heavier. (2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 7.350 lb /ft2 [35.32 kg /m2] or heavier. 3.1.4 bars — rounds, squares, and hexagons, of all sizes; flats 13⁄64 in. (0.203 in.) and over [over 5 mm] in specified thickness, not over 6 in. [150 mm] in specified width; and flats 0.230 in. and over [over 6 mm] in specified thickness, over 6 to 8 in. [150 to 200 mm] inclusive, in specified width. 3.1.5 exclusive — when used in relation to ranges, as for ranges of thickness in the tables of permissible variations in dimensions, is intended to exclude only the greater value of the range. Thus, a range from 60 to 72 in. [1500 to 1800 mm] exclusive includes 60 in. [1500 mm], but does not include 72 in. [1800 mm]. 3.1.1.3 Slabs, sheet bars, and skelp, though frequently falling in the foregoing size ranges, are not classed as plates. 3.1.6 rimmed steel — steel containing sufficient oxygen to give a continuous evolution of carbon monoxide during solidification, resulting in a case or rim of metal virtually free of voids. 3.1.1.4 Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material specifications governed by this specification until decoiled, leveled, cut to length, and, if required, properly tested by the processor in accordance with ASTM specification requirements (see 6.4.2 and the individual material specification). 3.1.7 semi-killed steel — incompletely deoxidized steel containing sufficient oxygen to form enough carbon monoxide during solidification to offset solidification shrinkage. 3.1.2 Shapes (Flanged Sections): 3.1.2.1 structural-size shapes — rolled flanged sections having at least one dimension of the cross section 3 in. [75 mm] or greater. Structural shape size groupings used for tensile property classification are listed in Table A. 3.1.8 capped steel — rimmed steel in which the rimming action is limited by an early capping operation. Capping is carried out mechanically by using a heavy metal cap on a bottle-top mold or chemically by an addition of aluminum or ferrosilicon to the top of the molten steel in an open-top mold. 3.1.2.2 bar size shapes — rolled flanged sections having a maximum dimension of the cross section less than 3 in. [75 mm]. 3.1.9 killed steel — steel deoxidized, either by addition of strong deoxidizing agents or by vacuum treatment, to reduce the oxygen content to such a level that no reaction occurs between carbon and oxygen during solidification. 3.1.2.3 “W” shapes — doubly-symmetric, wideflange shapes with inside flange surfaces that are substantially parallel. 3.1.2.4 “HP” shapes — are wide-flange shapes generally used as bearing piles whose flanges and webs are of the same nominal thickness and whose depth and width are essentially the same. 3.1.10 groupings for tensile property classification — in some of the material specifications, the tensile property requirements vary for different sizes of shapes due to mass effect, etc. For the convenience of those using the specifications, the various sizes of shapes have been divided into groups based on section thickness at the standard tension test location (webs of beams, channels, and zees; legs of angles; and stems of tees). The material specifications designate shape sizes by reference to the group designations. The groupings are shown in Table A. 3.1.2.5 “S” shapes — doubly-symmetric beam shapes with inside flange surfaces that have a slope of approximately 162⁄3%. 3.1.2.6 “M” shapes — doubly-symmetric shapes that cannot be classified as “W,” “S,” or “HP” shapes. 3.1.2.7 “C” shapes — channels with inside flange surfaces that have a slope of approximately 162⁄3%. 3 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II 3.1.11 mill edge — the normal edge produced by rolling between horizontal finishing rolls. A mill edge does not conform to any definite contour. Mill edge plates have two mill edges and two trimmed edges. 4.1.8 Exclusion of either structural product from coil or discrete cut lengths of flat product (see 6.3 or Appendix X1), if applicable, 4.1.9 Heat treatment requirements (see 7.2 and 7.3), if any, 3.1.12 universal mill edge — the normal edge produced by rolling between horizontal and vertical finishing rolls. Universal mill plates, sometimes designated UM Plates, have two universal mill edges and two trimmed edges. 4.1.10 Mechanical property test report requirements (see Section 15), if any, 4.1.11 Special packaging, marking, and loading for shipment requirements (see Section 18), if any, 3.1.13 sheared edge — the normal edge produced by shearing. Sheared edge plates are trimmed on all edges. 4.1.12 Supplementary requirements, if any, including any additional requirements called for in the supplementary requirements, 3.1.14 gas cut edge — the edge produced by gas flame cutting. 4.1.13 End use, if there are any end-use-specific requirements (see 5.1, 12.3.4, Table 22 or Table A1.22, and Table 24 or Table A1.24), and 3.1.15 special cut edge — usually the edge produced by gas flame cutting involving special practices such as preheating or postheating, or both, in order to minimize stresses, avoid thermal cracking, and reduce the hardness of the gas cut edge. In special instances, special cut edge is used to designate an edge produced by machining. 4.1.14 Special requirements (see 1.10), if any, 4.1.15 Repair welding requirements (see 10.5), if any. 4.1.16 Color Marking of plates (see 5.1.5). 3.1.16 sketch — when used to describe a form of plate, denotes a plate other than rectangular, circular, or semicircular. Sketch plates may be furnished to a radius or with four or more straight sides. 5. 3.1.17 normalizing — a heat treating process in which a steel plate is reheated to a uniform temperature above the upper critical temperature and then cooled in air to below the transformation range. Identification of Structural Products 5.1 Required Plate Markings: 5.1.1 Except as allowed by 5.1.4.2 and 5.7, plates shall be legibly marked with the following: applicable ASTM designation (see 1.1) (year of issue not required); “G” or “MT” if applicable (see 5.1.2); applicable grade; heat number; size and thickness; color marking, if applicable (see 5.1.5); and name, brand, or trademark of the manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete cut lengths) or the processor (for plates produced from coil and for subdivided plates (see 5.7). 3.1.18 plate-as-rolled — when used in relation to the location and number of tests, the term referes to the unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It does not refer to the condition of the plate. 4. Ordering Information 4.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate, for inclusion in purchase orders are as follows: 5.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have not been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the manufacturer or processor, with the letter “G” (denoting green) following the required ASTM designation mark, except that “G” marking is not necessary if such plates are for shipment, for the purpose of obtaining the required heat treatment, to an organization under the manufacturer’s control. Such plates shall have been qualified for shipment on the basis of test specimens that have been so heat treated. Plates that are required to be heat treated, and have been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the party that performed the heat treatment, with the letter “MT” (denoting material treated) following the required ASTM designation mark. 4.1.1 ASTM specification designation (see 1.1) and year of issue, 4.1.2 Name of material (plates, shapes, bars, or sheet piling), 4.1.3 Shape designation, or size and thickness or diameter, 4.1.4 Grade, class, and type designation, if applicable, 4.1.5 Condition, (see Section 7) if other than asrolled, 5.1.3 Types of Marking: 5.1.3.1 Any required color marking (see 5.1.5) shall be by paint marking. 4.1.6 Quantity (weight [mass] or number of pieces), 4.1.7 Length, 4 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M 5.1.3.2 Except as allowed by 5.1.4.2 and 5.7, the required markings for plates shall be by steel die stamping or paint marking. (See also 5.1.5) and mill identification marks on each piece. Either the manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shall be shown in raised letters at intervals along the length. 5.1.4 Location of Markings: 5.1.4.1 The required markings for plates shall be in at least one place on each finished plate. 5.4 Bars — Bars of all sizes, when loaded for shipment, shall be properly identified with the name or brand of manufacturer, purchaser’s name and order number, the ASTM designation number (year of issue not required), grade number where appropriate, size and length, weight [mass] of lift, and the heat number for identification. Unless otherwise specified, the method of marking is at the manufacturer’s option and shall be made by hot stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking tags attached to the lifts of bars. Bars are not required to be die-stamped. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 5.1.4.2 For secured lifts of all sizes of plates 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] (or 5⁄16 in. [8 mm] for material specified for bridge construction end use) or under in thickness, and for secured lifts of all thicknesses of plates 36 in. [900 mm] or under in width, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of placing such markings on only the top piece of each lift, or of showing such markings on a substantial tag attached to each lift, unless otherwise specified (See also 5.6) 5.5 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements of 5.1 to 5.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of using bar coding as a supplementary identification method. 5.1.5 Color Marking: 5.1.5.1 When specified in the Purchase Order, each plate (except for plates in secured lifts), for which a color scheme is given for the respective ASTM Designation and Grade listed in 5.6, shall be marked with that color scheme along one edge or on the rolled surface within 12 in. [300 mm] of the heat number identification. For plates in secured lifts, a vertical color scheme identification stripe for the full height of the lift is permissible. Each plate in the lift shall be marked with this stripe. Color markings shall be distinct and of sufficient size to be clearly visible. NOTE 2 —Bar 5.6 Colors — The following color scheme shall be used to identify the listed ASTM Designation and Grade of structural plate and shapes: ASTM Designation and Grade A 242 /A 242M A 283 /A 283M (Grade D) A 514 /A 514M A 529 /A 529M Grade 50 A 529 /A 529M Grade 55 A 572 Grade 42 /A 572M Grade 290 A 572 Grade 50 /A 572M Grade 345 A 572 /A 572M Grade 55 A 572 Grade 60 /A 572M Grade 415 A 572 Grade 65 /A 572M Grade 450 A 588 /A 588M A 709 Grade 50 /A 709M Grade 345 A 709 Grade 50W /A 709M Grade 345W A 709 Grade 70W /A 709M Grade 485W A 709 Grade HPS70W /A 709M Grade HPS485W A 709 Grade 100 /A 709M Grade 690 A 709 Grade 100W /A 709M Grade 690W A 852 /A 852M A 913 Grade 50 A 913 Grade 60 A 913 Grade 65 A 913 Grade 70 5.2 Shapes: 5.2.1 Except as allowed by 5.2.2 and 5.7, shapes shall be marked with the heat number, size of section, length, and mill identification marks on each piece. The manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shall be shown in raised letters at intervals along the length. In addition, shapes shall be identified with the ASTM designation (year of issue not required) and grade, either by marking each piece individually or, if bundled, by attaching a substantial tag to the bundle. 5.2.2 Bundling for shipment of small shapes with the greatest cross-sectional dimensional not greater than 6 in. [150 mm] is permissible. Each lift or bundle shall be marked or substantially tagged showing the identification information listed in 5.2.1. 5.2.3 Each structural shape or lift, for which a color scheme is given for the respective ASTM Designation and Grade listed in 5.6, shall be marked with the color scheme on one cut end or across the rolled face of one flange or leg, adjacent to one cut end. Color markings shall be distinct and of sufficient size to be clearly visible. Color Scheme blue orange red black and yellow black and red green and white green and yellow green and red green and gray green and blue blue and yellow green and yellow blue and yellow blue and orange blue and red red red and orange blue and orange red and yellow red and gray red and blue red and white 5.7 Subdivided Material: 5.7.1 Pieces separated from master structural product by a processor shall be identified with the ASTM designation (year of issue not required), grade, heat number, and the heat treatment identification, if applicable, 5.3 Steel Sheet Piling — Steel sheet piling shall be marked with the heat number, size of section, length, 5 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B-1. Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II along with the trademark, brand, or name of the organization subdividing the structural product. The identification methods shall be in accordance with the requirements of 5.1 to 5.4 inclusive, except that the raised letters method for shapes and steel sheet piling is not required. If the original manufacturer’s identification remains intact, the structural product need not be additionally identified by the organization supplying the structural product. repairs, and inspection; and except as allowed by Section 7, performs operations not intended to affect the properties of the material. Specific sections of this specification for which the processor is responsible are 10, 11, 12, 5, 13, 16, 14, 15, and 18. 6.4.3 When part of a heat is rolled into discrete lengths of flat product and the balance of the heat into coiled product, each part must be tested separately. 6.4.4 Structural products produced from coils shall not contain splice welds, unless previously approved by the purchaser. 5.7.2 As an alternative, pieces from the same heat of structural product shall be bundled or placed in secured lifts, with the identification specified in 5.7.1 placed on the top piece of each lift or shown on a substantial tag attached to each lift or bundle. 7. Heat Treatment 7.1 When material is required to be heat treated, such heat treatment may be performed by the manufacturer, the processor, or the fabricator, unless otherwise specified in the material specification. 6. Manufacture 6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the material specification, the steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process. Additional refining by vacuum-arc-remelt (VAR) or electroslag-remelt (ESR) is permitted. NOTE 3 — When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or processor has the option of heat treating the products by normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing then stress relieving to meet the material specification. 6.2 The steel shall be strand cast or cast in stationary molds. 7.2 When heat treatment is to be performed by other than the material manufacturer, the order shall so state. 7.2.1 When heat treatment is to be performed by other than the material manufacturer, the structural plates shall be accepted on the basis of tests made on specimens taken from full thickness coupons heat treated in accordance with the requirements specified in the material specification or on the order. If the heat-treatment temperatures are not specified, the manufacturer or processor shall heat treat the coupons under conditions he considers appropriate. The purchaser shall be informed of the procedure followed in heat treating the specimens. 6.2.1 Strand Cast: 6.2.1.1 When heats of the same nominal chemical composition are consecutively strand cast at one time, the heat number assigned to the cast product need not be changed until all of the steel in the cast product is from the following heat. 6.2.1.2 When two consecutively strand cast heats have different nominal chemical composition ranges, the manufacturer shall remove the transition material by an established procedure that positively separates the grades. 6.3 Structural products are produced in either discrete cut lengths of flat product or from coils. 7.3 When heat treatment is to be performed by the manufacturer or the processor, the material shall be heat treated as specified in the material specification, or as specified in the purchase order, provided that the heat treatment specified by the purchaser is not in conflict with the requirements of the material specification. 6.3.1 Structural products produced from coil means structural products that have been cut to individual lengths from a coiled product and are furnished without heat treatment. For the purposes of this paragraph, stress relieving is not considered to be a heat treatment. 6.3.2 Structural products that are heat treated (except stress relieving) after decoiling shall be considered to be discrete cut lengths of flat product. 7.4 When normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator, the material shall be either normalized or heated uniformly for hot forming, provided that the temperature to which the structural products are heated for hot forming does not significantly exceed the normalizing temperature. 6.4 When structural products are produced from coils: 6.4.1 The manufacturer directly controls one or more of the operations (that is, melting, rolling, coiling, etc.), that affect the chemical composition or the mechanical properties, or both, of the material. 6.4.2 The processor decoils, forms, cuts to length, and marks; performs and certifies tests, examinations, 7.5 The use of cooling rates that are faster than those obtained by cooling in air to improve the toughness shall be subject to approval by the purchaser, and structural products so treated shall be tempered subsequently in the range from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C]. 6 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 8. Chemical Analysis 8.1 Heat Analysis — An analysis of each heat shall be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentage of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur, and any other elements specified or restricted by the applicable specification. This analysis shall be made from a test sample preferably taken during the pouring of the heat. The heat analysis shall be reported to the purchaser or his representative and shall conform to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable specification. 9. Metallurgical Structure 9.1 When a grain size is specified, it shall be specified as fine austenitic grain size or coarse austenitic grain size. Austenitic grain size shall be determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112. 9.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size — When coarse austenitic grain size is specified, steel having grain size number of 1 to 5 as determined by the method described in 9.1 shall be acceptable. Conformance to the specified grain size for at least 70% of the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per heat shall be made and the grain size results shall be reported. 8.1.1 When vacuum-arc-remelting or electroslag remelting is used, a heat is defined as all the ingots remelted from a single primary melt. The heat analysis shall be obtained from one remelted ingot, or the product of one remelted ingot, of each primary melt providing the heat analysis of the primary melt meets the heat analysis requirements of the material specification. If the heat analysis of the primary melt does not meet the heat analysis requirements of the material specification, one test sample shall be taken from the product of each remelted ingot. In either case, the analyses so obtained from the remelted material shall conform to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable specification. 9.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size: 9.3.1 When fine austenitic grain size is specified, steel having grain size number 5 or higher as determined by the method described in 9.1 shall be acceptable. Conformance to the specified grain size for at least 70% of the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One grain size test per heat shall be performed except as described in 9.3.2 and the grain size results shall be reported. 9.3.2 When aluminum is used as the grain refining element and on heat analysis the aluminum content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum, or alternatively, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be deemed fulfilled and the testing requirement of 9.1 shall be waived. The aluminum content shall be reported if the testing requirement is waived. 8.1.2 In addition to the elements specified by the applicable specification, test reports shall include for information the chemical analyses for copper, columbium, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, silicon, and vanadium. NOTE 4 — When the amount of copper, chromium, nickel, molybdenum or silicon is less than 0.02%, the analysis may be reported as “<0.02.%.” When the amount of columbium or vanadium is less than 0.008%, the analysis may be reported as “<0.008%.” 9.3.3 When specified on the order, one grain size test (see 9.1) per heat shall be made regardless of type or content of grain refining element. Austenitic grain size shall conform to 9.3.1. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 8.2 Product Analysis — The purchaser shall have the option of analyzing finished material representing each heat. Sampling shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements of the product specification subject to the permitted variations in product analysis given in Table B. If a range is specified, the determinations of any element in a heat shall not vary both above and below the specified range. Rimmed or capped steel is characterized by a lack of homogeneity in its composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur. Therefore, the limitations for these elements shall not be applicable unless misapplication is clearly indicated. 9.3.4 Where elements other than aluminum are used for grain refining, the content of such elements shall be reported with the heat analysis. 10. Quality 10.1 General — The material shall be free of injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish. NOTE 5 — Unless otherwise specified, structural quality steels are normally furnished in the as-rolled condition and subjected to visual inspection by the manufacturer. Non-injurious surface or internal imperfections or both may be present in the steel as delivered and may require conditioning by the purchaser to improve the appearance of the steel or in preparation for welding, coating, or other further processing. More restrictive requirements may be specified by invoking supplementary requirements or by agreement between purchaser and supplier. Materials that exhibit injurious defects during subsequent fabrication are deemed not to comply with the specification. (See 17.2.) Fabricators should be aware that cracks may initiate upon bending a sheared or burned edge during the fabrication process. This is not considered to 8.3 Referee Analysis — For referee purposes, Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall be used. 8.4 Grade Substitution— Alloy steel grades that meet the chemical requirements of Table 1 of Specification A 829 shall not be substituted for carbon steel grades. 7 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- be a fault of the steel but is rather a function of the induced cold-work or heat-affected zone. The conditioning requirements in 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 limit the conditioning allowed to be performed by the manufacturer. Conditioning of imperfections beyond the limits of 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 may be performed by parties other than the manufacturer at the discretion of the purchaser. 10.3.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) following removal of imperfections that are greater in depth than the limits listed in 10.3.1 shall be subject to the following limiting conditions: 10.3.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground surface of any piece prior to welding shall not exceed 2% of the total surface area of that piece. 10.2 Plate Conditioning: 10.2.1 The grinding of plates by the manufacturer or processor to remove imperfections on the top or bottom surface shall be subject to the limitations that the area ground is well faired without abrupt changes in contour and the grinding does not reduce the thickness of the plate by (1) more than 7% under the nominal thickness for plates ordered to weight per square foot or mass per square metre, but in no case more than 1⁄8 in. [3 mm]; or (2) below the permissible minimum thickness for plates ordered to thickness in inches or millimetres. 10.3.2.2 The reduction of thickness of the material resulting from removal of imperfections prior to welding shall not exceed 30% of the nominal thickness at the location of the imperfection, nor shall the depth of depression prior to welding exceed 11⁄4 in. [32 mm] in any case except as noted in 10.3.2.3. 10.3.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) following grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging of the toes of angles, beams, channels, and zees and the stems and toes of tees shall be subject to the limitation that, prior to welding, the depth of the depression, measured from the toe inward, is not more than the thickness of the material at the base of the depression or 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm], whichever is the lesser. 10.2.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) following the removal of imperfections on the top or bottom surface of plates by chipping, grinding, or arcair gouging shall be subject to the following limiting conditions: 10.3.2.4 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) and grinding to correct or build up the interlock of any sheet piling section at any location shall be subject to the limitation that the total surface area of the weld not exceed 2% of the total surface area of the piece. 10.2.2.1 The chipped, ground, or gouged area shall not exceed 2% of the area of the surface being conditioned. 10.2.2.2 After removal of any imperfections preparatory to welding, the thickness of the plate at any location shall not be reduced by more than 30% of the nominal thickness of the plate. (Specification A 131/A 131M restricts the reduction in thickness to 20% maximum.) 10.4 Bar Conditioning: 10.4.1 The conditioning of bars by the manufacturer or processor to remove imperfections by grinding, chipping, or some other means shall be subject to the limitations that the conditioned area is well faired and the affected sectional area is not reduced by more than the applicable permitted variations (see Section 13). 10.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) following the removal of injurious imperfections on the edges of plates by grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging by the manufacturer or processor shall be subject to the limitation that, prior to welding, the depth of the depression, measured from the plate edge inward, is not more than the thickness of the plate or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is the lesser. 10.4.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5) following chipping or grinding to remove imperfections that are greater in depth than the limits listed in 10.4.1 shall be subject to the following conditions: 10.4.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground surface of any piece, prior to welding, shall not exceed 2% of the total surface area of the piece. 10.3 Structural Size Shapes, Bar Size Shapes, and Sheet Piling Conditioning: 10.3.1 The grinding, or chipping and grinding, of structural size shapes, bar size shapes, and sheet piling by the manufacturer or processor to remove imperfections shall be subject to the limitations that the area ground is well faired without abrupt changes in contour and the depression does not extend below the rolled surface by more than (1) 1⁄32 in. [1 mm], for material less than 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] in thickness; (2) 1⁄16 in. [2 mm], for material 3 ⁄8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm] inclusive in thickness; or (3) 1 ⁄8 in. [3 mm], for material over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness. 10.4.2.2 The reduction of sectional dimension of a round, square, or hexagon bar, or the reduction in thickness of a flat bar, resulting from removal of an imperfection, prior to welding, shall not exceed 5% of the nominal dimension or thickness at the location of the imperfection. 10.4.2.3 For the edges of flat bars, the depth of the conditioning depression prior to welding shall be measured from the edge inward and shall be limited to 8 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS a maximum depth equal to the thickness of the flat bar or 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm], whichever is less. is considered to be prequalified if its chemical composition and mechanical properties are comparable to those for one of the prequalified base metals listed in ANSI/ AWS D1.1. (e) Any material not listed in ASME Section IX also is considered to be a material with an S-number in ASME Section IX if its chemical composition and its mechanical properties are comparable to those for one of the materials listed in ASME Section IX with an S-number. 10.5 Repair by Welding: 10.5.1 General Requirements: 10.5.1.1 Repair by welding shall be in accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS) using shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW), flux cored are welding (FCAW), or submerged arc welding (SAW) processes. Shielding gases used shall be of welding quality. 10.5.1.8 When so specified in the purchase order, the WPS shall include qualification by Charpy V-notch testing, with the test locations, test conditions, and the acceptance criteria meeting the requirements specified for repair welding in the purchase order. 10.5.1.2 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWS Specification A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20, A5.23, A5.28, or A5.29, whichever is applicable. For SMAW, low hydrogen electrodes shall be used. 10.5.1.9 When so specified in the purchase order, the welding procedure specification (WPS) shall be subject to approval by the purchaser prior to repair welding. 10.5.1.3 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be selected so that the tensile strength of the deposited weld metal (after any required heat treatment) is consistent with the tensile strength specified for the base metal being repaired. 10.5.2 Steels with Specified Minimum Tensile Strength of 100 ksi [690 MPa] and Higher — Repair welding of steels with specified minimum tensile strength of 100 ksi [690 MPa] shall be subject to the following additional requirements: 10.5.1.4 Welding electrodes and flux materials shall be dry and protected from moisture during storage and use. 10.5.2.1 When so specified in the purchase order, prior approval for repair by welding shall be obtained from the purchaser. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 10.5.1.5 Prior to repair welding, the surface to be welded shall be inspected to verify that the imperfections intended to be removed have been removed completely. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to the weld shall be dry and free of scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material that would prevent proper welding. 10.5.2.2 The surface to be welded shall be inspected using a magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method to verify that the imperfections intended to be removed have been completely removed. When magnetic particle inspection is employed, the surface shall be inspected both parallel and perpendicular to the length of the area to be repaired. 10.5.1.6 Welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/ AWS D1.1 or ASME Section IX, except that any complete joint penetration groove weld qualification also qualifies the welder or welding operator to do repair welding. 10.5.2.3 When weld repairs are to be post-weld heat-treated, special care shall be exercised in the selection of electrodes to avoid those compositions that embrittle as a result of such heat treatment. 10.5.2.4 Repairs on material that subsequently is heat-treated at the mill shall be inspected after heat treatment; repairs on material that subsequently is not heat-treated at the mill shall be inspected no sooner than 48 h after welding. Such inspection shall use a magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method; when magnetic particle inspection is involved, such inspection shall be both parallel to and perpendicular to the length of the repair. 10.5.1.7 Repair welding of materials shall be in accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS) that is in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/ AWS D1.1 or ASME Section IX, with the following exceptions or clarifications: (a) The WPS shall be qualified by testing a complete joint penetration groove weld or a surface groove weld. (b) The geometry of the surface groove weld need not be described in other than a general way. (c) An ANSI/AWS D1.1 prequalified complete joint penetration groove weld WPS is acceptable. (d) Any material not listed in the prequalified base metal-filler metal combinations of ANSI/AWS D1.1 also 10.5.2.5 The location of the weld repairs shall be marked on the finished piece. 10.5.3 Repair Quality — The welds and adjacent heat-affected zone shall be sound and free of cracks, the weld metal being thoroughly fused to all surfaces and 9 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II edges without undercutting or overlap. Any visible cracks, porosity, lack of fusion, or undercut in any layer shall be removed prior to deposition of the succeeding layer. Weld metal shall project at least 1⁄16 in. [2 mm] above the rolled surface after welding, and the projecting metal shall be removed by chipping or grinding, or both, to make it flush with the rolled surface, and to produce a workmanlike finish. 12.1.1 When the plate is heat treated with a cooling rate faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing temperature, one of the following shall apply in addition to other requirements specified herein: 12.1.1.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated edge where T is the thickness of the plate and shall be at least 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] from flame cut or heat-affectedzone surfaces. 10.5.4 Inspection of Repair — The manufacturer or processor shall maintain an inspection program to inspect the work to see that: 12.1.1.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1T by 1T by at least 3T, shall be joined to the plate edge by a partial penetration weld completely sealing the buffered edge prior to heat treatment. 10.5.4.1 Imperfections have been completely removed. 10.5.4.2 The limitations specified above have not been exceeded. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 10.5.4.4 Any weld deposit is of acceptable quality as defined above. 12.1.1.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall be used during the heat treatment adjacent to the plate edge where specimens are to be removed. It shall be demonstrated that the cooling rate of the tension test specimen is no faster than, and not substantially slower than, that attained by the method described in 12.1.1.2. 11. Test Methods 11.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 12.1.1.4 When test coupons cut from the plate but heat treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not less than 3T by 3T by T and each tension specimen cut from it shall meet the requirements of 12.1.1.1. 10.5.4.3 Established welding procedures have been followed, and 11.2 Yield strength shall be determined either by the 0.2% offset method or by the 0.5% extension under load method, unless otherwise stated in the material specification. 12.1.1.5 The heat treatment of test specimens separately in the device shall be subject to the limitations that (1) cooling rate data for the plate are available; (2) cooling rate control devices for the test specimens are available; and, (3) the method has received prior approval by the purchaser. 11.3 Rounding Procedures — For purposes of determining conformance with the specification, a calculated value shall be rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa] tensile and yield strength, and to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting value for other values in accordance with the rounding method given in Practice E 29. 12.2 Orientation — For plates wider than 24 in. [600 mm], test specimens shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of the specimen is transverse to the final direction of rolling of the plate. Test specimens for all other products shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of the specimen is parallel to the final direction of rolling. 11.4 For full-section test specimens of angles, the cross-sectional area used for calculating the yield and tensile strengths shall be a theoretical area calculated on the basis of the weight of the test specimen (see 13.1). 12.3 Location: 12.3.1 Plates — Test specimens shall be taken from a corner of the plate. 12.3.2 W, HP, S, and M Shapes with Flanges 6 in. [150 mm] or Wider — Test specimens shall be selected from a point in the flange 2⁄3 of the way from the flange centerline to the flange toe. 12. Tension Tests 12.1 Condition — Test specimens for non-heat-treated material shall be prepared for testing from the material in its delivered condition. Test specimens for heat-treated material shall be prepared for testing from the material in its delivered condition or from a separate piece of full thickness or full section from the same heat similarly heat treated. 12.3.3 Shapes Other Than Those in 12.3.2 — Test specimens shall be selected from the webs of beams, channels, and zees; from the stems of rolled tees; and from the legs of angles and bulb angles, except where full-section test specimens for angles are used and the 10 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS elongation acceptance criteria are increased accordingly. (See 12.6.2) 12.5 Preparation: 12.5.1 Plates: 12.5.1.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the plates. The test specimens shall conform to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for either 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimen or the 1 ⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen. 12.5.1.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, the use of 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimens, full thickness of the material and conforming to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, shall be subject to the limitation that adequate testing machine capacity is available. 12.5.1.3 For plates over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as permitted in 12.5.1.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements as shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimen. The axis of such specimens shall be located midway between the center of thickness and the top or bottom surface of the plate. 12.5.2 Shapes: 12.5.2.1 Except when angles are tested in full section, tension test specimens for shapes 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the material. The test specimen shall conform to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for either the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimen or the 1⁄2in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen. 12.5.2.2 For shapes up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, the use of 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimens, full thickness of the material and conforming to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, shall be subject to the limitation that adequate testing machine capacity is available. 12.5.2.3 For shapes over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as permitted in 12.5.2.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements as shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimens. The axis of such specimens shall be located midway between the center of thickness and the top or bottom surface of the material. 12.5.3 Bars: 12.5.3.1 Except as otherwise provided below, test specimens for bars shall be in accordance with Annex A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 12.5.3.2 Except as provided in 12.5.3.5, test specimens for bars 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness may conform to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for either the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimen or the 1⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen. 12.3.4 Bars: 12.3.4.1 Test specimens for bars to be used for pins and rollers shall be taken so that the axis is: midway between the center and the surface for pins and rollers less than 3 in. [75 mm] in diameter; 1 in. [25 mm] from the surface for pins and rollers 3 in. [75 mm] and over in diameter; or as specified in Annex A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 if the applicable foregoing requirement is not practicable. 12.3.4.2 Test specimens for bars other than those to be used for pins and rollers shall be taken as specified in Annex A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 12.4 Test Frequency: 12.4.1 Structural Products Produced in Discrete Cut Lengths — For structural products produced in discrete cut lengths, the minimum number of pieces or plates-as-rolled to be tested for each heat and strength gradation, where applicable, shall be as follows, except that it shall be permissible for any individual test to represent multiple strength gradations: 12.4.1.1 As given in Table C, or 12.4.1.2 One taken from the minimum thickness in the heat and one taken from the maximum thickness in the heat, where thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled. 12.4.2 Structural Products Produced from Coils: 12.4.2.1 For structural products produced from coils, the minimum number of coils to be tested for each heat and strength gradation, where applicable, shall be as given in Table D, except that it shall be permissible for any individual coil to represent multiple strength gradations. 12.4.2.2 Except as required by 12.4.2.3, two tension test specimens shall be taken from each coil tested, with the first being taken immediately prior to the first structural product to be qualified, and the second being taken from the approximate center lap. 12.4.2.3 If, during decoiling, the amount of material decoiled is less than that required to reach the approximate center lap, the second test for the qualification of the decoiled portion of such a coil shall be taken from a location adjacent to the end of the innermost portion decoiled. For qualification of successive portions from such a coil, an additional test shall be taken adjacent to the innermost portion decoiled, until a test is obtained from the approximate center lap. 11 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II 12.5.3.3 Except as provided in 12.5.3.4 and 12.5.3.5, test specimens for bars over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness or diameter shall conform either to the requirements for the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] or 1⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, or to the requirements for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimen of Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. from the specified percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] shall be made for each 0.5-in. [12.5-mm] increment of thickness over 3.5 in. [90 mm]. This deduction shall not exceed 3 percentage points. Accordingly, the following deductions from the base elongation requirements shall apply: 12.5.3.4 For bars other than those to be used for pins and rollers, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of using test specimens that are machined to a thickness or diameter of at least 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] for a length of at least 9 in. [230 mm]. 12.5.3.5 Test specimens for bars to be used for pins and rollers shall conform to the requirements of Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimen. Elongation Deduction, % 3.500–3.999 [90.00–102.49] 4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99] 4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49] 5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99] 5.500–5.999 [140.00–152.49] 6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 12.6.4 When so stated in the material specification, for plates up to 3⁄4 in. [20 mm], inclusive, in thickness, if the percentage of elongation of an 8-in. [200-mm] gage length test specimen falls not more than 3 percentage points below the amount prescribed, the elongation shall be considered satisfactory, provided the percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] across the break is not less than 25%. 12.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments: 12.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing thin material, adjustments in elongation requirements must be provided for thicknesses under 0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions from the base elongation requirements shall apply: Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm] 0.299–0.311 [7.60–7.89] 0.286–0.298 [7.30–7.59] 0.273–0.285 [7.00–7.29] 0.259–0.272 [6.60–6.99] 0.246–0.258 [6.20–6.59] 0.233–0.245 [5.90–6.19] 0.219–0.232 [5.50–5.89] 0.206–0.218 [5.20–5.49] 0.193–0.205 [4.90–5.19] 0.180–0.192 [4.60–4.89] 0.166–0.179 [4.20–4.59] 0.153–0.165 [3.90–4.19] 0.140–0.152 [3.60–3.89] 0.127–0.139 [3.20–3.59] 0.114–0.126 [2.90–3.19] Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm] NOTE 6 — A characteristic of certain types of alloy steels is a local disproportionate increase in the degree of necking down or contraction of the specimens under tension test, resulting in a decrease in the percentage of elongation as the gage length is increased. The effect is not so pronounced in the thicker plates. Elongation Deduction, %A 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 12.6.5 The tensile property requirements tables in many of the material specifications covered by this general specification specify elongation requirements in both 8-in. [200-mm] and 2-in. [50-mm] gage lengths. Unless otherwise provided in the individual material specification, both requirements are not required to be applied simultaneously and elongation need only be determined in gage length appropriate for the test specimen used. After selection of the appropriate gage length, the elongation requirement for the alternative gage length shall be deemed not applicable. 12.7 Yield Strength Application: A Elongation deductions for thicknesses less than 0.180 in. [4.60 mm] apply to structural shapes only. 12.7.1 When test specimens do not exhibit a welldefined disproportionate yield point, yield strength shall be determined and substituted for yield point. 12.6.2 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered when using full-section test specimens for angles, the elongation requirements for structural-size angles shall be increased by six percentage points when full-section test specimens are used. 12.7.2 The manufacturer or processor shall have the option of substituting yield strength for yield point if the test specimen exhibits a well-defined disproportionate yield point. 12.6.3 Due to the inherently lower elongation that is obtainable in thicker material, adjustments in elongation requirements must be provided. For material over 3.5 in. [90 mm] in thickness, a deduction of 0.5 percentage point 12.7.3 Yield strength shall be determined either by the 0.2% offset method or by the 0.5% extension-underload method. 12 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 12.8 Product Tension Tests — This specification does not provide requirements for product tension testing subsequent to shipment (see 16.1). Therefore, the requirements of 12.1 to 12.7 inclusive and Section 14 apply only for tests conducted at the place of manufacture prior to shipment. 13.4 Sheet Piling — The weight [mass] of each steel sheet pile shall not vary more than 2.5% from the theoretical or specified weight [or mass]. The length of each steel sheet pile shall not vary more than 5 in. [125 mm] over, and shall not be less than the length specified. 13.5 Hot-Rolled Bars — The permitted variations in dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 26 to 31 [Annex A1, Tables A1.26 to A1.31], inclusive. NOTE 7 — Compliance to Specification A 6/A 6M and the individual material specifications by a manufacturer does not preclude the possibility that product tension test results might vary outside specified ranges. The tensile properties will vary within the same heat or piece, be it asrolled, control-rolled, or heat-treated. Tension testing according to the requirements of Specification A 6/A 6M does not provide assurance that all products of a heat will be identical in tensile properties with the products tested. If the purchaser wishes to have more confidence than that provided by Specification A 6/A 6M testing procedures, additional testing or requirements, such as Supplementary Requirement S4, should be imposed. 14. Retests 14.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of discarding it and substituting another test specimen. 12.8.1 Appendix X2 provides additional information on the variability of tensile properties in plates and structural shapes. 14.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that specified and any part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] from the center of the gage length of a 2 in. [50-mm] specimen or is outside the middle half of the gage length of an 8 in. [200-mm] specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed. 13. Permitted Variations in Dimensions and Weight [Mass] 13.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel is assumed to weigh 490 lb. One cubic metre of rolled steel is assumed to have a mass of 7850 kg. 14.3 Except as provided in 14.3.1, if the results from an original tension specimen fails to meet the specified requirements, but are within 2 ksi [14 MPa] of the required tensile strength, within 1 ksi [7 MPa] of the required yield strength or yield point, or within 2 percentage points of the required elongation, a retest shall be permitted to replace the failing test. A retest shall be performed for the failing original test, with the specimen being randomly selected from the heat. If the results of the retest meet the specified requirements, the heat or lot shall be approved. 13.2 Plates — The permissible variations for dimensions and weight [mass] shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 1 to 15 [Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.15], inclusive. 13.3 Shapes: 13.3.1 Annex A2 lists the designations and dimensions, in both inch-pound and SI units, of shapes that are most commonly available. Radii of fillets and toes of shape profiles vary with individual manufacturers and therefore are not specified. 13.3.2 The permitted variations for dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 16 to 25 [Annex A1, Tables A1.16 to A1.25], inclusive. Permitted variations for special shapes not listed in such tables shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 14.3.1 For structural products produced from coils, both tests from each coil tested to qualify a heat are required to meet all mechanical property requirements. Should either test fail to do so, then that coil cannot be used to qualify the parent heat, however, the portion of that individual coil that is bracketed by acceptable tests (see 12.4.2.3) is considered to be qualified. NOTE 8 — Tolerances are shown in Tables 16 to 25 [Annex A1, Tables A1.16 to A1.25], inclusive, for some shapes that are not listed in Annex A2 (that is, bulb angles, tees, zees). Addition of such sections to Annex A2 will be considered by Subcommittee A01.02 when and if a need for such listing is shown. 14.4 Quenched and tempered steel plates are subject to the additional retest requirements contained in the material specification. 13.3.3 Shapes Having One Dimension of the Cross Section 3 in. [75 mm] or Greater (Structural-Size Shapes) — The cross-sectional area or weight [mass] of each shape shall not vary more than 2.5% from the theoretical or specified amounts. 14.5 When the full-section option of 12.3.3 is used and the elongation falls below the specified requirement, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of making another test using a test specimen permitted in 12.5.2. 13 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II 15. Test Reports 15.1 Test reports for each heat supplied are required and they shall report the following: 15.6 A signature is not required on the test report. However, the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting the report. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the report is responsible for the content of the report. 15.1.1 The specification designation, including year of issue, and the grade or class if applicable, to which the material is furnished. 15.7 When finished material is supplied to a purchase order specifying an ASTM material specification listed in the Scope section of Specification A 6/A 6M, the organization supplying that material shall provide the purchaser with a copy of the original manufacturer’s test report. 15.1.2 The heat number, heat analysis, and nominal sizes. 15.1.3 Two tension test results appropriate to qualify the material shipped (see 12.4), except that only one test result need be reported if the shipment consists of a single piece or plate-as-rolled. 15.8 A material test report, certificate of inspection, or similar document printed from or used in electronic form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The content of the EDI transmitted document must meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM standard(s) and conform to any existing EDI agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the EDI transmission is responsible for the content of the report. 15.1.3.1 In reporting elongation values, both the percentage increase and the original gage length shall be stated. 15.1.4 When the material is required to be heat treated, either by the designated ASTM specification, or when specified in the purchase order, all heat treatments, including temperature ranges and time at temperature. 15.1.4.1 The supply of a heat treatment procedure in place of the actual temperatures and times shall be subject to agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. NOTE 9 — The industry definition as invoked here is: EDI is the computer to computer exchange of business information in a standard format such as ANSI ASC X12. 15.1.4.2 Subcritical heat treatment to soften thermally cut edges need not be reported except for materials having specified minimum tensile strengths of 95 ksi [655 MPa] or higher, unless such subcritical heating is accomplished at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C] lower than the minimum tempering temperature. 16. Inspection and Testing 16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times, while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be conducted so as not to interfere with the operation of the works. 15.1.5 The results of all other tests required by the material specification, applicable supplementary requirements, and the order. 15.2 The thickness of the product tested is not necessarily the same as an individual ordered thickness since it is the heat that is tested rather than each ordered item. Tests from material thicknesses in accordance with 12.4 and encompassing the thicknesses in a shipment shall be sufficient for qualifying the material in the shipment. These test thicknesses are not required to be within previously tested and shipped thicknesses from the same heat. 16.2 When structural products are produced from coils, 16.1 shall apply to the processor instead of the manufacturer, and the place of process shall apply instead of the place of manufacture. When structural products are produced from coils and the processor is different from the manufacturer, the inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concerns the manufacturer of the material ordered. 15.3 For structural products produced from coils, both test results shall be reported for each qualifying coil. 15.4 For structural products produced from coils, both the manufacturer and processor shall be identified on the test report. 15.5 When full-section test specimens have been used for the qualification of angles, that information shall be stated on the test report. 14 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 17. Rejection 17.1 Any rejection based on product analysis made in accordance with the material specification shall be reported to the supplier and samples that represent the rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the date of notification of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the supplier shall have the option of making claim for a rehearing within that time. packaging, and packing shall be in accordance with the Level A requirements of MIL-STD-163. 18.3 When specified in the contract or order, and for direct procurement by or direct shipment to the U.S. government, marking for shipment, in addition to requirements specified in the contract or order, shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129 for military agencies and with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies. 17.2 The purchaser shall have the option of rejecting material that exhibits injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manufacturer’s works, and so notifying the manufacturer or processor. 19. Retreatment 19.1 If any heat-treated material fails to meet the mechanical property requirements of the applicable specification, the manufacturer or the processor shall have the option of heat treating the material again. All mechanical property tests shall be repeated and the material surface shall be reexamined for defects when the material is resubmitted for inspection. 18. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment 18.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with Practices A 700. 20. Keywords 20.1 bars; general requirements; plates; rolled; shapes; sheet piling; structural steel 18.2 When Level A is specified, and when specified in the contract or order, and for direct procurement by or direct shipment to the U.S. government, preservation, 15 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale 16 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale over 3⁄4 in. [over 19 mm] over 102 lb/ft [over 152 kg/m] W40 ⴛ 277 to 328 incl [W1000 ⴛ 412 to 488 incl] W36 ⴛ 230 to 300 incl [W920 ⴛ 342 to 446 incl] W33 ⴛ 201 to 291 incl [W840 ⴛ 299 to 433 incl] W30 ⴛ 235 to 261 incl [W760 ⴛ 350 to 389 incl] W27 ⴛ 194 to 258 incl [W690 ⴛ 289 to 384 incl] W24 ⴛ 176 to 229 incl [W610 ⴛ 262 to 341 incl] W21 ⴛ 166 to 223 incl [W530 ⴛ 248 to 331 incl] W18 ⴛ 158 to 192 incl [W460 ⴛ 235 to 286 incl] W14 ⴛ 145 to 211 incl [W360 ⴛ 216 to 314 incl] W12 ⴛ 120 to 190 incl [W310 ⴛ 179 to 283 incl] Group 3 W40 ⴛ 362 to 655 incl [W1000 ⴛ 539 to 976 incl] W36 ⴛ 328 to 798 incl [W920 ⴛ 488 to 1188 incl] W33 ⴛ 318 to 619 incl [W920 ⴛ 473 to 922 incl] W30 ⴛ 292 to 581 incl [760 ⴛ 434 to 865 incl] W27 ⴛ 281 to 539 incl [W690 ⴛ 419 to 892 incl] W24 ⴛ 250 to 492 incl [W610 ⴛ 372 to 732 incl] W21 ⴛ 248 to 402 incl [W530 ⴛ 370 to 599 incl] W18 ⴛ 211 to 311 incl [W460 ⴛ 315 to 464 incl] W14 ⴛ 233 to 550 incl [W360 ⴛ 347 to 818 incl] W12 ⴛ 210 to 336 incl [W310 ⴛ 313 to 500 incl] Group 4 W36 ⴛ 920 [W920 ⴛ 1369] W14 ⴛ 605 to 873 incl [W360 ⴛ 900 to 1299 incl] Group 5 Note 1 — SI designations, from Annex A2, are shown in brackets. Tees cut from W, M, and S shapes fall within the same group as the shape from which they are cut. L Shapes MC Shapes C Shapes HP Shapes to 20.7 lb/ft, incl [to 30.8 kg/m, incl] to 28.5 lb/ft, incl [to 42.4 kg/m, incl] to 1⁄2 in., incl [to 13 mm, incl] to 18.9 lb/ft, incl [to 28.1 kg/m, incl] to 35 lb/ft, incl [to 52 kg/m, incl] M Shapes over 35 lb/ft [over 52 kg/m] to 102 lb/ft, incl [to 152 kg/m, incl] over 20.7 lb/ft [over 30.8 kg/m] over 28.5 lb/ft [over 42.4 kg/m] over 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 in., incl [over 13 to 19 mm, incl] W40 ⴛ 149 to 268 incl [W1000 ⴛ 222 to 399 incl] W36 ⴛ 135 to 210 incl [W920 ⴛ 201 to 313 incl] W33 ⴛ 118 to 152 incl [W840 ⴛ 176 to 226 incl] W30 ⴛ 90 to 211 incl [W760 ⴛ 134 to 314 incl] W27 ⴛ 84 to 178 incl [W690 ⴛ 125 to 263 incl] W24 ⴛ 68 to 162 incl [W610 ⴛ 101 to 241 incl] W21 ⴛ 62 to 147 incl [W530 ⴛ 92 to 219 incl] W18 ⴛ 76 to 143 incl [W460 ⴛ 113 to 213 incl] W16 ⴛ 67 to 100 incl [W410 ⴛ 100 to 149 incl] W14 ⴛ 61 to 132 incl [W360 ⴛ 91 to 196 incl] W12 ⴛ 65 to 106 incl [W310 ⴛ 97 to 158 incl] W10 ⴛ 49 to 112 incl [W250 ⴛ 73 to 167 incl] W8 ⴛ 58 & 67 [W200 ⴛ 86 & 100] W24 ⴛ 55 & 62 [W610 ⴛ 82 & 92] W21 ⴛ 44 to 57 incl [W530 ⴛ 66 to 85 incl] W18 ⴛ 35 to 71 incl [W460 ⴛ 52 to 106 incl] W16 ⴛ 26 to 57 incl [W410 ⴛ 38.8 to 85 incl] W14 ⴛ 22 to 53 incl [W360 ⴛ 32.9 to 79 incl] W12 ⴛ 14 to 58 incl [W310 ⴛ 21.0 to 86 incl] W10 ⴛ 12 to 45 incl [W250 ⴛ 17.9 to 67 incl] W8 ⴛ 10 to 48 incl [W200 ⴛ 15.0 to 71 incl] W6 ⴛ 9 to 25 incl [W150 ⴛ 13.5 to 37.1 incl] W5 ⴛ 16 & 19 [W130 ⴛ 23.8 & 28.1] W4 ⴛ 13 [W100 ⴛ 19.3] W Shapes S Shapes Group 2 Group 1 Shape Type TABLE A SHAPE SIZE GROUPINGS FOR TENSILE PROPERTY CLASSIFICATION SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE B PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS INDEX TO TABLES OF PERMITTED VARIATIONS Table Permitted Variations, % Element Carbon ManganeseA --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Upper Limit, or Maximum Specified Value, % Under Minimum Limit Over Maximum Limit to 0.15 incl over 0.15 to 0.40 incl over 0.40 to 0.75 incl over 0.75 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 to 0.60 incl over 0.60 to over 0.90 to over 1.20 to over 1.35 to over 1.65 to over 1.95 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.09 0.09 0.11 0.12 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.90 1.20 1.35 1.65 1.95 incl incl incl incl incl Phosphorus to 0.04 incl over 0.04 to 0.15 incl ... ... 0.010 NAB Sulfur to 0.06 incl over 0.06 ... N/AB 0.010 N/AB Silicon to 0.30 incl over 0.30 to 0.40 incl over 0.40 to 2.20 incl 0.02 0.05 0.06 0.03 0.05 0.06 Nickel to 1.00 incl over 1.00 to 2.00 incl over 2.00 to 3.75 incl over 3.75 to 5.30 incl over 5.30 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.08 0.10 Chromium to 0.90 incl over 0.90 to 2.00 incl over 2.00 to 4.00 incl 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.04 0.06 0.10 Molybdenum to 0.20 incl over 0.20 to 0.40 incl over 0.40 to 1.15 incl 0.01 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.03 0.04 Copper 0.20 minimum only to 1.00 incl over 1.00 to 2.00 incl 0.02 0.03 0.05 ... 0.03 0.05 Titanium Vanadium to 0.10 incl C 0.01 C 0.01 to 0.10 incl over 0.10 to 0.25 incl over 0.25 minimum only specified 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.03 ... Boron any NAB NAB Columbium to 0.10 incl 0.01C 0.01 Zirconium to 0.15 incl 0.03 0.03 Nitrogen to 0.030 incl 0.005 0.005 Dimension 12 11 11 A1.12 A1.11 A1.11 21 24 25 A1.21 A1.24 A1.25 Cross Section of Shapes and Bars Flats Hexagons Rounds and Squares Shapes, Rolled; L, Bulb Angles, and Z Shapes, Rolled; W, HP, S, M, C, and MC Shapes, Rolled; T Shapes, Split; L and T 26 28 27 17 16 18 25 A1.26 A1.28 A1.27 A1.17 A1.16 A1.18 A1.25 Diameter Plates, Sheared Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Rounds 6 7 10 27 A1.6 A1.7 A1.10 A1.27 End Out-of-Square Shapes, Other than W Shapes, W Shapes, Milled, Other than W 20 22 23 A1.20 A1.22 A1.23 13 14 S27.1 S27.3 A1.13 A1.14 S27.2 S27.4 Length Bars Bars, Recut Plates, Sheared and Universal Mill Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Plates, Mill Edge Shapes, Rolled; Other than W Shapes, Rolled; W and HP Shapes, Split; L and T Shapes, Milled 30 31 3 9 8 4 19 22 25 23 A1.30 A1.31 A1.3 A1.9 A1.8 A1.4 A1.19 A1.22 A1.25 A1.23 Straightness Bars Shapes, Other than W 29 21 A1.29 A1.21 Sweep Shapes, W and HP 24 A1.24 Thickness Flats Plates, Ordered to Thickness 26 1 A1.26 A1.1 Waviness Plates 15 A1.15 2 A1.2 26 3 5 9 8 4 A1.26 A1.3 A1.5 A1.9 A1.8 A1.4 Carbon Steel Other than Carbon Steel Restrictive—Carbon Steel Restrictive—Other than Carbon Steel Weight [Mass] Plates, Ordered to Weight [Mass] Width Flats Plates, Plates, Plates, Plates, Plates, A Permitted variations in manganese content for bars and bar size shapes shall be: to 0.90 incl ±0.03; over 0.90 to 2.20 incl ±0.06. B NA — Product analysis not applicable. C 0.005% if the minimum of the range is 0.01%. Inch-Pound Units SI Units Camber Plates, Carbon Steel; Sheared and Gas-Cut Plates, Carbon Steel; Universal Mill Plates, Other than Carbon Steel; Sheared, Gas-Cut and Universal Mill Shapes, Rolled; S, M, C, MC, and L Shapes, Rolled; W and HP Shapes, Split; L and T Flatness Plates, Plates, Plates, Plates, Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table there is no requirement. Sheared Universal Mill Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut Mill Edge 17 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE C STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS PRODUCED IN DISCRETE CUT LENGTHS — MINIMUM NUMBER OF TENSION TESTS REQUIRED A Thickness Range Rolled for the Heat Under 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] ThicknessA Difference Between Pieces or Plates-asrolled in the ThicknessA Range TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA in the thicknessA range TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the thicknessA range TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA range. TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the thicknessA range TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA in the thicknessA range TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the thicknessA range 1 ⁄16 in. [2 mm] or less More than 1⁄16 in. [2 mm] 3 ⁄8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm], incl Less than 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] 3 ⁄8 in. [10 mm] or more Over 2 in. [50 mm] Minimum Number of Tension Tests Required Less than 1 in. [25 mm] 1 in. [25 mm] or more A Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or camparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled. B One test, if only one piece or plate-as-rolled is to be qualified. TABLE D STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS PRODUCED FROM COILS — MINIMUM NUMBER OF COILS REQUIRED TO BE TENSION TESTED ThicknessA Difference Between Coils in the Heat Minimum Number of Coils Required to Be Tension Tested Less than 1⁄16 in. [2 mm] 1 ⁄16 in. [2 mm] or more TwoB coils per heat, at any thicknessA in the heat TwoB coils per heat, one at the minimum thicknessA in the heat and one at the maximum thicknessA in the heat NOTE — See 12.4.2.2 and 12.4.2.3 for the number of tests to be taken per coil. A Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled. B One coil, if the product of only one coil is to be qualified. 18 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.23 0.29 0.29 48 and under 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.29 0.29 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 60 to 72, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 72 to 84, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 84 to 96, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 96 to 108, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.12 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 108 to 120, excl 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.10 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 120 to 132, excl 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.10 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 132 to 144, excl Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given, in inches, in. ... ... 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.11 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.27 0.33 0.35 144 to 168, excl ... ... ... 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.28 0.35 0.35 168 to 182, excl ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.07 0.09 0.16 ... ... ... ... ... ... 182 and over Note 1 — Tables 1–31, inclusive, contain permitted variations in dimensions and weight stated in inch-pound units. Note 2 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in. Note 3 — Thickness to be measured at 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. from the longitudinal edge. Note 4 — For thicknesses measured at any location other than that specified in Note 3, the permitted variations over specified thickness shall be 13⁄4 times the amounts in this table, rounded to the nearest 0.01 in. Note 5 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. To 1⁄4, excl 1 ⁄4 to 5⁄16, excl 5 ⁄16 to 3⁄8, excl 3 ⁄8 to 7⁄16, excl 7 ⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl 1 ⁄2 to 5⁄8, excl 5 ⁄8 to 3⁄4, excl 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl 1 to 2, excl 2 to 3, excl 3 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 10, excl 10 to 12, excl 12 to 15, excl Specified Thickness, in. Over 48 to 60, excl TABLE 1 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR, CARBON, HIGH-STRENGTH, LOW-ALLOY, AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES, 15 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS WHEN ORDERED TO THICKNESS PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M 19 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 84 to 96, excl 96 to 108, excl 108 to 120, excl 120 to 132, excl 132 to 144, excl 144 to 168, excl 168 and over 20 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale A 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 7.5 6.5 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 9.0 7.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 11.0 8.0 7.5 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Permitted variations in overweight for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11⁄4 times the amounts in this table. Permitted variations in overweight for single plates shall be 11⁄3 times the amounts in this table. Permitted variations in overweight for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12⁄3 times the amounts in this table. The adopted standard density of rolled steel is 490 lb/ft3. Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and weight group represented in each shipment. Note Note Note Note Note 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 13.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 12.0 11.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.5 6.0 5.5 4.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... ... ... 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.5 6.0 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.5 ... ... ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 72 to 84, excl To 10, excl 10 to 12.5, excl 12.5 to 15.0, excl 15 to 17.5, excl 17.5 to 20, excl 20 to 25, excl 25 to 30, excl 30 to 40, excl 40 to 81.7, excl 81.7 to 122.6, excl 122.6 to 163.4, excl 163.4 to 245.1, excl 245.1 to 409.0, excl 409.0 to 490.1, excl 490.1 to 613.0, excl 60 to 72, excl Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over 48 to 60, excl Specified Weights, lb/ft2 48 and Under Permitted Variation in Average Weight of LotsA for Widths Given in Inches, Expressed in Precentage of the Specified Weights per Square Foot TABLE 2 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT FOR RECTANGULAR SHEARED PLATES AND UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 613.0 LB/FT2 AND UNDER WHEN ORDERED TO WEIGHT SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 3 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES 11⁄2 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS; LENGTH ONLY OF UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 21⁄2 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses, in., or Equivalent Weights, lb/ft2, in. ⁄8 to 1, excl 1 to 2, inclB 15.3 to 25.5, excl 25.5 to 40.8, excl 40.8 to 81.7, incl Width Width To 3⁄8, excl Specified Dimensions, in. Length To 120, excl 120 to 240, excl 240 to 360, excl 360 to 480, excl 480 to 600, excl 600 to 720, excl 700 and over Width To 15.3, excl Width Length 3 ⁄8 to 5⁄8, excl To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 3 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 1 7 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 7 5 1 ⁄16 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 3 ⁄8 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 3 ⁄8 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 1 1 1 11⁄8 1 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 7 ⁄16 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 7 Length Length Width 5 7 7 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄4 1 11⁄8 1 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 7 ⁄8 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 11⁄8 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 1 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 3 7 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 13⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 13⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 15⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄4 15⁄8 15⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 ⁄16 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 15⁄8 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 15⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄4 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 1 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 2 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 21⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄2 To 60, excl 60 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 and over 9 2 2 2 2 3 21⁄8 21⁄8 21⁄8 23⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 11⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄2 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 23⁄4 23⁄4 23⁄4 3 1 1 1 5 ⁄16 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 1 3 3 5 5 5 5 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 7 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 A 3 3 3 7 5 Length 1 1 5 5 3 7 7 7 7 Permitted variation under specified width and length, 1⁄4 in. Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 12 in. in width for thicknesses over 2 to 21⁄2 in., incl, except for alloy steel up to 13⁄4 in. thick. B 21 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 4 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE CARBON AND HIGH-STRENGTH, LOW-ALLOY PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS (Applies to Either Plates Produced from Coils or Plates Produced in Discrete Cut Lengths of Flat Product) Permitted Variation Over Specified Width, in.A Specified Width, in. To 14 17 19 21 24 26 28 35 50 60 65 70 80 A 7 14, excl to 17, excl to 19, excl to 21, excl to 24, excl to 26, excl to 28, excl to 35, excl to 50, excl to 60, excl to 65, excl to 70, excl to 80, excl and over ⁄16 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2 1 No permitted variation under specified width. TABLE 5 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 15 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permitted Variations over Specified WidthA for Thicknesses Given in Inches or Equivalent Weights Given in Pounds per Square Foot, in. To 3⁄8, excl Specified Width, in. Over 8 to 20, excl 20 to 36, excl 36 and over A To 15.3, excl 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 3 5 5 ⁄8 to ⁄8, excl ⁄8 to 1, excl 1 to 2, incl Over 2 to 10, incl Over 10 to 15, incl 15.3 to 25.5, excl 25.5 to 40.8, excl 40.8 to 81.7, incl 81.7 to 409.0, incl 409.0 to 613.0, incl 1 3 1 1 5 3 ⁄8 ⁄4 3 ⁄8 ⁄16 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 Permitted variation under specified width, 1⁄8 in. 22 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 3 ⁄8 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 7 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 9 PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 6 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR PLATES 1 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permitted Variation Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A Specified Diameters, in. To 3⁄8, excl To 32,excl 32 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 to 130, excl 130 and over A 3 ⁄8 to 5⁄8, excl 5 ⁄8 to 1, incl 1 3 1 5 7 9 ⁄4 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 No permitted variation under specified diameter. TABLE 7 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR PLATES (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) Specified Diameter, in. To 32, excl 32 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 to 130, excl 130 and over A Permitted Variation Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A to 1, excl 1 to 2, excl 2 to 4, excl 3 3 1 3 1 1 ⁄8 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 ⁄2 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 4 to 6, excl 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 5 6 to 8, excl 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 3 8 to 15, incl 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 7 No permitted variation under specified diameter. TABLE 8 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) Specified Thickness, in. To 2, excl 2 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 8, excl 8 to 15, incl TABLE 9 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) Permitted Variation Over Specified Width and Length, in. Specified Thickness, in. 3 To 2, excl 2 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 8, excl 8 to 15, incl ⁄4 1 11⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄2 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 1 5 Note 1 — These permitted variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. Note 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. Note 1 — These permitted variations shall be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. Note 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. 23 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Permitted Variation Over Specified Width and Length, in. Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 10 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR PLATES (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) Specified Diameter, in. To 32, excl 32 to 84, excl 84 to 108, excl 108 to 130, excl A Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Specified Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A to 1, excl 1 to 2, excl 1 1 1 5 ⁄2 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 2 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 8, excl 8 to 15, incl 3 ⁄4 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 1 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 3 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 7 No permitted variation under specified diameter. TABLE 11 PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL, AND ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED, SPECIAL-CUT, OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES Specified Thickness, in. Specified Weight, lb/ft2 Specified Width, in. To 2, incl Over 2 to 15, incl Over 2 to 15, incl to 81.7, incl 81.7 to 613.0, incl 81.7 to 613.0, incl all to 30, incl over 30 Permitted Camber, in. ⁄8 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5) ⁄16 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5) 1 ⁄4 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5) 1 3 A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. TABLE 12 PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR SHEARED PLATES AND GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES, ALL THICKNESSES (Applies to Carbon Steel Only) Permitted camber, in. p 1⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of length/5) A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. 24 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS To 10.2, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 40.8 to 81.7, excl 81.7 to 163.4, excl 163.4 to 245.1, excl 245.1 to 326.8, excl 326.8 to 409.0, excl 409.0 to 490.1, excl 490.1 to 613.0, incl To 1⁄4, excl 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl 1 to 2, excl 2 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 8, excl 8 to 10, excl 10 to 12, excl 12 to 15, excl ⁄16 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 1 9 To 36, excl ⁄4 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 3 36 to 48, excl ⁄16 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 3 15 48 to 60, excl 11⁄4 15 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 60 to 72, excl 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 72 to 84, excl 11⁄2 11⁄4 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 84 to 96, excl 15⁄8 13⁄8 1 1 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 96 to 108, excl 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄8 1 7 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 108 to 120, excl 1 7 ⁄8 1 5 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄8 1 11 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 120 to 144, excl ... ... 1 7 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 144 to 168, excl ... ... 2 1 ⁄8 2 1 3 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 ... 168 and Over 25 Not for Resale A Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates. B Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in. Note 2 — These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 60 ksi or comparable chemical composition or hardness. The limits in this table are increased 50% for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile strength or comparable chemical composition or hardness. Note 3 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. Note 4 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Note 5 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Weight, lb/ft2 Specified Thickness, in. Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.A,B TABLE 13 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS To 10.2, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 40.8 to 81.7, excl 81.7 to 163.4, excl 163.4 to 245.1, excl 245.1 to 326.8, excl 326.8 to 409.0, excl 409.0 to 490.1, excl 490.1 to 613.0, incl To 1⁄4, excl 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl 1 to 2, excl 2 to 4, excl 4 to 6, excl 6 to 8, excl 8 to 10, excl 10 to 12, excl 12 to 15, incl ⁄16 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 3 13 To 36, excl 11⁄8 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 36 to 48, excl 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 1 1 ⁄8 13⁄16 48 to 60, excl 1 7 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 13 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 1 1 1 ⁄4 15⁄16 60 to 72, excl 2 13⁄4 11⁄8 1 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄8 72 to 84, excl 21⁄4 17⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄8 1 15 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 84 to 96, excl 2 3 ⁄8 2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 1 1 ⁄4 115⁄16 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 96 to 108, excl 25⁄8 21⁄4 15⁄8 13⁄8 15⁄16 1 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 108 to 120, excl 2 3 ⁄4 2 3 ⁄8 1 7 ⁄8 1 5 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 120 to 144, excl ... ... 2 3 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 5 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 144 to 168, excl ... ... 3 1 ⁄8 3 2 5 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄4 1 5 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 168 and Over 26 Not for Resale A Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates. B Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width. Note 2 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. Note 3 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Note 4 — Plates must be a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Weight, lb/ft2 Specified Thickness, in. Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.A,B TABLE 14 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL PLATES, HOT ROLLED OR THERMALLY TREATED SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 15 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WAVINESS FOR PLATES Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface (from Table 13 or 14), in. 5 ⁄16 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2 21⁄8 21⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄2 25⁄8 23⁄4 27⁄8 3 31⁄8 3 Permitted Variation in Waviness in., When Number of Waves in 12 ft is 1 5 ⁄16 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2 21⁄8 21⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄2 25⁄8 23⁄4 27⁄8 3 31⁄8 3 2 1 ⁄4 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄4 15⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄2 15⁄8 111⁄16 113⁄16 17⁄8 2 21⁄16 23⁄16 21⁄4 23⁄8 5 3 3 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 11⁄16 11⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄4 15⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄2 19⁄16 15⁄8 111⁄16 13⁄4 3 4 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 11⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄4 15⁄16 3 5 1 ⁄8 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 1 6 7 1 1 1 1 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 Note 1— Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of the plate from a plane parallel to the surface of the point of measurement and contiguous to the surface of the plate at each of the two adjacent wave peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured in an increment of less than 12 ft of length. The permitted variation in waviness is a function of the permitted variation from a flat surface as obtained from Table 13 or 14, whichever is appropriate. Note 2— Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when waviness is measured. 27 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 16 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR W, HP, S, M, C, AND MC SHAPES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Shape Section Nominal Sizes, in. C, Maximum T+ Depth at any T ′A Cross Section A, Depth B, Flange Width Flanges E, Web over Over Under Over Under Out-ofoff Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical SquareB CenterC Depth, in. Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Web Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in. 3 ⁄16 and Under Over 3 ⁄16 W and HP Up to 12, incl Over 12 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 5 3 1 ⁄4 ⁄4 ... ... ... ... S and M 3 to 7, incl Over 7 to 14, incl Over 14 to 24, incl 3 ⁄32 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 1 5 ⁄32 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 3 5 ⁄8 ⁄32 3 ⁄16 1 3 ⁄8 ⁄32 3 ⁄16 1 1 1 3 ⁄16 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 11⁄2 and under Over 11⁄2 to 3, excl 3 to 7, incl Over 7 to 14, incl Over 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.010 0.015 ... ... ... 0.015 0.020 ... ... ... C and MC ⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄32 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 ⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄32 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 ⁄4 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄32 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 ⁄32 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 5 ⁄32 3 ⁄16 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄32 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 ⁄16 ⁄16 Note 1 — A is measured at center line of web for S, M, and W and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is overall for C shapes under 3 in. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web. Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A T + T ′ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 5⁄8 in. and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 3⁄64 in./in. of depth. B Permitted variation is per inch of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes. C Permitted variation of 5⁄16 in. max for sections over 426 lb/ft. 28 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 17 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR ANGLES (L SHAPES), BULB ANGLES, AND ZEES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in. B, Flange Width or Length of Leg, in. A, Depth, in. Section Nominal Size, in. Over Theoretical Under Theoretical Over Theoretical Under Theoretical T, Out-ofSquare per Inch of B, in. ⁄16 and under Over 3⁄16 to 3⁄8, incl Over 3⁄8 ⁄128B ⁄128B 3 ⁄128B 3 ⁄128B 3 ⁄128B 3 ⁄128B 0.008 0.010 0.012 ... ... ... 0.010 0.010 0.015 ... ... ... ... 0.012 0.015 ... ... ... ⁄128B ⁄128B 3 ⁄128B ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ⁄128B ⁄128B ... ... ... ... ... ... AnglesA (L Shapes) 1 and under Over 1 to 2, incl Over 2 to 3, excl 3 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6, incl Over 6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 ⁄32 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄32 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 3 3 3 Bulb angles (Depth) 3 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6, incl Over 6 1 ⁄8 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 1 ⁄32 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 1 ⁄8 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 1 1 3 3 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6, incl 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 Zees ⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄32 ⁄8 Note 1—Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification. ⁄128 in./in. p 11⁄2°. B3 29 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in. 3 SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 18 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROLLED TEES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in. Tees A, DepthB Nominal SizeA Over 11⁄4 and under Over 11⁄4 to 2, incl Over 2 to 3, excl 3 to 5, incl Over 5 to 7, incl Under B, WidthB Over Under 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 ⁄64 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 3 ⁄32 3 ⁄32 ⁄64 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 ⁄64 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 T, Outof-Square per inch of B E, Weboff-Center ... ... ... 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 ... ... ... 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 ⁄64 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 Thickness of Flange Stem Out-ofSquareC 1 ⁄32 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 ... ... 1 Thickness of Stem Over Under Over Under 0.010 0.012 0.015 ... ... 0.010 0.012 0.015 ... ... 0.005 0.010 0.015 ... ... 0.020 0.020 0.020 ... ... Note 1 — * Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.” Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for permitted variations. Measurements for both depth and width are overall. C Stem-out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point. B TABLE 19 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in. Nominal Size,A in. Under 3 3 and over 5 to 10, excl Over 5 ⁄8 1 Under 0 0 10 to 20, excl 20 to 30, incl Over Under Over 0 0 1 1 11⁄2 1 ⁄2 13⁄4 Under Over 30 to 40, incl Over 0 0 2 21⁄4 Over 40 to 50, incl Under Over 0 0 1 2 ⁄2 23⁄4 Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A Greatest cross-sectional dimension. 30 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Over 50 to 65, incl Over 65 ft Under Over Under Over Under 0 0 1 0 0 ... ... ... ... 2 ⁄2 23⁄4 PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 20 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN END OUT-OF-SQUARE FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Shapes S, M, C, and MC LA Bulb angles Rolled TeesA Zees Permitted Variation 1 ⁄64 in./in. of depth ⁄128 in./in. of leg length or 11⁄2° 3 ⁄128 in./in. of depth or 11⁄2° 1 ⁄64 in./in. of flange or stem 3 ⁄128 in./in. of sum of both flange lengths 3 A Permitted variations for end out-of-square are determined on the longer members of the shape. TABLE 21 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Positions for Measuring Camber of Shapes Variable Nominal Size,A in. Camber under 3 3 and over all Sweep A Permitted Variation, in. ⁄4 in. in any 5 ft, or 1⁄4 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5) ⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5) Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject to negotiations between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved. 1 1 Greatest cross-sectional dimension. 31 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE 22 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR W AND HP SHAPES Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in.A,B 30 ft and Under W and HP Shapes Over Beams 24 in. and under in nominal depth Beams over 24 in. in nominal depth and all columns Over 30 ft Under Over Under 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 ⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄8 plus 1⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof ⁄2 plus 1⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof ⁄8 ⁄2 A For HP and W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the permitted variations in length are plus 5 in. and minus 0 in. These permitted variations in length also apply to sheet piles. B The permitted variations in end out-of-square W and HP shapes shall be 1⁄64 in. per inch of depth, or per inch of flange width if the flange width is larger than the depth. TABLE 23 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH AND END OUT-OF-SQUARE, MILLED SHAPES Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, in.A Milled Both EndsC Milled One-EndC Length Nominal, Depth, in. 6 to 36 Length, ftB 6 to 70 Over 1 ⁄32 Length Under 1 End Out-ofSquare 1 ⁄32 ⁄32 A Over 1 ⁄4 Under 1 ⁄4 End Out-ofSquare (for Milled End) 1 ⁄32 Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature. The permitted variations in length and out-of-square are additive. C End out-of-square are measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The measured variation from true squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount. B 32 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 24 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR W AND HP SHAPES Positions for Measuring Camber and Sweep of W and HP Shapes Permitted Variation in Straightness, in. ⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/10)A 1 Camber and sweep When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to depth are specified in the order for use as columns: Lengths of 45 ft and under Lengths over 45 ft ⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of total length/10) but not over 3⁄8 in. ⁄8 in. + [1⁄8 in. ⴛ ([number of feet of total length — 45]/10)] 1 3 Sections with a flange width less than 6 in., permitted variation for sweep, in. p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5). Applies only to: 8-in. deep sections 31 lb/ft and heavier, 10-in. deep sections 49 lb/ft and heavier, 12-in. deep sections 65 lb/ft and heavier, and 14-in. deep sections 90 lb/ft and heavier. For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer. A B TABLE 25 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR SPLIT TEES AND SPLIT ANGLES (L SHAPES)A Permitted Variation Over or Under Specified Depth,B in. Specified Depth, in. To 6, excl (beams and channels) 6 to 16, excl (beams and channels) 16 to 20, excl (beams and channels) 20 to 24, excl (beams) 24 and over (beams) 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 A The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are the same as those applicable to the section from which the tees or angles are split. B The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles include the permitted variations in depth for the beams or channels before splitting. Permitted variations in dimensions and straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which these tees or angles are cut, apply, except: straightness p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (length in feet/5). 33 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 26 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in. Specified Widths, in. To 1, incl Over 1 to 2, Over 2 to 4, Over 4 to 6, Over 6 to 8, incl incl incl incl 0.203 to 0.230, excl 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.009 A 0.203 to 1 ⁄4, excl 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.015 1 ⁄4 to 1⁄2 incl Over 1⁄2 to 1, incl 0.008 0.012 0.015 0.015 0.016 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.025 Over 1 to 2, incl ... 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 Over 2 to 3, incl ... ... 3 ⁄64 3 ⁄64 3 ⁄64 Over 3 ... ... 3 ⁄64 3 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 Permitted Variations from Specified Width, in. Over Under 1 1 ⁄64 ⁄32 1 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 B ⁄8 ⁄64 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄16 3 B ⁄32 1 1 Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A B Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled carbon steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in. For flats over 6 to 8 in., in width, and 3 in. incl in thickness. TABLE 27 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND ROUND-CORNERED SQUARES Permitted Variations from Specified Size, in. Specified Size, in. Over Under Permitted Out-ofRound or Out-ofSquare, in.A To 5⁄16 Over 5⁄16 to 7⁄16, incl Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8, incl Over 5⁄8 to 7⁄8, incl Over 7⁄8 to 1, incl Over 1 to 11⁄8, incl Over 11⁄8 to 11⁄4, incl Over 11⁄4 to 13⁄8, incl Over 13⁄8 to 11⁄2, incl Over 11⁄2 to 2, incl Over 2 to 21⁄2, incl Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2, incl Over 31⁄2 to 41⁄2, incl Over 41⁄2 to 51⁄2, incl Over 51⁄2 to 61⁄2, incl Over 61⁄2 to 81⁄4, incl Over 81⁄4 to 91⁄2, incl Over 91⁄2 to 10, incl 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.012 0.014 1 ⁄64 1 ⁄32 3 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 5 ⁄64 1 ⁄8 5 ⁄32 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.012 0.014 1 ⁄64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.012 0.013 0.015 0.016 0.018 0.021 0.023 0.023 0.035 0.046 0.058 0.070 0.085 0.100 0.120 TABLE 28 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR HEXAGONS Permitted Variations from Specified Size, in. Specified Sizes Between Opposite Sides, in. 1 ⁄2 and under Over 1⁄2 to 1, incl Over 1 to 11⁄2, incl Over 11⁄2 to 2, incl Over 2 to 21⁄2, incl Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2, incl Under 0.007 0.010 0.021 1 ⁄32 3 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 0.007 0.010 0.013 1 ⁄64 1 ⁄64 1 ⁄64 0.011 0.015 0.025 1 ⁄32 3 ⁄64 1 ⁄16 A Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance between any two opposite faces measured at the same transverse cross section. TABLE 29 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR BARS Permitted Variations in Straightness, in.A 1 A Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same transverse cross section. Out-of-square section is the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the same transverse cross section. ⁄4 in any 5 ft, or 1⁄4 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5) A Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed. 34 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Over Permitted Out-of-Hexagon Section, Three Measurements, in.A Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE 30 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR HOT-CUT STEEL BARSA Permitted Variations Over Specified Length Given in Feet, in. (No Variation Under) Specified Sizes of Flats, in. Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, and Hexagons, in. To 1, incl Over 1 to 2, incl Over 1 to 2, incl Over 2 to 5, incl Over 5 to 10, incl Thickness To 1, incl Over 1 To 1, incl Over 1 ... 0.230 to 1, incl Over 1 to 3, incl 5 to 10, excl Width To 3, incl To 3, incl Over 3 to 6, Over 3 to 6, ... Over 6 to 8, Over 6 to 8, 10 to 20, excl 40 to 60, incl 3 ⁄4 1 1 11⁄2 21⁄2 11⁄4 13⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 13⁄4 23⁄4 13⁄4 2 13⁄4 2 2 21⁄4 3 31⁄2 31⁄2 21⁄4 21⁄2 21⁄2 23⁄4 31⁄4 4 4 B 11⁄2 21⁄2 13⁄4 23⁄4 21⁄4 3 23⁄4 31⁄4 5 incl incl 30 to 40, excl ⁄2 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 1 2 3 ⁄4 11⁄4 1 incl incl 20 to 30, excl Hot Sawing B 2 to 5, incl Over 5 to 10, incl 1 and over ... 3 and over ... B Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A B For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length. Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed. TABLE 31 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR BARS RECUT BOTH ENDS AFTER STRAIGHTENINGA,B Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, Width of Flats and Maximum Dimension of Other Sections, in. To 3, incl Over 3 to 6, incl Over 6 to 8, incl Rounds over 8 to 10, incl Permitted Variations from Specified Lengths Given in Feet, in. To 12, incl Over Under Over 12 Over Under 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 ⁄16 ⁄4 3 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 A ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer or processor for permitted variations in length. B Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies. 35 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the purchaser. Those that are considered suitable for use with each material specification are listed in the specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser. These additional requirements shall apply only when specified in the order, in which event the specified tests shall be made by the manufacturer or processor before shipment of the material. S5.2 The frequency of testing, the test temperature to be used, and the absorbed energy requirements shall be as specified on the order. S1. Vacuum Treatment S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process which includes vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select suitable process procedures. S6. Drop-Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and over in Thickness) S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance with Method E 208. The specimens shall represent the material in the final condition of heat treatment. Agreement shall be reached between the purchaser and the manufacturer or processor as to the number of pieces to be tested and whether a maximum nil-ductility transition (NDT) temperature is mandatory or if the test results are for information only. S2. Product Analysis S2.1 Product analyses shall be made for those elements listed in the material specification. Test frequency shall be as specified on the order. Specimens for analysis shall be taken adjacent to or from the tension test specimen, or from a sample taken from the same relative location as that from which the tension test specimen was taken. S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test Coupons S3.1 Prior to testing, the test specimens representing the structural product for acceptance purposes for mechanical properties shall be thermally treated to simulate a post-weld heat treatment below the critical temperature (Ac3), using the heat treatment parameters (such as temperature range, time, and cooling rates) specified in the order. The test results for such heat-treated test specimens shall meet the applicable product specification requirements. S8. Ultrasonic Examination S8.1 The material shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the requirements specified on the order. S15. Reduction of Area Measurement S15.1 The reduction of area, as determined on the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm] diameter round tension test specimen in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370, shall not be less than 40%. S4. Additional Tension Test S4.1 Plate — One tension test shall be made from each unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot, except that for quenched and tempered plates, a test shall be taken from each unit plate heat treated. The results obtained shall be reported on the mill test reports when such tests are required by the order. Maximum Tensile Strength S18.1 Steel having a specified minimum tensile strength of less than 70 ksi [485 MPa] shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 30 ksi [205 MPa]. S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with Specification A 673 /A 673M. S18.2 Steel having a minimum specified tensile strength of 70 ksi [485 MPa] or higher shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 25 ksi [170 MPa]. S18. 36 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS S23. Copper-Bearing Steel (for improved atmospheric corrosion resistance) S27. Restrictive Plate Flatness S27.1 As-rolled or normalized carbon steel plates ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given in Table S27.1 or Table S27.2, whichever is applicable. S23.1 The copper content shall be a minimum of 0.20% on heat analysis, 0.18 on product analysis. S26. SA-6 /SA-6M S27.2 As-rolled or normalized high-strength lowallow steel plates ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given in Table S27.3 or Table S27.4, whichever is applicable. Subdivided Material — Marking of Individual Pieces S74. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability S74.1 Plates and shapes shall be supplied with a specific maximum carbon equivalent value as specified by the purchaser. This value shall be based on heat analysis. The required chemical analysis as well as the carbon equivalent shall be reported. S26.1 Subdivided pieces shall be individually identified by marking, stenciling, or die stamping the specification number (year-date not required), grade, heat number, and the heat treatment identification, if applicable, along with the trademark, brand, or name of the organization subdividing the material. As an alternative, individual subdivided pieces shall be identified by a code traceable to the original required identification, provided that the trademark, name, or brand of the organization subdividing the material is also placed on the material and the original required identification, cross referenced on the code, is furnished with the material. S74.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using the following formula: CE p C + Mn /6 + (Cr + Mo + V) /5 + (Ni + Cu) /15 S74.3 For additional information on the weldability of steel, see Appendix X3. TABLE S27.1 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED CARBON STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Specified Thickness, in. Specified Weights, lb/ft2 To 1⁄4, excl. 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, incl. To 10.2 excl. 10.2 to 15.3, 15.3 to 20.4, 20.4 to 30.6, 30.6 to 40.8, 40.8 to 51.7, excl. excl. excl. excl. incl. Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in. 48 to 60, excl. 60 to 72, excl. 3 15 9 3 ⁄4 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 72 to 84, excl. 84 to 96, excl. A ⁄16 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 A 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 96 to 108, excl. 108 to 120, incl. A A 1-1⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1-1⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft. in length, or in any 12 ft. of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in. NOTE 4 — The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 6 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 7 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A There is no published restricted value for this size. 37 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE S27.2 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED CARBON STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in. Specified Thickness, mm Specified Weights, kg/m2 1200 to 1500, excl. 1500 to 1800, excl. 1800 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2400, excl. 2400 to 2700, excl. 2700 to 3000, incl. To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, incl. To 47.1 excl. 47.1 to 78.5, excl. 78.5 to 94.2, excl. 78.5 to 94.2, excl. 157.0 to 196.2, excl. 196.2 to 392.7, incl. 18 15 8 7 7 7 24 18 8 8 8 7 A A A A 22 10 8 8 7 24 11 10 8 8 27 13 13 10 8 29 15 13 11 8 NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. NOTE 4 — The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 6 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 7 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A There is no published restricted value for this size. TABLE S27.3 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Specified Thickness, in. Specified Weights, lb/ft2 To 1⁄4, excl. 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, incl. To 10.2 excl. 10.2 to 15.3, 15.3 to 20.4, 20.4 to 30.6, 30.6 to 40.8, 40.8 to 51.7, excl. excl. excl. excl. incl. Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in. 48 to 60, excl. 60 to 72, excl. 72 to 84, excl. 84 to 96, excl. 96 to 108, excl. 108 to 120, incl. 1-1⁄16 7 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 1-7⁄16 1-1⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 A A A A 1-5⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 1-7⁄16 11 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 1-1⁄2 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1-11⁄16 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft. in length, or in any 12 ft. of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 3⁄8 in. NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 5 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 6 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A There is no published restricted value for this size. 38 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE S27.4 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Millimeters, mm Specified Thickness, mm Specified Weights, kg/m2 1200 to 1500, excl. 1500 to 1800, excl. 1800 to 2100, excl. To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, incl. To 47.1 excl. 47.1 to 78.5, excl. 78.5 to 94.2, excl. 94.2 to 157.0, excl. 157.0 to 196.2, excl. 196.2 to 392.5, incl. 27 22 12 11 11 10 36 27 12 11 11 11 A A A A 33 15 13 12 11 36 17 15 13 12 39 19 16 15 13 43 21 18 17 13 2100 to 2400, excl. 2400 to 2700, excl. 2700 to 3000, incl. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 10 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800, incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 10 mm. NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 5 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 6 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A There is no published restricted value for this size. 39 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II ANNEXES (Mandatory Information) A1. PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS AND MASS IN SI UNITS A1.1 Tables A1.1 through A1.31 contain permitted variations in dimensions and mass stated in SI Units. 40 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.1 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALL0Y, AND ALLOY STEEL PLATES, 300 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS WHEN ORDERED TO THICKNESS Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimetres, mm Specified Thickness, mm 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 25.0 28.0 30.0 32.0 35.0 38.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0 150.0 160.0 180.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 1200 and Under Over 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3300, excl 3300 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and Over 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 5.8 7.5 7.5 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 5.8 7.5 7.5 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 ... ... ... 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.4 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 6.3 7.0 7.5 9.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 6.3 7.0 8.8 9.0 Note 1 — Permitted variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm. Note 2 — Thickness to be measured at 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge. Note 3 — For specified thicknesses not listed in this table, the permitted variations in thickness shall be as given for the next higher value of specified thickness that is listed in this table. Note 4 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 5, the permitted variations over specified thickness shall be 13⁄4 times the amounts in this table, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm. Note 5 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. 41 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 42 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale A 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3300, excl 3300 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and Over 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 5.5 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 6.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 7.5 6.5 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 9.0 7.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 8.0 7.5 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Permitted variations in excess mass for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11⁄4 times the amounts in this table. Permitted variations in excess mass for single plates shall be 11⁄3 times the amounts in this table. Permitted variations in excess mass for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12⁄3 times the amounts in this table. The adopted standard density for rolled steel is 7850 kg/m3. Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... ... 11 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.5 6.0 5.5 4.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 ... ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... ... ... 10 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.5 6.0 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.5 ... ... ... 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over 1200 to 1500, excl The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and mass group represented in each shipment. Note Note Note Note Note To 51.02, excl 51.02 to 62.80, excl 62.80 to 74.58, excl 74.58 to 86.35, excl 86.35 to 102.0, excl 102.0 to 125.6, excl 125.6 to 149.2, excl 149.2 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl 392.5 to 588.8, excl 588.8 to 785.0, excl 785.0 to 1178, excl 1178 to 1962, excl 1962 to 2355, excl 2355 to 2983, incl Specified Mass, kg/m2 1200 and Under Permitted Variations in Average Mass of LotsA for Widths Given in Millimetres, Expressed in Percentage of the Specified Masses per Square Metre TABLE A1.2 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN MASS FOR RECTANGULAR SHEARED PLATES AND UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 2983 kg/m2 AND UNDER WHEN ORDERED TO MASS SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.3 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES 40 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS; LENGTH ONLY OF UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 65 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres and Equivalent Masses Given in Kilograms per Square Metre, mm To 10.5 excl Specified Dimensions, mm Length To 78.50, excl 10.5 to 16, excl 16 to 25, excl 25 to 50, inclB 78.50 to 125.6, excl 125.6 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl Width Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length To 3000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 10 11 13 16 13 16 19 22 11 13 16 19 16 18 22 25 13 16 19 22 19 22 25 29 16 19 25 29 25 25 29 32 3000 to 6000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 10 13 14 16 19 19 22 25 13 16 18 19 22 22 24 29 16 19 21 22 25 25 29 32 19 22 25 29 29 32 35 35 6000 to 9000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 10 13 14 18 25 25 25 29 13 16 18 22 29 29 32 32 16 19 22 25 32 32 35 35 19 22 25 32 38 38 38 44 9000 to 12 000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 11 13 14 19 29 32 32 35 13 16 19 22 32 35 35 38 16 19 22 25 35 38 38 41 19 22 25 32 41 41 48 48 12 000 to 15 000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 11 13 16 19 32 35 35 38 13 16 19 22 38 38 38 41 16 19 22 25 41 41 41 44 19 22 25 32 48 48 48 48 15 000 to 18 000, excl To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 13 16 16 22 44 44 44 44 16 19 19 25 48 48 48 51 19 22 22 29 48 48 48 57 22 25 29 32 57 57 57 64 18 000 and over To 1500, excl 1500 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 and over 14 19 19 25 51 51 51 51 19 22 22 29 54 54 54 60 22 25 25 32 57 57 57 64 25 29 32 35 70 70 70 76 A Permitted variations under specified width and length, 6 mm. Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 300 mm in width for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl, except for alloy steel up to 50 mm thick. B 43 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.4 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE CARBON AND HIGH STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS (Applies to Either Plates Produced from Coils or Plates Produced in Discrete Cut Lengths of Flat Product) Specified Width, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Width, mmA To 360, excl 360 to 430, excl 430 to 480, excl 480 to 530, excl 530 to 610, excl 610 to 660, excl 660 to 710, excl 710 to 890, excl 890 to 1270, excl 1270 to 1520, excl 1520 to 1650, excl 1650 to 1780, excl 1780 to 2030, excl 2030 and over 11 13 14 16 17 21 24 29 32 38 41 44 47 51 A No permitted variation under specified width. TABLE A1.5 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 380 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permitted Variations Over Specified WidthA for Thickness Given in Millimetres or Equivalent Masses Given in Kilograms per Square Metre, mm Over 50 to 250, Over 250 to 400, incl incl To 10, excl 10 to 16, excl 16 to 25, incl 25 to 50, incl Specified Width, mm To 78.50, excl 78.50 to 125.6, excl 125.6 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, incl Over 392.5 to 1962, incl Over 1962 to 3140, incl Over 200 to 500, excl 500 to 900, excl 900 and over 3 5 8 3 6 10 5 8 11 6 10 13 10 11 14 13 14 16 A Permitted variation under specified width, 3 mm. TABLE A1.6 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR PLATES 25 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Specified Diameters, mm To 800, excl 800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3300, excl 3300 and over A Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mmA To 10, excl 10 to 16, excl 16 to 25, incl 6 8 10 11 13 10 11 13 14 16 13 14 16 17 19 No permitted variation under specified diameter. 44 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE A1.7 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GASCUT CIRCULAR PLATES (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) TABLE A1.10 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GASCUT CIRCULAR PLATES (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mmA Specified Diameters, mm To 25, excl 25 to 50, excl To 800, excl 800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3300, excl 3300 and over 10 10 13 13 16 10 13 14 14 19 A Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Specified Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mmA 50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to 100, 150, 200, 400, excl excl excl incl 13 13 16 17 22 13 16 19 22 25 16 19 22 25 29 SA-6 /SA-6M 19 22 25 29 32 Specified Diameter, mm To 25, excl 25 to 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 400, incl To 800, excl 800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3300, incl 13 13 16 22 13 16 19 25 19 22 25 29 19 25 29 32 25 29 32 35 25 32 35 38 No permitted variations under specified diameter. A No permitted variations under specified diameter. TABLE A1.8 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) Specified Thickness, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Width and Length, mm To 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 400, excl 19 25 29 33 38 TABLE A1.11 PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL, AND ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES Note 1 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. Note 2 — These permitted variations shall be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. Specified Thickness, mm To 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 400, incl 13 16 19 22 25 Permitted Camber, mm To 750, incl Over 750 to 1500 Length in millimetres/300 Length in millimetres/250 A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. TABLE A1.9 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and Length, mmA Specified Width, mm TABLE A1.12 PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR SHEARED PLATES AND GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES, ALL THICKNESSES (Applies to Carbon Steel Only) Permitted camber, mm p length in millimetres/500 Note 1 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. A These permitted variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. 45 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.13 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Milimetres, mmA,B Specified Thickness, mm Specified Mass, kg/m2 To 900, excl To 6, excl 6 to 10, excl 10 to 12, excl 12 to 20, excl 20 to 25, excl 25 to 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 250, excl 250 to 300, excl 300 to 400, incl To 47.1, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl 392.5 to 785.0, excl 785.0 to 1178, excl 1178 to 1570, excl 1570 to 1962, excl 1962 to 2355, excl 2355 to 3140, incl 14 13 13 11 11 10 8 10 11 13 13 16 900 1200 to to 1200, 1500, excl excl 19 16 14 13 13 13 10 11 13 13 16 19 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and over 32 24 16 16 16 14 13 13 16 18 21 22 35 29 19 16 16 14 13 14 18 19 22 24 38 32 22 19 16 16 13 14 19 21 24 25 41 35 25 25 19 16 13 16 22 22 25 25 44 38 29 25 22 16 14 19 22 24 25 25 48 41 32 29 25 18 16 22 25 25 25 25 ... ... 48 38 35 29 22 22 25 25 25 25 ... ... 54 51 44 38 29 25 25 25 25 ... 24 19 16 14 14 13 11 13 13 16 19 21 Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. Note 2 — These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 415 MPa or comparable chemical composition or hardness. The limits in the table are increased 50% for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile strength or comparable chemical composition or hardness. Note 3 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. Note 4 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Note 5 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm for longer plates. B Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from the flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. 46 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.14 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY STEEL PLATES, HOT ROLLED OR THERMALLY TREATED Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Milimetres, mmA,B Specified Thickness, mm Specified Mass, kg/m2 To 900, excl To 6, excl 6 to 10, excl 10 to 12, excl 12 to 20, excl 20 to 25, excl 25 to 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 250, excl 250 to 300, excl 300 to 400, incl To 47.1, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl 392.5 to 785.0, excl 785.0 to 1178, excl 1178 to 1570, excl 1570 to 1962, excl 1962 to 2355, excl 2355 to 3140, incl 21 19 19 16 16 14 13 14 16 19 19 22 900 1200 to to 1200, 1500, excl excl 29 24 22 19 19 16 14 18 19 21 24 25 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and over 48 35 24 22 22 21 19 19 24 25 32 33 51 44 29 25 24 22 19 22 25 29 33 35 57 48 33 29 25 24 19 22 29 32 35 38 60 51 38 32 29 25 19 24 32 33 38 38 67 57 41 35 33 25 22 29 33 35 38 38 70 60 48 41 38 25 25 32 38 38 38 38 ... ... 70 57 51 41 32 32 38 38 38 38 ... ... 79 76 67 57 41 38 38 38 38 38 35 29 24 22 22 19 18 19 19 24 29 30 Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation shall not exceed 10 mm. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width. Note 2 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of such plates. Note 3 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Note 4 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. A Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and permitted variations from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm for longer plates. B Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. 47 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.15 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WAVINESS FOR PLATES Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface (from Table A1.13 or A1.14) mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 24 25 29 32 35 38 41 44 48 51 54 57 60 64 67 70 73 76 79 8 10 11 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 24 25 29 32 35 38 41 44 48 51 54 57 60 64 67 70 73 76 79 6 8 8 10 11 13 13 14 16 17 17 19 22 24 27 29 32 33 37 38 41 43 46 48 51 52 56 57 60 5 5 6 8 8 10 10 11 11 13 13 14 16 17 19 22 24 25 27 29 30 32 33 37 38 40 41 43 44 3 5 5 5 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 11 13 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 22 24 25 27 29 29 30 32 33 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 10 10 11 13 13 14 14 16 17 17 19 21 21 22 24 24 25 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 10 10 11 11 13 13 14 14 14 16 16 17 17 19 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 11 11 11 13 13 14 14 Permitted Variations in Waviness, mm, When Number of Waves in 4000 mm is Note 1 — Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of the plate from a plane parallel to the surface of the point of measurement and contiguous to the surface of the place at each of the two adjacent wave peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured in an increment of less than 4000 mm of length. The permitted variation in waviness is a function of the permitted variation from a flat surfaced as obtained from Table A1.13 or A1.14, whichever is applicable. Note 2 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when waviness is measured. 48 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.16 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR W, HP, S, M, C, AND MC SHAPES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm B, Flange Width A, Depth Shape Section Nominal Size, mm Over Theoretical Under Theoretical Over Theoretical Under Theoretical T + T ′A Flanges Out-ofSquareB Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Web Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Milimetres, mm E, Web off CenterC C, Maximum Depth at any Cross Section over Theoretical Depth 5 and Under Over 5 W and HP up to 310, incl over 310 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 6 8 5 5 6 6 ... ... ... ... S and M 75 to 180, incl over 180 to 360, incl over 360 to 610, incl 2 3 5 2 2 3 3 4 5 3 4 5 0.03 0.03 0.03 5 5 5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... C and MC 40 and under over 40 to 75, excl 75 to 180, incl over 180 to 360, incl over 360 1 2 3 3 5 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 4 5 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.2 0.4 ... ... ... 0.4 0.5 ... ... ... Note 1 — A is measured at center lines of web for S, M, W, and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is overall for C shapes under 75 mm. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web. Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. T + T ′ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 16 mm and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 0.05 mm/mm of depth. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation. B Permitted variation is per millimetre of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes. C Permitted variation of 8 mm max for sections over 634 kg/m. A 49 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.17 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR ANGLES (L SHAPES), BULB ANGLES, AND ZEES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm B, Flange Width, or Length of Leg A, Depth Section Nominal Size, mm Over Theoretical Under Theoretical Over Theoretical ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 1 2 3 3 5 Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Milimetres, mm T, Out-of-Square, per Milimetre of B 5 and Under Over 5 to 10 Over 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 0.026B 0.026B 0.026B 0.026B 0.026B 0.026B 0.2 0.2 0.3 ... ... ... 0.2 0.2 0.4 ... ... ... ... 0.3 0.4 ... ... ... Under Theoretical AnglesA (L shapes) 25 and under over 25 to 50, incl over 50 to 75, excl 75 to 100, incl over 100 to 150 incl over 150 Bulb angles (depth) 75 to 100, incl over 100 to 150, incl over 150 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 5 2 3 3 0.026B 0.026B 0.026B ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Zees 75 to 100, incl over 100 to 150, incl 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 0.026B 0.026B ... ... ... ... ... ... Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A B For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification. 0.026 mm/mm p 11⁄2°. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation. 50 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.18 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROLLED TEES Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm Nominal SizeA Over Under Over Under T, Out-ofSquare per Milimetre of B 30 and under Over 30 to 50, incl Over 50 to 75, excl 75 to 125, incl Over 125 to 180, incl 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 ... ... ... 0.03 0.03 A, DepthB B, WidthB Thickness of Flange Thickness of Stem E, Weboff-Center, max Stem Out-ofSquareC Over Under Over Under ... ... ... 2 3 1 2 2 ... ... 0.2 0.3 0.4 ... ... 0.2 0.3 0.4 ... ... 0.1 0.2 0.4 ... ... 0.5 0.5 0.5 ... ... Note 1 — * Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.” Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for Permitted variations. Measurements for both depth and width are overall. C Stem-out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point. B TABLE A1.19 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Metres, mm 1.5 to 3, excl 3 to 6, excl Over 9 to 12, incl 6 to 9, incl Over 12 to 15, incl Over 15 to 20, incl Over 20 m Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Under 75 75 and over 16 25 0 0 25 38 0 0 38 45 0 0 51 57 0 0 64 70 0 0 64 70 0 0 ... ... ... ... --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Nominal Size,A mm Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A Greatest cross-sectional dimension. TABLE A1.20 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN END OUT-OF-SQUARE FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Shapes S, M, C, and MC LA Bulb angles Rolled teesA Zees Permitted Variation 0.017 0.026 0.026 0.017 0.026 mm/mm mm/mm mm/mm mm/mm mm/mm of of of of of depth leg length or 11⁄2 deg depth or 11⁄2 deg flange or stem sum of both flange lengths A Permitted variations in ends out-of-square are determined on the longer members of the shape. 51 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A1.21 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES Variable Nominal Size,A mm Camber under 75 75 and over all Sweep A Permitted Variation, mm 4 ⴛ number of metres of total length 2 ⴛ number of metres of total length Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject to negotiations between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved. Greatest cross-sectional dimension. TABLE A1.22 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR W AND HP SHAPES Permitted Variations From Specified Length for Lengths Given in Metres, mmA,B 9 and Under W Shapes Beams 610 mm and under in nominal depth Beams over 610 mm in nominal depth and all columns Over 10 13 Over 9 Under 10 13 Over Under 10 plus 1 for each additional 1 m or fraction thereof 13 plus 1 for each additional 1 m or fraction thereof 10 13 A For HP shapes or W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the permitted variations in length are plus 125 and minus 0 mm. These permitted variations in length also apply to sheet piles B The permitted variations in end out-of-square for W and HP shapes shall be 0.016 mm per milimetre of depth, or per milimetre of flange width if the flang width is larger than the depth. The permitted variations shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation. 52 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A1.23 PERMITTED VARIATIONS FOR LENGTH AND END OUT-OF-SQUARE, MILLED SHAPES Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, mmA Milled Both EndsC Nominal Depth, mm 150 to 920 Length Length,Bm 2 to 21 Milled One EndC Over Under End Outof-Square 1 1 1 Over Under End Out-ofSquare (for Milled End) 6 6 1 Length A The permitted variations in length and end out-of-square are additive. Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature. C End out-of-square is measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The measured variation from true squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount. B --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A1.24 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR W AND HP SHAPES Permitted Variation in Straightness, mm 1 ⴛ number of metres of total lengthA Camber and sweep When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to depth are specified in the order for use as columns: Lengths of 14 mm and under Lengths over 14 m 1 ⴛ number of metres of total length, but not over 10 10 + [1 ⴛ (number of metres of total length − 14 m)] Sections with a flange width less than 150 mm, permitted variation for sweep p 2 mm ⴛ number of metres of total length. Applies only to: 200-mm deep sections — 46.1 kg/m and heavier, 250-mm deep sections — 73 kg/m and heavier, 310-mm deep sections — 97 kg/m and heavier, and 360-mm deep sections — 116 kg/m and heavier. For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer. A B 53 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A1.25 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR SPLIT TEES AND SPLIT ANGLES (L SHAPES)A Specified Depth, mm Permitted Variation over or under Specified Depth,B mm To 150, excl (beams and channels) 150 to 410, excl (beams and channels) 410 to 510, excl (beams and channels) 510 to 610, excl (beams) 610 and over (beams) 3 5 6 8 10 A The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are the same as those applicable to the section from which the tees or angles are split. B The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles include the permitted variations in depth for the beams or channels before splitting. Permitted variations in dimensions and straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which these tees or angles are cut, apply, except straightness p 2 mm ⴛ length in metres TABLE A1.26 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in milimetres, mm Permitted Variations from Specified Width, mm Specified Widths, mm Over 5 to 6, incl Over 6 to 12, incl Over 12 to 25, incl Over 25 to 50, incl Over 50 to 75 Over 75 Over Under To 25, incl Over 25 to 50, incl Over 50 to 100, incl Over 100 to 150, incl Over 150 to 200, incl 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.65 ... 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 ... ... 1.2 1.2 1.2 ... ... 1.2 1.2 1.6 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 A Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table there is no requirement. A Flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled bars in thickness 6 mm and under. 54 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE A1.27 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND ROUND-CORNERED SQUARES Permitted Variation Over or Under Specified Size Permitted Outof-Round or Out-ofSquare SectionA Specified Sizes, mm mm % mm % Up to 7.0, incl Over 7.0 to 11.0, incl Over 11.0 to 15.0, incl Over 15.0 to 19.0, incl Over 19.0 to 250, incl 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... 1B 0.20 0.22 0.27 0.30 ... ... ... ... ... 11⁄2B Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same transverse cross section. Out-of-square section is the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the same transverse cross section. B The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest tenth of a millimetre after calculation. TABLE A1.28 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR HEXAGONS Specified Sizes Between Opposite Sides, mm To 13 incl Over 13 to Over 25 to Over 40 to Over 50 to Over 65 to 25 40 50 65 80 incl incl incl incl incl Permitted Variations from Specified Size, mm Over Under 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.8 1.2 1.6 0.18 0.25 0.35 0.40 0.40 1.6 Out-ofHexagon Section, mmA 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.2 A Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance between any two opposite faces measured at the same transverse cross section. TABLE A1.29 PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR BARS Maximum Permitted Variation in Straightness, mmA 6 mm in any 1500 mm, or (length in millimetres/250)B A Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed. B Round to the nearest whole millimetre. 55 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.30 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR HOT-CUT STEEL BARSA Permitted Variations Over Specified Lengths Given in Metres, mm (No Variation Under) Specified Sizes of Flats, mm Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, and Hexagons, mm To 25, incl Over 25 to 50, incl Over 50 to 125, incl Over 125 to 250, incl Bar size sections Thickness Width 1.5 to 3, excl 3 to 6, excl 6 to 9, excl 9 to 12, excl 12 to 18, incl to 25, incl over 25 to 25, incl over 25 ... over 6 to 25, incl over 25 to 75, incl ... to 75, incl to 75, incl over 75 to 150, incl over 75 to 150, incl ... over 150 to 200, incl over 150 to 200, incl ... 15 15 15 25 50 20 30 15 20 25 25 40 65 30 45 25 35 40 40 45 70 45 50 40 45 50 50 60 75 90 90 50 60 65 65 70 85 100 100 65 B 40 65 45 70 60 75 70 85 Hot Sawing 50 to 125, incl Over 125 to 250, incl 25 and over ... 75 and over ... B Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. A B For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width and over 75 mm in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length. Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed. TABLE A1.31 PERMIITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR BARS RECUT BOTH ENDS AFTER STRAIGHTENINGA,B Permitted Variations Over Specified Length Given in Metres, mm (No Variation Under) Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, Widths of Flats and Maximum Dimensions of Other Sections, mm to 3.7, incl over 3.7 To 75, incl Over 75 to 150, incl Over 150 to 200, incl Rounds over 200 to 250, incl 6 8 11 14 8 11 14 18 A For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width, and over 75 mm in thickness, consult the manufacturer or the processor for permitted variations in length. B Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies. 56 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS A2. DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD SHAPE PROFILES A2.1 Listed herein are dimensions and weight [mass] of some standard shape profiles. The values stated in inch-pound units are independent of the values stated in SI units, and the values from the two systems are not to be combined in any way. Unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 57 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M Area A, in.2 98.7 85.8 77.2 67.9 174.4 147.8 126.7 117 109.4 107 97.5 95.3 87.4 81.3 73.3 63.3 58.4 W44 ⴛ 335 ⴛ 290 ⴛ 262 ⴛ 230 W40 ⴛ 593 ⴛ 503 ⴛ 431 ⴛ 397 ⴛ372 ⴛ 362 ⴛ 331 ⴛ324 ⴛ297 ⴛ 277 ⴛ 249 ⴛ 215 ⴛ 199 58 Not for Resale 42.99 42.05 41.26 40.95 40.63 40.55 40.79 40.16 39.84 39.69 39.38 38.98 38.67 44.02 43.62 43.31 42.91 Depth d, in. 16.690 16.417 16.220 16.12 16.063 16.02 12.165 15.91 15.825 15.830 15.750 15.750 15.750 15.945 15.827 15.748 15.748 Width bf, in. 3.230 2.756 2.362 2.20 2.047 2.01 2.126 1.81 1.650 1.575 1.420 1.220 1.065 1.772 1.575 1.417 1.220 Thickness tf, in.A Flange --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) d X 1.790 1.535 1.339 1.22 1.161 1.12 1.220 1.00 0.930 0.830 0.750 0.650 0.650 1.024 0.866 0.787 0.709 Web Thickness tw, in.A tf tw X W1000 ⴛ 883 X 748 ⴛ 642 ⴛ 591 ⴛ 554 ⴛ 539 ⴛ 494 ⴛ483 ⴛ 443 ⴛ 412 ⴛ 371 ⴛ 321 ⴛ 296 W1100 X 499 X 433 X 390 X 343 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) bf Y Y TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES 112 517 95 345 81 765 75 300 70 581 68 700 62 913 61 500 56 387 52 470 47 271 40 849 37 699 63 521 55 119 49 703 43 647 Area A, mm2 1 092 1 068 1 048 1 040 1 032 1 030 1 036 1 020 1 012 1 008 1 000 990 982 1 118 1 108 1 100 1 090 Depth d, mm 424 417 412 409 408 407 309 404 402 402 400 400 400 405 402 400 400 Width bf, mm 82.0 70.0 60.0 55.9 52.0 51.1 54.0 46.0 41.9 40.0 36.1 31.0 27.1 45.0 40.0 36.0 31.0 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 45.5 39.0 34.0 31.0 29.5 28.4 31.0 25.4 23.6 21.1 19.0 16.5 16.5 26.0 22.0 20.0 18.0 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Area A, in.2 115.3 95.9 81.9 77.6 68.9 62.0 53.7 49.1 43.8 234.6 191.0 154.7 129.0 115.6 105.4 96.4 88.3 82.4 76.5 75.4 72.1 68.1 67.6 61.8 57.0 53.6 44.2 47.0 44.2 39.7 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W40 ⴛ 392 ⴛ 327 ⴛ 278 ⴛ 264 ⴛ 235 ⴛ 211 ⴛ 183 ⴛ 167 ⴛ 149 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W36 ⴛ 798 ⴛ 650 ⴛ 527 ⴛ 439 ⴛ 393 ⴛ 359 ⴛ 328 ⴛ 300 ⴛ 280 ⴛ 260 ⴛ 256 ⴛ 245 ⴛ 232 ⴛ 230 W36 ⴛ 210 ⴛ 194 ⴛ 182 ⴛ 170 ⴛ 160 ⴛ 150 ⴛ 135 59 Not for Resale 36.69 36.49 36.33 35.85 36.01 35.85 35.55 41.97 40.47 39.21 38.26 37.80 37.40 37.09 36.74 36.52 36.26 37.43 36.08 37.12 35.90 41.57 40.79 40.16 40.00 39.69 39.37 38.98 38.59 38.20 Depth d, in. 12.180 12.15 12.075 11.975 12.000 11.975 11.950 17.990 17.575 17.220 16.965 16.830 16.730 16.630 16.655 16.595 16.550 12.215 16.510 12.120 16.470 12.362 12.13 11.969 11.930 11.890 11.810 11.810 11.810 11.810 1.360 1.260 1.180 0.940 1.020 0.940 0.790 4.290 3.540 2.910 2.440 2.200 2.010 1.850 1.680 1.570 1.440 1.730 1.350 1.570 1.260 2.520 2.13 1.811 1.730 1.575 1.415 1.200 1.025 1.830 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.830 0.765 0.725 0.625 0.650 0.625 0.600 2.380 1.970 1.610 1.360 1.220 1.120 1.020 0.945 0.885 0.840 0.960 0.800 0.870 0.760 1.417 1.18 1.024 0.960 0.830 0.750 0.650 0.650 0.630 Web Thickness tw, in.A W920 ⴛ 313 ⴛ 289 ⴛ 271 ⴛ 253 ⴛ 238 ⴛ 223 ⴛ 201 W920 ⴛ 1188 ⴛ967 ⴛ 784 ⴛ653 ⴛ 585 ⴛ 534 ⴛ 488 ⴛ 446 ⴛ 417 ⴛ 387 ⴛ 381 ⴛ 365 ⴛ345 ⴛ 342 W1000 ⴛ 584 ⴛ 486 ⴛ 415 ⴛ393 ⴛ 350 ⴛ 314 ⴛ 272 ⴛ 249 ⴛ 222 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 39 900 36 800 34 600 32 300 30 300 28 500 25 600 151 347 123 210 99 835 83 195 71 559 68 004 62 165 57 000 53 200 49 400 48 600 46 500 44 000 43 600 74 373 61 900 52 869 50 100 44 600 40 000 34 647 31 675 28 232 Area A, mm2 932 927 923 919 915 911 903 1 066 1 028 996 972 960 950 942 933 928 921 951 916 943 912 1 056 1 036 1 020 1 016 1 008 1 000 990 980 970 Depth d, mm 309 308 307 306 305 304 304 457 446 437 431 427 425 422 423 422 420 310 419 308 418 314 308 304 303 302 300 300 300 300 Width bf,mm 34.5 32.0 30.0 27.9 25.9 23.9 20.1 109.0 89.9 73.9 62.0 55.9 51.1 47.0 42.7 39.9 36.6 43.3 34.3 39.9 32.0 64.0 54.1 46.0 43.9 40.0 35.9 31.0 26.0 21.1 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 21.1 19.4 18.4 17.3 16.5 15.9 15.2 60.5 50.0 40.9 34.5 31.0 28.4 25.9 24.0 22.5 21.3 24.4 20.3 22.1 19.3 36.0 30.0 26.0 24.4 21.1 19.1 16.5 16.5 16.0 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Area A, in.2 114 104.1 93.5 85.6 77.4 70.9 65.0 59.1 49.5 44.7 41.6 38.3 34.7 115.0 104.8 95.7 85.7 76.7 69.0 62.0 56.1 50.8 43.5 38.9 36.5 34.2 31.7 29.1 26.4 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W33 ⴛ 387 ⴛ 354 ⴛ 318 ⴛ 291 ⴛ 263 ⴛ 241 ⴛ 221 ⴛ 201 ⴛ 169 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W33 ⴛ 152 ⴛ 141 ⴛ 130 ⴛ 118 W30 ⴛ 391 ⴛ 357 ⴛ 326 ⴛ 292 ⴛ 261 ⴛ 235 ⴛ 211 ⴛ 191 ⴛ 173 ⴛ 148 W30 ⴛ 132 ⴛ 124 ⴛ 116 ⴛ 108 ⴛ 99 ⴛ 90 60 Not for Resale 30.31 30.17 30.01 29.83 29.65 29.53 33.19 32.80 32.40 32.01 31.61 31.30 30.94 30.68 30.44 30.67 33.49 33.30 33.09 32.86 35.95 35.55 35.16 34.84 34.53 34.18 33.93 33.68 33.82 Depth d, in. 10.545 10.515 10.495 10.475 10.450 10.400 15.590 15.470 15.370 15.255 15.155 15.055 15.105 15.040 14.985 10.480 11.565 11.535 11.510 11.480 16.20 16.100 15.985 15.905 15.805 15.860 15.805 15.745 11.500 1.000 0.930 0.850 0.760 0.670 0.610 2.440 2.240 2.050 1.850 1.650 1.500 1.315 1.185 1.065 1.180 1.055 0.960 0.855 0.740 2.28 2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.400 1.275 1.150 1.220 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.615 0.585 0.565 0.545 0.520 0.470 1.360 1.240 1.140 1.020 0.930 0.830 0.755 0.710 0.655 0.650 0.635 0.605 0.580 0.550 1.26 1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.830 0.775 0.715 0.670 Web Thickness tw, in.A W760 ⴛ 196 ⴛ 185 ⴛ 173 ⴛ 161 ⴛ 147 ⴛ 134 W760 ⴛ 582 ⴛ 531 ⴛ 484 ⴛ 434 ⴛ 389 ⴛ 350 ⴛ 314 ⴛ 284 ⴛ 257 ⴛ 220 W840 ⴛ 226 ⴛ 210 ⴛ 193 ⴛ 176 W840 ⴛ 576 ⴛ 527 ⴛ 473 ⴛ 433 ⴛ 392 ⴛ 359 ⴛ 329 ⴛ 299 ⴛ 251 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 25 100 23 500 22 100 20 500 18 800 17 041 74 171 67 617 61 718 55 293 49 499 44 541 40 000 36 200 32 800 28 100 28 800 26 800 24 700 22 400 73 500 67 173 60 316 55 218 49 915 45 700 41 900 38 100 31 900 Area A, mm2 770 766 762 758 753 750 843 833 823 813 803 795 786 779 773 779 851 846 840 835 913 903 893 885 877 868 862 855 859 Depth d, mm 268 267 267 266 265 264 396 393 390 387 385 382 384 382 381 266 294 293 292 292 411 409 406 404 401 403 401 400 292 Width bf,mm 25.4 23.6 21.6 19.3 17.0 15.5 62.0 56.9 52.1 47.0 41.9 38.1 33.4 30.1 27.1 30.0 26.8 24.4 21.7 18.8 57.9 53.1 48.0 43.9 39.9 35.6 32.4 29.2 31.0 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 15.6 14.9 14.4 13.8 13.2 11.9 34.5 31.5 29.0 25.9 23.6 21.1 19.7 18.0 16.6 16.5 16.1 15.4 14.7 14.0 32.0 29.5 26.4 24.4 22.1 21.1 19.7 18.2 17.0 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Area A, in.2 158.4 108.1 98.7 90.2 82.6 75.7 69.1 57.0 52.3 47.4 42.9 63.8 37.8 33.5 30.0 27.7 24.8 108 98.4 89.8 82.0 73.5 67.2 60.7 56.3 51.7 47.7 43.0 38.5 34.4 30.6 30.3 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W27 ⴛ 539 ⴛ 368 ⴛ 336 ⴛ 307 ⴛ 281 ⴛ 258 ⴛ 235 ⴛ 194 ⴛ 178 ⴛ 161 ⴛ 146 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W27 ⴛ 217 ⴛ129 W27 ⴛ 114 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 94 ⴛ 84 W24 ⴛ 370 ⴛ 335 ⴛ 306 ⴛ 279 ⴛ 250 ⴛ 229 ⴛ 207 ⴛ 192 ⴛ 176 ⴛ 162 ⴛ 146 ⴛ 131 ⴛ 117 ⴛ 104 ⴛ 103 61 Not for Resale 27.99 27.52 27.13 26.73 26.34 26.02 25.71 25.47 25.24 25.00 24.74 24.48 24.26 24.06 24.53 27.29 27.09 26.92 26.71 28.43 27.63 32.52 30.39 30.00 29.61 29.29 28.98 28.66 28.11 27.81 27.59 27.38 Depth d, in. 13.66 13.520 13.405 13.305 13.185 13.110 13.010 12.950 12.890 12.955 12.900 12.855 12.800 12.750 9.000 10.070 10.015 9.990 9.960 14.115 10.010 15.255 14.665 14.55 14.445 14.35 14.270 14.190 14.035 14.085 14.020 13.965 2.72 2.480 2.28 2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.460 1.340 1.220 1.090 0.960 0.850 0.750 0.980 0.930 0.830 0.745 0.640 1.500 1.100 3.540 2.480 2.28 2.090 1.93 1.770 1.610 1.340 1.190 1.080 0.975 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 1.52 1.380 1.26 1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.810 0.750 0.705 0.650 0.605 0.550 0.500 0.550 0.570 0.515 0.490 0.460 0.830 0.610 1.970 1.380 1.26 1.160 1.06 0.980 0.910 0.750 0.725 0.660 0.605 Web Thickness tw, in.A W610 ⴛ 551 ⴛ 498 ⴛ 455 ⴛ 415 ⴛ 372 ⴛ 341 ⴛ 307 ⴛ 285 ⴛ 262 ⴛ 241 ⴛ 217 ⴛ 195 ⴛ 174 ⴛ 155 W610 ⴛ 153 W690 ⴛ 170 ⴛ 152 ⴛ 140 ⴛ 125 W690 ⴛ 323 ⴛ 192 W690 ⴛ 802 ⴛ 548 ⴛ 500 ⴛ457 ⴛ 419 ⴛ 384 ⴛ 350 ⴛ 289 ⴛ 265 ⴛ 240 ⴛ 217 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 70 211 63 495 57 859 52 902 47 437 43 383 39 169 36 125 33 348 30 800 27 700 24 800 22 200 19 700 19 600 21 600 19 400 17 900 16 000 41 100 24 400 102 208 69 762 63 700 58 180 53 300 48 869 44 608 36 765 33 700 30 600 27 700 Area A, mm2 711 699 689 679 669 661 653 647 641 635 628 622 616 611 623 693 688 684 678 722 702 826 772 762 752 744 736 728 714 706 701 695 Depth d, mm 347 343 340 338 335 333 330 329 327 329 328 327 325 324 229 256 254 254 253 359 254 387 372 369 367 364 362 360 356 358 356 355 Width bf,mm 69.1 63.0 57.9 53.1 48.0 43.9 39.9 37.1 34.0 31.0 27.7 24.4 21.6 19.0 24.9 23.6 21.1 18.9 16.3 38.1 27.9 89.9 63.0 57.9 53.1 49.0 45.0 40.9 34.0 30.2 27.4 24.8 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 38.6 35.1 32.0 29.5 26.4 24.4 22.1 20.6 19.0 17.1 16.5 15.4 14.0 12.7 14.0 14.5 13.1 12.4 11.7 21.1 15.5 50.0 35.1 32.0 29.5 26.9 24.9 23.1 19.0 18.4 16.8 15.4 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Area A, in.2 27.7 24.7 22.4 20.1 18.2 16.2 59.2 53.7 48.9 43.2 38.8 35.9 32.7 29.8 27.3 24.3 21.5 20.0 18.3 16.2 14.1 16.7 14.7 13.0 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W24 ⴛ 94 ⴛ 84 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 68 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W24 ⴛ 62 ⴛ 55 W21 ⴛ 201 ⴛ 182 ⴛ 166 ⴛ 147 ⴛ 132 ⴛ 122 ⴛ 111 ⴛ 101 W21 ⴛ 93 ⴛ 83 ⴛ 73 ⴛ 68 ⴛ 62 ⴛ 55 ⴛ 48 W21 ⴛ 57 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 44 Not for Resale 21.06 20.83 20.66 21.62 21.43 21.24 21.13 20.99 20.80 20.62 23.03 22.72 22.48 22.06 21.83 21.68 21.51 21.36 23.74 23.57 24.31 24.10 23.92 23.73 Depth d, in. 6.555 6.530 6.500 8.420 8.355 8.295 8.270 8.240 8.220 8.140 12.575 12.500 12.420 12.510 12.440 12.390 12.340 12.290 7.040 7.005 9.065 9.020 8.990 8.965 0.650 0.535 0.450 0.930 0.835 0.740 0.685 0.615 0.522 0.430 1.630 1.480 1.360 1.150 1.035 0.960 0.875 0.800 0.590 0.505 0.875 0.770 0.680 0.585 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.405 0.380 0.350 0.580 0.515 0.455 0.430 0.400 0.375 0.350 0.910 0.830 0.750 0.720 0.650 0.600 0.550 0.500 0.430 0.395 0.515 0.470 0.440 0.415 Web Thickness tw, in.A 17 600 15 700 13 900 12 900 11 800 10 500 9 180 10 800 9 480 8 390 W530 ⴛ 85 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 66 38 222 34 620 31 524 27 900 25 000 23 200 21 100 19 200 11 700 10 500 17 900 15 900 14 500 13 000 Area A, mm2 W530 ⴛ 138 ⴛ 123 ⴛ 109 ⴛ 101 ⴛ 92 ⴛ 82 ⴛ 72 ⴛ 300 ⴛ 272 ⴛ 248 ⴛ 219 ⴛ 196 ⴛ 182 ⴛ 165 ⴛ 150 W610 ⴛ 92 ⴛ 82 W610 ⴛ 140 ⴛ 125 ⴛ 113 ⴛ 101 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 535 529 525 549 544 539 537 533 528 524 585 577 571 560 554 551 546 543 603 599 617 612 608 603 Depth d, mm 166 166 165 214 212 211 210 209 209 207 319 317 315 318 316 315 313 312 179 178 230 229 228 228 Width bf,mm 16.5 13.6 11.4 23.6 21.2 18.8 17.4 15.6 13.3 10.9 41.4 37.6 34.5 29.2 26.3 24.4 22.2 20.3 15.0 12.8 22.2 19.6 17.3 14.9 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 10.3 9.7 8.9 14.7 13.1 11.6 10.9 10.2 9.00 9.00 23.1 21.1 19.0 18.3 16.5 15.2 14.0 12.7 10.9 10.0 13.1 11.9 11.2 10.5 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II 62 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 63 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale 16.8 14.7 13.3 11.8 10.6 W16 ⴛ 57 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 45 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 36 9.12 7.68 29.4 26.2 22.6 19.7 W16 ⴛ 100 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 77 ⴛ 67 W16 ⴛ 31 ⴛ 26 13.5 11.8 10.3 51.3 46.3 42.1 38.2 35.1 31.1 28.5 25.3 22.3 20.8 19.1 17.6 16.2 14.7 W18 ⴛ 175 ⴛ 158 ⴛ 143 ⴛ 130 ⴛ 119 ⴛ 106 ⴛ 97 ⴛ 86 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 71 ⴛ 65 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 55 ⴛ 50 W18 ⴛ 46 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 35 Area A, in.2 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) 15.88 15.69 16.43 16.26 16.13 16.01 15.86 16.97 16.75 16.52 16.33 18.06 17.90 17.70 20.04 19.72 19.49 19.25 18.97 18.73 18.59 18.39 18.21 18.47 18.35 18.24 18.11 17.99 Depth d, in. 5.525 5.500 7.120 7.070 7.035 6.995 6.985 10.425 10.365 10.295 10.235 6.060 6.015 6.000 11.375 11.300 11.220 11.160 11.265 11.200 11.145 11.090 11.035 7.635 7.590 7.555 7.530 7.495 0.440 0.345 0.715 0.630 0.565 0.505 0.430 0.985 0.875 0.760 0.665 0.605 0.525 0.425 1.590 1.440 1.320 1.200 1.060 0.940 0.870 0.770 0.680 0.810 0.750 0.695 0.630 0.570 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.275 0.250 0.430 0.380 0.345 0.305 0.295 0.585 0.525 0.455 0.395 0.360 0.315 0.300 0.890 0.810 0.730 0.670 0.655 0.590 0.535 0.480 0.425 0.495 0.450 0.415 0.390 0.355 Web Thickness tw, in.A 10 800 9 480 8 580 7 610 6 840 5 880 4 950 W410 ⴛ 46.1 ⴛ 38.8 19 000 16 900 14 600 12 700 8 710 7 610 6 650 33 120 29 899 27 148 24 666 22 600 20 100 18 400 16 300 14 400 13 400 12 300 11 400 10 500 9 480 Area A, mm2 W410 ⴛ 85 ⴛ 75 ⴛ 67 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 53 W410 ⴛ 149 ⴛ 132 ⴛ 114 ⴛ 100 W460 ⴛ 68 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 52 W460 ⴛ 260 ⴛ 235 ⴛ 213 ⴛ193 ⴛ 177 ⴛ 158 ⴛ 144 ⴛ 128 ⴛ 113 ⴛ106 ⴛ 97 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 82 ⴛ 74 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 403 399 417 413 410 407 403 431 425 420 415 459 455 450 509 501 495 489 482 476 472 467 463 469 466 463 460 457 Depth d, mm 140 140 181 180 179 178 177 265 263 261 260 154 153 152 289 287 285 283 286 284 283 282 280 194 193 192 191 190 Width bf,mm 11.2 8.8 18.2 16.0 14.4 12.8 10.9 25.0 22.2 19.3 16.9 15.4 13.3 10.8 40.4 36.6 33.5 30.5 26.9 23.9 22.1 19.6 17.3 20.6 19.0 17.7 16.0 14.5 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 7.0 6.4 10.9 9.7 8.8 7.7 7.5 14.9 13.3 11.6 10.0 9.1 8.0 7.6 22.6 20.6 18.5 17.0 16.6 15.0 13.6 12.2 10.8 12.6 11.4 10.5 9.9 9.0 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Area A, in.2 237.4 215.0 196.0 178.0 162.0 147.0 134.0 125.0 117.0 109.0 101.0 91.4 83.3 75.6 68.5 62.0 56.8 51.8 46.7 42.7 38.8 35.3 32.0 29.1 26.5 24.1 21.8 20.0 17.9 15.6 14.1 12.6 11.2 10.0 8.85 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W14 ⴛ 808 ⴛ 730 ⴛ 665 ⴛ 605 ⴛ 550 ⴛ 500 ⴛ 455 ⴛ 426 ⴛ 398 ⴛ 370 ⴛ 342 ⴛ 311 ⴛ 283 ⴛ 257 ⴛ 233 ⴛ 211 ⴛ 193 ⴛ 176 ⴛ 159 ⴛ 145 W14ⴛ ⴛ 132 ⴛ 120 ⴛ 109 ⴛ 99 ⴛ 90 ⴛ 82 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 68 ⴛ 61 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W14 ⴛ 53 ⴛ 48 ⴛ 43 64 Not for Resale W14 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 34 ⴛ 30 14.10 13.98 13.84 13.92 13.79 13.66 14.66 14.48 14.32 14.16 14.02 14.31 14.17 14.04 13.89 22.84 22.42 21.64 20.92 20.24 19.60 19.02 18.67 18.29 17.92 17.54 17.12 16.74 16.38 16.04 15.72 15.48 15.22 14.98 14.78 Depth d, in. 6.770 6.745 6.730 8.060 8.030 7.995 14.725 14.670 14.605 14.565 14.520 10.130 10.070 10.035 9.995 18.560 17.890 17.650 17.415 17.200 17.010 16.835 16.695 16.590 16.475 16.360 16.230 16.110 15.995 15.890 15.800 15.710 15.650 15.565 15.500 Width bf, in. 0.515 0.455 0.385 0.660 0.595 0.530 1.030 0.940 0.860 0.780 0.710 0.855 0.785 0.720 0.645 5.120 4.910 4.520 4.160 3.820 3.500 3.210 3.035 2.845 2.660 2.470 2.260 2.070 1.890 1.720 1.560 1.440 1.310 1.190 1.090 Thickness tf, in.A Flange 0.310 0.285 0.270 0.370 0.340 0.305 0.645 0.590 0.525 0.485 0.440 0.510 0.450 0.415 0.375 3.740 3.070 2.830 2.595 2.380 2.190 2.015 1.875 1.770 1.655 1.540 1.410 1.290 1.175 1.070 0.980 0.890 0.830 0.745 0.680 Web Thickness tw, in.A W360ⴛ 57.8 ⴛ 51 ⴛ 44 W360 ⴛ 79 ⴛ 72 ⴛ 64 W360 ⴛ 196 ⴛ 179 ⴛ 162 ⴛ 147 ⴛ 134 ⴛ 122 ⴛ 110 ⴛ 101 ⴛ 91 W360 ⴛ 1202 ⴛ 1086 ⴛ 990 ⴛ 900 ⴛ 818 ⴛ 744 ⴛ 677 ⴛ 634 ⴛ 592 ⴛ 551 ⴛ 509 ⴛ 463 ⴛ 421 ⴛ 382 ⴛ 347 ⴛ 314 ⴛ 287 ⴛ 262 ⴛ 237 ⴛ 216 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 7 230 6 450 5 710 10 100 9 100 8 130 25 000 22 800 20 600 18 800 17 100 15 500 14 100 12 900 11 500 153 000 139 000 126 000 115 000 105 000 94 800 86 500 80 600 75 500 70 300 65 200 59 000 53 700 48 800 44 200 40 000 36 600 33 400 30 100 27 500 Area A, mm2 358 355 352 354 350 347 372 368 364 360 356 363 360 357 353 580 569 550 531 514 498 483 474 465 455 446 435 425 416 407 399 393 387 380 375 Depth d, mm 172 171 171 205 204 203 374 373 371 370 369 257 256 255 254 471 454 448 442 437 432 428 424 421 418 416 412 409 406 404 401 399 398 395 394 Width bf,mm 13.1 11.6 9.8 16.8 15.1 13.5 26.2 23.9 21.8 19.8 18.0 21.7 19.9 18.3 16.4 130.0 125.0 115.0 106.0 97.0 88.9 81.5 77.1 72.3 67.6 62.7 57.4 52.6 48.0 43.7 39.6 36.6 33.3 30.2 27.7 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 7.9 7.2 6.9 9.4 8.6 7.7 16.4 15.0 13.3 12.3 11.2 13.0 11.4 10.5 9.5 95.0 78.0 71.9 65.9 60.5 55.6 51.2 47.6 45.0 42.0 39.1 35.8 32.8 29.8 27.2 24.9 22.6 21.1 18.9 17.3 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 98.8 89.6 81.9 74.1 67.7 61.8 55.8 50.0 44.7 39.9 35.3 31.2 28.2 25.6 23.2 21.1 19.1 17.0 15.6 14.7 13.2 11.8 10.3 8.79 7.65 6.48 5.57 4.71 4.16 W12 ⴛ 58 ⴛ 53 W12 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 45 ⴛ 40 W12 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 26 W12 ⴛ 22 ⴛ 19 ⴛ 16 ⴛ 14 7.69 6.49 Area A, in.2 W12 ⴛ 336 ⴛ 305 ⴛ 279 ⴛ 252 ⴛ 230 ⴛ 210 ⴛ 190 ⴛ 170 ⴛ 152 ⴛ 136 ⴛ 120 ⴛ 106 ⴛ 96 ⴛ 87 ⴛ 79 ⴛ 72 ⴛ 65 W14 ⴛ 26 ⴛ 22 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 65 Not for Resale 12.31 12.16 11.99 11.91 12.50 12.34 12.22 12.19 12.06 11.94 12.19 12.06 16.82 16.32 15.85 15.41 15.05 14.71 14.38 14.03 13.71 13.41 13.12 12.89 12.71 12.53 12.38 12.25 12.12 13.91 13.74 Depth d, in. 4.030 4.005 3.990 3.970 6.560 6.520 6.490 8.080 8.045 8.005 10.010 9.995 13.385 13.235 13.140 13.005 12.895 12.790 12.670 12.570 12.480 12.400 12.320 12.220 12.160 12.125 12.080 12.040 12.000 5.025 5.000 0.425 0.350 0.265 0.225 0.520 0.440 0.380 0.640 0.575 0.515 0.640 0.575 2.955 2.705 2.470 2.250 2.070 1.900 1.735 1.560 1.400 1.250 1.105 0.990 0.900 0.810 0.735 0.670 0.605 0.420 0.335 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.260 0.235 0.220 0.200 0.300 0.260 0.230 0.370 0.335 0.295 0.360 0.345 1.775 1.625 1.530 1.395 1.285 1.180 1.060 0.960 0.870 0.790 0.710 0.610 0.550 0.515 0.470 0.430 0.390 0.255 0.230 Web Thickness tw, in.A 11 000 10 100 9 480 8 520 7 610 6 650 5 670 4 940 4 180 3 590 3 040 2 680 W310 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 67 ⴛ 60 W310 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 44.5 ⴛ 38.7 W310 ⴛ 32.7 ⴛ 28.3 ⴛ 23.8 ⴛ 21.0 63 700 57 800 52 800 47 800 43 700 39 900 36 000 32 300 28 800 25 700 22 800 20 100 18 200 16 500 15 000 13 600 12 300 4 960 4 190 Area A, mm2 W310 ⴛ 86 ⴛ 79 W310 ⴛ 500 ⴛ 454 ⴛ 415 ⴛ 375 ⴛ 342 ⴛ 313 ⴛ 283 ⴛ 253 ⴛ 226 ⴛ 202 ⴛ 179 ⴛ 158 ⴛ 143 ⴛ 129 ⴛ 117 ⴛ 107 ⴛ 97 W360 ⴛ 39.0 ⴛ 32.9 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 313 309 305 303 317 313 310 310 306 303 310 306 427 415 403 391 382 374 365 356 348 341 333 327 323 318 314 311 308 353 349 Depth d, mm 102 102 101 101 167 166 165 205 204 203 254 254 340 336 334 330 328 325 322 319 317 315 313 310 309 308 307 306 305 128 127 Width bf,mm 10.8 8.9 6.7 5.7 13.2 11.2 9.7 16.3 14.6 13.1 16.3 14.6 75.1 68.7 62.7 57.2 52.6 48.3 44.1 39.6 35.6 31.8 28.1 25.1 22.9 20.6 18.7 17.0 15.4 10.7 8.5 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 6.6 6.0 5.6 5.1 7.6 6.6 5.8 9.4 8.5 7.5 9.1 8.8 45.1 41.3 38.9 35.4 32.6 30.0 26.9 24.4 22.1 20.1 18.0 15.5 14.0 13.1 11.9 10.9 9.9 6.5 5.8 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Area A, in.2 32.9 29.4 25.9 22.6 20.0 17.6 15.8 14.4 13.3 11.5 9.71 8.84 7.61 6.49 5.62 4.99 4.41 3.54 19.7 17.1 14.1 11.7 10.3 9.13 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) W10 ⴛ 112 ⴛ 100 ⴛ 88 ⴛ 77 ⴛ 68 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 54 ⴛ 49 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS W10 ⴛ 45 ⴛ 39 ⴛ 33 W10 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 26 ⴛ 22 W10 ⴛ 19 ⴛ 17 ⴛ 15 ⴛ 12 W8 ⴛ 67 ⴛ 58 ⴛ 48 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 31 66 Not for Resale 9.00 8.75 8.50 8.25 8.12 8.00 10.24 10.11 9.99 9.87 10.47 10.33 10.17 10.10 9.92 9.73 11.36 11.10 10.84 10.60 10.40 10.22 10.09 9.98 Depth d, in. 8.280 8.220 8.110 8.070 8.020 7.995 4.020 4.010 4.000 3.960 5.810 5.770 5.750 8.020 7.985 7.960 10.415 10.340 10.265 10.190 10.130 10.080 10.030 10.000 0.935 0.810 0.685 0.560 0.495 0.435 0.395 0.330 0.270 0.210 0.510 0.440 0.360 0.620 0.530 0.435 1.250 1.120 0.990 0.870 0.770 0.680 0.615 0.560 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.570 0.510 0.400 0.360 0.310 0.285 0.250 0.240 0.230 0.190 0.300 0.260 0.240 0.350 0.315 0.290 0.755 0.680 0.605 0.530 0.470 0.420 0.370 0.340 Web Thickness tw, in.A 3 630 3 220 2 850 2 280 W250 ⴛ 28.4 ⴛ 25.3 ⴛ 22.3 ⴛ 17.9 12 700 11 000 9 100 7 550 6 650 5 890 5 700 4 910 4 190 W250 ⴛ 44.8 ⴛ 38.5 ⴛ 32.7 W200 ⴛ 100 ⴛ 86 ⴛ 71 ⴛ 59 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 46.1 8 580 7 420 6 260 21 200 19 000 16 700 14 600 12 900 11 400 10 200 9 290 Area A, mm2 W250 ⴛ 67 ⴛ 58 ⴛ 49.1 W250 ⴛ 167 ⴛ 149 ⴛ 131 ⴛ 115 ⴛ 101 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 80 ⴛ 73 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 229 222 216 210 206 203 260 257 254 251 266 262 258 257 252 247 289 282 275 269 264 260 256 253 Depth d, mm 210 209 206 205 204 203 102 102 102 101 148 147 146 204 203 202 265 263 261 259 257 256 255 254 Width bf,mm 23.7 20.6 17.4 14.2 12.6 11.0 10.0 8.4 6.9 5.3 13.0 11.2 9.1 15.7 13.5 11.0 31.8 28.4 25.1 22.1 19.6 17.3 15.6 14.2 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 13.0 10.2 9.1 7.9 7.2 6.4 6.1 5.8 4.8 7.6 6.6 6.1 8.9 8.0 7.4 19.2 17.3 15.4 13.5 11.9 10.7 9.4 8.6 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS A 67 Not for Resale 6.16 5.26 4.44 3.84 2.96 7.34 5.87 4.43 4.74 3.55 2.68 2.52 5.54 4.68 3.83 W8 ⴛ 21 ⴛ 18 W8 ⴛ 15 ⴛ 13 ⴛ 10 W6 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 20 ⴛ 15 W6 ⴛ 16 ⴛ 12 ⴛ9 ⴛ 8.5 W5 ⴛ 19 ⴛ 16 W4 ⴛ 13 4.16 5.15 5.01 6.28 6.03 5.90 5.83 6.38 6.20 5.99 8.11 7.99 7.89 8.28 8.14 8.06 7.93 Depth d, in. 4.060 5.030 5.000 4.030 4.000 3.940 3.940 6.080 6.020 5.990 4.015 4.000 3.940 5.270 5.250 6.535 6.495 0.345 0.430 0.360 0.405 0.280 0.215 0.194 0.455 0.365 0.260 0.315 0.255 0.205 0.400 0.330 0.465 0.400 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.280 0.270 0.240 0.260 0.230 0.170 0.170 0.320 0.260 0.230 0.245 0.230 0.170 0.250 0.230 0.285 0.245 Web Thickness tw, in.A W100 ⴛ 19.3 W130 ⴛ 28.1 ⴛ 23.8 W150 ⴛ 24.0 ⴛ 18.0 ⴛ 13.5 ⴛ 13 W150 ⴛ 37.1 ⴛ 29.8 ⴛ 22.5 W200 ⴛ 22.5 ⴛ 19.3 ⴛ 15.0 W200 ⴛ 31.3 ⴛ 26.6 W200 ⴛ 41.7 ⴛ 35.9 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) 2 470 3 590 3 040 3 060 2 290 1 730 1 630 4 740 3 790 2 860 2 860 2 480 1 910 3 970 3 390 5 320 4 570 Area A, mm2 106 131 127 160 153 150 148 162 157 152 206 203 200 210 207 205 201 Depth d, mm Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed. 8.25 7.08 Area A, in.2 W8 ⴛ 28 ⴛ 24 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) TABLE A2.1 “W” SHAPES (CONT’D) 103 128 127 102 102 100 100 154 153 152 102 102 100 134 133 166 165 Width bf,mm 8.8 10.9 9.1 10.3 7.1 5.5 4.9 11.6 9.3 6.6 8.0 6.5 5.2 10.2 8.4 11.8 10.2 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 7.1 6.9 6.1 6.6 5.8 4.3 4.3 8.1 6.6 5.8 6.2 5.8 4.3 6.4 5.8 7.2 6.2 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Area A, in.2 35.6 31.2 29.3 26.5 23.5 28.2 25.3 22.0 19.4 20.6 16.1 14.7 12.6 14.7 12.0 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) S 24 ⴛ 121 ⴛ 106 S 24 ⴛ 100 ⴛ 90 ⴛ 80 S 20 ⴛ 96 ⴛ 86 68 Not for Resale S 20 ⴛ 75 ⴛ 66 S 18 ⴛ 70 ⴛ 54.7 S 15 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 42.9 S 12 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 40.8 12.00 12.00 15.00 15.00 18.00 18.00 20.00 20.00 20.30 20.30 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.50 24.50 Depth d, in. 5.477 5.252 5.640 5.501 6.251 6.001 6.385 6.255 7.200 7.060 7.245 7.125 7.000 8.050 7.870 0.659 0.659 0.622 0.622 0.691 0.691 0.795 0.795 0.920 0.920 0.870 0.870 0.870 1.090 1.090 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. X 0.687 0.462 0.550 0.411 0.711 0.461 0.635 0.505 0.800 0.660 0.745 0.625 0.500 0.800 0.620 Web Thickness tw, in.A d tf tw X S 310 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 60.7 S 380 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 64 S 460 ⴛ 104 ⴛ 81.4 S 510 ⴛ 112 ⴛ 98.2 9 480 7 740 9 480 8 130 13 300 10 400 14 200 12 500 18 200 16 300 18 900 17 100 15 200 S 610 ⴛ 149 ⴛ 134 ⴛ 119 S 510 ⴛ 143 ⴛ 128 23 000 20 100 Area A, mm2 S 610 ⴛ 180 ⴛ 158 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) bf Y Y TABLE A2.2 “S” SHAPES 305 305 381 381 457 457 508 508 516 516 610 610 610 622 622 Depth d, mm 139 133 143 140 159 152 162 159 183 179 184 181 178 204 200 16.7 16.7 15.8 15.8 17.6 17.6 20.2 20.2 23.4 23.4 22.1 22.1 22.1 27.7 27.7 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 17.4 11.7 14.0 10.4 18.1 11.7 16.1 12.8 20.3 16.8 18.9 15.9 12.7 20.3 15.7 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 69 Not for Resale 2.79 2.26 2.21 1.67 S 4 ⴛ 9.5 ⴛ 7.7 S 3 ⴛ 7.5 ⴛ 5.7 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 Depth d, in. 2.509 2.330 2.796 2.663 3.004 3.565 3.332 4.171 4.001 4.944 4.661 5.078 5.000 0.260 0.260 0.293 0.293 0.326 0.359 0.359 0.425 0.425 0.491 0.491 0.544 0.544 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.349 0.170 0.326 0.193 0.214 0.465 0.232 0.441 0.271 0.594 0.311 0.428 0.350 Web Thickness tw, in.A 1 800 1 450 1 430 1 080 S 75 ⴛ 11.2 ⴛ 8.5 1 880 S 130 ⴛ 15 S 100 ⴛ 14.1 ⴛ 11.5 3 270 2 360 S 150 ⴛ 25.7 ⴛ 18.6 4 370 3 480 6 650 4 810 S 250 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 37.8 S 200 ⴛ 34 ⴛ 27.4 6 650 6 030 Area A, mm2 S 310 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 47.3 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) 76 76 102 102 127 152 152 203 203 254 254 305 305 Depth d, mm Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed. 2.94 S 5 ⴛ 10 A 5.07 3.67 S 6 ⴛ 17.25 ⴛ 12.5 10.3 7.46 S 10 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 25.4 6.77 5.41 10.3 9.35 S 12 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 31.8 S 8 ⴛ 23 ⴛ 18.4 Area A, in.2 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) TABLE A2.2 “S” SHAPES (CONT’D) 64 59 71 68 76 91 85 106 102 126 118 129 127 6.6 6.6 7.4 7.4 8.3 9.1 9.1 10.8 10.8 12.5 12.5 13.8 13.8 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 8.9 4.3 8.3 4.9 5.4 11.8 5.9 11.2 6.9 15.1 7.9 10.9 8.9 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 70 Not for Resale A 12 ⴛ 11.8 12 ⴛ 10.8 12 ⴛ 10.0 10 ⴛ 9 10 ⴛ 8 10 ⴛ 7.5 8 ⴛ 6.5 8 ⴛ 6.2 6 ⴛ 4.4 6 ⴛ 3.7 5 ⴛ 18.9 4ⴛ6 3.47 3.18 2.94 2.65 2.35 2.21 1.92 1.81 1.29 1.09 5.55 1.78 Area A, in.2 12.00 11.97 11.97 10.00 9.95 9.99 8.00 8.00 6.00 5.922 5.00 3.80 Depth d, in. 3.065 3.065 3.250 2.690 2.690 2.688 2.281 2.281 1.844 2.00 5.003 3.80 0.225 0.210 0.180 0.206 0.182 0.173 0.189 0.177 0.171 0.129 0.416 0.160 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.177 0.160 0.149 0.157 0.141 0.130 0.135 0.129 0.114 0.0980 0.316 0.130 Web Thickness tw, in.A X tw X M 310 ⴛ 17.6 M 310 ⴛ 16.1 M 310 ⴛ 14.9 M 250 ⴛ 13.4 M 250 ⴛ 11.9 M 250 ⴛ 11.2 M 200 ⴛ 9.7 M 200 ⴛ 9.2 M 150 ⴛ 6.6 M 150 ⴛ 5.5 M 130 ⴛ 28.1 M 100 ⴛ 8.9 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) bf Y Y 2 240 2 050 1 900 1 710 1 520 1 430 1 240 1 170 832 703 3 580 1 150 Area A, mm2 305 304 304 254 253 253.7 203 203.2 152.4 150.4 127 97.0 Depth d, mm Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed. M M M M M M M M M M M M Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) d tf TABLE A2.3 “M” SHAPES 78 78 82.55 68 68 68.3 57 58 46.84 50.8 127 96.52 5.7 5.3 4.57 4.6 5.2 4.39 4.8 4.5 4.34 3.28 10.6 4.06 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 4.5 4.1 3.78 3.6 4.0 3.3 3.4 3.28 2.90 2.49 8.0 3.30 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 71 Not for Resale 16.8 12.4 10.6 HP10 ⴛ 57 ⴛ 42 HP8 ⴛ 36 8.02 9.99 9.70 12.28 12.13 11.94 11.78 14.21 14.01 13.83 13.61 Depth d, in. 8.155 10.225 10.075 12.295 12.215 12.125 12.045 14.885 14.785 14.695 14.585 Width bf, in. 0.445 0.565 0.420 0.685 0.610 0.515 0.435 0.805 0.705 0.615 0.505 Thickness tf, in.A Flange X 0.455 0.565 0.415 0.685 0.605 0.515 0.435 0.805 0.705 0.615 0.505 Web Thickness tw, in.A tf tw X 10 800 8 000 HP250 ⴛ 85 ⴛ 62 6 840 15 900 14 100 11 900 10 000 HP310 ⴛ 125 ⴛ 110 ⴛ 93 ⴛ 79 HP200 ⴛ 53 22 200 19 400 16 800 13 800 Area A, mm2 HP360 ⴛ 174 ⴛ 152 ⴛ 132 ⴛ 108 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) bf Y Y 204 254 246 312 308 303 299 361 356 351 346 Depth d, mm Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed. 24.6 21.8 18.4 15.5 HP12 ⴛ 84 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 63 ⴛ 53 A 34.4 30.0 26.1 21.4 Area A, in.2 HP14 ⴛ 117 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 73 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) d --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A2.4 “HP” SHAPES 207 260 256 312 310 308 306 378 376 373 370 Width bf, mm 11.3 14.4 10.7 17.4 15.5 13.1 11.0 20.4 17.9 15.6 12.8 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 11.3 14.4 10.5 17.4 15.4 13.1 11.0 20.4 17.9 15.6 12.8 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Area A, in.2 14.7 11.8 9.96 8.82 7.35 6.09 8.82 7.35 5.88 4.49 5.88 4.41 3.94 5.51 4.04 3.38 4.33 3.60 2.87 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) C 15 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 33.9 C 12 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 20.7 C 10 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 20 ⴛ 15.3 C 9 ⴛ 20 ⴛ 15 ⴛ 13.4 Not for Resale C8 ⴛ 18.75 ⴛ 13.75 ⴛ 11.5 C7 ⴛ 14.75 ⴛ 12.25 ⴛ 9.8 72 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 7.00 7.00 7.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 Depth d, in. 2.299 2.194 2.090 2.527 2.343 2.260 2.648 2.485 2.433 3.033 2.886 2.739 2.600 3.170 3.047 2.942 3.716 3.520 3.400 0.366 0.366 0.366 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.413 0.413 0.413 0.436 0.436 0.436 0.436 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.650 0.650 0.650 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. bf Y 0.419 0.314 0.210 0.487 0.303 0.220 0.448 0.285 0.233 0.673 0.526 0.379 0.240 0.510 0.387 0.282 0.716 0.520 0.400 Web Thickness tw, in.A X Y x d 5 690 4 740 3 930 5 690 4 740 3 790 2 900 3 790 2 850 2 540 3 550 2 610 2 180 2 790 2 320 1 850 C 250 ⴛ 45 ⴛ 37 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 22.8 C 230 ⴛ 30 ⴛ 22 ⴛ 19.9 C 200 ⴛ 27.9 ⴛ 20.5 ⴛ 17.1 C 180 ⴛ 22 ⴛ 18.2 ⴛ 14.6 9 480 7 610 6.430 Area A, mm2 C 310 45 ⴛ 37 ⴛ 30.8 C 380 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 50.4 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) X tw tf TABLE A2.5 “C” SHAPES 178 178 178 203 203 203 229 229 229 254 254 254 254 305 305 305 381 381 381 Depth d, mm 58 55 53 64 59 57 67 63 61 76 73 69 65 80 77 74 94 89 86 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.9 9.9 9.9 10.5 10.5 10.5 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 12.7 12.7 12.7 16.5 16.5 16.5 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 10.6 8.0 5.3 12.4 7.7 5.6 11.4 7.2 5.9 17.1 13.4 9.6 6.1 13.0 9.8 7.2 18.2 13.2 10.2 Web Thickness tw, mmA SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS A 73 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale 2.13 1.59 1.32 1.76 1.47 1.21 1.03 C4 ⴛ 7.25 ⴛ 5.4 ⴛ 4.5 C3 ⴛ 6 ⴛ5 ⴛ 4.1 ⴛ 3.5 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 Depth d, in. 1.596 1.498 1.410 1.372 1.721 1.584 1.584 1.885 1.750 2.157 2.034 1.920 0.273 0.273 0.273 0.273 0.296 0.296 0.296 0.320 0.320 0.343 0.343 0.343 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. 0.356 0.258 0.170 0.132 0.321 0.184 0.125 0.325 0.190 0.437 0.314 0.200 Web Thickness tw, in.A 1 700 1 270 1 370 1 030 852 1 130 948 781 665 C 100 ⴛ 10.8 ⴛ8 ⴛ 6.7 C 75 ⴛ 8.9 ⴛ 7.4 ⴛ 6.1 ⴛ 5.2 2 470 1 990 1 550 Area A, mm2 C 130 ⴛ 13 ⴛ 10.4 C 150 ⴛ 19.3 ⴛ 15.6 ⴛ 12.2 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) 76 76 76 76 102 102 102 127 127 152 152 152 Depth d, mm Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed. 2.64 1.97 3.83 3.09 2.40 C6 ⴛ 13 ⴛ 10.5 ⴛ 8.2 C5 ⴛ 9 ⴛ 6.7 Area A, in.2 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) TABLE A2.5 “C” SHAPES (CONT’D) 40 37 35 35 43 40 40 47 44 54 51 48 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.1 8.1 8.7 8.7 8.7 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 9.0 6.6 4.3 3.4 8.2 4.7 3.2 8.3 4.8 11.1 8.0 5.1 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Area A, in.2 17.1 15.3 13.5 12.6 14.7 11.8 10.3 9.35 14.7 13.2 11.8 10.3 9.12 3.10 12.1 9.87 8.37 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) MC 18 ⴛ 58 ⴛ 51.9 ⴛ 45.8 ⴛ 42.7 MC 13 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 31.8 MC 12 ⴛ 50 ⴛ 45 ⴛ 40 ⴛ 35 ⴛ 31 74 Not for Resale MC 12 ⴛ 10.6 MC 10 ⴛ 41.1 ⴛ 33.6 ⴛ 28.5 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 Depth d, in. 4.321 4.100 3.950 1.500 4.135 4.010 3.890 3.765 3.670 4.412 4.185 4.072 4.000 4.200 4.100 4.000 3.950 0.575 0.575 0.575 0.309 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.610 0.610 0.610 0.610 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 Thickness tf, in.A Flange Width bf, in. bf Y 0.796 0.575 0.425 0.190 0.835 0.710 0.590 0.465 0.370 0.787 0.560 0.447 0.375 0.700 0.600 0.500 0.450 Web Thickness tw, in.A X Y x d MC 250 ⴛ 61.2 ⴛ 50 x42.4 MC 310 ⴛ 15.8 MC 310 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 67 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 46 MC 330 ⴛ 74 ⴛ 60 ⴛ 52 ⴛ 47.3 MC 460 ⴛ 86 ⴛ 77.2 ⴛ 68.2 ⴛ 63.5 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) X tw tf TABLE A2.6 “MC” SHAPES 7 810 6 370 5 400 2 000 9 480 8 502 7 610 6 620 5 890 9 480 7 610 6 640 6 030 11 000 9 870 8 710 8 130 Area A, mm2 254 254 254 305 305 305 305 305 305 330 330 330 330 457 457 457 457 Depth d, mm 110 104 100 38 105 102 98 96 93 112 106 103 102 107 104 102 100 14.6 14.6 14.6 7.8 17.8 17.8 17.8 17.8 17.8 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9 Thickness tf, mmA Flange Width bf, mm 20.2 14.6 10.8 4.8 21.2 18.0 15.0 11.8 9.4 20.0 14.2 11.4 9.5 17.8 15.2 12.7 11.4 Web Thickness tw, mmA --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Area A, in.2 7.35 6.45 2.46 7.47 7.02 6.70 6.28 5.88 5.50 2.50 6.67 5.61 5.29 4.50 4.79 4.44 3.53 Designation (Nominal Depth in Inches and Weight in Pounds per Linear Foot) MC 10 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 22 MC 10 ⴛ 8.4 MC 9 ⴛ 25.4 ⴛ 23.9 MC 8 ⴛ 22.8 ⴛ 21.4 MC 8 ⴛ 20 ⴛ 18.7 MC 8 ⴛ 8.5 MC 7 ⴛ 22.7 ⴛ 19.1 75 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale MC 6 ⴛ 18 ⴛ 15.3 MC 6 ⴛ 16.3 ⴛ 15.1 MC 6 ⴛ 12 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 7.00 7.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 9.00 9.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 Depth d, in. 2.497 3.000 2.941 3.504 3.500 3.603 3.452 1.874 3.025 2.978 3.502 3.450 3.500 3.450 1.500 3.405 3.315 Width bf, in. 0.375 0.475 0.475 0.475 0.385 0.500 0.500 0.311 0.500 0.500 0.525 0.525 0.550 0.550 0.280 0.575 0.575 Thickness tf, in.A Flange 0.310 0.375 0.316 0.379 0.340 0.503 0.352 0.179 0.400 0.353 0.427 0.375 0.450 0.400 0.170 0.380 0.290 Web Thickness tw, in.A MC 150 ⴛ 17.9 MC 150 ⴛ 24.3 ⴛ 22.5 MC 150 ⴛ 26.8 ⴛ 22.8 MC 180 ⴛ 33.8 ⴛ 28.4 MC 200 ⴛ 12.6 MC 200 ⴛ 29.8 ⴛ 27.8 MC 200 ⴛ 33.9 ⴛ 31.8 2 280 3 090 2 860 3 410 2 900 4 300 3 620 1 610 3 790 3 550 4 320 4 050 4 820 4 530 1 590 MC 250 ⴛ 12.5 MC 230 ⴛ 37.8 ⴛ 35.6 4 740 4 160 Area A, mm2 MC 250 ⴛ 37 ⴛ 33 Designation (Nominal Depth in Millimetres and Mass in Kilograms per Metre) TABLE A2.6 “MC” SHAPES (CONT’D) 152 152 152 152 152 178 178 203 203 203 203 203 229 229 254 254 254 Depth d, mm 63 76 74 88 88 91 87 47 76 75 88 87 88 87 38 86 84 Width bf, mm 9.5 12.1 12.1 12.1 9.8 12.7 12.7 7.9 12.7 12.7 13.3 13.3 14.0 14.0 7.1 14.6 14.6 Thickness tf, mmA Flange 7.9 9.5 8.0 9.6 8.6 12.8 8.9 4.5 10.2 9.0 10.8 9.5 11.4 10.2 4.3 9.7 7.4 Web Thickness tw, mmA PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.7 “L” SHAPES (EQUAL LEGS) Y x Z X X y Y Z k Size and Thickness, in. Weight per Foot, lb Area, in.2 Size and Thickness, mm Mass per Metre, kg Area, mm2 11⁄8 1 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 56.9 51.0 45.0 38.9 32.7 29.6 26.4 16.7 15.0 13.2 11.4 9.61 8.68 7.75 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 203 203 203 203 203 203 203 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 28.6 25.4 22.2 19.0 15.9 14.3 12.7 84.7 75.9 67.0 57.9 48.7 44.0 39.3 10 800 9 680 8 502 7 360 6 200 5 600 5 000 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 37.4 33.1 28.7 24.2 21.9 19.6 17.2 14.9 12.4 11.0 9.73 8.44 7.11 6.43 5.75 5.06 4.36 3.65 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 25.4 22.2 19.0 15.9 14.3 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 55.7 49.3 42.7 36.0 32.6 29.2 25.6 22.2 18.5 7 100 6 280 5 450 4 590 4 150 3 710 3 270 2 810 2 360 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L5 L5 L5 L5 L5 L5 L5 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 7 ⁄8 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 27.2 23.6 20.0 16.2 14.3 12.3 10.3 7.98 6.94 5.86 4.75 4.18 3.61 3.03 L127 L127 L127 L127 L127 L127 L125 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 22.2 19.0 15.9 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 40.5 35.1 29.8 24.1 21.3 18.3 15.3 5 150 4 480 3 780 3 070 2 700 2 330 1 960 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 3 18.5 15.7 12.8 11.3 9.8 8.2 6.6 5.44 4.61 3.75 3.31 2.86 2.40 1.94 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 19.0 15.9 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 6.4 27.5 23.4 19.0 16.8 14.6 12.2 9.8 3 510 2 970 2 420 2 140 1 850 1 550 1 250 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 11.1 9.8 8.5 7.2 5.8 3.25 2.87 2.48 2.09 1.69 L89 L89 L89 L89 L89 16.5 14.6 12.6 10.7 8.6 2 100 1 850 1 600 1 350 1 090 7 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 5 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 7 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 89 89 89 89 89 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 6.4 76 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M TABLE A2.7 “L” SHAPES (EQUAL LEGS) (CONT’D) --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Size and Thickness, in. Weight per Foot, lb Area, in.2 Mass per Metre, kg Area, mm2 9.4 8.3 7.2 6.1 4.9 3.71 2.75 2.43 2.11 1.78 1.44 1.09 L76 L76 L76 L76 L76 L76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 76 76 76 76 76 76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 6.4 4.8 14.0 12.4 10.7 9.1 7.3 5.5 1 770 1 570 1 360 1 150 929 703 7.7 5.9 5.0 4.1 3.07 2.25 1.73 1.46 1.19 0.90 L64 L64 L64 L64 L64 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 64 64 64 64 64 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 9.5 7.9 6.49 4.8 11.4 8.7 7.4 6.1 4.6 1 450 1 120 942 768 581 4.7 3.92 3.19 2.44 1.65 1.36 1.15 0.938 0.715 0.484 L51 L51 L51 L51 L51 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 51 51 51 51 51 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 9.5 7.9 6.4 4.8 3.2 7.0 5.8 4.7 3.6 2.4 877 742 605 461 312 2.77 2.12 1.44 0.813 0.621 0.422 L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 6.4 L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 4.8 L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 3.2 4.1 3.1 2.1 525 401 272 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4 11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16 1 ⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄32 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄8 2.34 1.80 1.52 1.23 0.688 0.527 0.444 0.359 L38 L38 L38 L38 6.4 4.8 4.0 3.2 3.4 2.7 2.2 1.8 444 340 286 232 L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄4 L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16 L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8 1.92 1.48 1.01 0.563 0.434 0.297 L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 6.4 L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 4.8 L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 3.2 2.8 2.2 1.5 363 280 192 L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 1⁄4 L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 3⁄16 L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 1⁄8 1.49 1.16 0.80 0.438 0.340 0.234 L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 6.4 L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 4.8 L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 3.2 2.2 1.8 1.2 283 219 151 L3⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8 0.59 0.172 L19 ⴛ 19 ⴛ 3.2 0.9 111 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 3 3 3 3 3 3 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L21⁄2 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 2 2 2 2 2 ⴛ 3⁄8 ⴛ 5⁄16 ⴛ 1⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16 ⴛ 1⁄8 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 7 ⴛ 1⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄8 ⴛ 5⁄16 ⴛ 1⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16 L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄4 L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16 L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8 L11⁄2 L11⁄2 L11⁄2 L11⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ Size and Thickness, mm ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 38 38 38 38 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 77 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.8 “L” SHAPES (UNEQUAL LEGS) Y x Z X X y k Y Size and Thickness, in. Z Weight per Foot, lb Area, in.2 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 44.2 39.1 33.8 28.5 25.7 23.0 20.2 13.0 11.5 9.94 8.36 7.56 6.75 5.93 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 L203 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄4 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 37.4 28.7 21.9 19.6 11.0 8.44 6.43 5.75 L203 L203 L203 L203 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 102 102 102 102 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄8 L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 5⁄8 L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄16 33.1 24.2 17.2 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L8 L8 L8 L8 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 4 4 4 4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ L7 L7 L7 L7 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 4 4 4 4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 7 3 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 5 L7 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄16 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 7 ⁄8 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 3 L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄2 L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄8 L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄16 Size and Thickness, mm Mass per Metre, kg Area, mm2 25.4 22.2 19.0 15.9 14.3 12.7 11.1 65.5 57.9 50.1 42.2 38.1 34.1 29.9 8 390 7 420 6 410 5 390 4 880 4 350 3 830 25.4 19.0 14.3 12.7 55.4 42.5 32.4 29.0 7 100 5 450 4 150 3 710 9.73 7.11 5.06 L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 22.2 L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 15.9 L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 11.1 49.3 36.0 25.6 6 280 4 590 3 260 26.2 22.1 17.9 13.6 7.69 6.48 5.25 3.98 L178 L178 L178 L178 19.0 15.9 12.7 9.5 38.8 32.7 26.5 20.2 4 960 4 180 3 390 2 570 15.7 4.62 L178 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 11.1 23.4 2 980 27.2 23.6 20.0 18.1 16.2 14.3 12.3 10.3 7.98 6.94 5.86 5.31 4.75 4.18 3.61 3.03 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 L152 40.3 35.0 29.6 26.8 24.0 21.2 18.2 15.3 5 150 4 480 3 780 3 430 3 060 3 700 2 330 1 950 15.3 11.7 9.8 4.50 3.42 2.87 L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 12.7 L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 9.5 L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 7.9 22.7 17.3 14.5 2 900 2 210 1 850 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 22.2 19.0 15.9 14.3 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 78 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-6 /SA-6M --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A2.8 “L” SHAPES (UNEQUAL LEGS) (CONT’D) Size and Thickness, in. Weight per Foot, lb Area, in.2 19.8 16.8 13.6 10.4 8.7 7.0 5.81 4.92 4.00 3.05 2.56 2.06 L127 L127 L127 L127 L127 L127 12.8 11.3 3 ⴛ 3⁄8 3 ⴛ 5⁄16 3 ⴛ 1⁄4 31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄2 31⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄8 31⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄16 31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4 3 ⴛ 5⁄8 3 ⴛ 1⁄2 3 ⴛ 3⁄8 3 ⴛ 5⁄16 3 ⴛ 1⁄4 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 3 3 3 3 3 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 L31⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 L5 L5 L5 L5 L5 L5 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 5 L5 ⴛ 3 ⴛ 1⁄2 L5 ⴛ 3 ⴛ 7⁄16 L5 L5 L5 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 L4 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 7 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 3 Size and Thickness, mm Mass per Metre, kg Area, mm2 19.0 15.9 12.7 9.5 7.9 6.4 29.3 24.9 20.2 15.4 12.9 10.4 3 750 3 170 2 580 1 970 1 650 1 330 3.75 3.31 L127 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 12.7 L127 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 11.1 19.0 16.7 2 420 2 140 9.8 8.2 6.6 11.9 9.1 7.7 6.2 13.6 11.1 8.5 7.2 5.8 2.86 2.40 1.94 3.50 2.67 2.25 1.81 3.98 3.25 2.48 2.09 1.69 L127 L127 L127 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 L102 14.5 12.1 9.8 17.6 13.5 11.4 9.2 20.2 16.4 12.6 10.7 8.6 1 850 1 550 1 250 2 260 1 720 1 450 1 170 2 570 2 100 1 600 1 350 1 090 10.2 9.1 7.9 6.6 5.4 3.00 2.65 2.30 1.93 1.56 L89 L89 L89 L89 L89 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 76 76 76 76 76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 6.4 15.1 13.5 11.7 9.8 8.0 1 940 1 710 1 480 1 250 1 010 9.4 7.2 6.1 4.9 2.75 2.11 1.78 1.44 L89 L89 L89 L89 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 64 64 64 64 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 9.5 7.9 6.4 13.9 10.7 9.0 7.3 1 770 1 360 1 150 929 8.5 7.6 6.6 5.6 4.5 3.39 2.50 2.21 1.92 1.62 1.31 0.996 L76 L76 L76 L76 L76 L76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 64 64 64 64 64 64 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 11.1 9.5 7.9 6.4 4.8 12.6 11.3 9.8 8.3 6.7 5.1 1 610 1 430 1 240 1 050 845 643 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 89 89 89 89 89 89 76 76 76 89 89 89 89 76 76 76 76 76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 9.5 7.9 6.4 12.7 9.5 7.9 6.4 15.9 1.27 9.5 7.9 6.4 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 2 2 2 2 2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 7.7 5.9 5.0 4.1 3.07 2.25 1.73 1.46 1.19 0.902 L76 L76 L76 L76 L76 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 51 51 51 51 51 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 12.7 9.5 7.9 6.4 4.8 11.5 8.8 7.4 6.1 4.6 1 450 1 120 942 768 582 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 L21⁄2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 2 2 2 2 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 5.3 4.5 3.62 2.75 1.55 1.31 1.06 0.809 L64 L64 L64 L64 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 51 51 51 51 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 9.5 7.9 6.4 4.8 7.9 6.7 5.4 4.2 1 000 845 684 522 L21⁄2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4 L21⁄2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16 3.19 2.44 0.938 0.715 L64 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 6.4 L64 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 4.8 4.8 3.6 605 461 L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4 L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16 L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄8 2.77 2.12 1.44 0.813 0.621 0.422 L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 6.4 L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 4.8 L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 3.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 525 401 272 ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ ⴛ 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 7 3 3 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 5 79 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II APPENDICES (Nonmandatory Information) X1. COILED PRODUCT AS A SOURCE OF STRUCTURAL PLATES, SHAPES, SHEET PILING, AND BARS X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different types of systems employed during or following the rolling operations, it is common for the steel to be reeled into the coiler at temperatures in the stress-relieving range. In general, these temperatures are higher as material thickness increases. The coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and inner laps cooling more rapidly than central laps. The difference in cooling rate can result in measurable differences in the mechanical properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced yield and tensile strength with increased percent elongation for the product with slower cooling rates from the coiling temperature to ambient. These differences are in addition to the effects on mechanical properties caused by differences in heat analysis and chemical segregation. Carbon Steel Plates and Wide Flange Shapes” (SU /18, SU /19, and SU /20), published in September 1974. The data are presented in tables of probability that tensile properties at other than the official location may differ from those of the reported test location. X2.3 Specification A 6 /A 6M contains no requirements applicable to product tension tests; conformance to the material specifications is determined on the basis of tests performed at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified. X2.4 A Task Group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.02 has determined, based on review of the AISI data, that the variation in tensile properties of plates and structural shapes can be expressed as a function of specified requirements: one standard deviation equals approximately 4% of required tensile strength, 8% of required yield strength, and 3 percentage units of required elongation. X2.5 Acceptance criteria for product testing based on these values either below the minimum or above the maximum allowed by the material specification are generally acceptable to material manufacturers. Such tolerances could be considered by users of this product as a reasonable basis for acceptance of materials which, due to their inherent variability, deviate from material specification requirements when subjected to product tension testing. X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES IN PLATES AND STRUCTURAL SHAPES X2.1 The tension testing requirements of Specification A 6 /A 6M are intended only to characterize the tensile properties of a heat of steel for determination of conformance to the requirements of the material specifications. These testing procedures are not intended to define the upper or lower limits of tensile properties at all possible test locations within a heat of steel. It is well known and documented that tensile properties will vary within a heat or individual piece of steel as a function of chemical composition, processing, testing procedure, and other factors. It is, therefore, incumbent on designers and engineers to use sound engineering judgement when using tension test results shown on mill test reports. The testing procedures of Specification A 6 /A 6M have been found to provide material adequate for normal structural design criteria. X3. WELDABILITY OF STEEL X3.1 Weldability is a term that usually refers to the relative ease with which a metal can be welded using conventional practice. Difficulties arise in steel when the cooling rates associated with weld thermal cycles produce microstructures (for example, martensite) that are susceptible to brittle fracture or, more commonly, hydrogeninduced (or cold) cracking. (Solidification or hot cracking is a relatively rare phenomenon that will not be addressed here.) X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in tensile properties obtained from plates and structural shapes was conducted by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). The results of this survey are contained in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The Variation of Product Analysis and Tensile Properties — X3.2 The relative sensitivity of steels to forming cold cracking microstructures is called hardenability and can be measured in a number of ways. Perhaps the most popular method of assessing this is by the carbon equivalent (CE) formula, which attempts to equate the relative hardening contributions of a steel’s constituent elements 80 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (for example, manganese, vanadium) to an equivalent amount of carbon, which is the most significant hardening agent. The most popular formula is the IIW (International Institute of Welding) equation presented in S74.2, which has been found suitable for predicting hardenability in a wide range of commonly used carbon-manganese and low alloy steels. X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold forming are referenced to Group Designations A to F inclusive as defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii listed in Table X4.2 should be used as minimums in typical shop fabrication. Material that does not form satisfactorily when fabricated in accordance with Table X4.2 may be subject to rejection pending negotiation with the steel supplier. When tighter bends are required, the manufacturer should be consulted. X3.3 It should be noted, however, that for the current generation of low carbon (<0.10%) low alloy steels that derive strength from a combination of microalloys and thermal processing methods, the use of other formulae may more accurately assess hardenability and cold cracking sensitivity. X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die should be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The width across the shoulders of the female die should be at least eight times the plate thickness. Higher strength steels require larger die openings. The surface of the dies in the area of radius should be smooth. X3.4 For a vast number of common structural applications it is unnecessary to specify the use of CE limits. However, in order to obtain a higher level of confidence in avoiding cold cracking, the chemistry controls in S74 are available. A purchaser who specifies the use of S74 should be aware that there are several factors involved in the judicious selection of a maximum CE value, such as the following: X4.2.1 Since cracks in cold bending commonly originate from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut edges should be removed by grinding. Sharp corners on edges and on punched or gas cut holes should be removed by chamfering or grinding to a radius. X3.4.1 Actual production joint restraint /base metal thickness(es), X4.2.2 If possible, parts should be formed such that the bend line is perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. If it is necessary to bend with the bend line parallel to the direction of final rolling, a more generous radius is suggested (11⁄2 times applicable value given in Table X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of rolling). X3.4.2 Filler metal and base metal strength compatibility, X3.4.3 Deposited weld metal diffusible hydrogen content, X3.4.4 Preheat and interpass temperatures, X3.4.5 Filler metal and base metal cleanliness, and X3.4.6 Heat input. X4.3 References: X3.5 Though it is widely believed that low CE steels are immune to weld cracking problems, failure to consider these factors and others have resulted in weld or base metal HAZ (heat affected zone) cracks in such steels. X4.3.1 Holt, G. E., et al, “Minimum Cold Bend Radii Project—Final Report,” Concurrent Technologies Corporation, January 27, 1997. X4.3.2 Brockenbrough, R. L., “Fabrication Guidelines for Cold Bending,” R. L. Brockenbrough & Associates, June 28, 1998. X3.6 It is important to note that carbon equivalence is only a qualitative assessment of potential welding problems, and should never be solely relied on to ensure weld integrity. The proper use of welding specifications, coupled with the knowledge of actual construction conditions, must also be used. X4.3.3 Both of these references are available from American Iron and Steel Institute, 1101 17th Street NW, Washington, DC 20036-4700. 81 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-6 /SA-6M Not for Resale SA-6 /SA-6M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X4.1 GROUP DESIGNATIONS FOR COLD BENDING Specification A 36/A 36M A 242/A 242M A 283/A 283M A 514/A 514M A 529/A 529M A 572/A 572M A 573/A 573M A 588/A 588M A 633/A 633M A 656/A 656M A 678/A 678M A 690/A 690M A 709/A 709M --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- A A A A A 710/A 808/A 852/A 871/A 945/A 710M 808M 852M 871M 945M Grade B B A or B C or D any 50 [345] or 55 [380] 42 [290] 50 [345] 55 [380] 60 [415] or 65 [450] 58 [400] or 65 [450] 70 [485] any any 50 [345] 60 [415] 70 [485] 80 [550] A or B C or D B 36 [250] 50 [345] or 50W [345W] 70W [485W] or HPS70W [HPS485W] 100 [690] or 100W [690W] A B B 60 [415] or 65 [450] 50 [345] or 65 [450] Group DesignationA B C A B F C B C D E B C C B B D E F C D C B C D TABLE X4.2 SUGGESTED MINIMUM INSIDE RADII FOR COLD BENDINGA Thickness (t), in. [mm] Group DesignationB Up to 3 ⁄4 in. [20 mm] Over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] To 1 [25 mm, incl.] Over 1 in. [25 mm] To 2 in. [50 mm], incl. Over 2 in. [50 mm] A B C D E F 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.75t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 2.25t 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t 3.0t 4.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t 3.0t 3.5t 5.5t A Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. These radii apply when the precautions listed in X 4.2 are followed. If bend lines are parallel to the direction of the final rolling, multiply values by 1.5. B Steel specifications included in the group designations may not include the entire thickness range shown in this table. F F C D E B A Steels having a ratio of specified minimum tensile strength to specified minimum yield strength of 1.15 or less are in Group F; other steels are in Groups A to E inclusive, which are grouped on the basis of their having similar specified values for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm]. B Grade designations are not applicable for this specification. 82 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PLATES FOR PRESSURE VESSELS SA-20 /SA-20M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 20 /A 20M-01) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers a group of common requirements which, unless otherwise specified in the individual material specification, shall apply to rolled steel plates for pressure vessels under each of the following specifications issued by ASTM: --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Title of Specification Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Lowand Intermediate-Tensile Strength Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength Manganese Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, HighStrength, Quenched and Tempered Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, CarbonManganese-Silicon Steel Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Chromium-Molybdenum Title of Specification Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9 Percent Nickel Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel and HighStrength Low-Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength LowAlloy Steel Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, CarbonManganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service Pressure Vessel Plates, Quenched and Tempered Manganese-Chromium-MolybdenumSilicon-Zirconium Alloy Steel Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium ASTM Designation A 202 /A 202M A 203 /A 203M A 204 /A 204M A 225 /A 225M A 285 /A 285M A 299 /A 299M A 302 /A 302M A 353 /A 353M A 387 /A 387M A 455 /A 455M A 515 /A 515M A 516 /A 516M A 517 /A 517M A 533 /A 533M A 537 /A 537M A 542 /A 542M 83 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ASTM Designation A 543 /A 543M A 553 /A 553M A 562 /A 562M A 612 /A 612M A 645 /A 645M A 662 /A 662M A 724 /A 724M A 734 /A 734M A 735 /A 735M A 736 /A 736M A 737 /A 737M A 738 /A 738M A 782 /A 782M A 832 /A 832M SA-20 /SA-20M Title of Specification Pressure Vessel Plates, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP) Pressure Vessel Plates, 9% Nickel Alloy, Produced by the Direct-Quenching Process 2004 SECTION II ASTM Designation system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with this specification. A 841 /A 841M 1.11 This specification and the applicable material specifications are expressed in both inch-pound units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. A 844 /A 844M 1.1.1 This specification also covers a group of supplementary requirements which are applicable to several of the above specifications as indicated therein. These are provided for use when additional testing or inspection is desired and apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 202 /A 202M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon A 203 /A 203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel A 204 /A 204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum A 225 /A 225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel A 285 /A 285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength A 299 /A 299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon A 302 /A 302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel A 353 /A 353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 387 /A 387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum A 435 /A 435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates A 455 /A 455M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength Manganese A 515 /A 515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service A 516 /A 516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service A 517 /A 517M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and Tempered A 533 /A 533M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered ManganeseMolybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel A 537 /A 537M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel 1.2 Appendix X1 describes the production and some of the characteristics of coiled product from which pressure vessel plates may be produced. 1.3 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels. 1.4 Appendix X3 provides information on the variability of Charpy V-Notch impact test properties in plates for pressure vessels. 1.5 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of plates including suggested minimum inside radii for cold bending. 1.6 These materials are intended to be suitable for fusion welding. When the steel is to be welded, it is presupposed that a welding procedure suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized. 1.7 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the individual material specification shall prevail over those of this general specification. 1.8 The purchaser may specify additional requirements which do not negate any of the provisions of this general specification or of the individual material specifications. Such additional requirements, the acceptance of which is subject to negotiation with the supplier, must be included in the order information (see 4.1.8). 1.9 For purposes of determining conformance with this specification and the various material specifications referenced in 1.1, values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting values in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29. 1.10 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents. Therefore, each 84 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS A 542 /A 542M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered ChromiumMolybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium A 543 /A 543M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum A 553 /A 553M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9 Percent Nickel A 562 /A 562M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings A 577 /A 577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates A 578 /A 578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications A 612 /A 612M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service A 645 /A 645M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated A 662 /A 662M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment A 724 /A 724M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels A 734 /A 734M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered A 735 /A 735M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service A 736 /A 736M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel A 737 /A 737M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel A 738 /A 738M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 770 /A 770M Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications A 782 /A 782M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Quenched and Tempered Manganese-ChromiumMolybdenum-Silicon-Zirconium Alloy Steel A 832 /A 832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium A 841 /A 841M Specification for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP) A 844 /A 844M Specification for Steel Plates, 9% Nickel Alloy, for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the DirectQuenching Process A 919 Terminology Relating to Heat Treatment of Metals A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys E 21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of Metallic Materials E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size E 208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination 2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code : ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding Qualifications 2.3 U.S. Military Standard: MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage 2.4 U.S. Federal Standard: Fed. Std. No. 123, Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) 2.5 Automotive Industry Action Group Standard: B 1 Bar Code Symbology Standard 3. Terminology 3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 3.1.1 capped steel — rimmed steel in which the rimming action is limited by an early capping operation. Capping may be carried out mechanically by using a heavy metal cap on a bottle-top mold or it may be carried out chemically by an addition of aluminum or ferrosilicon to the top of the molten steel in an open-top mold. 3.1.2 exclusive — when used in relation to ranges, as for ranges of thicknesses in the tables of permissible variations in dimensions, the term is intended to exclude only the greater value of the range. Thus, a range from 60 to 72 in. [1500 to 1800 mm] exclusive includes 60 in. [1500 mm], but does not include 72 in. [1800 mm]. 85 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-20 /SA-20M Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II 3.1.3 heat treatment terms — see 3.1.7, 3.11, and Terminology A 941. 3.1.4 hot forming — a forming operation producing permanent deformation, performed after the plate has been heated to the temperature required to produce grain refinement. 3.1.5 killed steel — steel deoxidized, either by addition of strong deoxidizing agents or by vacuum treatment, to reduce the oxygen content to such a level that no reaction occurs between carbon and oxygen during solidification. 3.1.6 manufacturer (material manufacturer) — an organization that performs or directly controls one or more operations, such as melting, rolling, coiling, and heat treating, that affect the chemical composition or mechanical properties of the material. 3.1.7 normalizing — a heat treating process in which a steel plate is reheated to a uniform temperature above the upper critical temperature and then cooled in air to below the transformation range. 3.1.8 plate-as-rolled — when used in relation to the location and number of tests, the term refers to the unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It does not refer to the condition of the plate. 3.1.9 plate identifier — the alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric designation used to identify the plate. 3.1.10 plates — flat hot-rolled steel, commonly available by size as follows: Width, in. [mm] Over 8 [200] Over 48 [1200] 4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of plates); 4.1.2 Dimensions; 4.1.3 Name of material (plates, carbon steel; plates, alloy steel); 4.1.4 Specification designation (including type, class, and grade as applicable) and year of issue; 4.1.5 Condition (as-rolled, normalized, quenched and tempered, etc. If heat treatment of material is to be performed by the fabricator, this must be so stated. Also, if purchaser specifies a heat-treatment cycle, it must be stated.); 4.1.6 Impact test requirements, if any (Section 12). (For Charpy V-notch test, include specimen orientation, testing temperature, and acceptance criteria. For dropweight test give testing temperature.); 4.1.7 Either plates from coil or discrete cut lengths of flat product may be supplied unless one is specifically excluded on the order (see Appendix X1); 4.1.8 If the processor (see 5.5.2) intends to qualify plates cut from a coiled product as pressure vessel plates, the order to the manufacturer (see 5.5.1) should state the intended ASTM specification designation, grade, and type (as applicable); 4.1.9 Paint markings (see 13.2.1); 4.1.10 Supplementary requirements, if any (test specimen heat treatment, special impact test requirements, etc.); and Thickness, in. [mm] 4.1.11 Additional requirements, if any. Over 0.229 [6.0 mm and over] Over 0.179 [4.6 mm and over] 3.1.11 precipitation heat treatment — a subcritical temperature thermal treatment performed to cause precipitation of submicroscopic constituents, etc., to result in enhancement of some desirable property. 3.1.12 processor — an organization that performs operations, such as decoiling, cutting to length, marking, inspecting, examining, and testing. 3.1.13 rimmed steel — steel containing sufficient oxygen to give a continuous evolution of carbon monoxide while the ingot is solidifying, resulting in a case or rim of metal virtually free of voids. 3.1.14 semikilled steel — incompletely deoxidized steel containing sufficient oxygen to form enough carbon monoxide during solidification to offset solidification shrinkage. 5. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Materials and Manufacture 5.1 The steel shall be produced by one of the following primary steelmaking processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace. The steel may be further refined by secondary processes, including but not restricted to: vacuum-secondary processes, including but not restricted to: vacuum-arc remelt (VAR), electroslag remelt (ESR), and ladle treatment. 5.2 The steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast. 5.2.1 Strand-Cast Slabs : 5.2.1.1 When heats of the same nominal chemical composition are consecutively strand cast at one time, the heat number assigned to the cast product (slab) may remain unchanged until all of the steel in the slab is from the following heat. 4. Ordering Information 4.1 Orders should include the following information, as necessary, to adequately describe the desired material. 5.2.1.2 When two consecutively strand-cast heats have different nominal chemical composition 86 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS inspection, or operations not intended to affect the properties of the material. The processor may subsequently heat treat the plates (see Section 6). Specific sections of this specification for which the processor is responsible are 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 20. ranges, the manufacturer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates the grades. 5.3 The ratio of reduction of thickness from a strandcast slab to plate shall be at least 3.0:1, except that reduction ratios as low as 2.0:1 are permitted if all of the following limitations are met: 5.3.1 The purchaser agrees to the use of such reduction ratios. 5.3.2 The applicable material specification is a A 299 / A 299M, A 515 / A 515M, A 516 / A 516M, A 537 /A 537M, A 662 /A 662M, or A 737 /A 737M. 5.3.3 The specified plate thickness is 3.0 in. [75 mm] or more. 5.3.4 One or more of the following low hydrogen practices are used; vacuum degassing during steelmaking; controlled soaking of the slabs or plates; or controlled slow cooling of the slabs or plates. 5.3.5 The sulfur content is 0.004% or less, based upon heat analysis. 5.3.6 One or more of the following practices are used: electromagnetic stirring during strand casting; soft reduction during strand casting; heavy pass reductions or other special practices during plate rolling; or combined forging and rolling during plate rolling. 5.3.7 The plates are ultrasonically examined in accordance with Specification A 578 /A 578M, Level C based on continuous scanning over 100% of the plate surface. 5.3.8 The plates are through thickness tension tested in accordance with Specification A 770 /A 770M. 5.5.2.1 Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material specifications governed by this specification until decoiled, leveled, cut to length, and tested by the processor in accordance with the specified requirements. 5.5.3 Plates produced from coils shall not contain splice welds, unless approved by the purchaser. 6. Heat Treatment 6.1 When material is required to be heat treated, the heat treatment may be performed either by the manufacturer or processor or by the fabricator unless otherwise specified in the material specification. 6.2 When the heat treatment required by the material specification is to be performed by the purchaser or the purchaser’s agent, and the material is to be supplied by the material producer in a condition other than that required by the material specification, the order shall so state. 6.2.1 When plates are ordered without the heat treatment required by the material specification, heat treatment of the plates to conform to the requirements of the material specification shall be the responsibility of the purchaser. 6.3 When heat treatment is to be performed, the material shall be heat treated as specified in the material specification. The purchaser may specify the heat treatment to be used provided it is not in conflict with the requirements of the material specification. 5.4 Plates are produced in either discrete cut lengths of flat product or from coils. 5.4.1 Plates produced from coil means plates that have been leveled or flattened and cut to length from a coiled product and that are furnished without heat treatment. For the purposes of this paragraph, stress relieving is not considered to be a heat treatment. 5.4.2 Plates that are annealed, normalized, normalized-and-tempered, or quenched-and-tempered after decoiling shall be considered to be discrete cut lengths of flat products. 6.4 When normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator, it may be accomplished by heating uniformly for hot forming. The temperature to which the plates are heated for hot forming shall not significantly exceed the normalizing temperature. 6.5 When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or processor may opt to heat treat the plates by normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing and then stress relieving to meet the material specification. 5.5 When plates are produced from coils: 5.5.1 The manufacturer directly controls one or more of the operations (that is, melting, rolling, coiling, etc.) that affect the chemical composition or the mechanical properties, or both, of the material. 5.5.2 The processor decoils, cuts to length, and marks; performs and certifies tests, examination repairs, 6.6 If approved by the purchaser, cooling rates faster than those obtained by cooling in air are permissible to achieve specified mechanical properties, provided the plates are subsequently tempered in the temperature range from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C]. 87 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-20 /SA-20M Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II 7. 8.2.2.1 When aluminum is used as the grain refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the aluminum content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum or, alternately, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum. Chemical Composition 7.1 Heat Analysis of each heat shall be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentage of elements specified in the individual material specification. This analysis shall be made from a test specimen preferably taken during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser, or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable specification. 8.2.3 When specified on the order, one McQuaidEhn test (see 8.1) per heat shall be made and the austenitic grain size of the steel, as represented by the test, shall be Number 5 or finer. 8.2.4 By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, elements other than aluminum may be used for grain refining. In such instances, the heat analysis limits for the element, or elements, permitted shall be specified on the order. In addition, the McQuaid-Ehn test of 8.2.3 shall be required. 7.1.1 Unspecified elements may be present. Unless otherwise specified in the material specification, limits on elements shall be as stated in Table 1. 7.1.1.1 Each of the elements listed in Table 1 shall be included in the report of the heat analysis. When the amount of an element present is less than 0.02%, the analysis may be reported as “< 0.02%.” 9. Quality 9.1 General — Plates furnished under this specification shall be free of injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish. 7.2 Product Analysis representing each plate as-rolled may be made by the purchaser from a broken tension test specimen or from a sample taken from the same relative location as that from which the tension test specimen was obtained. The chemical composition thus determined, as to elements required or restricted, shall conform to the product analysis requirements specified in the applicable specification. 9.2 Surface Imperfections: 9.2.1 All injurious surface imperfections shall be removed by the manufacturer of discrete cut length plates. For plates provided from coils, the processor shall remove the injurious imperfections, rather than the manufacturer. 7.3 Referee Analysis — For referee purposes, Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall be used. 9.2.1.1 Shallow imperfections shall be ground to sound metal; the ground area shall be well faired and the thickness of the ground plate shall not be reduced below the minimum thickness permitted. 9.2.1.2 All surface imperfections, the removal of which will reduce the plate thickness below this minimum, shall be cause for rejection of the plate; however, by agreement with the purchaser, the metal so removed may be replaced with weld metal as provided in 9.4. 8. Metallurgical Structure 8.1 Where coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the steel shall have a carburized austenitic grain size number in the range from 1 to 5, inclusive, as determined by the McQuaid-Ehn test. Determination shall be in accordance with Test Methods E 112, Plate IV, by carburizing for 8 h at 1700°F [925°C]. At least 70% of the grains in the area examined shall conform to the specified grain size requirement. One test per heat shall be made. 9.3 Edge Imperfections: 9.3.1 Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. [25 mm] and less in length visible to the unaided eye on the edges of a plate as prepared for shipment by the manufacturer or processor are acceptable and do not require exploration. 8.2 Fine Austenitic Grain Size: 8.2.1 When a fine austenitic grain size is specified, aluminum shall be used as the grain refining element unless the order provides otherwise as specified in 8.2.4. 9.3.2 All larger discontinuities shall be explored to determine their depth and extent. Discontinuities shall be considered continuous when located in the same plane within 5% of the plate thickness and separated by a distance less than the length of the smaller of two adjacent discontinuities. 8.2.2 When a fine austenitic grain size is specified, except as otherwise provided in 8.2.2.1, the steel shall have a carburized austenitic grain size number of 5 or higher (finer) as determined by the McQuaid-Ehn test in accordance with Methods E 112, Plate IV. One test per heat shall be made. 9.3.3 Indications visible to the unaided eye on the cut edges of a plate as prepared for shipment by the manufacturer or processor shall not exceed the limits given in columns 1 and 2 of Table A1.14 [A2.14]. 88 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 9.3.4 Larger indications shall be removed by the manufacturer or processor by grinding provided the resultant cavity does not exceed the limits given in columns 3 and 4 of Table A1.14 [A2.14]. 9.3.5 Indications of greater magnitude shall be cause for rejection of a plate; however, by agreement with the purchaser, the defects may be removed and replaced with weld metal as provided in 9.4. 9.3.6 Indications on the edges of a plate cut during the fabrication shall be cause for rejection of the plate at the discretion of the purchaser when the magnitude exceeds the limits given in columns 5 and 6 of Table A1.14 [A2.14]. The defects may be removed and replaced with weld metal as provided in 9.4. 9.3.7 Fabricators should be aware that edge cracks may initiate upon bending a sheared or burned edge during the fabrication process. This is not considered to be a fault of the steel, but is rather a function of the induced cold work or heat-affected zone. 10. Test Methods 10.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 10.2 Yield strength may be determined either by the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension under load method unless otherwise stated in the material specification. 10.3 Rounding Procedures — For purposes of determining conformance with the specification, a calculated value shall be rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa] tensile and yield strength, and to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting value for other values in accordance with the rounding method given in Practice E 29. 11. Tension Tests 11.1 Number of Tests — Except as specified in 11.1.1, one tension test shall be taken from each plate-as-rolled, except for plates subjected to heat treatment by quenching and tempering. Two tension tests shall be taken from each quenched and tempered plate. When plates are furnished by the manufacturer or processor in accordance with 11.4.2 and qualified by heat-treated specimens (including normalized, normalized and tempered, and quenched and tempered), one tension test specimen shall be taken from each plate-as-rolled (see 3.1.8 for the definition of plate-as-rolled). 9.4 Repair by Welding: 9.4.1 Repair welding shall be permitted only with the approval of the purchaser. 9.4.2 Preparation for repair welding shall include inspection to assure complete removal of the defect. 9.4.3 Repairs shall be made utilizing welding procedures qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code and repair welding shall be done by welders or welding operators meeting the qualification requirements of ASME Section IX. 9.4.4 The weld metal shall have the A-number analysis corresponding to the equivalent ASME P number of the plate material except that A-1 or A-2 analysis weld metal may be employed for P-1 materials. Other weld metals may be employed that are compatible with the base material being repaired, when so approved by the purchaser. Such weld metals must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code. 9.4.5 If Charpy impact tests are required on the plate material, the welding procedure qualification tests shall also include Charpy impact tests of the weld, heataffected zone, and plate material, and shall be reported to the purchaser. 9.4.6 If the plate material is subjected to normalizing, quenching and tempering, hot forming, or post-weld heat treating, the welding procedure qualification test plates and the weld-repaired plate shall be subjected to the thermal heat treatment as specified by the purchaser. 9.4.7 In addition, repair welds shall meet the requirements of the construction code specified by the purchaser. 11.1.1 Plates Produced from Coils — Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material specifications governed by this specification until decoiled, leveled, cut to length, and properly tested by the processor in accordance with ASTM specification requirements. When plates are produced from coils, a minimum of three tension tests shall be made from each coil qualified, except as otherwise indicated as follows for qualification of a portion of a coil. 11.1.1.1 The first test coupon shall be taken immediately prior to the first plate produced to the qualifying specification, the second test coupon shall be taken from the approximate center lap, and the third test coupon shall be taken immediately after the last plate produced to the qualifying specification. If, during decoiling, the amount of material decoiled is less than that required to reach the next standard test location, a test for qualification of that particular shipment may be made from a test coupon taken from a location adjacent to the innermost portion shipped. 11.1.1.2 All material between any two test locations that meet the requirements of the material specification is acceptable. 89 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-20 /SA-20M Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II 11.1.1.3 All material between a test location that fails to meet the requirements of the material specification and an adjacent acceptable test is rejectable. However, other tests may be made after cutting back the coil in either direction. slower than, that attained by the method described in 11.4.4.2. 11.4.4.4 When test coupons cut from the plate but heat treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not less than 3T by 3T by T and each tension specimen cut from it shall meet the requirements of 11.4.4.1. 11.2 Orientation of Tests — The longitudinal axis of the tension-test specimens shall be transverse to the final rolling direction of the plate. 11.3 Location of Tests — The tension test specimen shall be taken from a corner of the plate. For quenched and tempered plates, the tension test specimens shall be taken from a corner of the plate at both ends of the plate. 11.4.4.5 If cooling rate data for the plate and cooling rate control devices for the test specimens are available, the test specimens may be heat treated separately in the device. This method shall require prior approval of the purchaser. 11.4 Tests from Heat-Treated Plates: 11.4.1 When heat treatment is performed by the manufacturer or processor, the test specimens shall be taken from the plate in the heat-treated condition or from full-thickness coupons simultaneously heat treated with the plate. 11.5 Specimen Preparation: 11.5.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the plates. The test specimens shall conform to the requirements for either the 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide or the 1 ⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] wide rectangular tension test specimen of Methods and Definitions A 370. The 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide specimen may have both edges parallel. The 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] wide specimen may have a maximum nominal thickness of 3⁄4 in. [20 mm]. 11.4.2 When heat treatment is to be performed by the fabricator, the plates shall be accepted on the basis of tests made on specimens taken from full thickness coupons heat treated in accordance with the requirements specified in the material specification or on the order. If the heat-treatment temperatures are not specified, the manufacturer or processor shall heat treat the coupons under conditions he considers appropriate. The purchaser shall be informed of the procedure followed in heat treating the specimens. 11.5.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, tension test specimens may be the full thickness of the material and conform to the requirements for the 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide rectangular tension test specimen of Methods and Definitions A 370 when adequate testing machine capacity is available. 11.4.3 When approved by the purchaser, the procedures of paragraph 11.4.2 may be implemented on plates heat treated by the manufacturer or processor. 11.4.4 When the plate is heat treated with a cooling rate faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing temperature, one of the following shall apply in addition to other requirements specified herein: 11.5.3 For plates over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as permitted in 11.5.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements for the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm] round specimen of Methods and Definitions A 370. The axis of the specimen shall be located, as nearly as practicable, midway between the center of thickness and the top or bottom surface of the plate. 11.4.4.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated edge where T is the thickness of the plate and shall be at least 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] from flame cut or heat-affectedzone surfaces. 11.4.4.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1T by 1T by at least 3T, shall be joined to the plate edge by a partial penetration weld completely sealing the buffered edge prior to heat treatment. 11.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments: 11.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing thin material, adjustments in elongation requirements must be provided for thicknesses under 0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions shall be made from the base elongation requirements in the individual plate specifications: 11.4.4.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall be used during the heat treatment adjacent to the plate edge where specimens are to be removed. It shall be demonstrated that the cooling rate of the tension test specimen is no faster than, and not substantially 90 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm] 0.299–0.311 0.286–0.298 0.273–0.285 0.259–0.272 0.246–0.258 0.233–0.245 0.219–0.232 0.206–0.218 0.193–0.205 0.180–0.192 [7.60–7.89] [7.30–7.59] [7.00–7.29] [6.60–6.99] [6.20–6.59] [5.90–6.19] [5.50–5.89] [5.20–5.49] [4.90–5.19] [4.60–4.89] Elongation Deduction, % 11.7 This specification does not provide requirements for product tension testing subsequent to shipment (see 15.1). Therefore, the requirements of 11.1 through 11.6 and Section 16 apply only for tests conducted at the place of manufacture prior to shipment. Compliance to Specification A 20 /A 20M and the individual material specifications does not preclude the possibility that product tension test results may vary outside specified ranges. The tensile properties will vary within the same plateas-rolled or piece, be it as-rolled, control-rolled, or heattreated. The purchaser should, therefore, be aware that tension testing in accordance with the requirements of Specification A 20 /A 20M does not provide assurance that all products of a plate-as-rolled will be identical in tensile properties with the products tested. If the purchaser wishes to have more confidence than that provided by Specification A 20 /A 20M testing procedures, additional testing or requirements, such as Supplementary Requirement S4, should be imposed. 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 11.6.2 Due to the inherently lower elongation which is obtainable in thicker material, adjustments in elongation requirements in 2 in. [50 mm] gage length must be provided for thicknesses over 3.5 in. [90 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions shall be made from the base elongation requirements in 2 in. [50 mm] listed in the individual plate specifications: Plate Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm] Elongation Deduction, % 3.501–3.999 [90.00–102.49] 4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99] 4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49] 5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99] 5.500–5.999 [140.00–152.49] 6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 11.8 Appendix X2 provides additional information on the variability of tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels. 12. Notch-Toughness Tests 12.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests: 12.1.1 Number of Tests — Except for plates subjected to quenching-and-tempering, and except as specified in 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2, one impact test (3 specimens) for each specified orientation (see 12.1.2) shall be made from each plate-as-rolled. For plates subjected to quenching-and-tempering, one impact test shall be made from each plate-as-heat-treated. 11.6.3 A characteristic of certain types of alloy steels is a local disproportionate increase in the degree of necking down or contraction of the specimens under tension test, resulting in a decrease in the percentage of elongation as the gage length is increased. The effect is not so pronounced in the thicker plates. On such material, when so stated in the material specification for plates up to 3⁄4 in. [20 mm], inclusive, in thickness, if the percentage of elongation of an 8 in. [200 mm] gage length test specimen falls not more than 3% below the amount prescribed, the elongation shall be considered satisfactory provided the percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] across the break is not less than 25%. 12.1.1.1 Plates Ordered Without the Heat Treatment Specified by the Material Specification — When the material specification requires heat treatment but the plates are ordered without such heat treatment, and when Charpy V-notch tests are specified, one coupon shall be taken from each plate-as-rolled. The coupon shall be heat treated in accordance with the material specification and the purchase order and the plate qualified by specimens taken from the heat-treated coupon. 11.6.4 The tensile requirements tables in many of the plate specifications covered by these general requirements specify elongation requirements in both 8 in. [200 mm] and 2 in. [50 mm] gage lengths. Unless otherwise provided in the individual plate specification, it is not the intent that both requirements apply simultaneously and that the elongation be determined in both gage lengths. Instead, it is intended that the elongation be determined only in the gage length appropriate for the test specimen used. After selection of the appropriate gage length, the elongation requirement for the alternative gage length shall be deemed not applicable. 12.1.1.2 Plates Produced from Coils — When the plates are produced from coils and when Charpy V-notch tests are specified, the number of impact tests required shall be the same as the number specified in 11.1.1 for tension tests. The test coupons shall be taken from the material after flattening. 12.1.2 Orientation of Test Specimens — The long axes of the specimens shall be oriented either longitudinal (parallel to the final direction of rolling) or transverse 91 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-20 /SA-20M Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II (transverse to the final direction of rolling) as specified in the material specification or order. 12.1.6.2 When the acceptance criteria is based on lateral expansion opposite the notch, the acceptance value shall be the same for all sizes of specimens. 12.1.3 Location of Test Coupons — The impact test coupons shall be taken adjacent to the tension test coupons. The impact test coupons shall be subject to the same requirements as those specified for tension tests in 11.4 except that the provisions of 11.4.4.1 apply to the area under the notch of the impact test specimen instead of to the gage length of the tension test specimen. 12.1.7 Marking — The letters “LTV” shall be stenciled or stamped on each plate following the class number, grade, etc. 12.1.8 Variability — The impact properties of steel can vary within the same plate-as-rolled or piece, be it as-rolled, control-rolled, or heat-treated. The purchaser should, therefore, be aware that testing of one plate-asrolled does not provide assurance that all locations within a plate-as-rolled will be identical in toughness with the location tested. Normalizing or quenching and tempering the product will reduce the degree of variation. 12.1.4 Test Method — Impact testing shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370 using Charpy V-notch (Type A) specimens as shown in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Except as provided in 12.1.4.1, full-size (10 by 10 mm) specimens shall be used when the plate thickness permits, and their central axis shall correspond as near as practical to the 1⁄4 t plane in the plate thickness t. Where the plate thickness is insufficient to obtain full-size specimens, sub-size specimens shall be used. The sub-size specimens may have a width of full material thickness or may be reduced in thickness to produce the largest possible standard sub-size specimen listed in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 12.1.8.1 Appendix X3 provides additional information on the variability of Charpy V-Notch test properties in plates for pressure vessels. 12.2 Drop-Weight Tests: 12.2.1 When specified, one drop-weight test, consisting of a set of two specimens, shall be made to the same frequency stated in 12.1.1 in accordance with Method E 208. 12.2.2 The test coupons shall be obtained adjacent to a tension test coupon. For plates produced from coils, the test coupon locations shall be the same as for Charpy V-notch tests. (See 12.1.) The provisions of 11.4 shall also apply. 12.1.4.1 For materials that normally have absorbed energy values in excess of 180 ft·lbf [245 J] when tested using full-size specimens at the specified testing temperature, sub-size 0.4 by 0.268 in. [10 by 6.7 mm] specimens may be used in lieu of full-size specimens. However, when this option is used, the acceptance value shall be 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum for each specimen and the lateral expansion in mils [m] shall be reported. 12.2.3 The testing temperature shall be as specified in the material specification or order. 12.2.4 Acceptance shall be on the basis of no-break performance of both specimens at the specified testing temperature. 12.2.5 The plates shall be marked as required in 12.1.7 except that the letters “LTD” shall be used instead of “LTV.” 12.1.5 Test Temperature — The test temperature should be specified on the order. At the supplier’s option, the actual test temperature may be lower than the specified test temperature. When a test temperature is not specified, tests shall be conducted at a temperature no higher than listed in Table A1.15 [A2.15] for the class, grade, and thickness of the material specified. The actual test temperature shall be reported with the test results. 13. Identification of Plates 13.1 Required Markings: 13.1.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, plates shall be legibly marked with the following information: applicable ASTM designation (see 1.1) (year of issue not required); “G” or “MT” if applicable (see 13.1.2); applicable grade, type, and class; heat number; plate identifier; and name, brand, or trademark of the manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete cut lenghts of flat product) or the processor (for plates produced from coil and for subdivided plates (see 13.4)). 12.1.6 Acceptance Criteria — Unless otherwise agreed upon, the acceptance criteria shall be as listed in Table A1.15 [A2.15] for the class, grade, and thickness of the material specified. 12.1.6.1 When the acceptance criteria is based on energy absorption of a full-size specimen, the acceptance criteria for the various sub-size specimens shall be as shown in Table A1.16 [A2.16] except as otherwise provided in 12.1.4.1. 13.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have not been so heat treated, shall be marked by the 92 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS manufacturer or processor with the letter “G” (denoting green) following the required ASTM designation mark, except that “G” marking is not necessary if such plates are for shipment, for the purpose of obtaining the required heat treatment, to an organization under the manufacturer’s control. Such plates shall have been qualified for shipment on the basis of test specimens that have been so heat treated. Plates that are required to be heat treated, and have been so heat treated, shall be marked by the party that performed the heat treatment with the letters “MT” (denoting material treated) following the required ASTM designation mark. 13.5 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements of 13.1 to 13.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of using bar coding as a supplementary identification method. NOTE 2 — Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B 1. 14. Permissible Variations in Dimensions or Mass 14.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel shall be assumed to weigh 490 lb, unless otherwise stated in the material specification. One cubic meter of rolled steel is assumed to have a mass of 7850 kg, unless otherwise stated in the material specification. NOTE 1 — Any stress relief of test specimens intended to simulate post-weld heat treatment is not included in the above heat treatment. 14.2 For carbon steel plates the permissible variations for dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.9, and Table A1.13 [Annex A2, Tables A2.1 to A2.9, and Table A2.13]. 13.2 Types of Marking: 13.2.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for plates over 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] in thickness shall be by steel die stamping, unless paint marking is specified in the purchase order. 14.3 For alloy steel plates the permissible variations for dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.4, A1.8, and A1.10 to A1.13 [Annex A2, Tables A2.1 to A2.4, A2.8, and A2.10 to A2.13]. 13.2.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for plates 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] and under in thickness shall be by paint marking or by steel die stamping using low-stress (either round-nose or interrupted-dot) impressions. 15. Inspection and Testing 15.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. 13.3 Location of Markings: 13.3.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for plates with a maximum lenghtwise or crosswise dimensions more than 72 in. [1800 mm] shall be in at least two places on each finished plate, at least 12 in. [300 mm] from the edges of the plate. 13.3.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for plates with a maximum lenghtwise or crosswise dimensions of 72 in. [1800 mm] or less shall be in at least one place on each finished plate, approximately midway between the center and an edge of the plate. 15.2 When plates are produced from coils, 15.1 shall apply to the “processor” instead of to the “manufacturer” and the “place of process” shall apply instead of the “place of manufacture.” When plates are produced from coils and the processor is different from the manufacturer, the inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. 13.4 Subdivided Plates: 13.4.1 By agreement between the purchaser and the processor, each subdivided plate (a plate separated from a master plate) shall be legibly marked with the name, brand, or trademark of the processor plus a code traceable to the required markings, provided that the information required in 13.1, cross-referenced to that code, is furnished with the plates. 13.4.2 By agreement between the purchaser and the processor, subdivided plates that are from the same master plate and placed in secured lifts shall have the information required in 13.1 paint marked on the top piece of each lift or shown on a substantial tag attached to each lift. 16. Retests 16.1 Tension Tests — In addition to the provisions of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, the following retest provisions shall apply: 93 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-20 /SA-20M Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II 16.1.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining, or develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted. the material may be reheat treated. All mechanical property tests shall be repeated and the plate surface shall be reexamined for defects when the material is resubmitted for inspection. 16.1.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that specified, and any part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] from the center of the gage length of a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen or is outside the middle half of the gage length of an 8 in. [200 mm] specimen as indicated by scribe marks on the specimen before testing, one retest shall be allowed. 18. Rejection 18.1 Any rejection based on product analysis made in accordance with the material specification shall be reported to the supplier and samples that represent the rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the date of notification of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the supplier may make claim for a rehearing within that time. 16.1.3 If the results from an original tension test specimen fail to meet the specified requirements but are within 2 ksi [14 MPa] of the required tensile strength or within 1 ksi [7 MPa] of the required yield strength or yield point, or within 2% points of the required elongation or reduction in area, one retest shall be permitted to replace the failing test. 18.2 Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manufacturer’s or processor’s works may be rejected. In such cases, the manufacturer or processor shall be notified. 16.1.4 The results of the retest shall meet the specified requirements. 19. Test Reports 19.1 The manufacturer or processor shall report the results of all tests required by the material specification, applicable supplementary requirements, and the order. The heat number, the plate identifier of the plate tested, and the nominal plate thickness shall be shown on the test report. The year-date of the specification to which the material is furnished shall be included on the test report. 16.2 Charpy V-Notch Tests: 16.2.1 The retest provisions of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 shall apply except that the 5 ft·lbf [7 J] absolute minimum for an individual specimen, as specified in Test Methods and Definitions A 370, does not apply when two-thirds of the specified minimum average is less than 5 ft·lbf [7 J]. 16.2.2 When Charpy V-notch impact test lateral expansion values are specified, if the value of one specimen falls below the specified minimum value and not below two-thirds of the specified minimum value, and if the average of the three specimens equals or exceeds the specified minimum value, a retest of three additional specimens may be made. Each of the three retest specimens must equal or exceed the specified minimum value. 19.1.1 In reporting elongation values, both the percentage increases and the original gage length shall be stated. 19.2 For plates rolled from a strand-cast slab with a reduction ratio in the range from 2.0:1 to 3.0:1, exclusive, the specific practices (see 5.3.4 and 5.3.6) that were used by the manufacturer shall be reported, and the test reports shall state that the limitations of 5.3 have been met. 16.2.3 If the required values are not obtained on Charpy V-notch retests as specified in 16.2.1 and 16.2.2, or if the values in the initial test are below the values required for retest, no further retests are permitted unless the plate is heat treated or reheat treated. After heat treatment or reheat treatment, a set of three specimens shall be tested and each must equal or exceed the specified minimum value. 19.3 All heat treatment, exclusive of subcritical heating to soften thermally cut edges, shall be reported including temperature ranges and time at temperature. This exclusion does not apply to those materials with specified minimum tensile strengths of 95 ksi [655 MPa] or higher unless such subcritical heating is accomplished at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C] below the minimum tempering temperature. The reports shall state whether the plates only, the test specimens only, or both plates and test specimens were heat treated. 16.2.4 When the option of 12.1.4.1 is used and the test result falls below the 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum specified, another test may be made using full-size specimens. 19.4 When Charpy V-notch tests are specified, the specimen size used shall be reported. 17. Retreatment 17.1 If any heat-treated material fails to meet the mechanical requirements of the applicable specification, 19.5 When required by the purchase order, the manufacturer shall also furnish a certification that the material 94 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M has been manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of the material specification. For plates provided from coils, the processor shall furnish the required certification. the supplier. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the EDI transmission is responsible for the content of the report. 19.6 For plates produced from coils, both the manufacturer and processor shall be identified on the test report. 20. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment 20.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with those procedures recommended by Practices A 700. 19.7 A signature is not required on the test report. However, the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting the report. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the report is responsible for the content of the report. 20.2 For USA Government Procurement — Packaging, packing, and marking of material for military procurement shall be in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-163, Level A, Level C, or commercial as specified in the contract or purchase order. Marking for shipment of material for civil agencies shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123. 19.8 Copies of the original manufacturer’s test report shall be included with any subsequent test report. 19.9 A Material Test Report, Certificate of Inspection, or similar document printed from or used in electronic form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The content of the EDI transmitted document must meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM standard(s) and conform to any existing EDI agreement between the purchaser and 21. Keywords 21.1 general delivery requirement; pressure containing parts; pressure vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for pressure vessel applications 95 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 1 LIMITS ON UNSPECIFIED ELEMENTS (SEE 7.1.1) Copper, max. %A Heat analysis Product analysis 0.40 0.43 Nickel, max. %A Heat analysis Product analysis 0.40 0.43 Chromium, max. %A,B Heat analysis Product analysis 0.30 0.34 Heat analysis Product analysis 0.12 0.13 Vanadium, max. %C Heat analysis Product analysis 0.03 0.04 Columbium, max. %D Heat analysis Product analysis 0.02 0.03 Titanium, max. %E Heat analysis Product analysis 0.03 0.04 Molybdenum, max. % A,B TABLE 2 MAXIMUM CARBON EQUIVALENT FOR WELDABILITY Specified Minimum UTS ksi [MPa] NOTES: A The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00% on heat analysis. When one or more of these elements are specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only the individual limits on the remaining unspecified elements will apply. B The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32% on heat anaylsis. When one or more of these elements are specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only the individual limits on the remaining unspecified elements will apply. C By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.10%, and the product analysis limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.11%. D By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for columbium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.05%, and the product analysis limit for columbium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.06%. E By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for titanium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.04%, and the product analysis limit for titanium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.05%. Thickness up to 2 in. [50 mm] Incl. Thickness Over 2 in. [50 mm] 60 ≤ UTS < 70 [415 ≤ UTS < 485] 0.45 0.46 70 ≤ UTS < 80 [485 ≤ UTS < 550] 0.47 0.48A UTS ≥ 80 [UTS ≥ 550] 0.48A,B ... NOTES: A If simulated PWHT of the test coupons is specified (S3), the maximum carbon equivalent value may be increased up to 0.50 upon agreement between purchaser and supplier. B Applicable to quenched-and-tempered material; for other conditions, maximum carbon equivalent shall be by agreement between purchaser and supplier. 96 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Maximum Carbon Equivalent Value Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Specified Thickness, in. Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in. 48 to 60, Excl. 1 To ⁄4, excl. 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, incl. 60 to 72, Excl. 3 15 9 3 ⁄4 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 72 to 84, Excl. Z 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 84 to 96, Excl. Z 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 96 to 108, Excl. 108 to 120, Incl. Z 11⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 Z 11⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in. NOTE 4 — The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts shown in the table below. NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 6 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply. NOTE 7 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size. NOTE 8 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. TABLE 4 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm Specified Thickness, mm 1200 to 1500, Excl. 1500 to 1800, Excl. 1800 to 2100, Excl. 2100 to 2400, Excl. 2400 to 2700, Excl. 2700 to 3000, Incl. To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, excl. 18 15 8 7 7 7 24 18 8 8 8 7 Z 22 10 8 8 7 Z 24 11 10 8 8 Z 27 13 13 10 8 Z 29 15 13 11 8 NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. NOTE 4 — The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts shown in the table below. NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 6 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply. NOTE 7 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size. NOTE 8 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. 97 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Specified Thickness, in. To 1⁄4, excl. 1 ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, incl. Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 48 to 60, Excl. 60 to 72, Excl. 72 to 84, Excl. 84 to 96, Excl. 96 to 108, Excl. 108 to 120, Incl. 11⁄16 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 17⁄16 11⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 Z 15⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 Z 17⁄16 11 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 Z 11⁄2 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 Z 111⁄16 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 3⁄8 in. NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 5 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply. NOTE 6 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size. NOTE 7 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. TABLE 6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm Specified Thickness, mm 1200 to 1500, Excl. 1500 to 1800, Excl. 1800 to 2100, Excl. 2100 to 2400, Excl. 2400 to 2700, Excl. 2700 to 3000, Incl. To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, excl. 27 22 12 11 11 10 36 27 12 11 11 11 Z 33 15 13 12 11 Z 36 17 15 13 12 Z 39 19 16 15 13 Z 43 21 18 17 13 NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 10 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 10 mm. NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the variations for flatness of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 5 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply. NOTE 6 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size. NOTE 7 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. 98 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the purchaser. Several of those that are considered suitable for use with each material specification are listed in the specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser. These supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the order, in which event the specified tests shall be made by the supplier before shipment of the plates. S1. Vacuum Treatment S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process which includes vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select suitable process procedures. additional tests with specified properties shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S2. Product Analysis S2.1 A product analysis shall be made of each plate as rolled. The specimens for analysis shall be taken adjacent to or from a broken tension-test specimen. S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with 12.1. S4.3 For plates produced from coils, the additional tension test shall be taken immediately after the last plate produced to the qualifying specification. S5.2 The orientation of the test bars, whether longitudinal or transverse to the direction of rolling, shall be as stated on the order. S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test Coupons S3.1 Prior to testing, the test specimens representing the plate for acceptance purposes for mechanical properties shall be thermally treated to simulate a post-weld heat treatment below the critical temperature (Ac3), using the heat treatment parameters (such as temperature range, time, and cooling rates) specified in the order. The test results of such heat-treated test specimens shall meet the applicable product specfication requirements. S5.3 The test temperature and the required acceptance criteria, if other than those required in 12.1, shall be as stated on the order. S5.4 The recorded results shall include test-bar orientation, specimen size, test temperature, absorbed energy values, and, when specified on the order for other than Class VI material, lateral expansion opposite the notch. The percent shear fracture appearance shall also be recorded when specified on the order. S6. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Drop-Weight Test (for Plates 0.625 in. [16 mm] and Over in Thickness) S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Test Method E 208. The specimens shall represent the plates in the final condition of heat treatment. Agreement shall be reached between the purchaser and the manufacturer or processor as to the number of plates to be tested and whether a maximum NDT temperature is mandatory or if the test results are for information only. S4. Additional Tension Test S4.1 Other Than Quenched-and-Tempered Plates — In addition to the required single-tension test, a second tension test shall be made on a specimen taken from a corner of the plate-as-rolled on the end opposite the single specimen and in a direction parallel to the single specimen. The results obtained on testing this second specimen shall conform to the requirements of the specification. S4.2 Quenched-and-Tempered Plates 2 in. [50 mm] or Greater in Thickness — In addition to the required tension tests, two additional specimens shall be taken from the bottom corner of the plate. One shall be taken at the center of the plate thickness and the other immediately beneath the surface. Mandatory conformance of these S7. High-Temperature Tension Tests S7.1 A short-time elevated temperature tension test shall be made to represent each plate or each heat of steel 99 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II as indicated by the purchaser. The material for testing shall be obtained as required for the room temperature tension tests specified in the body of the specification. The hot tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Practice E 21. Mandatory conformance of these additional tests with specified properties shall be a matter for agreement between the manufacturer or processor and the purchaser. A 578 /A 578M. The acceptance level shall be as specified on the order. S13. NDT Temperature Determination S13.1 The NDT temperature shall be established in accordance with Method E 208 using coupons from a single plate. The number of plates to be so tested shall be subject to agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer or processor. S8. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A 435 /A435M S8.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the requirements of Specification A 435 /A 435M. S15. Reduction of Area Measurement S15.1 A reduction of area measurement shall be taken while making the required tension test. Reduction of area shall be determined only on the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm] round specimen as shown in Fig. 5 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The minimum acceptance limit shall be 40%. S9. Magnetic Particle Examination S9.1 All plate edges shall be examined by magnetic particles in accordance with the procedures covered in Practice E 709. The acceptability of defects revealed by this examination shall be judged in accordance with the requirements for quality in 9.3. S16. Thermal Stress Relief of Mechanical Test Coupons S16.1 Test coupons representing the plates shall be thermally stress relieved by gradually and uniformly heating them to a temperature between 1100 and 1200°F [595 and 650°C], or a temperature range otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer or processor and the purchaser, holding at temperature for at least 1 h /in. [2.4 min /mm] of thickness and cooling in still air to a temperature not exceeding 600°F [315°C]. S10. Charpy V-Notch Impact Transition Curve S10.1 Sufficient impact tests of the same specimen size shall be made from the plate test material to establish a transition curve. The test temperature range shall be wide enough to establish the upper and lower shelf energies, with sufficient testing at intermediate temperatures to permit plotting a reasonable smooth curve. A plot of the data is not required. The manufacturer shall report the specimen orientation, test temperature, and absorbed energy for each specimen tested. Lateral expansion and percent shear shall also be reported when specified in the order. The number of plates tested and the specimen orientation shall be the same as in 12.1 unless otherwise specified in the order. S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel S17.1 Material shall be vacuum carbon-deoxidized, in which case the silicon content at the time of vacuum deoxidizing shall be 0.12% maximum, and the content of deoxidizers such as aluminum, zirconium, and titanium should be kept low enough to allow deoxidation by carbon. The test report shall indicate that the steel was vacuum carbon-deoxidized. The minimum heat analysis and product analysis requirements for silicon do not apply to vacuum carbon-deoxidized steel. S11. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A 577 /A 577M S11.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the requirements of Specification A 577 /A 577M. S19. Restricted Chemical Requirements S19.1 Restricted heat analysis and product analysis limits are applicable as defined on the order. S12. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A 578 /A 578M S12.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the requirements of Specification S20. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability S20.1 Plates shall be supplied with a specific maximum carbon equivalent value. This value shall be based 100 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS on heat analysis. The required chemical analysis as well as the carbon equivalent shall be reported. S25. SA-20 /SA-20M Weldability S25.1 Weldability tests shall be conducted. The type of test and the acceptance criteria shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. S20.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using the following formula: CE p C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15 S20.3 The maximum value of the carbon equivalent for carbon steels (including C-Mn, C-Mn-Si, C-Mn-SiAl steels), are given in Table 2. S26. Low-Sulfur Steels S26.1 The steel shall be made to 0.010% sulfur maximum. Lower sulfur levels and sulfide shape control practices can be specified by agreement between purchaser and supplier. S21. Restricted Unspecified Elements S21.1 The maximum limits on certain elements are 0.35% Cu, 0.25% Ni, 0.25% Cr, and 0.08% Mo on heat analysis. The sum of Cu, Ni, Cr, and Mo shall not exceed 0.70% on heat analysis. S27. Restrictive Plate Flatness S27.1 Carbon steel plates, as-rolled or normalized, shall conform to the permissible restrictive variations from flatness as detailed in Table 3 or 4. S22. Through-Thickness Tension Tests S22.1 Through-thickness tension tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Specification A 770 /A 770M. (See Ordering Information in Specification A 770 /A 770M for the additional information that may be needed.) S27.2 High-strength low-alloy steel plates, as-rolled or normalized, shall conform to the permissible restrictive variations from flatness as detailed in Table 5 or 6. S28. Heat Treatment in the Working Zone of a Surveyed Furnace S28.1 Plates shall be heat treated in the working zone of a furnace that has been surveyed in accordance with Test Method A 991 /A 991M, provided that such working zone was established using a variation of 25°F [15°C] or less from the furnace set point. S24. Strain Age Test S24.1 Test coupons shall be given a strain age treatment designated by the purchaser. Charpy V-notch tests shall be conducted on the strain aged specimens. Heat treatment, strain aging, test temperature, and acceptance criteria shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. S28.2 The test report shall indicate that S28 applies. 101 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II ANNEXES (Mandatory Information) --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- A1. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS, ETC. — INCH-POUND UNITS A1.1 Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions, and notch toughness information, expressed in inch-pound units of measurement. 102 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 103 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.23 0.29 0.29 To 1⁄4, excl. 1 ⁄4 to 5⁄16, excl. 5 ⁄16 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 7⁄16, excl. 7 ⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 5⁄8, excl. 5 ⁄8 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, excl. 2 to 3, excl. 3 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 15, incl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.29 0.29 Over 48 to 60, Excl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 60 to 72, Excl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 72 to 84, Excl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.11 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 84 to 96, Excl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 96 to 108, Excl. 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.12 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 108 to 120, Excl. 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.10 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 120 to 132, Excl. Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given, in. 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.10 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.24 0.33 0.35 132 to 144, Excl. ... ... 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.11 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.27 0.33 0.35 144 to 168, Excl. ... ... ... 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.28 0.35 0.35 168 to 182, Excl. ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.07 0.09 0.16 ... ... ... ... ... ... 182 and Over NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in. NOTE 2 — Thickness to be measured at 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. from the longitudinal edge. NOTE 3 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over-tolerance shall be increased by 75%, rounded to the nearest 0.01 in. 48 and Under Specified Thickness, in. TABLE A1.1 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OVER IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES (NOTE 1) AND LENGTH ONLY FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES (NOTE 2) Variations Over Specified Width and Length for Thicknesses, Given in. To 3⁄8, Excl. Specified Dimensions, in. Length To 120, excl. 120 to 240, excl. 240 to 360, excl. 360 to 480, excl. 480 to 600, excl. 600 to 720, excl. 720 and over Width 3 ⁄8 to 5⁄8, Excl. 5 ⁄8 to 1, Excl. 1 to 2, Incl.A Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 3 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 1 5 1 3 5 7 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 7 5 1 5 7 3 1 11⁄8 1 11⁄8 1 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 3 ⁄8 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 3 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 3 1 1 1 11⁄8 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 1 ⁄8 ⁄2 1 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 ⁄2 1 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄2 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 3 5 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 1 7 ⁄8 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 11⁄8 7 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 5 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 ⁄4 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 15⁄8 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 1 11⁄4 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 3 5 3 1 3 1 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 1 11⁄4 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 1 11⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 13⁄4 15⁄8 15⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 7 ⁄16 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 15⁄8 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 1 ⁄2 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4 5 ⁄8 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 2 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 21⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄2 over 8 to 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 9 2 2 2 2 3 21⁄8 21⁄8 21⁄8 23⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 11⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄2 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 23⁄4 23⁄4 23⁄4 3 1 5 ⁄16 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 3 1 5 3 1 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 7 3 1 7 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 7 NOTE 1 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 11⁄2 in. and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 11⁄4 in. and under in thickness. NOTE 2 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 21⁄2 in. and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 2 in. and under in thickness. NOTE 3 — Permissible variation under specified width and length: 1⁄4 in. A Permissible variations in length apply also to carbon-steel and high-strength low-alloy steel universal mill plates up to 12 in. in width for thicknesses over 2 to 21⁄2 in., incl. 104 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE A1.3 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 15 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Variations Over Specified Width for Thicknesses Given, in. Specified Width, in. Over 8 to 20, excl. 20 to 36, excl. 36 and over To 3⁄8, Excl. 3 ⁄8 to 5⁄8, Excl. 1 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 ⁄8 to 1, Excl. Over 2 to 10, Incl. 1 to 2, Incl. 3 ⁄8 ⁄4 3 ⁄8 1 ⁄16 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 3 5 3 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 3 7 NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified width shall be 1⁄8 in. TABLE A1.4 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 1 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Permissible Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in. Specified Diameter, in. 3 3 To ⁄8, Excl. To 32, excl. 32 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 to 130, incl. ⁄8 to 5⁄8, Excl. 1 3 5 7 ⁄4 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 to 1, Incl. 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 ⁄2 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 9 NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter. TABLE A1.5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED Specified Thickness, in. Variations Over for All Specified Widths or Lengths, in. 1 To 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl. 8 to 15, incl. ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 5 NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. 105 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Over 10 to 15, Incl. 1 ⁄2 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 9 SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in. Specified Diameter, in. To 1, Excl. 1 to 2, Excl. 3 3 To 32, excl. 32 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 to 130, excl. 130 and over 2 to 4, Excl. ⁄8 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 ⁄2 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 1 3 1 4 to 6, Excl. 6 to 8, Excl. 1 ⁄8 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 5 NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter. TABLE A1.7 PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES ALL THICKNESSES Maximum permissible camber, in. p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of length/5) NOTE 1 — Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. TABLE A1.8 PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES Dimension, in. Thickness Camber for Thickness and Widths Given Width ⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of length/5) 3 ⁄16 in. ⴛ (number of feet of length/5) 1 ⁄4 in. ⴛ (number of feet of length/5) 1 To 2, incl. all Over 2 to 15, incl. to 30, incl. Over 2 to 15, incl. over 30 106 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 8 to 15, Incl. 5 3 3 7 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS ⁄16 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 9 1 ⁄4 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 3 36 to 48, Excl. ⁄16 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 3 15 48 to 60, Excl. 11⁄4 15 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 60 to 72, Excl. 13⁄8 11⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 72 to 84, Excl. 11⁄2 11⁄4 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 84 to 96, Excl. 15⁄8 13⁄8 1 1 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 1 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 96 to 108, Excl. 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄8 1 7 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 17⁄8 15⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 11 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 ... ... 17⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄8 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 1 1 108 to 120, 120 to 144, 144 to 168, Excl. Excl. Excl. Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in. ... ... 21⁄8 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄8 1 1 1 1 ... 168 and Over NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in. NOTE 4 — The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60,000 psi or compatible chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the limits given in the table are increased to 11⁄2 times the amounts in the above table. NOTE 5 — This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 6 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. To 1⁄4, excl. ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl. 8 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 15, incl. 1 Specified Thickness, in. Over 8 to 36, Excl. TABLE A1.9 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON-STEEL PLATES PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 107 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.10 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED Variations Over for All Specified Widths and Lengths, in. Specified Thickness, in. 3 ⁄4 1 11⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄2 To 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl. 8 to 15, incl. NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. TABLE A1.11 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in. Specified Diameter, in. To 32, excl. 32 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 to 130, incl. To 1, Excl. 1 ⁄2 ⁄2 5 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 1 1 to 2, Excl. 2 to 4, Excl. 3 3 5 7 ⁄4 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 4 to 6, Excl. 6 to 8, Excl. 8 to 15, Incl. 3 ⁄4 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 1 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter. 108 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ⁄16 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 3 13 Over 8 to 36, Excl. 11⁄8 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 9 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 36 to 48, Excl. 13⁄8 11⁄8 15 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 11⁄8 13⁄16 48 to 60, Excl. 17⁄8 13⁄8 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 13 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 1 1 ⁄4 15⁄16 60 to 72, Excl. 2 13⁄4 11⁄8 1 15 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 1 11⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄8 72 to 84, Excl. 21⁄4 17⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄8 1 15 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 84 to 96, Excl. 23⁄8 2 11⁄2 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 15 ⁄16 11⁄4 15⁄16 11⁄2 11⁄2 96 to 108, Excl. 25⁄8 21⁄4 15⁄8 13⁄8 15⁄16 1 7 ⁄8 11⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 108 to 120, Excl. 23⁄4 23⁄8 17⁄8 15⁄8 11⁄2 1 1 11⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 120 to 144, Excl. ... ... 23⁄4 21⁄4 2 15⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 144 to 168, Excl. ... ... 31⁄8 3 25⁄8 21⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 168 and Over NOTE 1 — Flatness Tolerance for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Tolerances for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the variations for flatness of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 5 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. To 1⁄4, excl. ⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl. 3 ⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl. 1 ⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl. 3 ⁄4 to 1, excl. 1 to 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl. 8 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 15, incl. 1 Specified Thickness, in. Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in. TABLE A1.12 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M 109 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A1.13 WAVINESS TOLERANCES FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES, UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES, AND CIRCULAR AND SKETCH PLATES Flatness Tolerance from Tables A1.9 and A1.12 When Number of Waves in 12 ft is: 5 ⁄16 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 1⁄8 1 1⁄4 1 3⁄8 1 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 1 7⁄8 2 2 1⁄8 2 1⁄4 2 3⁄8 2 1⁄2 2 5⁄8 2 3⁄4 2 7⁄8 3 3 1⁄8 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 1 ⁄4 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1⁄16 1 1⁄8 1 1⁄4 1 5⁄16 1 7⁄16 1 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 111⁄16 113⁄16 1 7⁄8 2 2 1⁄16 2 3⁄16 2 1⁄4 2 3⁄8 3 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 1⁄16 1 1⁄8 1 3⁄16 1 1⁄4 1 5⁄16 1 7⁄16 1 1⁄2 1 9⁄16 1 5⁄8 111⁄16 1 3⁄4 1 ⁄8 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 1⁄16 1 1⁄8 1 1⁄8 1 3⁄16 1 1⁄4 1 5⁄16 1 ⁄8 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 ⁄16 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 3 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 7 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 1 1 1⁄8 1 1⁄4 1 3⁄8 1 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 1 7⁄8 2 2 1⁄8 2 1⁄4 2 3⁄8 2 1⁄2 2 5⁄8 2 3⁄4 2 7⁄8 3 3 1⁄8 3 3 5 3 3 7 1 1 1 ⁄16 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄16 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 1 ⁄8 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 5 ⁄16 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 3 ⁄8 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 7 ⁄16 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 9 ⁄16 1 1 NOTE 1 — Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured in an increment of less than 12 ft of length. The waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A1.9 and A1.12. TABLE A1.14 VISIBLE EDGE INDICATIONS EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY PARALLEL TO ROLLED SURFACES Acceptable Acceptable on Edges Cut in Fabrication Remove by Grinding Plate Specification and Thickness Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 any any any over 1⁄8 in. to 1⁄4 in., incl. over 1⁄16 in. to 1⁄8 in., incl. over 1⁄8 in. to 1⁄2 in., incl. over 1 in. over 1 in. over 1 in. ⁄4 in. max. ⁄8 in. max. 1 ⁄2 in. max. any any any Nonkilled,B to 2 in., incl. Killed,C to 6 in., incl. Killed,C over 6 in. 1 ⁄8 in. max. ⁄16 in. max. 1 ⁄8 in. max. 1 A Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration. Specifications: A 285; A 433; A 442 in thicknesses to 1 in., incl.; or A 455. C The specification in 1.1 of this standard other than those listed in footnote B of the preceding table. B 110 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1 1 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 13 13 I II III 15 10 ClassB IV Average For 3 SpecimensC ft-lbf, Min. Energy Absorption 12 10 10 7 Minimum For 1 SpecimenC ft-lbf Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch 111 Not for Resale A 203 A 203 A 203 A 299 A 516 A 537 A 537 A 662 A 203 A 203 A 442 A 442 A 516 A 516 A 516 A 537 A 662 A 662 A 455 Grade 70 Class 1 (21⁄2 in. max.) Class 2 (Over 21⁄2–4 in.) Grade C Grade B Grade E Grade F (4 in. max.) Grade A Grade D Grade 55 (11⁄2 in. max. thickness) Grade 60 (11⁄2 in. max. thickness) Grade 55 Grade 60 Grade 65 Class 1 (Over 21⁄2–4 in.) Grade A Grade B A 285 Grade A A 285 Grade B A 285 Grade C Specification and GradeA −90 −150 ... +20 −50 −80 ... −50 −90 −150 ... ... −60 −60 −60 ... −75 −60 +25 +40 +50 +60 1 in. and Under −90 −150 ... +30 −40 −75 ... −50 −90 −150 −20 −15 −60 −50 −50 ... −75 −60 ... +60 +70 +80 Over 1 in. to 2 in., Incl. −75 −125 −160 +30 −30 −75 −75 ... −75 −125 ... ... −50 −50 −40 −75 ... ... ... ... ... ... Over 2 in. to 3 in., Incl. Test Temperature, °F for Plate Thicknesses (Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon) TABLE A1.15 GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION) ... ... −160 +40 −20 ... −50 ... ... ... ... ... −50 −50 −25 −50 ... ... ... ... ... ... Over 3 in. to 5 in., Incl. PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS V 112 Not for Resale 15 15 Minimum For 1 SpecimenC ft-lbf A 353 A 553 A 553 A 645 A 517 A 724 all (21⁄2 in. max. thickness) Grade B Type I Type II A 203 Grade F A 537 Class 2 (21⁄2 in. max.) A 612 A 724 Grade A Specification and GradeA B Testing temperature as specified on order but no higher than 32°F. Class I is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower. Class II is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi. Class III is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower. Class IV is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi. Class V is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 75 ksi to but not including 95 ksi. Class VI is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 95 ksi and over. C Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens. A Lateral Expansion Mils. Minimum Each Specimen Transverse Test 20 ClassB Energy Absorption Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch Average For 3 SpecimensC ft-lbf, Min. VI --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- −320 −320 −275 −275 A ... A −50 −160 −90 ... ... Over 1 in. to 2 in., Incl. −320 −320 −275 −275 −160 −90 −50 −50 1 in. and Under ... ... ... ... ... ... ... −90 ... ... Over 2 in. to 3 in., Incl. Test Temperature, °F for Plate Thicknesses (Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon) TABLE A1.15 (CONT’D) GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Over 3 in. to 5 in., Incl. SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE A1.16 CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR VARIOUS SUB-SIZE SPECIMENSA Full Size, 10 by 10 mm 3 2 ⁄4 Size, 10 by 7.5 mm 1 ⁄3 Size, 10 by 6.7 mm 1 ⁄2 Size, 10 by 5 mm ⁄3 Size, 10 by 3.3 mm 1 ⁄4 Size, 10 by 2.5 mm ft-lbf [J] ft-lbf [J] ft-lbf [J] ft-lbf [J] ft-lbf [J] ft-lbf [J] 40 35 30 25 20 16 15 13 12 10 7 [54] [48] [41] [34] [27] [22] [20] [18] [16] [14] [10] 30 26 22 19 15 12 11 10 9 8 5 [41] [35] [30] [26] [20] [16] [15] [14] [12] [11] [7] 27 23 20 17 13 11 10 9 8 7 5 [37] [31] [27] [23] [18] [15] [14] [12] [11] [10] [7] 20 18 15 12 10 8 8 6 6 5 4 [27] [24] [20] [16] [14] [11] [11] [8] [8] [7] [5] 13 12 10 8 7 5 5 4 4 3 2 [18] [16] [14] [11] [10] [7] [7] [5] [5] [4] [3] 10 9 8 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 [14] [12] [11] [8] [7] [5] [5] [4] [4] [3] [3] A Interpolation shall be made for specimens with widths intermediate of those listed. Interpolated values shall be rounded to the nearest whole number as prescribed in Practice E 29. TABLE A1.17 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE CARBON STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS Variations Over Specified Width, in.A Specified Width, in. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- To 14 17 19 21 24 26 28 35 50 60 65 70 80 7 14, excl. to 17, excl. to 19, excl. to 21, excl. to 24, excl. to 26, excl. to 28, excl. to 35, excl. to 50, excl. to 60, excl. to 65, excl. to 70, excl. to 80, excl. and over ⁄16 ⁄2 9 ⁄16 5 ⁄8 11 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 15 ⁄16 1 1⁄8 1 1⁄4 1 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 1 7⁄8 2 1 NOTE 1 — Applies to either plates produced from coils or plates produced in discrete cut lengths of flat product. A No permissible variation under specified width. 113 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale ,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II A2. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS, ETC. — SI UNITS A2.1 Listed herein are permissible variations in dimensions, and notch toughness information, expressed in SI units. TABLE A2.1 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimeters, mm Specified Thickness, mm 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 25.0 28.0 30.0 32.0 35.0 38.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0 150.0 160.0 180.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 Over 1200 to 1200 and 1500, Under Excl. 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 5.8 7.5 7.5 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 5.8 7.5 7.5 1500 to 1800, Excl. 1800 to 2100, Excl. 2100 to 2400, Excl. 2400 to 2700, Excl. 2700 to 3000, Excl. 3000 to 3300, Excl. 3300 to 3600, Excl. 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 3600 to 4200, 4200 and Excl. Over ... ... 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.4 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 6.3 7.0 7.5 9.0 ... ... ... ... ... 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 6.3 7.0 8.8 9.0 ... ... NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm. NOTE 2 — Thickness shall be measured 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge. NOTE 3 — For specified thicknesses other than those shown, the tolerances for the next higher thickness shall apply. NOTE 4 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over tolerance shall be increased by 75%, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm. 114 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE A2.2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OVER IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES (NOTE 1) AND LENGTH ONLY FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES (NOTE 2) Variations Over Specified Width and Length for Thicknesses Given, mm Specified Dimensions, mm To 10, Excl. Length Width 10 to 16, Excl. 16 to 25, Excl. Width Length Width Length Width Length 25 to 50, Incl.A Width Length To 3,000 excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 10 11 13 16 13 16 19 22 11 13 16 19 16 17 22 25 13 16 19 22 19 22 25 29 16 19 25 29 25 25 29 32 3,000 to 6,000 excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 10 13 14 16 19 19 22 25 13 16 17 19 22 22 24 29 16 19 21 22 25 25 29 32 19 22 25 29 29 32 35 35 6,000 to 9,000, excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 10 13 14 17 25 25 25 29 13 16 17 22 29 29 32 32 16 19 22 25 32 32 35 35 19 22 25 32 38 38 38 44 9,000 to 12,000, excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 11 13 14 19 29 32 32 35 13 16 19 22 32 35 35 38 16 19 22 25 35 38 38 41 19 22 25 32 41 41 48 48 12,000 to 15,000, excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 11 13 16 19 32 35 35 38 13 16 19 22 38 38 38 41 16 19 22 25 41 41 41 44 19 22 25 32 48 48 48 48 15,000 to 18,000, excl. To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 13 16 16 22 44 44 44 44 16 19 19 25 48 48 48 51 19 22 22 29 48 48 48 57 22 25 29 32 57 57 57 64 18,000 and over To 1500, excl. 1500 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 and over 14 19 19 25 51 51 51 51 19 22 22 29 54 54 54 60 22 25 25 32 57 57 57 64 25 29 32 35 70 70 70 76 NOTE 1 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 40 mm and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 30 mm and under in thickness. NOTE 2 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 65 mm and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 50 mm and under in thickness. NOTE 3 — Permissible variation under in specified width and length: 6 mm. A Permissible variations in length apply also to carbon-steel and high-strength low-alloy steel universal mill plates up to 300 mm in width for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl. 115 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.3 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 400 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS Variations Over Specified Width for Thickness Given, mm Specified Width, mm Over 200 to 500, excl. 500 to 900, excl. 900 and over To 10, Excl. 10 to 16, Excl. 16 to 25, Excl. 25 to 50, Excl. Over 50 to 250, Incl. Over 250 to 400, Incl. 3 5 8 3 6 10 5 8 11 6 10 13 10 11 14 13 14 16 GENERAL NOTE: Permissible variation under specified width shall be 3 mm. TABLE A2.4 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 25 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS TABLE A2.6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mm Permissible Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mm Specified Diameters, mm To 800, excl. 800 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 to 3300, excl. 3300 and over To 10, Excl. 10 to 16, Excl. 16 to 25, Incl. 6 8 10 11 13 10 11 13 14 16 13 14 16 17 19 Specified Diameters, mm To 800, excl. 800 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 to 3300, excl. 3300 and over TABLE A2.5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED Specified Thickness, mm To 50, excl. 50 to 100, excl. 100 to 150, excl. 150 to 200, excl. 200 to 400, incl. 13 16 19 22 25 10 13 14 14 19 13 13 16 17 22 13 16 19 22 25 16 19 22 25 29 19 22 25 29 32 TABLE A2.7 PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES ALL THICKNESSES Maximum permissible camber, mm p length in millimeters/500 GENERAL NOTE: Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. 116 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 10 10 13 13 16 GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified diameter. GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified diameter. Variations Over for All Specified Widths or Lengths, mm 25 to 50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to To 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400, Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE A2.8 PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES Camber for Width Given, mm Width, mm To 750, incl. Over 750 to 1500 Length/300 Length/250 GENERAL NOTE: Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. TABLE A2.9 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON-STEEL PLATES Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm Specified Thickness, mm To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, excl. 50 to 100, excl. 100 to 150, excl. 150 to 200, excl. 200 to 250, excl. 250 to 300, excl. 300 to 400, incl. To 900, Excl. 900 to 1200 1200 to 1500 1500 to 1800 1800 to 2100 2100 to 2400 2400 to 2700 2700 to 3000 3000 to 3600 14 13 13 11 11 10 8 10 11 13 13 16 19 16 14 13 13 13 10 11 13 13 16 19 24 19 16 14 14 13 11 13 13 16 19 21 32 24 16 16 16 14 13 13 16 18 21 22 35 29 19 16 16 14 13 14 18 19 22 24 38 32 22 19 16 16 13 14 19 21 24 25 41 35 25 25 19 16 13 16 22 22 25 25 44 38 29 25 22 16 14 19 22 24 25 25 48 41 32 29 25 18 16 22 25 25 25 25 3600 to 4200 and 4200 Over ... ... 48 38 35 29 22 22 25 25 25 25 ... ... 54 51 44 38 29 25 25 25 25 ... NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. NOTE 4 — The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 400 MPa or compatible chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the limits given in the table are increased to 11⁄2 times the amounts in the above table. NOTE 5 — This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 6 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. 117 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.10 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR RECTANGULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED Specified Thickness, mm Variations Over for All Specified Widths and Lengths, mm To 50, excl. 50 to 100, excl. 100 to 150, excl. 150 to 200, excl. 200 to 400, incl. 19 25 29 33 38 TABLE A2.11 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mm Specified Diameter, mm To 800, excl. 800 to 2100, excl. 2100 to 2700, excl. 2700 to 3300, incl. NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. 25 to 50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to To 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400, Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Incl. 13 13 16 22 13 16 19 25 19 22 25 29 19 25 29 32 25 29 32 35 25 32 35 38 GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified diameter. TABLE A2.12 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES Flatness Tolerances for Specified Widths, mm To 900, Excl. 900 to 1200 1200 to 1500 1500 to 1800 1800 to 2100 2100 to 2400 2400 to 2700 2700 to 3000 3000 to 3600 To 6, excl. 6 to 10, excl. 10 to 12, excl. 12 to 20, excl. 20 to 25, excl. 25 to 50, excl. 50 to 100, excl. 100 to 150, excl. 150 to 200, excl. 200 to 250, excl. 250 to 300, excl. 300 to 400, incl. 21 19 19 16 16 14 13 14 16 19 19 22 29 24 22 19 19 16 14 18 19 21 24 25 35 29 24 21 22 19 18 19 19 24 29 30 48 35 24 22 22 21 19 19 24 25 32 33 51 44 29 25 24 22 19 22 25 29 33 35 57 48 33 29 25 24 19 22 29 32 35 38 60 51 38 32 29 25 19 24 32 33 38 38 67 57 41 35 33 25 22 29 33 35 38 38 70 60 48 41 38 25 25 32 38 38 38 38 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Specified Thickness, mm 3600 to 4200 and 4200 Over ... ... 70 57 51 41 32 32 38 38 38 38 ... ... 79 76 67 57 41 38 38 38 38 38 NOTE 1 — Flatness Tolerances for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length and variations from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2 — Flatness Tolerances for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation shall not exceed 10 mm. When the larger dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 4 — This table and notes cover the tolerances for flatness of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 5 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. 118 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE A2.13 WAVINESS TOLERANCES FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES, UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND CIRCULAR AND SKETCH PLATES Flatness Tolerance from Tables A2.9 and A2.12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 24 25 29 32 35 38 41 44 48 51 54 57 60 64 67 70 73 76 79 8 10 11 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 24 25 29 32 35 38 41 44 48 51 54 57 60 64 67 70 73 76 79 6 8 8 10 11 13 13 14 16 17 17 19 22 24 27 29 32 33 37 38 41 43 46 48 51 52 56 57 60 5 5 6 8 8 10 10 11 11 13 13 14 16 17 19 22 24 25 27 29 30 32 33 37 38 40 41 43 44 3 5 5 5 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 11 13 13 14 16 17 19 21 22 22 24 25 27 29 29 30 32 33 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 10 10 11 13 13 14 14 16 17 17 19 21 21 22 24 24 25 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 10 10 11 11 13 13 14 14 14 16 16 17 17 19 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 11 11 11 13 13 14 14 When Number of Waves in 4000 mm is: GENERAL NOTE: Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured in an increment of less than 4000 mm of length. The waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A2.9 and A2.12. 119 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.14 VISIBLE EDGE INDICATIONS EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY PARALLEL TO ROLLED SURFACES Acceptable Acceptable on Edges Cut in Fabrication Remove by Grinding Plate Specification and Thickness Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 Nonkilled,B to 50 mm, incl. Killed,C to 150 mm, incl. Killed,C over 150 mm 3 mm, max. 2 mm, max. 3 mm, max. any any any over 3 to 6 mm, incl. over 2 to 3 mm, incl. over 3 to 13 mm, incl. over 25 mm over 25 mm over 25 mm 6 mm max. 3 mm max. 13 mm max. any any any A Laminar-type discontinuities 25 mm and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration. Specifications: A 285; A 433; A 442 in thicknesses to 25 mm, incl., or A 455. C The specifications in 1.1 Scope of this document other than those listed in the above footnote B. B TABLE A2.15 GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION) Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch Test Temperature, °C, for Plate Thicknesses (Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon) Energy Absorption Average for 3 SpecimensB, J, Min. Minimum for 1 SpecimenB, J I 14 10 II 18 III 18 ClassA IV 20 25 mm and Under Over 25 mm to 50 mm, Incl. Over 50 mm to 75 mm, Incl. Over 75 mm to 125 mm, Incl. A 285 Grade A A 285 Grade B A 285 Grade C +4 +10 +16 +16 +21 +27 ... ... ... ... ... ... 14 A 455 −4 ... ... ... 14 A 203 Grade A A 203 Grade D A 442 Grade 55 (38 mm max. thickness) A 442 Grade 60 (38 mm max. thickness) A 516 Grade 55 A 516 Grade 60 A 516 Grade 65 A 537 Class 1 (Over 64–100 mm) A 662 Grade A A 662 Grade B −68 −101 −68 −101 −60 −87 ... ... ... −29 ... ... ... −51 −51 −51 −26 −51 −46 −46 ... −46 −46 −40 ... −46 −46 −32 ... −60 −51 ... −60 −51 −60 ... ... −46 ... ... A 203 Grade B A 203 Grade E A 203 Grade F (100 mm max.) A 299 A 516 Grade 70 A 537 Class 1 (64 mm max.) A 537 Class 2 (Over 64–100 mm) A 662 Grade C −68 −101 −68 −101 −60 −87 ... ... ... −7 −46 −62 ... −1 −40 −60 −107 −1 −35 −60 −107 +4 −29 ... ... −46 ... −46 −60 ... −46 ... 16 Specification and Grade 120 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE A2.15 GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION) (CONT’D) Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch Test Temperature, °C for Plate Thicknesses (Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon) Energy Absorption ClassA Average for 3 SpecimensB, J, Min. Minimum for 1 SpecimenB, J 27 V Specification and Grade 25 mm and Under Over 25 mm to 50 mm, Incl. Over 50 mm to 75 mm, Incl. Over 75 mm to 125 mm, Incl. 20 A 203 Grade F A 537 Class 2 (64 mm max.) A 612 A 724 Grade A −107 −68 −46 −46 −107 −68 ... ... ... −68 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... A 353 A 553 Type I A 553 Type II A 645 A 517 all (64 mm max. thickness) A 724 Grade B −196 −196 −170 −170 −196 −196 −170 −170 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... C ... ... ... ... Lateral Expansion mm, Minimum Each Specimen Transverse Test VI 0.38 C −46 ... GENERAL NOTE: The minimum temperatures listed are for longitudinal tests. For transverse tests, the available minimum temperature may be somewhat higher. NOTES: A Class I is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower. Class II is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl. Class III is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower. Class IV is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl. Class V is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 520 MPa to but not including 655 MPa. Class VI is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 655 MPa and over. B Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens. C Testing temperature as specified on order but no higher than 0°C. 121 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II TABLE A2.16 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE CARBON STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS Variations Over Specified Width, mmA Specified Width, mm To 360, excl. 360 to 430, excl. 430 to 480, excl. 480 to 530, excl. 530 to 610, excl. 610 to 660, excl. 660 to 710, excl. 710 to 890, excl. 890 to 1270, excl. 1270 to 1520, excl. 1520 to 1650, excl. 1650 to 1780, excl. 1780 to 2030, excl. 2030 and over 11 13 14 16 17 21 24 29 32 38 41 44 47 51 NOTE — Applies to either plates produced from coils or plates produced in discrete cut lengths of flat product. A No permissible variation under specified width. 122 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M APPENDICES (Nonmandatory Information) X1. COILED PRODUCTS X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different types of systems employed during or following the rolling operations, it is common for the steel to be reeled into the coiler at temperatures in the stress-relieving range. In general, these temperatures are higher as material thickness increases. The coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and inner laps cooling more rapidly than central laps. The difference in cooling rate can result in measurable differences in the mechanical properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced yield and tensile strength, and increased percent elongation, for the product with slower cooling rates from the coiling temperature to ambient. These differences are in addition to the effects on mechanical properties caused by differences in heat analysis and chemical segregation. properties at other than the official location may differ from those of the reported test location. X2.3 This specification contains no requirements applicable to product tension tests; conformance to the material specifications is determined on the basis of tests performed at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified. X2.4 A Task Group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.11 has determined, based on review of the AISI data (SU20), that the variation in tensile properties within a plate-asrolled can be expressed as a function of specified requirements; one standard deviation equals approximately 3% of required tensile strength, 5% of required yield strength, and 3 percentage units of required elongation. X3. VARIATION IN CHARPY V-NOTCH TESTS X3.1 A survey of the variation to be expected in Charpy V-Notch test results obtained from three common fine grain plate steels was conducted by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). The results of the survey are contained in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled, “The Variations of Charpy V-Notch Impact Test Properties in Steel Plates,” (SU/24), published January 1979. The survey data consists of test values obtained from six locations in addition to the locations specified in 12.1.3 of this specification. The plate conditions tested involved as-rolled, normalized, and quench and tempered. Sufficient full-size specimens were taken from each sample so that three longitudinal and three transverse specimens could be broken at three test temperatures defined for each grade. The data is presented in tables of probability that impact properties at other than the official location which may differ from those of the reported test location. Additional data of the same type, but utilizing samples from thicker plates, was published by AISI as SU/27. X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES IN PLATES X2.1 The tension requirements of this specification are intended only to characterize the tensile properties of a plate-as-rolled for determination of conformance to the requirements of the material specifications. These testing procedures are not intended to define the upper or lower limits of tensile properties at all possible test locations within a plate-as-rolled. It is well known and documented that tensile properties vary within a plate-as-rolled or individual piece of steel as a function of chemical composition, processing, testing procedure, and other factors. It is, therefore, incumbent on designers and engineers to use sound engineering judgment when using tension test results shown on mill test reports. The testing procedures of this specification have been found to provide material adequate for normal pressure vessel design criteria. X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in tensile properties obtained from plates and structural shapes was conducted by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). The results of this survey are contained in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The Variation of Product Analysis and Tensile Properties — Carbon Steel Plate, and Wide Flange Shapes” (SU/18, SU/19, and SU/20), published in September 1974. The data are presented in tables of probability that tensile X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold forming are referenced to group Designations A through F as defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii listed in Table X4.2 should be used as minimums in typical shop fabrication. Material that does not form satisfactorily 123 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-20 /SA-20M 2004 SECTION II when fabricated in accordance with Table X4.2 may be subject to rejection pending negotiation with the steel supplier. When tighter bends are required, the manufacturer should be consulted. should be removed by grinding. Sharp corners on edges and on punched or gas cut holes should be removed by chamfering or grinding to a radius. X4.4 If possible, parts should be formed such that the bend line is perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. If it is necessary to bend with the bend line parallel to the direction of final rolling, a more generous radius is suggested (11⁄2 times applicable value given in Table X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of rolling. X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die should be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The width across the shoulders of the female die should be at least 8 times the plate thickness. Higher strength steels require larger die openings. The surface of the dies in the area of radius should be smooth. X4.3 Since cracks in cold bending commonly originate from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut edges X4.5 DELETED 124 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-20 /SA-20M TABLE X4.1 GROUP DESIGNATIONS FOR COLD BENDING Specification Class Where Applicable A 202/A 202M A 204/A 204M A 225/A 225M A 285/A 285M A 299/A 299M A 302/A 302M --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- A, C, or D B 1 or 2 1 2 A 455/A 455M A 515/A 515M A 516/A 516M A 517/A 517M A 533/A 533M A 537/A 537M A 542/A 542MD A 543/A 543M A 553/A 553MD A 562/A 562M A 612/A 612M A 645/A 645M A 662/A 662M any anyB anyC 1 or 2 3 or 4 4a any A 782/A 782M A 832/A 832M A 841/A 841M A 844/A 844M 2, 11, 12 5, 9, 21, 21L, 22, 22L 5, 9, 21, 22, 91 60 or 65 70 55 60 or 65 70 any any A or B C A or C B A 724/A 724M A 734/A 734MD A 735/A 735M A 736/A 736M A 737/A 737M A 738/A 738M Group DesignationA A B A or B B or E F A B C C or D any A 203/A 203M A 353/A 353M A 387/A 387M Grade Where Applicable any any any any A or B CB CC 1 or 2 3 any any any D E B C D B C D D A D D E D C E E C B C A B C F E C D F D E F D A C D B C D E D E D B D C D E F E C D TABLE X4.2 SUGGESTED MINIMUM INSIDE RADII FOR COLD BENDINGA Thickness (t), in. [mm] Group DesignationB Over 3⁄4 in. Up to [20 mm] to 3 ⁄4 in. 1 [25 mm], [20 mm] Incl. A B C D E F 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 2.25t Over 2 in. [50 mm] 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t 3.0t 4.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t 3.0t 3.5t 5.5t NOTES A Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. These radii apply when the precautions listed in X4.2 are followed. If bend lines are parallel to the direction of the final rolling, multiply values by 1.5. B Steel specifications included in the group designations may not include the entire thickness range shown in this table. NOTES A Steels in Groups A to E inclusive are grouped on the basis of similar specified values for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm]; Group F includes steels which have a specified minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] of 16 or less, and steels which have a ratio of specified minimum tensile strength to specified minimum yield strength of 1.15 or less. B For thicknesses of 4 in. [25 mm] or less. C For thicknesses over 4 in. [25 mm]. D For any type. 125 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.75t Over 1 in. [25 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm], Incl. Not for Resale 126 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale (Identical with ASTM Specification A 29/A 2 9 ~ - 9 9 ' ' except for an editorial correction to the Mo content for Grade 94B17 in Table 2.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers a group of common requirements which, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order or in an individual specification, shall apply to carbon and alloy steel bars under each of the following ASTM specifications (or under any other ASTM specification which invokes this specification or portinns th~reef): Title of Specification Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars: Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and Tempered Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from "T"Rails Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, MGrades Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties Steel Bars for Springs, Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power Applications Cold-Finislzed Carbon Steel Bars: Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality Stress-Relieved Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements, ColdDrawn Carbon Hot-Rolled Alloy Steel Bars: Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades Steel Bars, Alloy, Subject to End-Quench Hardenability Requirements ASTM Designation Title of Specification ASTM Designation Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or ColdFinished, Quenched and Tempered A 434 Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both A 739 Cold-Finished Alloy Steel Bars: Steel Bars, Alloy, Cold-Finished A 331 Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Rolled or ColdFinished, Quenched and Tempered A 434 Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or ColdFinished, Special Quality. for Pressure Piping Components A 696 1.2 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the purchase order, the individual material specification, and this general specification shall prevail in the sequence named. 1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded as the standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 1.4 For purposes of determining conformance to this specification and the various material specifications referenced in 1.1, dimensional values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting values in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29. SA-291SA-29M 2004 SECTION I1 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Sta~zdards: A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment A 75 1 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Confo~mancewith Specifications E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain Size 2.2 Federal Staim'ards: Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products 2.3 Militaiy Staildard: MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products - Preparation for Shipment and Storage 2.4 Otlzer Sta~zdards: AIAG B-1 Bar Code Symbology Standard for 3-of-9 Bar Codes AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Tag Application Standard 3. Terminology 3.1 Definitions of Terms SpeciJic To This Stanrlni.d: 3.1.1 Hot-Wrotrglzt Steel Bars - Steel bars produced by hot forming ingots, blooms, billets, or other semifinished fonns to yield straight lengths (or coils, depending upon size, section, and mill equipment) in sections which are uniform throughout their length, and in the following sections and sizes: 3.1.1.1 Rounds, inclusive, 3.1.1.2 Squares, inclusive, g2 to 10.0 in. [5.5 to 250 mm], g2 to 6.0 in. [6 to 160 mm], 3.1.1.3 Round-Cornered Squnres, [6 to 200 mm], inclusive, 742to 8.0 in. 3.1.1.4 Flats, '4 to 8 in. inclusive, in width: in. in minimum thickness up to 6 in. in width; and 0.230 in. in minimum thiclcness for over 6 to 8 in. in width, inclusive [over 5 mm in thiclcness up to 150 mm in width; and over 6 mm in thickness for over 150 m n through 200 mm in width]. Maximum thiclcness for all widths is 4 in. [I00 mm]. 3.1.1.5 Hexagons and Octagorzs, '4to 4'/j6 in. [6 to 103 mm], inclusive, between parallel surfaces, 3.1.1.6 Bar Size Slzapes -Angles, channels, tees, zees, when their greatest cross-sectional dimension is under 3 in. [75 mm], and 3.1.1.7 Special Bar Sections - Half-rounds, ovals, half-ovals, other special bar size sections. 3.1.2 Cold-Finished Steel Bars - Steel bars produced by cold finishing previously hot-wrought bars by means of cold drawing, cold forming, turning, grinding, or polishing (singly or in combination) to yield straight lengths or coils in sections which are uniform throughout their length and in the following sections and sizes: 3.1.2.1 Rourzds, 9 in. [230 mm] and under in diameter, 3.1.2.2 Squares, 6 in. [150 mm] and under between parallel surfaces, 3.1.2.3 Hexagons, 4 in. [ I 0 0 mm] and under between parallel surfaces, 3.1.2.4 Flats, '/s in. [3 mm] and over in thiclu~ess and not over 12 in. [300 mm] in width, and 3.1.2.5 Special Bar Sections. 3.1.3 Lot - Unless otherwise specified in the contract or order, 2 lot sha!l consist: of dl b a ~ ssihnitted for inspection at the same time of the same heat, condition, finish, size, or shape. For bars specified in the quenched and tempered condition, when heat treated in batch-type furnaces, a lot shall consist of all bars from the same heat, of the same prior condition, the same size, and subjected to the same heat treatment in one tempering charge. For bars specified in the quenched and tempered condition, when heat treated without interruption in a continuous-type furnace. a lot shall consist of all bars from the same heat, of the same prior condition, of the same size, and subjected to the same heat treatment. 4. Chemical Composition 4.1 Limits: 4.1.1 The chemical composition shall confosm to the requirements specified in the purchase order or the individual product specifications. For convenience the grades commonly specified for carbon steel bars are shown in Tables 1 and 2. Bars may be ordered to these grade designations and when so ordered shall confosm to the specified limits by heat analysis. 4.1.2 When compositions other than those shown in Tables 1 and 2 are required, the composition limits shall be prepared using the ranges and limits shown in Table 3 for carbon steel and Table 4 for alloy steel. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 4.2 Heat or Cast Analysis: 4.2.1 The chemical composition of each heat or cast shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. 4.2.2 The heat or cast analysis shall conform to the requirements specified in the product specification or purchase order. These can be the heat chemical range and limit for a grade designated in Tables 1 and 2, or another range and limit in accordance with 4.1.2, or with requirements of the product specification. NOTE 1 - Heat aualysis for lead is not determinable since lead is added to the ladle stream while each ingot is poured. When specified as an added element to a standard steel, the percentage of lead is reported as 0.15 to 0.35 incl, which is the range commonly specified for this element. .2.3 If requested or required, the heat analysis shall be reported to the purchaser or his representative. 4.2.4 Reporting of significant figures and rounding shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 75 1. 4.3 Product Analysis: 4.3.1 Merchant quality carbon bar steel is not subject to rejection for product analysis unless misapplication of & heat is cle&-lYindicate& 4.3.2 Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished bars other than merchant quality representing each heat of open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace steel. The chemical composition thus determined shall not vary from the limits specified in the applicable specification by more than the amounts prescribed in Table 5 and Table 6, but the several determinations of any element, excluding lead, in a heat may not vary both above and below the specified range. Rimmed or capped steel is characterized by a lack of homogeneity in its composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur; therefore, when rimmed or capped steel is specified or required, the limitations for these elements shall not be applicable. Because of the degree to which phosphorus and sulfur segregate, the limitations for these elements shall not be applicable to rephosphorized or resulfurized steels. 4.3.3 Samples for product analysis shall be taken by one of the following methods: 4.3.3.1 Applicable to small sections whose crosssectional area does not exceed 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2] such as rounds, squares, hexagons, etc. Chips are taken by milling or machining the full cross section of the piece. Drilling is not a feasible method for sampling sizes 0.75 in.2 2 and smaller. §A-29ISA-29M .3.3.2 Applicable to products where the width of the cross section greatly exceeds the thickness, such as bar size shapes and light flat bars. Chips are taken by drilling entirely through the steel at a point midway between the edge and the middle of the section, or by milling or machining the entire cross section. 4.3.3.3 Applicable to large rounds, squares semifinished, etc. Chips are taken at any point midway between the outside and the center of the piece by drilling parallel to the axis or by milling or machining the full cross section. In cases where these methods are not practicable, the piece may be drilled on the side, but chips are not talcen until they represent the portion midway between the outside and the center. 4.3.3.4 When the steel is subject to tension test requirements, the tension test specimen can also be used for product analysis. In that case, chips for product analysis can be taken by drilling entirely through the tension test specimens or by the method described in 4.3.3.1. .3.4 When chips are taken by drilling, the diameter of the drill used shall conform to the following: Area of Sample Cross Section, in.' (cm2) Approximate Drill Diameter, in. (mm) 16 [I%] oi less Over 16 [I001 4.3.5 The minimum number of samples to be taken from material representing the same heat or lot before rejection by the purchaser shall be as follows: Minimum Number of Samples 15 tons [I5 Mg] and under Over 15 tons [15 Mg] 3.6 In case the number of pieces in a heat is less than the number of samples required, one sample from each piece shall be considered sufficient. 4.3.7 In the event that product analysis deteirninations are outside the pennissible limits as prescribed in 4.3.2, additional samples shall be analyzed and the acceptability of the heat negotiated between the pnrchaser and the producer. 4.4 Referee Ailnlysis - In case a referee analysis is required and agreed upon to resolve a dispute concerning the results of a chemical analysis, the referee analysis shall be performed in accordance with the latest issue of Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751, unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. SA-2915%-29M 2004 SECTION I1 Grain Size Requirement 5.1 Aztstenitic Grain Size 5.1.1 When a coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the steel shall have a grain size number of 1 to 5 exclusive as dete~minedin accordance with Test Methods E 112. Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the grains in the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per heat shall be made. 5.1.2 When a fine autenitic grain size is specified, the steel shall have a grain size number of 5 or higher as determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112. Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per heat shall be made unless the provisions of 5.1.2.1 or 5.1.2.2 are exercised. 5.1.2.1 When aluminum is used as the grain refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the aluminum content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum or, alternately, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum. The aluminum content shall be reported. The grain size test specified in 5.1.2 shall be the referee test. 5. 5.1.2.2 By agreement between purchaser and supplier, columbium or vanadium or both may be used for grain refining instead of or with aluminum. When columbium or vanadium is used as a grain refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the columbium or vanadium content is as follows (the content of the elements shall be reported with the heat analysis): Steels having 0.25% carbon or less: Cb 0.025 min V 0.05 min Steels having over 0.25% carbon: Cb 0.015 min V 0.02 min The maximum contents shall be: Cb 0.05 lnax V 0.08 max Cb + V 0.06 ~ n a x 5.1.2.3 Whenprovisionsof5.1.2.1or5.1.2.2are exercised, a grain size test is not required unless specified by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, fine austenitic grain size shall be certified using the analysis of grain refining element(s). 5.1.2.4 Referee Test -In the event that the chemical analysis of columbium or vanadi~undoes not meet the req~~irements of 5.12.2, the grain size test shown in 5.1.2 shall be the referee test unless an alternative test method is agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 6. Mechanical Property Requirements 6.1 Test Specimens: 6.1.1 Selectio~z- Test specimens shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of the applicable product specification or in accordance with Supplement I of the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, in the sequence named. 6.1.2 Preparation - Unless otherwise specified in the applicable product specification, test specimeus shall be prepared in accordance with the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, and especially Supplement I thereof. 6.2 Metlzods of Mechanical Testing - All mechanical tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, and especially Supplen~entI thereof, on steel bar products. 6.3 Retests: 6.3.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, the specimen may be discarded and another substituted. 6.3.2 If the percentage elongation of any tension specimen is less than that specified and any part of the fracture is more than % in. [20 mm] from the center of a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen, or is outside the middle half of the gage length of an 8 in. [200 mmJ specimen as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed. 6.3.3 For "as-wrought" mateiial, if the results for any original tension specimen are within 2000 psi [14 MPa] of the required tensile strength, within 1000 psi [7 MPa] of the required yield point, or within 2% of the required elongation, retesting shall be permitted. If the original testing required only one test, the retest shall consist of two random tests from the heat or lot involved. If the original testing required two tests of which one failed by the amounts listed in this paragraph, the retest shall be made on one random test from the heat or lot. If the results on the retest specimen or specimens meet the specified requirements, the heat or test lot will be accepted. If the results of one retest specimen do not meet the specified requirements, the material is subject to rejection. 6.3.4 For thermally treated bars, if the results of the mechanical tests do not confonn to the requirements specified, two more tests may be selected for each bar failing, and each of these retests shall confonn to the requirements of the product specification. 6.3.5 If a bend specimen fails, due to conditions of bending more severe than required by the specification, a retest shall be permitted from the heat or test lot involved PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS for which one random specimen for each original specimen showing failure shall be used. If the results on the retest specimen meet the requirements of the specification, the heat or test lot will be accepted. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations 7.1 Hot-Wrought B a n - The permissible variations for dimensions of hot-wrought carbon and alloy steel bars shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1 for inch-pound values and Annex A2 for metric values. 7. 7.2 Cold-Finished Bars - The permissible variations for dimensions of cold-finished carbon and alloy steel bass shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1 for inch-pound values and Annex A2 for metric values. ip, Finish, and A 8.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish. 9.1 For thermally treated bars only, the manufacturer may retreat a lot one or more times, and retests shall be made in the same manner as the original tests. Each such retest shall conform to the requirements specified. ector representing the purchaser shall have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is beil~gfurnishcc!in accordmx with this specification. Aii tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. 10.2 All required tests and inspection shall be made by the manufacturer prior to shipment. 11. Rejection 11.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejection because of noncompliance to the requirements of the specification shall be reported by the purchaser to the manufacturer within 30 working days after receipt of samples. 11.2 Material that shows imperfections capable of adversely affecting processibility subsequent to its acceptance at the purchaser's works will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified. §A-29/§A-29M 12. Rehearing 12.1 Samples that represent rejected material shall be preserved for two weelcs from the date rejection is reported to the manufacturer. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a rehearing within that time. 13.1 Civilian Procurement - Bass of all sizes, when loaded for shipment, shall be properly identified with the name or brand of manufacturer, purchaser's name and order number, the ASTM designation (yeas date is not required), grade number where appropriate, size and length, weight of lift, and the heat number for identification. Unless otherwise specified, the method of marking is at the manufacturer's option and may be made by hot stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking tags attached to the lifts of bars. 13.1.1 Bar code marking may be used as an auxiliary method of identification. Such bar-code markings shall be of the 3-of-9 type and shall conform to AIAG B 1. When barcoded tags are used, they shall confonn to AIAG B5. 13.2 Governnzent Procurement: 13.2.1 Marking for shipment shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in the contract or order and shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-163 for military agencies and in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies. 13.2.2 For government procurement by the Defense Supply Agency, the bars shall be continuously masked for identification in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 183. 14.1 Civilian Procurement - Unless otherwise specified, the bars shall be packaged and loaded in accordance with Practices A 700. 14.2 Govenzment Procurenzent -MIL-STD- 163 shall apply when packaging is specified in the contract or order, or when Level A for preservation, packaging, and packing is specified for direct procurement by or direct shipment to the government. 15. Keywords 15.1 alloy steel bars; carbon steel bars; cold finished steel bars; general delivery requirements; hot wrought steel bars; steel bars. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 1 GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS (CONT'D) TABLE 1 GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, % Grade Designation Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, maxA Nonresulfurized Carbon ~ t e e l s ' , ~ , ~ ~ ~ 1095 0.06 max 0.08 max 0.10 rnax 0.08-0.13 0.08-0.13 0.35 rnax 0.25-0.40 0.30-0.50 0.30-0.60 0.60-0.90 0.10-0.15 0.11-0.16 0.13-0.18 0.13-0.18 0.15-0.20 0.30-0.60 0.50-0.80 0.30-0.60 0.60-0.90 0.30-0.60 0.15-0.20 0.15-0.20 0.18-0.23 0.18-0.23 0.18-0.23 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.30-0.60 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.20-0.25 0.22-0.28 0.22-0.28 0.25-0.31 0.28-0.34 0.30-0.60 0.30-0.60 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.32-0.38 0.32-0.38 0.32-0.38 0.35-0.42 0.37-0.44 0.50-0.80 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.37-0.44 0.40-0.47 0.40-0.47 0.43-0.50 0.43-0.50 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.30-0.60 0.60-0.90 0.43-0.50 0.46-0.53 0.48-0.55 0.48-0.55 0.50-0.60 0.70-1.00 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.60-0.90 0.55-0.65 0.55-0.65 0.60-0.70 0.60-0.70 0.65-0.75 0.50-0.80 0.60-0.90 0.50-0.80 0.60-0.90 0.40-0.70 0.65-0.75 0.65-0.70 0.70-0.80 0.70-0.80 0.72-0.85 0.60-0.90 0.75-1.05 0.50-0.80 0.40-0.70 0.30-0.60 0.75-0.88 0.80-0.93 0.80-0.93 0.85-0.98 0.90-1.03 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.30-0.50 0.60-0.90 0.30-0.50 Grade Designation Rephosphorized and Resulfurized Carbon steelsQGF Carbon max max max rnax max max max 1211 1212 1213 1215 12L13 12L14 12L15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.09 0.13 0.15 0.09 Grade Designation Former Designation Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur Lead 0.60-0.90 0.70-1.00 0.70-1.00 0.75-1.05 0.70-1.00 0.85-1.15 0.75-1.05 0.07-0.12 0.07-0.12 0.07-0.12 0.04-0.09 0.07-0.12 0.04-0.09 0.04-0.09 0.10-0.15 0.16-0.23 0.24-0.33 0.26-0.35 0.24-0.33 0.26-0.35 0.26-0.35 ... ... ... ... 0.15-0.35 0.15-0.35 0.15-0.35 High-Manganese Carbon ~ t e e l s ' ~ ~ , ~ ~ Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, ma: Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, percent Grade Designation 0.040 Resulfurized Carbon ~ t e e l s ~ , ~ ~ 0.050 0.050 Merchant Quality M Series Carbon Steel Bars Carbon ~anganese~ Fhosphorus, max Sulfur, max A Maximum unless otherwise indicated. 'When silicon is required, the following ranges and limits are commonly specified: 0.10%, max, 0.10% to 0.20%, 0.15% to 0.35%, 0.20% to 0.40%, or 0.30% to 0.60%. Copper can be specified when required as 0.20% minimum. When lead is required as an added element to a standard steel, a range of 0.15 to 0.35% inclusive is specified. Such a steel is identified by inserting the letter "L" between the second and third numerals of the grade designation, for example, 10 L 45. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added to the ladle stream. when boron treatment for ltilled steels is specified, the steels can be expected to contain 0.0005 to 0.003% boron. I f the usual titanium additive is not permitted, tlie steels can be expected to contain up to 0.005% boron. F ~ h eelements bismuth, calcium, selenium, or tellurium may be added as agreed upon between purchaser and supplier. Unless prohibited by tlie purchaser, the manganese content lnay exceed 0.60% on heat analysis to a maximum of 0.75%, provided the carbon range on lieat analysis has the minimum and maximum reduced by 0.01% for each 0.05% manganese over 0.60%. SA-29lSA-29M PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 2 GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS Grade Designation Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, % Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, lnax siliconA Nicltel Chromium Molybdenum Note 1 - Sinall quantities of certain elements are present in alloy steels which are not specified or required. These elements are considered as incidental and may be present to the following maximum amounts: copper, 0.35%; nicltel, 0.25%; chromium, 0.20%; and molybdenum, 0.06%. Note 2 - Where minimum and maximum sulfur content is shown i t is indicative of resulfurized steel. Note 3 - The chemical ranges and limits shown in Table 2 are produced to product analysis tolerances shown in Table 6. Note 4 - Standard alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15-0.35%. S L K ~steels are identified by inserting the letter "L" between the second and third numerals of the A I S I number, for example, 4 1 L 40. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added t o the ladle stream. SA-29tSA-29M 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 2 GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS (CONT'D) Grade Designation Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, % Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, lnax Sulfur, lnax SiliconA Nickel Cli~~on~ium Molybdenum Standard Boron SteelsB A Silicon lnay be specified by the purchaser as 0.10% maximum. The need for 0.10% tnaxi~numgenerally relates to severe cold-formed parts. 'These steels can be expected t o contain 0.0005 t o 0.003% boron. I f the usual titanium additive is not permitted, the steels can be expected t o contain up to 0.005% boron. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 3 HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND L I M I T S OFCARBON STEEL BARS TABLE 4 HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND L I M I T S OF ALLOY STEEL BARS Chemical Ranges and Limits, % Element carbonA When Maximum of Specified Elements is: Lowest Maximum ... t o 0.12, incl over 0.12 t o over 0.25 t o over 0.40 t o over 0.55 t o over 0.80 Manganese Range 0.25, incl 0.40, incl 0.55, incl 0.80, incl ... Phospl1or~1~to 0.040, incl over 0 . 0 4 0 to 0.08, incl over 0.08 t o 0.13, incl siliconC t o 0.050, incl over 0 . 0 5 0 to 0.09, incl over 0.09 t o 0.15, incl over 0.15 t o 0.23, incl over 0.23 t o 0.50, incl ... t o 0.10, incl over 0.10 t o over 0.15 t o over 0.20 t o over 0.30 t o Copper ~ead Element Chemical Ranges and Limits, % OpenMaxiHearth or Electric mum BasicFurnace Limit, When Maximum of Oxygen Steel Steel % Specified Element is: Carbon t o 0.40, incl over 0.40 t o 0.50, incl over 0.50 t o 1.65, incl Sulfur §A-29/§A-29M 0.15, incl 0.20, incl 0.30, incl 0.60, incl When copper is required 0.20 niiti is generally used When lead is required, a range of 0.15 to 0.35 is specified t3ismuthE calciumE seleniumE A The carbon ranges shown in the colunin Iheaded "Range" apply when the specified maximum limit for manganese does not exceed 1.10%. When the maximum manganese limit exceeds 1.10%, add 0.01 to the carbon ranges shown above. 'For steels produced in merchant quality the phosphorus maximum is 0 . 0 4 % and the sulfur maximum is 0.05%. It is not common practice t o produce a rephosphorized and resulfurized carbon steel to specified limits for silicon because of its adverse effect on machinability. ' A cast or heat a~ialysisis not determinable when lead is added to the ladle stream. Element specification range as agreed upon between purchaser and supplier. To 0.55, incl Over 0.55-0.70, incl Over 0.70 to 0.80, incl Over 0.80-0.95, incl Over 0.95-1.35, incl Manganese To 0.60, incl Over 0.60-0.90, incl Over 0.90-1.05, incl Over 1.05-1.90, incl Over 1.90-2.10, incl Phosphorus Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen steel Acid open-hearth steel Basic electric-furnace steel Acid electric-furnace steel Sulfur To 0.050, incl Over 0.050-0.07, ilicl Over 0.07-0.10, incl Over 0.10-0.14, incl Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen steel Acid open-heart11 steel Basic electric-furnace steel Acid electric-furnace steel Silicon To 0.20, incl Over 0.20-0.30, incl Over 0.30-0.60, iticl Over 0.60-1.00, incl Over 1.00-2.20, incl Acid steelsB Nicltel To 0.50, incl Over 0.50-1.50, incl Over 1.50-2.00, incl Over 2.00-3.00; incl Over 3.00-5.30, incl Over 5.30-10.00, incl Chromium To 0.40, incl Over 0.40-0.90. incl Over 0.90-1.05; incl Over 1.05-1.60, incl Over 1.60-1.75, incl Over 1.75-2.10, incl Over 2.10-3.99, incl Molybdenum To 0.10, incl Over 0.10-0.20, incl Over 0.20-0.50, incl Over 0.50-0.80, incl Over 0.80-1.15, incl Tungsten To 0.50, incl Over 0.50-1.00, incl Over 1.00-2.00, incl Over 2.00-4.00, incl Vanadium To 0.25, incl Over 0.25-0.50, incl Aluminum Up to 0.10, incl Over 0.10-0.20, ilicl Over 0.20-0.30, ilicl Over 0.30-0.80, incl Over 0.80-1.30, incl Over 1.30-1.80, incl Copper To 0.60, incl Over 0.60-1.50, incl Over 1.50-2.00, incl Note 1 - Eoron steels can be expected to have 0.0005% minimum boron content. Note 2 - Alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15-0.35%. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added to the ladle stream. A Applies to only notirepliospliorized and tionresulf~~rized steels. " Minimutn silicon limit for acid open-liearth or acid electric-furnace alloy steels is 0.15%. Not normally prodi~cedin open-hearth. SA-29/SA-29M 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS OF CARBON STEEL Element Limit, or Maximum of Specified Range, % Over Maximum Limit, % Under Minimum Limit, % 0.25 and under over 0.25 to 0.55, incl over 0.55 Manganese 0.90 and under over 0.90 to 1.65, incl basic steels acid bessemer steel sulf~lr~,~ Silicon 0.35 and under over 0.35 to 0.60, incl Copper under minimum only ~ead 0.15 to 0.35, incl TABLE 6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS OF ALLOY STEEL Rimmed and capped steels are not subject to rejection on product analysis unless misapplication is clearly indicated. Resulfurized or rephosphorized steels are [not subject to rejection on product analysis for these elements unless misapplication is clearly indicated. Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%. Elements Limit, or Maximum of Specified Range, % Carbon 0.30 and under over 0.30 to 0.75, incl over 0.75 Manganese 0.90 and under over 0.90 to 2.10, incl Phosphorus over maximum only Sulfur 0.060 and under Silicon 0.40 and under over 0.40 to 2.20, incl Nickel 1.00 and under over 1.00 to 2.00, incl over 2.00 to 5.30, incl over 5.30 to 10.00, incl Chromium 0.90 and under over 0.90 to 2.10, incl over 2.10 to 3.99, incl A Permissible Variations Over Maximum Limit or Under Minimum Limit, % 0.20 and under over 0.20 to 0.40, incl over 0.40 to 1.15, incl Vanadiuni 0.10 and under over 0.10 to 0.25, incl over 0.25 to 0.50, incl minimum value specified, under minimum limit only Tungsten 1.00 and under over 1.00 to 4.00, incl Aluminum 0.10 over over over over and under 0.10 to 0.20, 0.20 to 0.30, 0.30 to 0.80, 0.80 to 1.80, incl incl incl incl ~ e a d ~ 0.15 to 0.35, incl Copper to 1.00 incl over 1.00 to 2.00, incl A Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS N The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the contract or order. ar Thicltness Tolerances Sl.1 When flat bars are specified in metric units to a thickness under tolerance of 0.3 mm, the thickness tolerance of Table S I. 1 shall apply. TABLE S1.l THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS ORDERED TO 0.3 M M UNDER TOLERANCE^ Tolerance from Specified Width, nirn Tolerances over Specified Tliicl~nessfor Thickness Given, mlii Specified Width, lnln To 25, incl Over 25 t o 50, incl Over 5 0 t o 100, incl Over 1 0 0 t o 150, incl Over 1 5 0 t o 200, incl Note - Over 6 t o 12, incl Over 1 2 t o 25, incl ... ... 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.7 1.0 ... Over 2 5 to 50, incl Over 5 0 to 75, iricl Over 7 5 Over Untler Tolerance under specified thicl(ness 0.3 mm. "When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square-edge flat liar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5 % of the thickness. 2004 SECTION I1 Al. TIONS IN . - INCH-POU UNITS A l . l Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions expressed in inch-pound units of measuremcnt. TABLE A l . 1 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N CROSS SECTION FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUND, SQUARE, AND ROUNDCORNEREDSQUAREBARSOFSTEEL Permissible Variation from Out-of-Round or in.A Specified Size, in. Over Under Out-of-Square, in.' To 5/1b, incl Over 5/1b t o 7/1b,incl Over 7/1b t o 5/,, incl Over 5/, t o 7/8, incl Over 7/, t o 1, incl Over 1 t o 11/,, incl Over 11/, t o 11/,, incl Over 1% t o 13/,, incl Over 13/, t o 11/,, incl Over 11/, t o 2, incl Over 2 t o 21/,,incl Over zl/, t o 31/,,incl Over 35; t o 41/2,inci Over 4 ' / , t o 5Y2,incI Over 5l/, t o 61/,,incl Over 61/2t o 8'4, incl Over t o 9'/2, incl Over 91/2t o 10, incl A Steel bars are regularly C L I ~t o length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionabie, a machine C L I ~end should be considered. Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minilnum diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross section. Out-of-square is the difference in the two dimensions at the same cross section of a square bar between opposite faces. ' TABLE A1.2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N CROSS SECTION FOR HOT-WROUGHT HEXAGONAL BARS OF STEEL Specified Sizes Between Opposite Sides, in. To I/,, incl t o 1, incl Over Over 1 t o 11/,,incl Over 11/2t o 2, incl Over 2 t o 21/,,incl Over 25; t o 3V2,incl '/,, incl Over 31/2t o 4 '/, Permissible Variations from Specified Size, in.A Over Under Out-of-Hexagon (Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel) or Out-of-Octagon (Alloy Steel), in.B 0.011 0.015 0.025 '/32 3/b 4 l/' b 5/b4 A Steel bars are regularly cut t o length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionabie, a machine cut end should be considered. Out-of-hexagon or out-of-octagon is the greatest difference between any two dimensions at the same cross section between opposite faces. ' PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS §A-29lSA-29M TABLE A1.3 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N THICKNESS AND WIDTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE EDGE AND ROUND EDGE FLAT BARS* -- -pppppp Permissible Variations in Width, in. Permissible Variations i n Thicl(ness, for Thickness Given, Over and Under, in.' Specified Width, in. 0.203 t o 0.230, excl 0.230 t o excl 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.015 TO 1, incl Over Over Over Over 1 to 2 to 4 to 6 to 2, incl 4, incl 6, incl 8, incl C to i c , 0.008 0.012 0.015 0.015 0.016 Over 1/2 t o 1, incl Over 1t o 2, incl Over 2 t o 3, incl Over 3 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.025 ... '/j~ ... ... ... ... Over Under '/64 '/64 2 1/3 2 3/64 3/b4 '/16 132' 3/64 3/64 3 /' 'I32 3/b4 l/' b '/32 2 5;6 '4 2 A When a square is lhelcl against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5% of the thickness. 'Steel bars are regularly cut to length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end should be consiclered. Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, are not available as hot-wrought steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in. TABLE A1.4 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N THICKNESS, LENGTH, AND OUT-OF-SQUARE FOR HOT-WROUGHT B A R S I Z E A N G L E S O F C A R B O N STEEL Permissible Variations in Thickness, for Thicknesses Given, Over and Under, in. Permissible Variations for Length o f Leg, Over and Under, Specified Length Over 3/16 of Leg, in.A To 3/16, incl to 3/8, incl Over 3/s in. TO 1,incl 0.008 0.010 0.012 Over 1 t o 2, incl Over 2 t o 3,excl 0.010 0.010 0.015 ... 0.012 0.015 l/32 3/64 6 A he longer leg of an unequal angle determines the size for tolerance. The out-of-square tolerance in either clirection is 1%". TABLE A1.5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE CHANNELS OF CARBON STEEL Permissible Variations in Size, Over and Under, in. Thickness of Specified Size of Channel, in. I'/~,incl Over 11/, t o 3, excl TO for Depth Width Thickness Given Over of of To 3/1b, sectionB ~ l a n g e s ~ incl 5;z Vlb 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.020 Out-ofsquareA if Either Flange, in.lin. of Flange Width I 4 2 /3 2 "or channels 5,/ in. and under in depth, the out-of-square tolerance is 3/b4 in./in. of depth. BMeas~trementsfor depth of section and width of flanges are overall. TABLE A1.6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE TEES OF CARBON STEEL Permissible Variations in Size, in. Specified size of Tee, in.A Width or ~epth' Thickness of Flange Thickness of Stem Stem outof- Over Under Over Under Over Under squarec TO I%, incl 3/64 ?/b4 Over 11/, t o 2, incl Over 2 to 3, excl 3/32 3/,, 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.020 0.012 0.012 0.010 0.020 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 1/32 1/,, 3/32 A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for tolerances. Measurements for both width and depth are overall. Stem out-of-square is the variation from its true position of the center line of the stem measured at the point. TABLE A1.7 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS Due t o Inill facilities, tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, half-ovals, and other special bar size sections vary among the manufacturers and such tolerances should be negotiated between the manufacturer and the ourchaser. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE A1.8 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N LENGTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, FLATS, AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS OF STEEL Permissible Variations Over Specified Length, Specified Size of Flats, in. Specified Size o f Rounds, Squares, and Hexagons, in. 5 t o 1 0 ft, Thickness Width excl 1 0 t o 2 0 ft, excl 2 0 t o 3 0 ft, excl 30 t o 4 0 ft, excl 4 0 t o 6 0 ft, excl 2 2 2 3/4 M i l l Shearincl To 1, incl Over 1 t o 2 , incl Over 2 t o 5, incl Over 5 t o 10, incl Bar Size Sections t o 1, incl over 1 to 1, incl over 1 t o 3, incl to 3, incl over 3 t o 6, incl over 3 t o 6, incl ... ... /4' 1 1 1 2112 1 13/4 1 1 1 1 1314 2'4 1% 2 1 13/4 2 2 2 2 4 4 2 112 1 21/2 13/4 23/4 2 3 2 3/4 3 5/8 1 2 0.230 to 1, incl over 6 t o 8, incl over 1 t o 3, incl over 6 t o 8, incl 3/4 ... % 11/4 ... z~/~ /2' a/' v2 3 3 3 v2 3 Hot Sawing 2 t o 5, incl Over 5 t o 10, incl 1 and over 3 and over 6 ... ... B No permissible variations under. 'Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are liot hot sawed. A TABLE A1.9 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N LENGTH FOR !?EC-UTT![\!G OF B.4P.S IVlEETING SPECIAL STRAIGHTNESSTOLERANCES Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, . Width of Flats and Maximum Dimension of Other Sections, ikA TO 3, incl Over 3 t o 6, incl Over 6 t o 8, incl Rounds over 8 t o 10, incl " No tolerance under. Tolerances Over Specified Length, in.A To 12 ft, incl Over 1 2 f t '14 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 11 /I 6 9/16 TABLE A1.10 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N STRAIGHTNESS FOR HOT-WROUGHT BARS AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS OF STEEL* Standard tolerances Special tolerances I/, in. in any 5 f t or in. in any 5 ft or (I/, in. x length in ftY5 in. x length in ftV5 A Because of warpage, straightness tolerances do not apply to bars i f any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has been performed. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS §A-29lSA-29M TABLE Al.11 SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED CARBON STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR TURNED AND POLISHED~ Maximum of Carbon Range 0.28% or less Size, in.' Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.28% t o 0.55%, incl Maximuni of Carbon Range t o 0.55%, incl, Stress Relieved or Annealed after Cold Finishing All tolerances are in inches'and Maximum of Carboll Range Over 0.55% or All Grades Quenched and Tempered or Normalized and Tempered before Cold Finishing are minusc Rounds - Cold Drawn (to 4 in.) or Turned and Polished To 11/,, incl Over 11/,to 2?;, incl Over zl/, to 4, incl Over 4 t o 6, incl Over 6 t o 8, incl Over 8 t o 9, incl 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 Hexagons To 3/,, incl Over 3/4 t o 11/,,incl Over 1112 t o zl/,, incl Over 2'/, t o 3l/,, incl Over 358 t o 4, incl 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 To 3/4, incl Over 3/4 to ll&,incl Over 11 ' , t o 21/,, incl Over zl/, t o 4, incl Over 4 to 5, incl Over 5 t o 6, incl 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.006 0.010 0.014 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.008 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.011 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.008 0.013 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.008 0.010 0.015 0.006 0.008 0.010 0.011 0.012 0.008 0.010 0.012 0.016 0.020 width,' ... ... in. To 3/4, incl Over t o 11/,, incl Over 1%t o 3, incl Over 3 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6, iticl Over 6 - A This table iiicludes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, nornialized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. T h ~ stable does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or for tolerances for s~iclibars. quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be cons~~lted BWidth governs the tolerances for both width and thicl(ness of flats. For example, wlie~ithe maximum of carbon range is 0.28% or less, for a flat 2 in. wide and 1 in. thick, the width tolerance is 0.005 In. and the thickness tolerance is the same, ~namely, 0.005 in. Standard manufacturing practice is a shear cut for cold drawn bars (size limits vary by proclucer) which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end should be considered. Tolerances may be ordered all pl~is,or distributed plus and minus with the sun1 equivalent to the tolerances listed. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE A1.12 SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD FINISHED ROUND BARS COLD DRAWN, GROUND AND POLISHED OR TURNED, GROUND AND POLISHED Size, in. Cold Drawn, Ground and Polished Turned, Ground and Polished To ll& incl Over 11/, t o 2/,' excl 2/,' t o 3, incl Over 3 to 4, incl To ll& incl Over 11/, t o 2'/?, excl 2/,' t o 3, incl Over 3 t o 4, incl Over 4 to 6, incl Over 6 ... ... Tolerances from Specified Size, Minus Only, in. 0.001 0.0015 0.002 0.003 0.004~ 0.005~ A For non-resulfurized steels (steels specified t o maximum sulphur limits under 0.08%), or f o r steels thermally treated, the tolerance is increased by 0.001 in. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS T A B L E A1.13 SIZE TOLERANCE FOR COLD-FINISHED ALLOY STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN, OR TURNED AND POLISHED Maximum of Carbon Maximum of Carbon Range 0.28% or less Size Maxilnu~nof Carbon Range Over 0.28% t o 0.55%, iricl Maximum of Carbon Range t o 0.55%, incl, Stress Relieved or Annealed after Cold Finishing Range Over 0.55% With or Without Stress Relieving or A~inealingafter Cold Finishing. Also, all Carbons, Quenclied and Tempered (Heat Treated), or Normalized and Tempered, before Cold Finishing All tolerances are in inches and are minusB Rounds - Cold Drawn (to 4 in.) or Turned and Polished To 1,incl, in coils Cut Lengths: To 11/,,incl Over to 21/,, incl Over 21/2to 4,incl Over 4 to 6,incl Over 6 to 8,incl Over 8 to 9,incl 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 ... ... ... Hexagons To 3/4,incl Over 3/4to I?,, incl Over 11/,t o 2 '/,, incl Over 2 ' / , t o 3'/,, incl Over 3 ' / , t o 4,incl 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006 Squares To 3/4,iticl Over t o lk,incl Over 15i to 21/,, incl Over 2 ' / , to 4,incl Over 4 to 5,incl 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.011 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.009 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.010 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.012 ... ... ... To 3/4,incl Over 3/, to 1'4, incl Over 11/,t o 3,incl Over 3 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6,incl Over 6 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.009 0.014 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.009 0.011 0.007 0.009 0.011 0.012 0.013 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.021 ... ... ... A Width governs tlie tolerances for both wiclth and tliiclcness of flats. For exaniple, when tlie maximuni of carbon range is 0.28% or less, for a flat 2 in. wide and 1 in. tliicl(, the wicith tolerance is 0.006 in. and the thickness tolerance is the same, namely 0.006in. "Standard manufacturing practice is a shear cut for cold drawn bars (size limits vary by proclucer) which can cause end distortion res~lltingin those portions of tlie liar being o~~tsicle the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end slio~~lcl be considered. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE A1.14 STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR COLD FINISHED BARS~J~ Straightness Tolerances, in. (Maximum Deviation) from Straightness i n any 10-ft Portion of the Bar Maximum of Carbon Range, 0.28% or Less Size, in. Length, ft Less than 5/, Less than ?/8 '/,and over 5/n and over less than 1 5 1 5 and over less than 1 5 1 5 and over Rounds Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.28% and All Grades Thermally Treated Rounds Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons sb I/' 6 Note 1 - All grades quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered t o Brinell 3 0 2 max. before cold finishing; and all grades stress relieved or annealed after cold finishing. Straightness tolerances are not applicable t o bars having Brinell hardness exceeding 3 0 2 . A The foregoing tolerances are based on the following method of measuring straightness: Departure from straightness is measured by placing the bar on a level table so that the arc or departure from straightness is horizontal, and the depth of the arc is measured with a feeler gage and a straightedge. It should be recognized that straightness is a perishable quality and lnay be altered by mishandling. The preservation of straightness in cold-finished bars requires the utmost care in subsequent handling. Specific straightness tolerances are sometimes required for carbon and alloy steels in which case the purchaser should inform the manufacturer of the straightness tolerances and the methods t o be used in checlting the straightness. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ENSIONAH, TOLE UNITS A2.P Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions expressed in SI units of measurement. TABLE A2.1 TOLERANCES I N SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND ROUND-CORNERED SQUARE BARS Size, lnrn Tolerance from Specified Size, Over arid Under, mm or %A To 7, incl Over 7 to 11,incl Over 11 t o 15, incl Over 15 t o 19, incl Over 19 t o 250,incl 0.13 mrn 0.15 m m 0.18 m m 0.20 mm 1% TABLE A2.2 TOLERANCES I N CROSS SECTION FOR HOTWROUGHT HEXAGONALANDOCTAGONALSTEEL BARS Tolerance from Out-of-Round, or Out-of-Square Section,' mln or 0.20 mm 0.22 lnin 0.27 ~ i i m 0.30 mm 1.5% "he tolerance shall be rounded t o tlie nearest tenth of a millitnetre after calculation. B ~ u t - o f - r o ~ ~isnthe d difference between tlie maximum and tlie minimum diameters of tlie bar, measured at the same cross section. OL~-of-squareis the difference in the two dimensions at tlie same cross section of a square bar between opposite faces. 'pecified Size, mni Specified Size Between Opposite Sides, lnm Over Under To 13, incl Over 13 t o 25, incl Over 25 to 40, incl Over 40 to 50, incl Over 50 to 65,incl Over 65 to 80,incl Over 80 to 100,incl 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 0.18 0.25 0.35 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 Out of Hexagon or Out of Octagon, mniA A Out of hexagon or out of octagon is tlie greatest difference between any two dimensions at the cross section between opposite faces. TABLE A2.3 THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT B A R S ~ , ~ Tolerances from Specified Width, rnm Tolerances fro111 Specified Thicl~nessfor Tliicl(ness Given Over and Under, rnrn Specified Width, m ~ n To 25, incl Over 25 t o 50,incl Over 50 to 100, incl Over 100 t o 150,incl Over 150 t o 200,incl Over 5 t o 6, incl Over 6 to 12, incl Over 1 2 t o 25, incl Over 2 5 t o 50, i ~ i c l Over 5 0 to 75 Over 7 5 Over Under 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 A When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, tlie edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5% of the thickness. 'Flats over 150 t o 200 rnrn, incl in wicltli are not available as hot-wrought bars in thickness 6 mm and mder. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE A2.4 THICI<NESS, LENGTH, AND OUT-OF-SQUARE TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE ANGLES Tolerances i n Thickness for Thickness Given, Over and Under, mm Tolerances for Length of Leg Over and Specified Length of Over 5 to Leg, mmAfB To 5, incl 10, incl Over 1 0 Under, m m To 50, incl Over 5 0 t o 75, excl 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 1 2 The longer leg of an ~ ~ n e q u angle al determines the size for tolerance. "Out of square tolerances in either direction is 11/," = 0.026 m nilmm. A TABLE A2.5 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE CHANNELS Tolerances i n Size. Over and Under, lnm Out of Square of Either Flange per min of Flange Depth of Width of To 5, SeciiotiA ~ l a r i g e s iricl ~ Over 5 Width,' t i i r i i Thicltness of Web Specified Size of Channel, m m To 40, incl Over 40 t o 75, excl 1 2 1 2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.03 0.03 A Measurements for depth of section and width of flanges are overall. 'For channels 16 m m and under in depth, out of square tolerance is 0.05 mnilmm. TABLE A2.6 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE TEES Tolerances i n Size, mni Specified Size of ~ e e mm , ~ To 30, incl Over 3 0 to 50, incl Over 5 0 to 75. excl Width or ~eptli,' Tliicltness of Flange Tliicltness of Stein Stenl Out of Over Under Over Under Over Under SquareC 1 2 2 1 2 2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 2 2 A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for tolerances. Measurements for width and depth are over all. Stem out of square is the tolerance from its true position of tlie center line of tlie stem measured at the point. ' TABLE A2.7 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS Due t o ~ n i lfacilities, l tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, and other special bar size sections vary among the manufacturers and such tolerances sliould be negotiated between tlie manufacturer and the purchaser. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS T A B L E A2.8 LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, OCTAGONS, FLATS, AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS Specified Size of Flats, tntn Specified Size of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons and Octagons, mtn Thickness Tolerances over Specified Length, tnmA 1500 to 3000, excl Width 3 0 0 0 to 6000, excl 6000 t o 9000, excl 9000 t o 1 2 000, excl 18 000, excl 1 2 000 to 40 65 45 70 60 75 70 85 Hot Shearing To 25, incl Over 25 to 50, ilicl Over 5 0 to 125, incl Over 125 t o 250, incl Bar Size Sections t o 25, incl over 2 5 t o 25, incl over 25 t o 75, incl t o 75, incl over 75 t o 150, incl over 75 to 150, incl ... ... over 6 t o 25, incl over 25 t o 75, incl over 1 5 0 t o 200, incl over 150 t o 200, incl Hot Sawing 5 0 t o 125, incl Over 1 2 5 t o 250, incl 25 and over ... 7 5 and over B ... B No tolerance under. 'Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not hot sawed. A T A B L E A2.9 LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR RECUTTING OF BARS M E E T I N G SPECIAL STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES Sizes of Roitnds, Sqiiaies, Hexagons, Octagons, Widths of Flats and Maximum Dimensions of Other Sections, lntn To 75, incl Over 75 t o 150, incl Over 1 5 0 to 200, incl Rounds over 200 to 250, incl A No tolerance under. Tolerances over Specified Length, miniA To 3 7 0 0 mm, incl 6 8 11 14 Over 3700 lnln 8 11 14 18 T A B L E 82.10 STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BARS AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS~ Standard tolerances Special tolerances ' 6 m m in ally 1500 mm or (length in mm1250)' 3 mm in any 1500 mm or (lenyth in mni/500)~ Because of warpaye, straightness tolerances do not apply to bars i f any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has been performed. Rou~idt o the nearest whole niillimetre. ' 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE A2.11 SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED CARBON STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR TURNED AND POLISHED* Tolerances from Specified Size, Under Only, m m Maximum of Carbon Range 0.28 or Less Size, m m Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.28 t o 0.55, incl Maximum of Carbon Range t o 0.55%) incl Stress Relief or Annealed After Cold Finishing Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.55% or All Grades Quenched and Tempered or Normalized Before Cold Finishing Rounds - Cold Drawn (lo 1 0 0 mm i n size) or Turned and Polished To 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 100, incl Over 100 t o 150, incl Over 150 t o 200, incl Over 200 t o 230, incl 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.25 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.23 Hexagons - Cold Drawn Up t o 20, incl Over 20 t o 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 80, incl Over 80 t o 100, incl 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.13 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.15 SquaresUp t o 20, incl Over 20 t o 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 100, incl Over 100 t o 130, incl Over 130 t o 150, incl 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.36 ... Cold ~ r a w n ' 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.23 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.28 ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.28 0.30 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.40 0.50 ... ... ... ... Flats - Cold ~ r a w n " ~ To 20, incl Over 20 t o 40, incl Over 40 to 80, incl Over 80 t o 100, incl Over 100 t o 150, incl Over 150 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.33 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.38 A This table includes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. This table does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, 01. quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be consulted for tolerances for such bars. BTolerances lnay be ordered all plus, or distributed plus and minus with the sum equivalent t o the tolerances listed. Width governs the tolerance for both width and thickness of flats, for example, when the maximum of carbon range is 0.28% or less for a flat 50 mm wide and 25 m m thick, the width tolerance is 0.13 nim and the thickness is the same, nearly, 0.13 mm. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE A2.12 SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED ROUND BARS, COLD DRAWN, GROUND AND POLISHED, OR TURNED, GROUND AND POLISHED Size, m m Colcl Drawn, Ground, and Polished To 4 0 , incl Over 40 t o 6 0 , incl Over 60 t o 80, incl Over 80 to 1 0 0 , incl ... ... Turned, Ground, and Polislied To 40, incl Over 40 t o 6 0 , incl Over 60 t o 80, incl Over 80 t o 1 0 0 , incl Over 1 0 0 t o 1 5 0 , incl Over 1 5 0 Tolerances from, Specified Size, Minus Onlv. mm 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.10~ 0.13" A For nonresulfurized steels (steels specified to maximum S L I I ~ L I ~ 0 . 0 8 % ) or for steels thermally treated, the tolerance limits ~~ncler is increased by 0.03 mm. 1004 SECTION I1 TABLE A2.13 SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED ALLOY STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR TURNED AND POLISHED~ - - Tolerances from Specified Size, Under Only, mm Maximum of Carbon Range 0.28 or less Size, m m Rounds To 25, incl, in coils Cut Lengths To 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 100, incl Over 1 0 0 to 150, incl Over 1 5 0 to 200, incl Over 200 t o 230, incl - Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.28 t o 0.55, incl Maximum of Carbon Range t o 0.55%, incl Stress Relief or Annealed After Cold Finishing Maximum of Carbon Range Over 0.55% or All Grades Quenched and Tempered or Normalized Before Cold Finishing - Cold Drawn (to 1 0 0 m m i n size) or Turned and Polished 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.25 Hexagons - Cold Drawn Up t o 20, i n d Over 20 t o 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 80, inci Over 80 t o 100, incl 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.15 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.25 ... ... ... 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.20 0.23 0.25 0.30 0.30 Squares - Cold Drawn Up t o 20, incl Over 20 to 40, incl Over 40 t o 60, incl Over 60 t o 100, incl Over 1 0 0 t o 130, incl 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.18 0.28 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.23 0.23 Flats - Cold ~ r a w n ' width' To 20, incl Over 20 t o 40, incl Over 40 t o 80, incl Over 80 t o 100, incl Over 1 0 0 t o 150, incl Over 150 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.23 0.36 A This table includes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheriodize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. This table does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheriodize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be consulted for tolerances for such bars. 'Width governs the tolerance for both width and thicltness of flats. For example, when the maximum of carbon range is 0.28% or less for a flat 50 mni wide and 25 nim thick, the width tolerance is 0.13 mm and the thickness tolerance is the same, namely 0.13 mm. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS T A B L E A2.14 STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED B A R S ~ ~ ~ Straightness Tolerances, mni (Maximum Deviation) from Straightness in any 3000 m m Portion of the Bar Maximum of Carbon Range, 0.28% or less Size, ~nln Less than 1 6 Less than 1 6 16 and over 1 6 and over Length, lnln Rounds Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons Maximum of Carbon Range over 0.28% and all Grades Tliermally Treated Rounds Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons Less than 4500 4500 and over Less than 4500 4500 and over Note - All grades quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered t o Brinnell 302 maximum before cold finishing and all grades stress relieved or annealed after cold finishing. Straightness tolerances are not applicable t o bars having Brinnell liardness exceeding 302. A The foregoing tolerances are based obi tlie following method of measuring straighttiess; departure from straightness is measured by placing the bar on a level table so that the arc or departure from straightness is horizontal, and the depth of the arc is measured with a feeler gage and a straightedge. 'It s l i o ~ ~ be l d recognized that straightness is a perishable quality and may be altered by mishandling. The preservation of straightness in cold-finished bars requires tlie utmost care i n subsequent Iiandling. Specific straightness tolerances are sometimes required for carbon and alloy steels in which case tlie purchaser sI10~1ldinform tlie manufacturer of tlie straightness tolerances and the methods to be used in checking tlie straightness. INTERNATIONAL Slandards Woildivlde (Identical with ASTM Specification A 36/A 36M-00a.) Scope 1.1 This specification covers carbon steel shapes, plates, and bars of structural quality for use in riveted, bolted, or welded construction of bridges and buildings, and for general str~~ctural purposes. 1.2 S~~pple~nentary requirements are provided for use where additional testing or additional restrictions are required by the purchaser. Such requirements apply only when specified in the purchase order. 1.3 When the steel is to be welded, a welding procedure suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or service is to be utilized. See Appendix X3 of Specification A 6/A 6M for infonnation on weldability. 1.4 For Groups 4 and 5 wide flange shapes for use in tension, it is recommended that the purchaser consider specifying supplementary requirements, such as fine austenitic grain size and Charpy V-notch impact testing. 1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound n nits or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system is to be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way. 1.6 The text of this specification contains notes or footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory material. Such notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables and figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements. 1.7 For plates cut from coiled product, the additional requirements, including additional testing requirements and the reporting of additional test results, of A 6/A 6M apply. 1. A 27/A 27M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60, 000 psi Tensile Strength A 325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Struct~~ral Steel Joints A 325M Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints [Metric] A 500 Specification for Cold-Fonned Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes A 501 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing A 502 Specification for Steel Structural Rivets A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts A 563M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric] A 570/A 570M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Str~~ctural Quality A 668/A 688M Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use F 568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners Appurtenant Materials 3.1 When components of a steel structure are identified with this ASTM designation but the product form is not listed in the scope of this specification, the material shall conform to one of the standards listed in Table 1 unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. 3. 4. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Stnnrlnl-ds: A 6/A 6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling 2. General Requirements for Delivery 4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of Specification A 6/A 6M, for the ordered material, unless a conflict exists in which case this specification shall prevail. SA-36lSA-36M 2004 SECTION IS 4.1.1 Coiled product is excluded from qualification to this specification until decoiled, levelled, and cut to length. Plates produced from coil means plates that have been cut to individual lengths from a coiled product and are furnished without heat treatment. The processor decoils, levels, cuts to length, and marks the product. The processor is responsible for performing and certifying all tests, examinations, repairs, inspections, or operations not intended to affect the properties of the material. For plates produced from coils, two test results shall be reported for each qualifying coil. See Note 1. NOTE 1 - Additional requirements regarding plate from coil are described i n Specification A 6/A 6M. 5.1 Unless otherwise specified, plates used as bearing plates for bridges shall be subjected to mechanical tests and shall conform to the tensile requirements of Section 8. 5.2 Unless otherwise specified, mechanical tests shall not be required for plates over 1'/' in. [40 mm] in thickness used as bearing plates in structures other than bridges, subject to the requirement that they shall contain 0.20 to 0.33% carbon by heat analysis, that the chemical composition shall conform to the requirements of Table 2 in phosphorus and sulfur content, and that a sufficient discard shall be made to secure sound plates. Materials and Manufacture 6.1 The steel for plates and bars over th_ in. [12.5 mm] in thickness and shapes other than Group 1 shall be semikilled or killed. 7. Chemical Composition 7.1 The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2, except as specified in 5.2. 7.2 The steel shall confonn on product analysis to the requirements prescribed in Table 2, subject to the product analysis tolerances in Specification A 6/A 6M. 8. Tension Test 8.1 The material as represented by the test specimen, except as specified in 5.2 and 8.2, shall conform to the requirements as to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 3. 8.2 Shapes less than 1 in.' [645 mm'] in cross-section and bars, other than flats, less than '4in. [12.5 mm] in thickness or diameter need not be subjected to tension tests by the manufacturer, provided that the chemical composition used is appropriate for obtaining the tensile properties in Table 3. 6. 9.1 bars; bolted construction; bridges; buildings; carbon; plates; riveted construction; shapes; steel; structural steel; welded construction TABLE 1 APPURTENANT MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Material Steel rivets Bolts High-strength bolts Steel nuts Cast steel Forgings (carbon steel) Hot-rolled sheets and strip Cold-formed tubing Hot-formed tubing Anchor bolts A S T M Designation A 502, Grade 1 A 307, Grade A or F 568M, Class 4.6 A 325 or A 325M A 563 or A 563M A 27lA 27M, Grade 65-35 C450-2401 A 668, Class D A 570lA 570M, Grade 3 6 A 500, Grade B A 501 F 1554 NOTE 1 - The specifier should be satisfied of the suitability of these n~aterialsfor the intended application. Chemical compositio~i andlor mechanical properties may be different than specified in A 36lA 36 M. TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS platess Product Thicl(ness, in. Lmml .... VI VI Carbon, max., % Manganese, % P I i o s p h o ~ . ~niax., ~~, % Sulfur, max., % Silicon, % Copper, min., Yo when copper steel is specifiecl shapesA All To 3/11 C201, Incl. Over 3/4 t o 11/2 L20 t o 401, Incl. Over 1!/i t o 21/2 L4.0 t o 651, Incl. 2 Bars Over 21/2 t o 4 C65 t o 1001, Incl. Over 4 11001 To 3/4 C201, Incl. 0.26 0.25 ... ... 0.25 0.80-1.20 0.26 0.80-1.20 0.27 0.85-1.20 0.29 0.85-1.20 0.26 ... 0.04 0.05 0.40 max. 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.40 max. 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.40 iiiax. 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.15-0.40 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.15-0.40 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.15-0.40 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.40 max. 0.20 Over 3/4 t o 1Y2 C20 t o 401, Incl. Over 11/2 to 4 C40 t o 1001, Incl. 9 I Over 4 ClOOl 0.27 0.28 0.29 0.60-0.90 0.04 0.05 0.40 tnax. 0.20 0.60-0.90 0.04 0.05 0.40 ~ i i a x . 0.20 0.60-0.90 0.04 0.05 0.40 wax. 0.20 - NOTE 1 - Where ". . ." appears in this table, tliere is no !requirement. The heat analysis for manganese shall be determined and reported as described in the heat analysis section of Specification A 6IA 6M. " Manganese content of 0.85-1.35% and silicon content of 0.15-0.40% is required for shapes over 426 Iblft C634 kg/ml. 'For each reduction of 0.01% point below the specified carbon maximuni, an increase of 0.06% point manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted, up to the maximum of 1.35%. P RJ 2 0 5 4 m z CA '0 h C! 2 z 0 5 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 3 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS~ Plates, shapes,' and Bars: Tensile strength, ltsi CM P a l Yield point, min., ltsi [ M P a l Plates and ~ a l . 5 ~ ) ~ : Elongation in 8 in. C200 mml, mill., % Elongation in 2 in. C50 mml, lnin., % Shapes: Elongation in 8 in. C200 mml, min., % Elongation i n 2 in. [50 mml, min., % 58-80 C400-5501 3 6 C250lc 20 23 20 218 A See the Orientation subsection in the Tension Tests section of Specification A 6IA 6M. 'For wide flange shapes over 426 Iblft C634 ltglml, the 8 0 ltsi C550 M P a l maximum tensile strength does not apply and a minimum elongation in 2 in. C50 m l n l of 1 9 % applies. Yield point 3 2 ltsi C220 M P a l for plates over 8 in. C200 mrnl in thicltness. Elongation not required t o be determined for floor plate. For plates wider than 24 in. C6OO mml, the elongation requirement is reduced 2% points. See Elongation Requirement Adjustments s~lbsection~lnderthe Tension Tests section of Specification A 6IA 6M. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order. Standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are listed in Specification A 6/A 6M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed by title. S5. Charpy V-Notc In addition, the following optional supplementary requirements are also suitable for use with this specification. S97. Eimitatian on Phmmed or Capped Steel S97.1 The steel shall be other than rimmed or capped. (identical will1 ASTM Specification A 47lA 47M-99, except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and 11.3, and mandatory certification in 14.1.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers femtic malleable cast- ings for general engineering usage at temperatures from normal ambient to approximately 400°C (750°F). 2.3 Federrrl Stniirlrrrd: Fed. Std. No. 123 Marlung for Domestic Shipment (Civilian Agencies) .2 No precise quantitative relationship can be stated between the properties of the iron in various locations of the same casting and those of a test specimen cast from the same iron (see Appendix XI). 3. 1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 4. 2. Referenced 9ocurneipts 2.1 ASTM Staizdrrrds: A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware A 247 Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of Graphite in Iron Castings A 644 Terminology Relating to Ison Castings E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials E 10 Test Method for Brine11 Hardness of Metallic Materials E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals 2.2 Militmy Staizdrrrd: MIL-STD- 129 Marking for Shipment and Storage Terminology 3.1 DeJiizitioizs -Definitions for many tesms common to iron are found in Tennillology A 644. Classification 4.1 Castings ordered and produced under this specification are classified nnder the following grades based on tests on separately cast test bars. Separately cast test bars shall be poured from the same lot of iron as the castings they represent and shall be heat treated with those castings except as provided in 7.2.3. 4.1.1 Grade 32510 [Grade 22010]: 4.1.1.1 The first three digits of the grade designation indicate the minimum yield strcngth ( X 100 psi [MPa]) and the last two digits indicate the minimum elongation (% in 2 in. [50 mm]). 5.1 The purchase order for castings ordered under this specification shall state the specification designation. the year in which the specification was issued, and the grade of ~nalleableiron to be supplied. Any option or special additions to the basic requirements of this specification shall be clearly and fully stipulated. 6. Chemical Composition 6.1 The chemical composition of the iron shall be such as to produce the structural and mechanical properties required by this specification. 04 SA-47lSA-47M 2004 SECTION I1 Mechanical 7.1 Factors influencing the properties of castings and their relationship to those of test specimens and separate test castings are discussed in Appendix X I . 7. 7.2 Temion Tesr Specirnerzs: 7.2.1 The tension test specimens shall be cast to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, in the same kind of molding material used for the production castings. At least three such speci~nensshall be cast from a representative ladle of iron either from each batchmelted heat or, in continuous melting, from each 4-11 pour period during which the purcl~aser'scastings were poured, or as otherwise agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser. 7.2.2 All test specimens shall be suitably identified with the designation of either the batch-melted heat or the pour period of a continuous heat. 7.2.3 All test specimens shall be heat treated in the same production furnaces and in the same cycles as the castings they represent. However, in those instances wherein the critical sections of the production castings differ appreciably from that of the central portion of the test specimens, the time cycle for tempering the test specimens may be altered from that of the production lot in order to obtain similar microstructures or hardness, or both, in both speci~nenand castings. In such cases the hardness of the specimens shall be tested and reported along with the tensile test results. 7.2.4 The tension test is usually performed on unmachined specimens. However, for referee work, the spccinlen may be machined from the standard cast bar to the dimensions shown in Fig. 3. 7.3 Terisiorz Test Metliod: 7.3.1 The gage length of [he srandard tension specin-ien shall be 2.00 + 0.01 in. [50.0 + 0.3 mm]. 7.3.2 The diameter used to compute the cross-sectional area shall be the average between the largest and smallest diameters in that section of the 2-in. [50-mm] gage length having the smallest diameter and shall be measured to the nearest 0.001 in. [0.2 ~nm].No cast bar having a mean diamcter less than 0.590 in. [15.0 mm] shall be accepted for test. 7.3.3 After reaching a stress equivalent to approximately half of the anticipated yield stress, the speed of the moving head of the testing machine shall not exceed 0.50 in.11nin [12.5 mmlmin] through the breaking load. 7.3.4 While the values for yield point and yield strength are not identical, they are sufficiently close for most applications of fessitic malleable irons to be used interchangeably. They may be detennined by any of the approved techniques described in the paragraphs on Determination of Yield Strength and Yield Point of Test Methods E 8. If determined as yield strength, that stress producing an extension under load of 0.01 in. 10.25 mm] over the 2-in. [50-mm] gage length (for example, 0.5% extension) or an offset of 0.2% shall be taken as the yield stress, which shall be converted to yield strength by dividing by the original cross-sectional area of the gage length found in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be reported to the nearest 100 psi [MPa]. In referee work, yield strength shall be determined as the stress that produces an extension under load of 0.5% of the gage length. 7.3.5 The tensile strcngth shall be the maxi~num load c m i e d by the specimen during the test divided by the original cross-sectional area of the gage length, as found in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be reported to the nearest 100 psi [MPa]. 7.3.6 The elongation is the increase in gage length after fracture of a tensile specimen, measured to the nearest 0.01 in. [0.25 mm], expressed as a percentage of the original gage length. It shall be reported to the nearest 0.5%. 7.4 Retestirrg: 7.4.1 If, after testing, a specimen shows evidence of a defect, another tension test may be made on a cornpanion specimen. Also, a retest shall be peimiited whenever frach~reoccurs outside the central 50% of the gage length. 7.4.2 If the results of a valid test fail to conform to the requirements of this specification, two retests shall be made. If either retest fails to meet the specification, the castings represented by these test specimens shall be rejected. A valid test is one wherein the test specimen has been properly prepared and appears to be sound and on which the approved test procedure has been followed. 7.4.3 If sufficient companion test bars are unavailable, the manufacturer shall have the option of testing a specimen cut from a representative casting. Therefore, as stated in XI .3, the mechanical properties of such tension test specimen removed from a production casting will not necessarily correspond to those of a standard separately cast test specimen, the values in Table 1 do not apply. Instead, the mechanical properties of the test specimen from the casting must equal or exceed the average of those from similar test specimens removed from the same location from two castings of the same design where separately cast test bars meet the requirements of Table 1. 7.4.4 If the first test results indicate that a reheat treatment is needed to meet the test requirements, the entire lot of castings and the representative test specimens PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS shall be reheat treated together. Testing shall then be repeated in accordance with 7.4.1-7.4.3. 7.4.5 The results of all tests, including retests, shall be posted in permanent record, which shall state any abnormalities observed during the test and in the fractured ends. Such records shall be kept for at least 1 year after shipment of the production castings and shall be available for examination by the purchaser or by his authorized representative. 7.4.6 If not covered in the purchase agreement, the frequency of tension testing shall be in accordance with 7.2.1 and sufficiently often to ensure unifomity of product and compliance with minimum test requirements. 7.4.7 Tension test results, obtained in accordance with the above subsections, must conform to the values of Table I for acceptance under this specification except as provided in 7.4.3. 7.4.8 When agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser, tested specimens or unbroken test bars shall be preserved by the manufacturer for a period of three months after the date of the test report. 7.5 Hal-dness T e s t - If the purchase agreement requires hardness testing, the acceptable hardness range shall be stated and a test location clearly shown on the covering drawing(s). 7.5.1 Hal-&ess Test Metlzod - The Brinell method of hardness testing in accordance with Test Method E 10 shall be employed whenever possible. 7.5.2 For castings of such size or shape that do not pennit Brinell testing with the standard 3000-kgf load, the 500 kgf may be employed, the hardness number being reported as HB 101500115. In very unusual cases where it is impossible to use the Brinell method, the Rockwell test may bc substituted, nsing Test Methods E 18 with an appropriate Rockwell scale. Convcrsions of liardness values from one method to another according to Standard E 140, which does not specifically cover cast irons, are approxin~ateonly and, therefore, are generally inadvisable. 7.5.3 Sufficient material shall be removed from the cast surface to ensure that the measured surface is representative. 7.5.4 Sampling procedures and the frequency of hardness testing shall be fully detailed on the purchase agreement. Otherwise, hardness tests shall be performed at the discretion of the producer. 7.5.5 Castings failing to conform to the required hardness range may be reheat treated and retested. If after reheat treating they still fail the hardness requirements, they shall be rejected. §A-47lSA-47M 7.5.6 Typical hardness maximums for this grade of malleable iron are listed in Table 2. 8. Microstructure Requirements 8.1 The ~nicrostsuctureof the malleable iron shall consist of temper carbon nodules distsibuted through a femtic matrix and shall be free of excessive pearlite, massive carbides, and primary graphite. 8.2 When agreed upon by the purchaser and producer, the maxi~numdecarburization at any as-cast surface after heat treatment may be stipulated in writing, as measured by visual depletion of combined carbon after polishing, etching in nital, and viewing at 100x. 8.3 In reference work, the metallographic practice recommended in Test Method A 247 shall be followed. Soundness hquirements 9.1 All castings, on visual examination, shall be sound and free of obvious shrinkage and porosity. 9. 9.2 If the purchaser requires soundness tests to be performed, it shall be so stated in the purchase agreement, and the method and soundness requirements shall be detailed. 10. Dimensional Requirements 10.1 The castings shall conform to the dimensions given on drawings furnished by the purchaser, or to the dimensions established by the pattern equipment supplied by the purchaser, or as agreed upon in specific cases to gages supplied by the purchaser. Variations in any solid dimensions will be permitted, as shown in Table 3, unless otherwise agreed upon by the foundry and purchaser. 11. Worhanship, Finish and Appearance 11.1 The surface of the casting shall be inspected visually, particularly in critical areas, for such surface defects as cracks, hot tears, adhering sand and scale, cold shuts, and gas holes. 11.2 No repairing or plugging of any kind shall be permitted unless written permission is granted by the purchaser. Welding or brazing is not permitted under any circumstances. 11.3 DELETED onsibility for Inspection 12.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for SA-47lSA-47M 2004 SECTION I1 sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification, including a report of test results signed by an authorized agent of the manufacturer, shall be furnished at the time of shipment, and such certification or compliance statement shall be the basis for acceptance of the casting or lot of castings. carrying out all the tests and inspections required by this specification, using his own or other reliable facilities, and he shall maintain complete records of all such tests and inspections. Such records shall be available for review by the purchaser. 12.2 The purchaser reserves the right to perfonn any inspection set forth in the specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that supplies and services conform to the prescribed requirements. 15. Product Marking 15.1 When the size of the casting permits, each casting shall bear the identifying inarlc of the manufactuser and the part or pattern number at a location shown on the covering drawing and, if not shown on the drawing, at such a location at the discretion of the producer that the identification will not interfere with s~lbsequentprocessing and service of the casting. 13. Rejection and Rehearing 15.1 Any casting or lot of castings failing to comply with the requirements of this specification may, where possible, be reprocessed, retested, and reinspected. If the tests and inspections on the reprocessed casting(s) show compliance with this specification, the castings shall be acceptable; if they do not, they shall be rejected. 13.2 If the purchaser should find that a casting or lot of castings fails to comply with this specification subsequent to receipt at his facility, he shall so notify the manufacturer promptly and in no case later than six weelts after receipt of the shipment, stating clearly his basis for rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the purchaser's claim, the manufacturer may apply for a hearing before final rejectior, of the shipment. 16.1 Unless otherwise stated in the contract or order, the cleaning, preservation, and paclung of castings for shipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's commercial practice. Packaging and marking shall also be adequate to identify the contents and to ensure acceptance and safe delivery by the canier for the mode of transporiaiion employed. 14. Certification 14.1 A manufacturer's certification or compliance statement that the casting or lot of castings was made, 16.2 U.S. Goveriznzent Procz~reii~eizt - When specified in the contract or purchase order, marking for shipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of Fed. Std. No. 123 and MIL-STD-129. TABLE 1 TENSION TEST REQUIREMENTS TABLE 2 TYPICAL HARDNESS Inch-Pound Grade [Metric Grade3 Hardness, Maximum HB Indentation Value Diameters, mm 3 2 5 1 0 C220101 156 4.8 Inch-Pound Grades English Grade Tensile Strength, min, psi Yield Strength, min, psi Elongation in 2 in., min, % Metric Grades Metric Grade Tensile Strength, min. MPa Yield Strength, min, MPa TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION I N ANY SOLID DIMENSION Elongation in 50 mm, min, % Size, in. Cmml Up to 1 [Up to 251 1to 6 C25 to 1501 6 to 1 2 1151 to 3003 1 2 to 1 8 C30l to 4601 1 8 to 2 4 C461 to 6003 24 to 3 6 C6Ol to 9001 162 Tolerance, -c in. Cmm1 0.03 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.19 0.22 C0.81 C1.61 13.21 C3.81 C4.81 C5.61 PART A -FERROUS MATERW, SPECIFICATIONS FIG. 1 TENSION TEST SPECIMEN NOTE 1 - Modifications may be made in the dimensions indicated above for those details of the specimen outside of the gage length as required by testing procedure and equipment. FIG. 2 ALTERNATIVE UNMACHINED TENSION TEST SPECIMEN Minimum Radius Recommended318' (IOrnrn), but not less than 118" (3mm) permitted. Parallel Section l7zsikd Gage Lenglh NOTE 1- The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial. The reduced section shall have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends 0.003 t o 0.005 in. C0.08 t o 0.13 m m l larger in diameter than the center. FIG. 3 MACHINED TENSION TEST SPECIMEN S1. Special Conditions S1.1 IS agreed upon in writing by the foundry and purchaser, the malleable iron castings may be required to meet special conditions, hardness or other property diinensions, surface qnality, or a combiilatioil of conditions. 52. Test Lugs S2.1 If req~lestedill writing or if included on the pattern(s) or pattern drawing(s), test lugs may be cast 011 all castings of sufficient size to permit their incorporation. The size of such lrrgs shall be proportional to the thickness of the casting. 011 castings over 24 in. [600 inm] in length, a test lug shall be cast near each end such as not to interfere with any subsequent processing of the castings. The purchase order shall stipulate whether the foundry's inspector or the pnrchaser's inspector shall break, inspect, and pass judgment on the fracture quality of these test lugs. S4. Special Tension Specimens S4.1 If tension specimens are to be machined from castings, their location in the casting, the speci~nendimensions, and the required properties shall be agreed upon in writing by the foundry and purchaser. S5. Zinc-Coated Castiugs S5.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order-, castings shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with Specification A 153. Castings shall be of a composition that will preclude the possibility of galvanizing embrittlement, or shall be either cooled from the anneal or subsequently heat treated so as to be immunized against such embrittlement. If regalvanizing is required, procedures for regalvanizing castings and determining the effect on the casting perfor~nancemust be agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller. S6. S3. Destrlnctive Tests $3.1 At the option of the pmchaser or his representative, a casting of each design ordered may be tested to destntction, or otherwise broken up, to determine the presence of any manufacturing condition that might be detrimental to the serviceability of the casting. Marlring of Casting for Government Procurement S6.1 When castings are specified for government procurement, the location of the permanent lnarlcings specified in 15.1, as well as any special making for inechanical or physical properties (either perinanent or temporary), shall be as indicated on the goveinment drawings or sketches. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS NICAL PROPERT CASTINGS S1.d The mechanical properties of malleable iron castings are influenced by a number of factors, including the cooling rate during solidification, chemical composition, the heat treatment, the design of the casting, section thickness, and the location and effectiveness of gates, risers, and chills. X1.2 Because of the complexity of these factors in influencing the properties of the final product, no precise quantitative relationship can be stated between the properties of the iron in vasious locations of the same casting or between the properties of a casting and those of a test specimen cast from the same iron. When such a relationship is important and must be known for a specific application, it may be determined by appropriate experimentation. X1.3 The specimen specified in 7.2.1 as the standard tensiie test bar for maileabie iron has a 5/8-in. [16-rmnj diameter test section that reasonably represents a typical section of the general run of malleable iron castings. Furthermore, the initial freezing of malleable irons as homogeneous white iron, together with the heat treatment that is inherent in the manufacture of malleable iron, tends to r e d ~ ~ cthe e section-sensitivity effect. Therefore, where experinlentation into precise properties within a given casting would be infeasible, this standard test bar, made like any typical casting, should provide a practical approximation of the properties that can be expected in average sound malleable iron casting. X1.4 If malleable iron castings are welded, the microstructure of the iron is markedly affected, pasticularly in the heat-affected zone. Therefore, since this may adversely affect the properties of the casting, the welding of malleable iron castings should be done under strict metallurgical control, followed by appropriate post-weld heat treatment, to minimize the substantial reductions in ductility, impact resistance, and machinability that could result, particularly in the vicinity of the weldment. Nevertheless, it is generally considered inadvisable to join castings to similar castings or to other materials, by fusion welding out in the field, or in manufactured assemblies, without fully testing the entire completed past. SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOTDIPPED, ZINC-COATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS SA-53/SA-53M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 53/A 53M-01 except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1.1, and editorial correction to Table X4.1.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers seamless and welded black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe in NPS 1⁄8 to NPS 26 [DN 6 to DN 650] (Note 1), inclusive, with nominal wall thickness (Note 2) as given in Table X2.2 and Table X2.3. It shall be permissible to furnish pipe having other dimensions (Note 2) provided such pipe complies with all other requirements of this specification. 1.3.3 Type E is furnished either nonexpanded or cold expanded at the option of the manufacturer. NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designators NPS (nominal pipe size) [DN (diameter nominal)] have been substituted in this specification for such traditional terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.” 1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the test method portion, Sections 9, 10, 11, 15, 16, and 17 of this specification: This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. 1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the standard. NOTE 2 — The term nominal wall thickness has been assigned for the purpose of convenient designation, existing in name only, and is used to distinguish it from the actual wall thickness, which may vary over or under the nominal wall thickness. 1.2 This specification covers the following types and grades: 1.6 The text of this specification contains notes or footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory material. Such notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables and figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements. 1.2.1 Type F — Furnace-butt welded, continuous welded Grade A, 1.2.2 Type E — Electric-resistance welded, Grades A and B, and 1.2.3 Type S — Seamless, Grades A and B. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 90/A 90M Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products NOTE 3 — See Appendix X1 for definitions of types of pipe. 1.3 Pipe ordered under this specification is intended for mechanical and pressure applications and is also acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, and air lines. It is suitable for welding, and suitable for forming operations involving coiling, bending, and flanging, subject to the following qualifications: 1.3.1 Type F is not intended for flanging. 1.3.2 When Types S and E are required for close coiling or cold bending, Grade A is the preferred grade. This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending of Grade B pipe. 167 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints B 6 Specification for Zinc E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products E 1806 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition 3.1.8.3 Plain end, if desired, 3.1.8.4 Couplings power tight, if desired, 3.1.8.5 Taper tapped couplings for NPS 2 [DN 50] and smaller, if desired, 3.1.9 Close coiling, if required (see 8.2), 3.1.10 Skelp for tension tests, if permitted (see 17.2), 3.1.11 Certification (see Section 22), 3.1.12 End use of material, 3.1.13 Special requirements, and 3.1.14 Selection of applicable level of preservation and packaging and level of packing required, if other than as specified or if MIL-STD-163 applies (see 21.2). 2.2 ANSI Standards: ASC X12 B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose 4. Materials and Manufacture 4.1 The steel for both seamless and welded pipe shall be made by one or more of the following processes: openhearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen. 2.3 ASME Standard: B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe 2.4 Military Standards: MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage 4.2 When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast, identification of the resultant transition material is required. The producer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates the grades. 2.5 Federal Standards: Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products 4.3 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe in Grade B shall be heat treated after welding to a minimum of 1000°F [540°C] so that no untempered martensite remains, or otherwise processed in such a manner that no untempered martensite remains. 2.6 API Standard: 5L Specification for Line Pipe 4.4 When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion shall not exceed 1 1 ⁄2 % of the outside diameter pipe size. 3. Ordering Information 3.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate, for inclusion in the purchase order are as follows: 3.1.1 Specification designation (A 53 or A 53M, including year of issue), 5. Chemical Composition 5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to chemical composition in Table 1 and the chemical analysis shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751. 3.1.2 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths), 3.1.3 Grade (see Table 1), 3.1.4 Type (see 1.2 and Table 2), 3.1.5 Finish (black or galvanized), 3.1.6 Size (either nominal (NPS) [DN] and weight class or schedule number, or both; or outside diameter and nominal wall thickness, Table X2.2 and Table X2.3), 6. Product Analysis 6.1 The purchaser is permitted to perform an analysis of two pipes from each lot of 500 lengths, or fraction thereof. Samples for chemical analysis, except for spectrographic analysis, shall be taken in accordance with Practice E 1806. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 1. 3.1.7 Length (specific or random, Section 18), 3.1.8 End finish (plain end or threaded, Section 13), 3.1.8.1 Threaded and coupled, if desired, 3.1.8.2 Threads only (no couplings), if desired, 168 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 6.2 If the analysis of either pipe does not conform to the requirements specified in Table 1, analyses shall be made on additional pipes of double the original number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. SA-53/SA-53M is a test for ductility, no cracks or breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces, except as provided for in 9.7, shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than the value of H calculated as follows: H p (1 + e) t/(e + t/D) where: 7. Tensile Requirements 7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2. H p distance between flattening plates, in. [mm] (Note 4), e p deformation per unit length (constant for a given grade of steel, 0.09 for Grade A, and 0.07 for Grade B), t p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and D p specified outside diameter, in. [mm] 7.2 The yield strength corresponding to a permanent offset of 0.2% of the gage length of the specimen or to a total extension of 0.5% of the gage length under load shall be determined. 9.2.2 During the second step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test specimen breaks or the opposite sides of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material that is revealed during the entire flattening test shall be cause for rejection. 7.3 The test specimen taken across the weld shall show a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test will not be required for pipe under NPS 8 [DN 200]. 7.4 Transverse tension test specimens for electricwelded pipe NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger shall be taken opposite the weld. All transverse test specimens shall be approximately 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage length, and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from which the specimen was cut. This test is required for NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger. NOTE 4 — The H values have been calculated for standard and extraheavy weight sizes from NPS 21⁄2 to NPS 24 [DN 65 to DN 600], inclusive, and are shown in Table X2.1. 9.3 Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe — A test specimen at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps, with the weld located either 0° or 90° from the line of direction of force as required in 9.3.1 or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable. During the first step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces at the weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than two thirds of the specified diameter of the pipe. As a second step, the flattening shall be continued as a test for ductility away from the weld. During the second step, no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces away from the weld, except as provided for in 9.7, shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than one third of the specified outside diameter of the pipe but is not less than five times the wall thickness of the pipe. During the third step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the flattening test shall be cause for rejection. 8. Bending Requirements 8.1 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, a sufficient length of pipe shall be capable of being bent cold through 90° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is twelve times the outside diameter of the pipe, without developing cracks at any portion and without opening the weld. 8.2 When ordered for close coiling, the pipe shall stand being bent cold through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is eight times the outside diameter of the pipe, without failure. 8.3 Double-extra-strong pipe over NPS 11⁄4 [DN 32] need not be subjected to the bend test. 9. Flattening Test 9.1 The flattening test shall be made on pipe over NPS 2 [DN 50] with all thicknesses extra strong and lighter. 9.3.1 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening test specified in 9.3 shall be made using a test specimen taken from each end of each length of pipe. The tests from each end shall be made alternately with the weld at 0° and at 90° from the line of direction of force. 9.2 Seamless Pipe: 9.2.1 For seamless pipe, a test specimen at least 21⁄2 in. [60 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates in two steps. During the first step, which 169 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II 9.3.2 For pipe produced in multiple lengths, the flattening test specified in 9.3 shall be made as follows: cracks at these locations shall not be cause for rejection if the D-to-t ratio is less than 10. 9.3.2.1 Test specimens taken from, and representative of, the front end of the first pipe intended to be supplied from each coil, the back end of the last pipe intended to be supplied from each coil, and each side of any intermediate weld stop location shall be flattened with the weld located at 90° from the line of direction of force. 10. Hydrostatic Test 10.1 The hydrostatic test shall be applied, without leakage through the pipe wall, to each length of pipe except as provided in 11.2 for seamless pipe. 10.2 Each length of plain-end pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.2, and each threaded-and-coupled length shall be hydrostatically tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.3. It shall be permissible, at the discretion of the manufacturer, to perform the hydrostatic test on pipe with plain ends, with threads only, or with threads and couplings and also shall be permissible to test pipe in either single lengths or multiple lengths. 9.3.2.2 Test specimens taken from pipe at any two locations intermediate to the front end of the first pipe and the back end of the last pipe intended to be supplied from each coil shall be flattened with the weld located at 0° from the line of direction of force. 9.3.3 For pipe that is to be subsequently reheated throughout its cross section and hot formed by a reducing process, the manufacturer shall have the option of obtaining the flattening test specimens required by 9.3.1 or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable, either prior to or after such hot reducing. NOTE 5 — The hydrostatic test pressures given herein are inspection test pressures, are not intended as a basis for design, and do not have any direct relationship to working pressures. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 10.3 The minimum hydrostatic test pressure required to satisfy these requirements need not exceed 2500 psi [17 200 kPa] for NPS 3 [DN 80] and under, nor 2800 psi [19 300 kPa] for all sizes over NPS 3 [DN 80]. This does not prohibit testing at a higher pressure at the manufacturer’s option. The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 s for all sizes of seamless and electric-welded pipe. 9.4 Continuous-Welded Pipe — A test specimen at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps. The weld shall be located at 90° from the line of direction of force. During the first step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces at the weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than three fourths of the specified diameter of the pipe. As a second step, the flattening shall be continued as a test for ductility away from the weld. During the second step, no cracks or breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces away from the weld, except as provided for in 9.7, shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than 60% of the specified outside diameter of the pipe. During the third step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the flattening test shall be cause for rejection. 11. Nondestructive Electric Test 11.1 Type E Pipe: 11.1.1 The weld seam of each length of ERW pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice E 213, E 309, or E 570 as follows: 11.1.2 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection — Any equipment utilizing the ultrasonic or electromagnetic principles and capable of continuous and uninterrupted inspection of the weld seam shall be used. The equipment shall be checked with an applicable reference standard as described in 11.1.3 at least once every working turn or not more than 8 h to demonstrate its effectiveness and the inspection procedures. The equipment shall be adjusted to produce well-defined indications when the reference standard is scanned by the inspection unit in a manner simulating the inspection of the product. 9.5 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish requirements in Section 14. 9.6 Superficial ruptures as a result of surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection. 11.1.3 Reference Standards — The length of the reference standards shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer, and they shall have the same specified diameter and thickness as the product being inspected. Reference 9.7 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high on the inside surface at the 6 and 12 o’clock locations, 170 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS standards shall contain machined notches, one on the inside surface and one on the outside surface, or a drilled hole, as shown in Fig. 1, at the option of the pipe manufacturer. The notches shall be parallel to the weld seam, and shall be separated by a distance sufficient to produce two separate and distinguishable signals. The 1⁄8-in. [3.2-mm] hole shall be drilled through the wall and perpendicular to the surface of the reference standard as shown in Fig. 1. Care shall be taken in the preparation of the reference standard to ensure freedom from fins or other edge roughness, or distortion of the pipe. location of significant longitudinally or circumferentially oriented imperfections; however, different techniques need to be employed for the detection of differently oriented imperfections. Ultrasonic testing is not necessarily capable of detecting short, deep imperfections. 11.2.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this specification has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt type. 11.2.2.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in this specification is capable of detecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented discontinuities. The provisions of this specification only require longitudinal calibration for flux leakage. Different techniques need to be employed for the detection of differently oriented imperfections. NOTE 6 — The calibration standards defined in 11.1.3 are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of such standards are not to be construed as the minimum sizes of imperfections detectable by such equipment. 11.1.4 Acceptance Limits — Table 3 gives the height of acceptance limit signals in percent of the height of signals produced by reference standards. Imperfections in the weld seam that produce a signal greater than the acceptance limit signal given in Table 3 shall be considered a defect unless the pipe manufacturer can demonstrate that the imperfection does not reduce the effective wall thickness beyond 12 1 ⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness. 11.2.2.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in 10.2 has the capability of finding imperfections of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure. Hydrostatic testing is not necessarily capable of detecting very tight through-the-wall imperfections or imperfections that extend an appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration. 11.2 Seamless Pipe — As an alternative to the hydrostatic test, and when specified by the purchaser, the full body of each seamless pipe shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practices E 213, E 309, or E 570. In this case each length so furnished shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NDE.” Except as provided in 11.2.6.2 it is the intent of this test to reject pipe with imperfections which produce test signals equal to or greater than that of the calibration standard. 11.2.2.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections that are capable of being detected in the specific application of these examinations is directed to discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular product. 11.2.3 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference notches shall be at the option of the producer, and shall be any one of the three common notch shapes shown in Practice E 213. The depth of notch shall not exceed 12.5% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever is greater. 11.2.1 When the nondestructive electric test is performed, the lengths shall be marked with the letters “NDE.” The certification, when required, shall state Nondestructive Electric Tested and shall indicate which of the tests was applied. Also, the letters NDE shall be appended to the product specification number and material grade shown on the certification. 11.2.4 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one of the following calibration standards to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection. 11.2.2 The following information is intended to facilitate the use of this specification. 11.2.4.1 Drilled Hole — Depending upon the pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain three holes spaced 120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and sufficiently separated longitudinally to ensure separately distinguishable responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the pipe wall, care being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling. Depending upon the pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain the following hole: 11.2.2.1 The calibration standards defined in 11.2.3 through 11.2.5 are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of such standards are not to be construed as the minimum sizes of imperfections detectable by such equipment. 11.2.2.2 The ultrasonic testing referred to in this specification is capable of detecting the presence and 171 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-53/SA-53M Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M NPS ≤ 1⁄2 > 1⁄2 ≤ 11⁄4 > 11⁄4 ≤ 2 >2≤ 5 >5 2004 SECTION II DN ≤ 15 > 15 ≤ 32 > 32 ≤ 50 > 50 ≤ 125 > 125 Diameter of Drilled Hole 0.039 in. (1 mm) 0.055 in. (1.4 mm) 0.071 in. (1.8 mm) 0.087 in. (2.2 mm) 0.106 in. (2.7 mm) with provisions of Section 14. A few examples of these imperfections would be straightener marks, cutting chips, scratches, steel die stamps, stop marks, or pipe reducer ripple. 11.2.7 The test methods described in this section are not necessarily capable of inspecting the end portion of pipes. This condition is referred to as end effect. The length of the end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer and, when specified in the purchase order, reported to the purchaser. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 11.2.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using a round tool or file with a 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] diameter, a notch shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever is greater. 11.2.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in. [0.8 mm] or less in width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of the pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever is greater. The length of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method. 11.2.4.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the calibration pipe shall be compatible with the testing equipment and the method being used. 11.2.5 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal calibration reference notches shall be straight sided notches machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis. For wall thickness under 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], outside and inside notches shall be used. For wall thickness equal and above 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], only an outside notch shall be used. Notch depth shall not exceed 12.5% of the specified wall thickness, or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever is greater. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm], and the width shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and inside diameter notches shall be located sufficiently apart to allow separation and identification of the signals. 11.2.6 Pipe containing one or more imperfections that produce a signal equal to or greater than the signal produced by the calibration standard shall be rejected or the area producing the signal shall be rejected. 11.2.6.1 Test signals produced by imperfections that cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or cracklike imperfections, shall result in rejection of the pipe, unless it is repaired and retested. To be accepted, the pipe must pass the same specification test to which it was originally subjected, provided that the remaining wall thickness is not decreased below that permitted by the specification. It shall be permissible to reduce the outside diameter at the point of grinding by the amount so removed. 11.2.6.2 It shall be permissible to evaluate test signals produced by visual imperfections in accordance 12. Permissible Variations in Weight and Dimensions 12.1 Weight — The weight of the pipe as specified in Table X2.2 and Table X2.3 or as calculated from the relevant equation in ASME B36.10M shall not vary by more than ±10%. NOTE 7 — The weight tolerance is determined from the weights of the customary lifts of pipe as produced for shipment by the mill, divided by the number of feet of pipe in the lift. On pipe sizes over NPS 4 [DN 100], where individual lengths are weighed, the weight tolerance is applicable to the individual length. 12.2 Diameter — For pipe NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and under, the outside diameter at any point shall not vary more than ± 1⁄64 in. [0.4 mm] from the standard specified. For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and over, the outside diameter shall not vary more than ±1% from the standard specified. 12.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5% under the nominal wall thickness specified. The minimum wall thickness on inspection shall conform to the requirements in Table X2.4. 13. End Finish 13.1 When ordered with plain ends, the pipe shall be furnished to the following practice, unless otherwise specified. 13.1.1 NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and Smaller — Unless otherwise specified on the purchase order, end finish shall be at the option of the manufacturer. 13.1.2 NPS 2 [DN 50] and Larger: 13.1.2.1 Pipe of standard or extra strong weights, or in wall thickness less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], other than double extra strong pipe, shall be plain-end beveled with ends beveled to an angle of 30°, +5°, -0°, measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe, and with a root face of 1⁄16 in. ± 1⁄32 in. [1.6 mm ± 0.8 mm]. 172 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 13.1.2.2 Pipe with wall thicknesses over 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], and all double extra strong, shall be plainend square cut. welding of Type F pipe and the weld seam of Type E is prohibited. 14.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may be cut off within the limits of requirement on length, or 13.2 When ordered with threaded ends, the pipe ends shall be provided with a thread in accordance with the gaging practice and tolerances of ANSI B1.20.1. For standard-weight pipe NPS 6 [DN 150] and smaller, refer to Table X3.1 for threading data. For standard-weight pipe NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger and all sizes of extrastrong weight and double extra-strong weight, refer to Table X3.2 for threading data. Threaded pipe NPS 4 [DN 100] and larger shall have thread protectors on the ends not protected by a coupling. 14.2.4 Rejected. 14.3 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected to rejection if surface defects repaired in accordance with 14.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of such pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 14.4 When imperfections or defects are removed by grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained, and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that permitted by this specification. It shall be permissible to reduce the outside diameter at the point of grinding by the amount so removed. 13.3 When ordered with couplings, one end of each length of pipe shall be provided with a coupling manufactured in accordance with Specification A 865. The coupling threads shall be in accordance with the gaging practice of ANSI B1.20.1. The coupling shall be applied handling-tight, unless power-tight is specified on the order. Couplings are to be made of steel. Taper-tapped couplings shall be furnished on all weights of threaded pipe sizes NPS 21⁄2 [DN 65] and larger. For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and smaller, it is regular practice to furnish straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight pipe and taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong and double extrastrong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and smaller on standard-weight pipe, it is recommended that line pipe threads in accordance with API Specification 5L be ordered. The taper-tapped couplings provided on line pipe in these sizes may be used on mill-threaded standard-weight pipe of the same size. 14.4.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In the case of a dispute, the measurement determined by use of the mechanical caliper shall govern. 14.5 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M. 14.6 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight. 14.7 The pipe shall contain no dents greater than 10% of the pipe diameter or 1⁄4 in. [6 mm], whichever is smaller, measured as a gap between the lowest point of the dent and a prolongation of the original contour of the pipe. Cold-formed dents deeper than 1⁄8 in. [3 mm] shall be free of sharp bottom gouges; it shall be permissible to remove the gouges by grinding, provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits. The length of the dent in any direction shall not exceed one half the pipe diameter. 14. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance 14.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance that they have been properly evaluated with respect to depth. 14.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than 121⁄2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe with defects shall be given one of the following dispositions: 15. Number of Tests 15.1 Except as required by 15.2, one of each of the tests specified in Section 7, 8.2, and Section 9 shall be made on test specimens taken from one length of pipe from each lot of each pipe size. For continuous-welded pipe, a lot shall contain no more than 25 tons [23 Mg] of pipe for pipe sizes NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and smaller, and no more than 50 tons [45 Mg] of pipe for pipe sizes NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger. For seamless and electricresistance-welded pipe, a lot shall contain no more than one heat, and at the option of the manufacturer shall 14.2.1 The defect shall be removed by grinding, provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits, 14.2.2 Type S pipe and the parent metal of Type E pipe, except within 1⁄2 in. [13 mm] of the fusion line of the electric resistance seam, are permitted to be repaired in accordance with the welding provisions of 14.5. Repair 173 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-53/SA-53M Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II contain no more than 500 lengths of pipe (as initially cut after the final pipe-forming operation, prior to any further cutting to the required ordered lengths) or 50 tons [45 Mg] of pipe. length and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from which the specimen was cut. 17.4 Test specimens for the bend and flattening tests shall be taken from pipe. Test specimens for the flattening test shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs. 15.2 The number of flattening tests for electric-resistance-welded pipe shall be in accordance with 9.3.1 or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable. 17.5 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature. 15.3 Except as allowed by 11.2, each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 10. 18. Lengths 18.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the following regular practice. 16. Retests 16.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any lot do not conform to the requirements specified in Sections 7, 8, and 9, retests are permitted to be made on additional pipe of double the original number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 18.1.1 Pipe of weights lighter than extra strong shall be in single-random lengths of 16 to 22 ft [4.88 to 6.71 m], but not more than 5% of the total number of threaded lengths are permitted to be jointers (two pieces coupled together). When ordered with plain ends, 5% are permitted to be in lengths of 12 to 16 ft [3.66 to 4.88 m]. 16.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, if any section of the pipe fails to comply with the requirements of 9.3, it shall be permissible to cut other sections from the same end of the same length until satisfactory tests are obtained, except that the finished pipe shall not be shorter than 80% of its length after the original cropping; otherwise the length shall be rejected. For pipe produced in multiple lengths, it shall be permissible to cut retests from each end of each individual length in the multiple. Such tests shall be made with the weld alternately 0° and 90° from the line of direction of force. 18.1.2 Pipe of extra-strong and heavier weights shall be in random lengths of 12 to 22 ft [3.66 to 6.71 m]. Five percent are permitted to be in lengths of 6 to 12 ft [1.83 to 3.66 m]. 18.1.3 When extra-strong or lighter pipe is ordered in double-random lengths, the minimum lengths shall be not less than 22 ft [6.71 m], with a minimum average for the order of 35 ft [10.67 m]. 18.1.4 When lengths longer than single random are required for wall thicknesses heavier than extra-strong, the length shall be subject to negotiation. 18.1.5 When pipe is furnished with threads and couplings, the length shall be measured to the outer face of the coupling. 17. Test Methods 17.1 The test specimens and the tests required by this specification shall conform to those described in the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 19. Galvanized Pipe 19.1 Galvanized pipe ordered under this specification shall be coated with zinc inside and outside by the hotdip process. The zinc used for the coating shall be any grade of zinc conforming to Specification B 6. 17.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall be taken from the end of the pipe or, for continuous-welded pipe, it shall be permissible to be taken from the skelp, at a point approximately 90° from the weld, and shall not be flattened between gage marks. The sides of each specimen shall be parallel between gage marks. If desired, the tension tests are permitted to be made on the full section of pipe. When impracticable to pull a test specimen in full section, the standard 2-in. [50-mm] gage length tension test specimen shown in Fig. A2.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 is acceptable. 19.2 Weight of Coating — The weight of zinc coating shall be not less than 1.8 oz/ft2 [0.55 kg/m2] as determined from the average results of the two specimens taken for test in the manner prescribed in 19.5 and not less than 1.6 oz/ft2 [0.49 kg/m2] for either of these specimens. The weight of coating expressed in ounces per square foot shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc, inside plus outside, by the total area, inside plus outside, of the surface coated. Each specimen shall have not less than 1.3 oz/ft2 [0.40 kg/m2] of zinc coating on each surface, calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc on 17.3 Transverse weld test specimens from electricresistance-welded pipe shall be taken with the weld at the center of the specimen. All transverse test specimens shall be approximately 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage 174 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS the given surface (outside or inside) by the area of the surface coated (outside or inside). not meet the requirements of this specification based on the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length shall be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 19.3 Weight of Coating Test — The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by a stripping test in accordance with Test Method A 90/A 90M. The total zinc on each specimen shall be determined in a single stripping operation. 21.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and requirements of this specification, shall be set aside and the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for agreement. 19.4 Test Specimens — Test specimens for determination of weight of coating shall be cut approximately 4 in. [100 mm] in length. 19.5 Number of Tests — Two test specimens for the determination of weight of coating shall be taken, one from each end of one length of galvanized pipe selected at random from each lot of 500 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size. 19.6 Retests — If the weight of coating of any lot does not conform to the requirements specified in 19.2, retests of two additional pipes from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 22. Certification 22.1 The producer or supplier shall, upon request, furnish to the purchaser a certificate of inspection stating that the material has been manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification (including year of issue), and has been found to meet the requirements. 19.7 When pipe ordered under this specification is to be galvanized, the tension, flattening, and bend tests shall be made on the base material before galvanizing. When specified, results of the mechanical tests on the base material shall be reported to the purchaser. If it is impracticable to make the mechanical tests on the base material before galvanizing, it shall be permissible to make such tests on galvanized samples, and any flaking or cracking of the zinc coating shall not be considered cause for rejection. When galvanized pipe is bent or otherwise fabricated to a degree that causes the zinc coating to stretch or compress beyond the limit of elasticity, some flaking of the coating is acceptable. 22.2 Report — For Types E and S, the producer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical analysis report for the elements specified in Table 1. 22.3 EDI — A certificate of inspection or chemical analysis report printed from or used in electronic form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The use and format of the EDI document are subject to agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. NOTE 8 — EDI is the computer to computer exchange of business information in a standard format such as ANSI ASC X12. 20. Inspection 20.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. 22.4 Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the certificate of inspection or chemical analysis report is responsible for its content. 23. Product Marking 23.1 Except as allowed by 23.5 and 23.6, each length of pipe shall be legibly marked in the following sequence by rolling, stamping, or stenciling to show: 23.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or mark, 23.1.2 Specification number (year of issue not required), 21. Rejection 21.1 The purchaser is permitted to inspect each length of pipe received from the manufacturer and, if it does NOTE 9 — Pipe that complies with multiple compatible specifications may be marked with the appropriate designation for each specification. 175 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-53/SA-53M Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II 23.1.3 Size (NPS and weight class, schedule number, or nominal wall thickness; or specified outside diameter and nominal wall thickness), that bar coding be consistent with the Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG) standard prepared by the Primary Metals Subcommittee of the AIAG Bar Code Project Team. 23.1.4 Grade (A or B), 23.1.5 Type of pipe (F, E, or S), 23.1.6 Test pressure, seamless pipe only (if applicable, in accordance with Table 4), 24. Government Procurement 24.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Federal Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required, for military agencies. 23.1.7 Nondestructive electric test, seamless pipe only (if applicable, in accordance with Table 4), 23.2 Unless another marking format is specified in the purchase order, length shall be marked in feet and tenths of a foot, or metres to two decimal places, dependent upon the units to which the pipe was ordered. The location of such marking shall be at the option of the manufacturer. 24.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the producer is responsible for the performance of all inspection and test requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall use its own or any other suitable facilities for performing the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless otherwise disapproved by the purchaser in the contract or purchase order. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where deemed necessary to ensure that the material conforms to prescribed requirements. 23.3 Heat number, lot number, run number, or a combination thereof shall be marked at the option of the manufacturer, unless specific marking is specified in the purchase order. The location of such marking shall be at the option of the manufacturer. 23.4 Any additional information desired by the manufacturer or specified in the purchase order. 23.5 For pipe NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and smaller that is bundled, it shall be permissible to mark this information on a tag securely attached to each bundle. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 23.6 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths by a subsequent producer for resale as material, the processor shall transfer complete identification including the name or brand of the manufacturer, to each unmarked cut length, or to metal tags securely attached to unmarked pipe bundled in accordance with the requirements of 23.5. The same material designation shall be included with the information transferred, and the processor’s name, trademark, or brand shall be added. 25. Packaging and Package Marking 25.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging, marking, and loading or shipment shall be in accordance with those procedures recommended by Practices A 700. 23.7 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 23.1, 23.5, and 23.6, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. It is recommended 26. Keywords 26.1 black steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe; welded steel pipe; zinc coated steel pipe 176 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M 0.04 in. [1 mm] max. 30 deg max. N10 Depth Depth 10% t, 15% with min. of 0.012, 0.002 in. [0.3 0.5 mm] 121/2% t or less Length For eddy current – 1.5 in. [38 mm] max. Total Length For diverted flux and ultrasonic – 2 in. [50 mm] min. at full depth B (Buttress) Notch 60 deg max. 10% t or less N10 Notch V10 Notch 1/ in. 8 [3.2 mm] 20% t or less Area of each side, 0.006 sq. in. [3.9 mm2] max. P (Parallel Sided) Notch Drilled Hole FIG. 1 CALIBRATION STANDARDS TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Composition, max, % Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur CopperA NickelA ChromiumA MolybdenumA VanadiumA Type S (seamless pipe) Open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen: Grade A Grade B 0.25 0.30 0.95 1.20 0.05 0.05 0.045 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.15 0.08 0.08 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.15 0.08 0.08 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08 Type E (electric-resistance-welded) Open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen: Grade A Grade B 0.25 0.30 0.95 1.20 0.05 0.05 0.045 0.045 0.40 0.40 Type F (furnace-welded pipe) Open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic oxygen Grade A A 0.30 1.20 0.05 0.045 0.40 The combination of these five elements shall not exceed 1.00%. 177 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 2 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS Type F Open-Hearth, Basic Oxygen, or ElectricFurnace, Grade A Tensile strength, min, psi [MPa] Yield strength, min, psi [MPa] Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] TABLE 3 ACCEPTANCE LIMITS Types E and S Type Notch Grade A 48 000 [330] 60 000 [415] 30 000 [205] 30 000 [205] 35 000 [240] A,B N10, V10 B.P. Grade B 48 000 [330] A,B Size of Hole A,B mm 1 ⁄8 ... 3.2 ... 100 80 TABLE 4 MARKING OF SEAMLESS PIPE A The minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] shall be that determined by the following equation: e p 625 000 [1940] A0.2/U 0.9 where: Hydro NDE Marking Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Test pressure NDE Test pressure/NDE e p minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] in percent rounded to the nearest percent A p cross-sectional area of the tension specimen, rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.2 [1 mm2], based on the specified outside diameter or the nominal specimen width and specified wall thickness. If the area calculated is equal to or greater than 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2], then the value 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2] shall be used, and U p specified tensile strength, psi [MPa] B See Table X4.1 or Table X4.2, whichever is applicable, for minimum elongation values for various size tension specimens and grades. 178 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS in. Acceptance Limit Signal, % Not for Resale APPENDICES (Nonmandatory Information) X1. DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF PIPE X1.1 Type F, Furnace-Butt-Welded Pipe, ContinuousWelded — Pipe produced in continuous lengths from coiled skelp and subsequently cut into individual lengths, having its longitudinal butt joint forge welded by the mechanical pressure developed in rolling the hot-formed skelp through a set of round pass welding rolls. X1.2 Type E, Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe — Pipe produced in individual lengths or in continuous lengths from coiled skelp and subsequently cut into individual lengths, having a longitudinal butt joint wherein coalescence is produced by the heat obtained from resistance of the pipe to the flow of electric current in a circuit of which the pipe is a part, and by the application of pressure. X1.3 Type S, Wrought Steel Seamless Pipe — Wrought steel seamless pipe is a tubular product made without a welded seam. It is manufactured by hot working steel and, if necessary, by subsequently cold finishing the hotworked tubular product to produce the desired shape, dimensions, and properties. X2. TABLES FOR DIMENSIONAL AND CERTAIN MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS X2.1 Tables X2.1–X2.4 address dimensional and certain mechanical requirements. 179 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X2.1 CALCULATED H VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE NPS Designator DN Designator Outside Diameter, in. [mm] Distance, in. [mm], Between Plates “H” by Formula: H p (1 + e ) t /(e + t/D ) Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Grade A Grade B --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 21⁄2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 [5.16] 0.276 [7.01] 1.378 [35.0] 1.618 [41.1] 1.545 [39.2] 1.779 [45.2] 3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.216 [5.49] 0.300 [7.62] 1.552 [39.4] 1.861 [47.3] 1.755 [44.6] 2.062 [52.4] 31⁄2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.226 [5.74] 0.318 [8.08] 1.682 [42.7] 2.045 [51.9] 1.912 [48.6] 2.276 [57.8] 4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.237 [6.02] 0.337 [8.56] 1.811 [46.0] 2.228 [56.6] 2.067 [52.5] 2.489 [63.2] 5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.258 [6.55] 0.375 [9.52] 2.062 [52.4] 2.597 [66.0] 2.372 [60.2] 2.920 [74.2] 6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.280 [7.11] 0.432 [10.97] 2.308 [58.6] 3.034 [77.1] 2.669 [67.8] 3.419 [86.8] 8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.277 [7.04] 0.322 [8.18] 0.500 [12.70] 2.473 [62.8] 2.757 [70.0] 3.683 [93.5] 2.902 [73.7] 3.210 [81.5] 4.181 [106.2] 10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.279 0.307 0.365 0.500 2.623 2.823 3.210 3.993 3.111 3.333 3.757 4.592 12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.300 [7.62] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.105 [78.9] 3.423 [86.9] 4.218 [107.1] 3.683 [93.5] 4.037 [102.5] 4.899 [124.4] 14 350 14.000 [355.6] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.500 [88.9] 4.336 [110.1] 4.146 [105.3] 5.061 [128.5] 16 400 16.000 [406.4] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.603 [91.5] 4.494 [114.1] 4.294 [109.1] 5.284 [134.2] 18 450 18.000 [457] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.688 [93.7] 4.628 [117.6] 4.417 [112.2] 5.472 [139.0] 20 500 20.000 [508] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.758 [95.5] 4.740 [120.4] 4.521 [114.8] 5.632 [143.1] 24 600 24.000 [610] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 3.869 [98.3] 4.918 [124.9] 4.686 [119.0] 5.890 [149.6] A [7.09] A [7.80] [9.27] [12.70] Special order only. 180 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale [66.6] [71.7] [81.5] [101.4] [79.0] [84.7] [95.4] [116.6] PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M TABLE X2.2 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE NPS DN Designator Designator Outside Diameter, in. [mm] Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Weight Schedule Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Test Pressure, A psi [kPa] Grade A Grade B 1 6 0.405 [10.3] 0.068 [1.73] 0.095 [2.41] 0.24 [0.37] 0.31 [0.47] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1 8 0.540 [13.7] 0.088 [2.24] 0.119 [3.02] 0.43 [0.63] 0.54 [0.80] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 3 10 0.675 [17.1] 0.091 [2.31] 0.126 [3.20] 0.57 [0.84] 0.74 [1.10] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1 15 0.840 [21.3] 0.109 0.147 0.188 0.294 [2.77] [3.73] [4.78] [7.47] 0.85 1.09 1.31 1.72 [1.27] [1.62] [1.95] [2.55] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 900 [6200] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 900 [6200] 1000 [6900] 3 20 1.050 [26.7] 0.113 0.154 0.219 0.308 [2.87] [3.91] [5.56] [7.82] 1.13 1.48 1.95 2.44 [1.69] [2.20] [2.90] [3.64] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 950 [6500] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 950 [6500] 1000 [6900] 1 25 1.315 [33.4] 0.133 0.179 0.250 0.358 [3.38] [4.55] [6.35] [9.09] 1.68 2.17 2.85 3.66 [2.50] [3.24] [4.24] [5.45] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 950 [6500] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 950 [6500] 1000 [6900] 11⁄4 32 1.660 [42.2] 0.140 0.191 0.250 0.382 [3.56] [4.85] [6.35] [9.70] 2.27 3.00 3.77 5.22 [3.39] [4.47] [5.61] [7.77] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000] 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100] 1900 [13 100] 2000 [13 800] 2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900] 11⁄2 40 1.900 [48.3] 0.145 0.200 0.281 0.400 [3.68] [5.08] [7.14] [10.16] 2.72 3.63 4.86 6.41 [4.05] [5.41] [7.25] [9.56] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000] 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100] 1950 [13 400] 2050 [14 100] 2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900] 2 50 2.375 [60.3] 0.154 0.218 0.344 0.436 [3.91] [5.54] [8.74] [11.07] 3.66 [5.44] 5.03 [7.48] 7.47 [11.11] 9.04 [13.44] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 2300 2500 2500 2500 [15 900] [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] 2500 2500 2500 2500 [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] 21⁄2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 0.276 0.375 0.552 [5.16] [7.01] [9.52] [14.02] 5.80 [8.63] 7.67 [11.41] 10.02 [14.90] 13.71 [20.39] STD XS ... XXS 40 80 160 ... 2500 2500 2500 2500 [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] 2500 2500 2500 2500 [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] [17 200] 3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.125 0.156 0.188 0.216 0.250 0.281 0.300 0.438 0.600 [3.18] [3.96] [4.78] [5.49] [6.35] [7.14] [7.62] [11.13] [15.24] 4.51 [6.72] 5.58 [8.29] 6.66 [9.92] 7.58 [11.29] 8.69 [12.93] 9.67 [14.40] 10.26 [15.27] 14.34 [21.35] 18.60 [27.68] ... ... ... STD ... ... XS ... XXS ... ... ... 40 ... ... 80 160 ... 1290 [8900] 1600 [11 000] 1930 [13 330] 2220 [15 300] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 1500 [1000] 1870 [12 900] 2260 [15 600] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 31⁄2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.125 [3.18] 0.156 [3.96] 5.18 [7.72] 6.41 [9.53] ... ... ... ... 1120 [7700] 1400 [6700] 1310 [19 000] 1640 [11 300] ⁄8 ⁄4 ⁄8 ⁄2 ⁄4 181 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X2.2 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D) Outside Diameter, in. [mm] NPS DN Designator Designator Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Weight Schedule Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Test Pressure, A psi [kPa] Grade A 0.188 0.226 0.250 0.281 0.318 [4.78] [5.74] [6.35] [7.14] [8.08] 7.66 [11.41] 9.12 [13.57] 10.02 [14.92] 11.17 [16.63] 12.52 [18.63] ... STD ... ... XS ... 40 ... ... 80 1690 2030 2250 2500 2800 [11 700] [14 000] [15 500] [17 200] [19 300] Grade B 1970 2370 2500 2500 2800 [13 600] [16 300] [17 200] [17 200] [19 300] 4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.125 0.156 0.188 0.219 0.237 0.250 0.281 0.312 0.337 0.438 0.531 0.674 [3.18] [3.96] [4.78] [5.56] [6.02] [6.35] [7.14] [7.92] [8.56] [11.13] [13.49] [17.12] 5.85 [8.71] 7.24 [10.78] 8.67 [12.91] 10.02 [14.91] 10.80 [16.07] 11.36 [16.90] 12.67 [18.87] 13.97 [20.78] 15.00 [22.32] 19.02 [28.32] 22.53 [33.54] 27.57 [41.03] ... ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... XXS ... ... ... ... 40 ... ... ... 80 120 160 ... 1000 [6900] 1250 [8600] 1500 [10 300] 1750 [12 100] 1900 [13 100] 2000 [13 800] 2250 [15 100] 2500 [17 200] 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 1170 [8100] 1460 [10 100] 1750 [12 100] 2040 [14 100] 2210 [15 200] 2330 [16 100] 2620 [18 100] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.156 0.188 0.219 0.258 0.281 0.312 0.344 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 [3.96] [4.78] [5.56] [6.55] [7.14] [7.92] [8.74] [9.52] [12.70] [15.88] [19.05] 9.02 [13.41] 10.80 [16.09] 12.51 [18.61] 14.63 [21.77] 15.87 [23.62] 17.51 [26.05] 19.19 [28.57] 20.80 [30.94] 27.06 [40.28] 32.99 [49.11] 38.59 [57.43] ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... XXS ... ... ... 40 ... ... ... 80 120 160 ... 1010 [7000] 1220 [8400] 1420 [9800] 1670 [11 500] 1820 [12 500] 2020 [13 900] 2230 [15 400] 2430 [16 800] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 1180 [8100] 1420 [9800] 1650 [11 400] 1950 [13 400] 2120 [14 600] 2360 [16 300] 2600 [17 900] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.188 0.219 0.250 0.280 0.312 0.344 0.375 0.432 0.562 0.719 0.864 [4.78] [5.56] [6.35] [7.11] [7.92] [8.74] [9.52] [10.97] [14.27] [18.26] [21.95] 12.94 15.00 17.04 18.99 21.06 23.10 25.05 28.60 36.43 45.39 53.21 [19.27] [22.31] [25.36] [28.26] [31.32] [34.39] [37.28] [42.56] [54.20] [67.56] [79.22] ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... XXS ... ... ... 40 ... ... ... 80 120 160 ... 1020 [7000] 1190 [8200] 1360 [9400] 1520 [10 500] 1700 [11 700] 1870 [12 900] 2040 [14 100] 2350 [16 200] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 1190 [8200] 1390 [9600] 1580 [10 900] 1780 [12 300] 1980 [13 700] 2180 [15 000] 2380 [16 400] 2740 [18 900] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.188 0.203 0.219 0.250 0.277 0.312 0.322 0.344 0.375 0.406 0.438 0.500 0.594 [4.78] [5.16] [5.56] [6.35] [7.04] [7.92] [8.18] [8.74] [9.52] [10.31] [11.13] [12.70] [15.09] 16.96 18.28 19.68 22.38 24.72 27.73 28.58 30.45 33.07 35.67 38.33 43.43 51.00 [25.26] [27.22] [29.28] [33.31] [36.31] [41.24] [42.55] [45.34] [49.20] [53.08] [57.08] [64.64] [75.92] ... ... ... ... ... ... STD ... ... ... ... XS ... ... ... ... 20 30 ... 40 ... ... 60 ... 80 100 780 [5400] 850 [5900] 910 [6300] 1040 [7200] 1160 [7800] 1300 [9000] 1340 [9200] 1440 [9900] 1570 [10 800] 1700 [11 700] 1830 [12 600] 2090 [14 400] 2500 [17 200] 920 [6300] 1000 [6900] 1070 [7400] 1220 [8400] 1350 [9300] 1520 [10 500] 1570 [10 800] 1680 [11 600] 1830 [12 600] 2000 [13 800] 2130 [14 700] 2430 [16 800] 2800 [19 300] 182 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M TABLE X2.2 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D) NPS DN Designator Designator Outside Diameter, in. [mm] Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Weight Schedule Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Test Pressure, A psi [kPa] Grade A 0.719 0.812 0.875 0.906 [18.26] [20.62] [22.22] [23.01] 60.77 [90.44] 67.82 [100.92] 72.49 [107.88] 74.76 [111.27] ... ... XXS ... 120 140 ... 160 2800 2800 2800 2800 [19 300] [19 300] [19 300] [19 300] Grade B 2800 2800 2800 2800 [19 300] [19 300] [19 300] [19 300] 10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.188 0.203 0.219 0.250 0.279 0.307 0.344 0.365 0.438 0.500 0.594 0.719 0.844 1.000 1.125 [4.78] [5.16] [5.56] [6.35] [7.09] [7.80] [8.74] [9.27] [11.13] [12.70] [15.09] [18.26] [21.44] [25.40] [28.57] 21.23 [31.62] 22.89 [34.08] 24.65 [36.67] 28.06 [41.75] 31.23 [46.49] 34.27 [51.01] 38.27 [56.96] 40.52 [60.29] 48.28 [71.87] 54.79 [81.52] 64.49 [95.97] 77.10 [114.70] 89.38 [133.00] 104.23 [155.09] 115.75 [172.21] ... ... ... ... ... ... ... STD ... XS ... ... ... XXS ... ... ... ... 20 ... 30 ... 40 ... 60 80 100 120 140 160 630 [4300] 680 [4700] 730 [5000] 840 [5800] 930 [6400] 1030 [7100] 1150 [7900] 1220 [8400] 1470 [10 100] 1670 [11 500] 1990 [13 700] 2410 [16 600] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 730 [5000] 800 [5500] 860 [5900] 980 [6800] 1090 [7500] 1200 [8300] 1340 [9200] 1430 [9900] 1710 [11 800] 1950 [13 400] 2320 [16 000] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.203 [5.16] 0.219 [5.56] 0.250 [6.35] 0.281 [7.14] 0.312 [7.92] 0.330 [8.38] 0.344 [8.74] 0.375 [9.52] 0.406 [10.31] 0.438 [11.13] 0.500 [12.70] 0.562 [14.27] 0.688 [17.48] 0.844 [21.44] 1.000 [25.40] 1.125 [28.57] 1.312 [33.32] 27.23 [40.55] 29.34 [43.63] 33.41 [49.71] 37.46 [55.75] 41.48 [61.69] 43.81 [65.18] 45.62 [67.90] 49.61 [73.78] 53.57 [79.70] 57.65 [85.82] 65.48 [97.43] 73.22 [108.92] 88.71 [132.04] 107.42 [159.86] 125.61 [186.91] 139.81 [208.00] 160.42 [238.68] ... ... ... ... ... ... ... STD ... ... XS ... ... ... XXS ... ... ... ... 20 ... ... 30 ... ... 40 ... ... 60 80 100 120 140 160 570 [3900] 620 [4300] 710 [4900] 790 [5400] 880 [6100] 930 [6400] 970 [6700] 1060 [7300] 1150 [7900] 1240 [8500] 1410 [9700] 1590 [11 000] 1940 [13 400] 2390 [16 500] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 670 [4600] 720 [5000] 820 [5700] 930 [6400] 1030 [7100] 1090 [7500] 1130 [7800] 1240 [8500] 1340 [9200] 1440 [9900] 1650 [11 400] 1850 [12 800] 2270 [15 700] 2780 [19 200] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 14 350 14.000 [355.6] 0.210 0.219 0.250 0.281 0.312 0.344 0.375 0.438 0.469 0.500 0.594 0.750 0.938 1.094 1.250 1.406 2.000 30.96 [46.04] 32.26 [47.99] 36.75 [54.69] 41.21 [61.35] 45.65 [67.90] 50.22 [74.76] 54.62 [81.25] 63.50 [94.55] 67.84 [100.94] 72.16 [107.39] 85.13 [126.71] 106.23 [158.10] 130.98 [194.96] 150.93 [224.65] 170.37 [253.56] 189.29 [281.70] 256.56 [381.83] ... ... ... ... ... ... STD ... ... XS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 ... 20 ... 30 40 ... ... 60 80 100 120 140 160 ... 540 [3700] 560 [3900] 640 [4400] 720 [5000] 800 [5500] 880 [6100] 960 [6600] 1130 [7800] 1210 [8300] 1290 [8900] 1530 [10 500] 1930 [13 300] 2410 [16 600] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 630 [4300] 660 [4500] 750 [5200] 840 [5800] 940 [6500] 1030 [7100] 1120 [7700] 1310 [9000] 1410 [9700] 1500 [10 300] 1790 [12 300] 2250 [15 500] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] [5.33] [5.56] [6.35] [7.14] [7.92] [8.74] [9.52] [11.13] [11.91] [12.70] [15.09] [19.05] [23.83] [27.79] [31.75] [35.71] [50.80] 183 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X2.2 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D) Outside Diameter, in. [mm] NPS DN Designator Designator Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Weight Schedule Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Test Pressure, A psi [kPa] Grade A Grade B 2.125 [53.97] 2.200 [55.88] 2.500 [63.50] 269.76 [401.44] 277.51 [413.01] 307.34 [457.40] ... ... ... ... ... ... 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 16.000 [406.4] 0.219 [5.56] 0.250 [6.35] 0.281 [7.14] 0.312 [7.92] 0.344 [8.74] 0.375 [9.52] 0.438 [11.13] 0.469 [11.91] 0.500 [12.70] 0.656 [16.66] 0.844 [21.44] 1.031 [26.19] 1.219 [30.96] 1.438 [36.53] 1.594 [40.49] 36.95 [54.96] 42.09 [62.64] 47.22 [70.30] 52.32 [77.83] 57.57 [85.71] 62.64 [93.17] 72.86 [108.49] 77.87 [115.86] 82.85 [123.30] 107.60 [160.12] 136.74 [203.53] 164.98 [245.56] 192.61 [286.64] 223.85 [333.19] 245.48 [365.35] ... ... ... ... ... STD ... ... XS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 ... 20 ... 30 ... ... 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 490 [3400] 560 [3900] 630 [4300] 700 [4800] 770 [5300] 840 [5800] 990 [6800] 1060 [7300] 1120 [7700] 1480 [10 200] 1900 [13 100] 2320 [16 000] 2740 [18 900] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 570 [3900] 660 [4500] 740 [5100] 820 [5700] 900 [6200] 980 [6800] 1150 [7900] 1230 [8500] 1310 [9000] 1720 [11 900] 2220 [15 300] 2710 [18 700] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 16 400 18 450 18.000 [457] 0.250 0.281 0.312 0.344 0.375 0.406 0.438 0.469 0.500 0.562 0.750 0.938 1.156 1.375 1.562 1.781 [6.35] [7.14] [7.92] [8.74] [9.52] [10.31] [11.13] [11.91] [12.70] [14.27] [19.05] [23.83] [29.36] [34.92] [39.67] [45.24] 47.44 [70.60] 53.23 [79.24] 58.99 [87.75] 64.93 [96.66] 70.65 [105.10] 76.36 [113.62] 82.23 [122.43] 87.89 [130.78] 93.54 [139.20] 104.76 [155.87] 138.30 [205.83] 171.08 [254.67] 208.15 [309.76] 244.37 [363.64] 274.48 [408.45] 308.79 [459.59] ... ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 ... 20 ... ... ... 30 ... ... 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 500 [3400] 560 [3900] 620 [4300] 690 [4800] 750 [5200] 810 [5600] 880 [6100] 940 [6500] 1000 [6900] 1120 [7700] 1500 [10 300] 1880 [13 000] 2310 [15 900] 2750 [19 000] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 580 [4000] 660 [4500] 730 [5000] 800 [5500] 880 [6100] 950 [6500] 1020 [7000] 1090 [7500] 1170 [8100] 1310 [9000] 1750 [12 100] 2190 [15 100] 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 20 500 20.000 [508] 0.250 [6.35] 0.281 [7.14] 0.312 [7.92] 0.344 [8.74] 0.375 [9.52] 0.406 [10.31] 0.438 [11.13] 0.469 [11.91] 0.500 [12.70] 0.594 [15.09] 0.812 [20.62] 1.031 [26.19] 1.281 [32.54] 1.500 [38.10] 1.750 [44.45] 1.969 [50.01] 52.78 [78.55] 59.23 [88.19] 65.66 [97.67] 72.28 [107.60] 78.67 [117.02] 84.04 [126.53] 91.59 [136.37] 97.92 [145.70] 104.23 [155.12] 123.23 [183.42] 166.56 [247.83] 209.06 [311.17] 256.34 [381.53] 296.65 [441.49] 341.41 [508.11] 379.53 [564.81] ... ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 ... ... ... 20 ... ... ... 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 450 [3100] 510 [3500] 560 [3900] 620 [4300] 680 [4700] 730 [5000] 790 [5400] 850 [5900] 900 [6200] 1170 [8100] 1460 [10 100] 1860 [12 800] 2310 [15 900] 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 520 [3600] 590 [4100] 660 [4500] 720 [5000] 790 [5400] 850 [5900] 920 [6300] 950 [6500] 1050 [7200] 1250 [8600] 1710 [11 800] 2170 [15 000] 2690 [18 500] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 24 600 24.000 [610] 0.250 [6.35] 0.281 [7.14] 63.47 [94.46] 71.25 [106.08] ... ... 10 ... 380 [2600] 420 [2900] 440 [3000] 490 [3400] 184 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M TABLE X2.2 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D) NPS DN Designator Designator 26 650 Outside Diameter, in. [mm] 26.000 [660] Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Weight Schedule Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. 0.312 [7.92] 0.344 [8.74] 0.375 [9.52] 0.406 [10.31] 0.438 [11.13] 0.469 [11.91] 0.500 [12.70] 0.562 [14.27] 0.688 [17.48] 0.938 [23.83] 0.969 [24.61] 1.219 [30.96] 1.531 [38.89] 1.812 [46.02] 2.062 [52.37] 2.344 [59.54] 79.01 [117.51] 86.99 [129.50] 94.71 [140.88] 102.40 [152.37] 110.32 [164.26] 117.98 [175.54] 125.61 [186.94] 140.81 [209.50] 171.45 [255.24] 231.25 [344.23] 238.57 [355.02] 296.86 [441.78] 367.74 [547.33] 429.79 [639.58] 483.57 [719.63] 542.64 [807.63] ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 20 ... ... ... ... 30 40 ... 60 80 100 120 140 160 0.250 [6.35] 0.281 [7.14] 0.312 [7.92] 0.344 [8.74] 0.375 [9.52] 0.406 [10.31] 0.438 [11.13] 0.469 [11.91] 0.500 [12.70] 0.562 [14.27] 68.82 [102.42] 77.26 [115.02] 85.68 [127.43] 94.35 [140.45] 102.72 [152.80] 111.08 [165.28] 119.69 [178.20] 128.00 [190.46] 136.30 [202.85] 152.83 [227.37] ... ... ... ... STD ... ... ... XS ... ... ... 10 ... ... ... ... ... 20 ... Test Pressure, A psi [kPa] Grade A Grade B 470 [3200] 520 [3600] 560 [3900] 610 [4200] 660 [4500] 700 [4800] 750 [5200] 840 [5800] 1030 [7100] 1410 [9700] 1450 [10 000] 1830 [12 600] 2300 [15 900] 2720 [18 800] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 550 [3800] 600 [4100] 660 [4500] 710 [4900] 770 [5300] 820 [5700] 880 [6100] 980 [6800] 1200 [8300] 1640 [11 300] 1700 [11 700] 2130 [14 700] 2680 [18 500] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 350 390 430 480 520 560 610 650 690 780 [2400] [2700] [3000] [3300] [3600] [3900] [4200] [4500] [4800] [5400] 400 450 500 560 610 660 710 760 810 910 [2800] [3100] [3400] [3900] [4200] [4500] [4900] [5200] [5600] [6300] A The minimum test pressure for outside diameters and wall thicknesses not listed shall be computed by the formula given below. The computed test pressure shall be used in all cases with the following exceptions: (1) When the wall thickness is greater than the heaviest wall thickness shown for a given diameter, the test pressure for the heaviest wall listed shall be the required test pressure. (2) For Grades A and B in sizes under NPS 2 [DN 50], when the wall thickness is lighter than the lightest shown for a given diameter, use the test pressure given for the lightest wall thickness of the table for the diameter involved. (3) For all sizes of Grades A and B pipe smaller than NPS 2 [DN 50], the test pressure has been arbitrarily assigned. Test pressures for intermediate outside diameters need not exceed those for the next larger listed size. P p 2St/D where: P S t D p p p p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi [kPa]), 0.60 times the specified minimum yield strength, psi [kPa], nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and specified outside diameter, in. [mm]. 185 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X2.3 DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR THREADED AND COUPLED PIPE NPS Designator DN Designator Outside Diameter, in. [mm] Nominal Wall Thickness, in. [mm] Nominal Weight [Mass] per Unit Length, Threaded Weight and Coupled, lb/ft [kg/m] Class Test Pressure, psi [kPa] Schedule No. Grade A Grade B 1 ⁄8 6 0.405 [10.3] 0.068 [1.73] 0.095 [2.41] 0.25 [0.37] 0.32 [0.46] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1 ⁄4 8 0.540 [13.7] 0.088 [2.24] 0.119 [3.02] 0.43 [0.63] 0.54 [0.80] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 3 ⁄8 10 0.675 [17.1] 0.091 [2.31] 0.126 [3.20] 0.57 [0.84] 0.74 [1.10] STD XS 40 80 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1 ⁄2 15 0.840 [21.3] 0.109 [2.77] 0.147 [3.73] 0.294 [7.47] 0.86 [1.27] 1.09 [1.62] 1.72 [2.54] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 3 ⁄4 20 1.050 [26.7] 0.113 [2.87] 0.154 [3.91] 0.308 [7.82] 1.14 [1.69] 1.48 [2.21] 2.45 [3.64] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 1 25 1.315 [33.4] 0.133 [3.38] 0.179 [4.55] 0.358 [9.09] 1.69 [2.50] 2.19 [3.25] 3.66 [5.45] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 700 [4800] 850 [5900] 1000 [6900] 11⁄4 32 1.660 [42.2] 0.140 [3.56] 0.191 [4.85] 0.382 [9.70] 2.28 [3.40] 3.03 [4.49] 5.23 [7.76] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 1000 [6900] 1500 [10 300] 1800 [12 400] 1100 [7600] 1600 [11 000] 1900 [13 100] 11⁄2 40 1.900 [48.3] 0.145 [3.68] 0.200 [5.08] 0.400 [10.16] 2.74 [4.04] 3.65 [5.39] 6.41 [9.56] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 1000 [6900] 1500 [10 300] 1800 [12 400] 1100 [7600] 1600 [11 000] 1900 [13 100] 2 50 2.375 [60.3] 0.154 [3.91] 0.218 [5.54] 0.436 [11.07] 3.68 [5.46] 5.08 [7.55] 9.06 [13.44] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 2300 [15 900] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 21⁄2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 [5.16] 0.276 [7.01] 0.552 [14.02] 5.85 [8.67] 7.75 [11.52] 13.72 [20.39] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.216 [5.49] 0.300 [7.62] 0.600 [15.24] 7.68 [11.35] 10.35 [15.39] 18.60 [27.66] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 2200 [15 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200] 31⁄2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.226 [5.74] 0.318 [8.08] 9.27 [13.71] 12.67 [18.82] STD XS 40 80 2000 [13 800] 2800 [19 300] 2400 [16 500] 2800 [19 300] 4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.237 [6.02] 0.337 [8.56] 0.674 [17.12] 10.92 [16.23] 15.20 [22.60] 27.62 [41.09] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 1900 [13 100] 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300] 2200 [15 200] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.258 [6.55] 0.375 [9.52] 0.750 [19.05] 14.90 [22.07] 21.04 [31.42] 38.63 [57.53] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 1700 [11 700] 2400 [16 500] 2800 [19 300] 1900 [13 100] 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300] 6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.280 [7.11] 0.432 [10.97] 0.864 [21.95] 19.34 [28.58] 28.88 [43.05] 53.19 [79.18] STD XS XXS 40 80 ... 1500 [10 300] 2300 [15 900] 2800 [19 300] 1800 [12 400] 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300] 8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.277 [7.04] 0.322 [8.18] 0.500 [12.70] 0.875 [22.22] 25.53 29.35 44.00 72.69 ... STD XS XXS 30 40 80 ... 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000] 2100 [14 500] 2800 [19 300] 1300 [9000] 1600 [11 000] 2400 [16 500] 2800 [19 300] 10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.279 [7.09] 0.307 [7.80] 0.365 [9.27] 0.500 [12.70] 32.33 [48.80] 35.33 [53.27] 41.49 [63.36] 55.55 [83.17] ... ... STD XS ... 30 40 60 950 [6500] 1000 [6900] 1200 [8300] 1700 [11 700] 1100 [7600] 1200 [8300] 1400 [9700] 2000 [13 800] 12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.330 [8.38] 0.375 [9.52] 0.500 [12.70] 45.47 [67.72] 51.28 [76.21] 66.91 [99.4] ... STD XS 30 ... ... 950 [6500] 1100 [7600] 1400 [9700] 1100 [7600] 1200 [8300] 1600 [11 000] [38.07] [43.73] [65.41] [107.94] 186 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M TABLE X2.4 TABLE OF MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES ON INSPECTION FOR NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESSES Nominal Wall Thickness (tn), in. [mm] Minimum Wall Thickness on Inspection (tm), in. [mm] Nominal Wall Thickness (tn), in. [mm] Minimum Wall Thickness on Inspection (tm), in. [mm] Nominal Wall Thickness (tn), in. [mm] Minimum Wall Thickness on Inspection (tm), in. [mm] 0.068 0.088 0.091 0.095 0.109 [1.73] [2.24] [2.31] [2.41] [2.77] 0.060 0.077 0.080 0.083 0.095 [1.52] [1.96] [2.03] [2.11] [2.41] 0.294 0.300 0.307 0.308 0.312 [7.47] [7.62] [7.80] [7.82] [7.92] 0.257 0.262 0.269 0.270 0.273 [6.53] [6.65] [6.83] [6.86] [6.93] 0.750 0.812 0.844 0.864 0.875 [19.05] [20.62] [21.44] [21.94] [22.22] 0.656 0.710 0.739 0.756 0.766 [16.66] [18.03] [18.77] [19.20] [19.46] 0.113 0.119 0.125 0.126 0.133 [2.87] [3.02] [3.18] [3.20] [3.38] 0.099 0.104 0.109 0.110 0.116 [2.51] [2.64] [2.77] [2.79] [2.95] 0.318 0.322 0.330 0.337 0.343 [8.08] [8.18] [8.38] [8.56] [8.71] 0.278 0.282 0.289 0.295 0.300 [7.06] [7.16] [7.34] [7.49] [7.62] 0.906 0.938 0.968 1.000 1.031 [23.01] [23.82] [24.59] [25.40] [26.19] 0.793 0.821 0.847 0.875 0.902 [20.14] [20.85] [21.51] [22.22] [22.91] 0.140 0.145 0.147 0.154 0.156 [3.56] [3.68] [3.73] [3.91] [3.96] 0.122 0.127 0.129 0.135 0.136 [3.10] [3.23] [3.28] [3.43] [3.45] 0.344 0.358 0.365 0.375 0.382 [8.74] [9.09] [9.27] [9.52] [9.70] 0.301 0.313 0.319 0.328 0.334 [7.65] [7.95] [8.10] [8.33] [8.48] 1.062 1.094 1.125 1.156 1.219 [26.97] [27.79] [28.58] [29.36] [30.96] 0.929 0.957 0.984 1.012 1.067 [26.30] [24.31] [24.99] [25.70] [27.08] 0.179 0.187 0.188 0.191 0.200 [4.55] [4.75] [4.78] [4.85] [5.08] 0.157 0.164 0.164 0.167 0.175 [3.99] [4.17] [4.17] [4.24] [4.44] 0.400 0.406 0.432 0.436 0.437 [10.16] [10.31] [10.97] [11.07] [11.10] 0.350 0.355 0.378 0.382 0.382 [8.89] [9.02] [9.60] [9.70] [9.70] 1.250 1.281 1.312 1.343 1.375 [31.75] [32.54] [33.32] [34.11] [34.92] 1.094 1.121 1.148 1.175 1.203 [27.79] [28.47] [29.16] [29.85] [30.56] 0.203 0.216 0.218 0.219 0.226 [5.16] [5.49] [5.54] [5.56] [5.74] 0.178 0.189 0.191 0.192 0.198 [4.52] [4.80] [4.85] [4.88] [5.03] 0.438 0.500 0.531 0.552 0.562 [11.13] [12.70] [13.49] [14.02] [14.27] 0.383 0.438 0.465 0.483 0.492 [9.73] [11.13] [11.81] [12.27] [12.50] 1.406 1.438 1.500 1.531 1.562 [35.71] [36.53] [38.10] [38.89] [39.67] 1.230 1.258 1.312 1.340 1.367 [31.24] [31.95] [33.32] [34.04] [34.72] 0.237 0.250 0.258 0.276 0.277 [6.02] [6.35] [6.55] [7.01] [7.04] 0.207 0.219 0.226 0.242 0.242 [5.26] [5.56] [5.74] [6.15] [6.15] 0.594 0.600 0.625 0.656 0.674 [15.09] [15.24] [15.88] [16.66] [17.12] 0.520 0.525 0.547 0.574 0.590 [13.21] [13.34] [13.89] [14.58] [14.99] 1.594 1.750 1.781 1.812 1.968 [40.49] [44.45] [45.24] [46.02] [49.99] 1.395 1.531 1.558 1.586 1.722 [35.43] [38.89] [39.57] [40.28] [43.74] 0.279 [7.09] 0.280 [7.11] 0.281 [7.14] 0.244 [6.20] 0.245 [6.22] 0.246 [6.25] 0.688 [17.48] 0.719 [18.26] 0.602 [15.29] 0.629 [15.98] 2.062 [52.37] 2.344 [59.54] 1.804 [45.82] 2.051 [52.10] Note 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, shall be applied to calculate minimum wall thickness from nominal wall thickness: tn ⴛ 0.875 p tm where: tn p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and tm p minimum wall thickness, in. [mm]. The wall thickness is expresssed to three decimal places, the fourth decimal place being carried forward or dropped in accordance with Practice E 29. Note 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification. 187 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II X3. BASIC THREADING DATA X3.1 Figure X3.1 is to be used with Table X3.1. Figure X3.2 is to be used with Table X3.2. . A NL W L2 E1 L4 L1 D FIG. X3.1 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.1 TABLE X3.1 BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT NPS 6 [DN 50] AND UNDER Pipe NPS DN Desig- Designator nator Threads Outside Diameter, in. [mm] D Number per inch 1 ⁄8 6 0.405 [10.3] 27 1 ⁄4 8 0.540 [13.7] 18 3 ⁄8 10 0.675 [17.1] 18 1 ⁄2 15 0.840 [21.3] 14 3 ⁄4 20 1.050 [26.7] 14 1 25 1.315 [33.4] 111⁄2 11⁄4 32 1.660 [42.2] 111⁄2 11⁄2 40 1.900 [48.3] 111⁄2 2 50 2.375 [60.3] 111⁄2 21⁄2 65 2.875 [73.0] 8 3 80 3.500 [88.9] 8 31⁄2 90 4.000 [101.6] 8 4 100 4.500 [114.3] 8 5 125 5.563 [141.3] 8 6 150 6.625 [168.3] 8 Coupling End of Pipe to Hand Tight Plane, in. [mm] L1 Effective Length, in. [mm] L2 0.1615 [4.1021] 0.2278 [5.7861] 0.240 [6.096] 0.2638 [6.7005] 0.4018 [10.2057] 0.4078 [10.3581] 0.3924 0.37360 [9.9670] [9.48944] 0.5946 0.49163 [15.1028] [12.48740] 0.6006 0.62701 [15.2552] [15.92605] 0.320 [8.128] 0.339 [8.611] 0.400 [10.160] 0.5337 [13.5560] 0.5457 [13.8608] 0.6828 [17.3431] 0.420 [10.668] 0.420 [10.668] 0.436 [11.074] Total Length, in. [mm] L4 Pitch Diameter at Hand Tight Plane, in. [mm] E1 0.563 [14.3] Length, min., in. [mm] NL 3 ⁄4 [19] Hand Tight Stand-Off (Number of Threads) A 4 0.719 [18.3] 11⁄8 [29] 51⁄2 0.875 [22.2] 11⁄8 [29] 5 0.7815 0.77843 [19.8501] [19.77212] 0.7935 0.98887 [20.1549] [25.11730] 0.9845 1.23863 [25.0063] [31.46120] 1.063 [27.0] 11⁄2 [38] 5 1.313 [33.4] 1 [40] 5 1.576 [40.0] 115⁄16 [49] 5 0.7068 [17.9527] 0.7235 [18.3769] 0.7565 [19.2151] 1.0085 1.58338 [25.6159] [40.21785] 1.0252 1.82234 [26.0401] [46.28744] 1.0582 2.29627 [26.8783] [58.32526] 1.900 [48.3] 2 [50] 5 2.200 [55.9] 2 [50] 51⁄2 2.750 [69.8] 21⁄16 [52] 51⁄2 0.682 [17.323] 0.766 [19.456] 0.821 [20.853] 1.1376 [28.8950] 1.2000 [30.4800] 1.2500 [31.7500] 1.5712 2.76216 [39.9085] [70.15886] 1.6337 3.38850 [41.4960] [86.06790] 1.6837 3.88881 [42.7660] [98.77577] 3.250 [82.5] 31⁄16 [78] 51⁄2 4.000 [101.6] 33⁄16 [81] 51⁄2 4.625 [117.5] 35⁄16 [84] 51⁄2 0.844 [21.438] 0.937 [23.800] 0.958 [24.333] 1.3000 [33.0200] 1.4063 [35.7200] 1.5125 [38.4175] 1.7337 4.38713 [44.0360] [111.43310] 1.8400 5.44929 [46.7360] [138.41200] 1.9462 6.50597 [49.4335] [165.25164] 5.000 [127.0] 37⁄16 [87] 5 6.296 [159.9] 311⁄16 [94] 5 7.390 [187.7] 415⁄16 [125] 6 Note 1 — All dimensions in this table are nominal and subject to mill tolerances. Note 2 — The taper of threads is 3⁄4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter. 188 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Outside Diameter, in. [mm] W Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M A NL W L2 E1 L4 L1 D FIG. X3.2 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.2 TABLE X3.2 BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT Pipe NPS DN Desig- Designator nator Threads Outside Diameter, in. [mm] D Number per inch 1 ⁄8 6 0.405 [10.3] 27 1 ⁄4 8 0.540 [13.7] 18 3 ⁄8 10 0.675 [17.1] 18 1 ⁄2 15 0.840 [21.3] 14 3 ⁄4 20 1.050 [26.7] 141⁄2 1 25 1.315 [33.4] 11 11⁄4 32 1.660 [42.2] 111⁄2 11⁄2 40 1.900 [48.3] 111⁄2 2 50 2.375 [60.3] 111⁄2 21⁄2 65 2.875 [73.0] 8 3 80 3.500 [88.9] 8 31⁄2 90 4.000 [101.6] 8 4 100 4.500 [114.3] 8 5 125 5.563 [141.3] 8 6 150 6.625 [168.3] 8 8 200 8.625 [219.1] 8 Coupling End of Pipe to Hand Tight Plane, in. [mm] L1 Effective Length, in. [mm] L2 Total Length, in. [mm] L4 Pitch Diameter at Hand Tight Plane, in. [mm] E1 0.1615 [4.1021] 0.2278 [5.7861] 0.240 [6.096] 0.320 [8.128] 0.339 [8.611] 0.400 [10.160] 0.420 [10.668] 0.420 [10.668] 0.436 [11.074] 0.682 [17.323] 0.766 [19.456] 0.821 [20.853] 0.844 [21.438] 0.937 [23.800] 0.958 [24.333] 1.063 [27.000] 0.2638 [6.7005] 0.4018 [10.2057] 0.4078 [10.3581] 0.5337 [13.5560] 0.5457 [13.8608] 0.6828 [17.3431] 0.7068 [17.9527] 0.7235 [18.3769] 0.7565 [19.2151] 1.1375 [28.8950] 1.2000 [30.4800] 1.2500 [31.7500] 1.3000 [33.0200] 1.4063 [35.7200] 1.5125 [38.4175] 1.7125 [43.4975] 0.3924 [9.9670] 0.5946 [15.1028] 0.6006 [15.2552] 0.7815 [19.8501] 0.7935 [20.1549] 0.9845 [25.0063] 1.0085 [25.6159] 1.0252 [26.0401] 1.0582 [26.8783] 1.5712 [39.9085] 1.6337 [41.4960] 1.6837 [42.7660] 1.7337 [44.0360] 1.8400 [46.7360] 1.9462 [49.4335] 2.1462 [54.5135] 0.37360 [9.48944] 0.49163 [12.48740] 0.62701 [15.92605] 0.77843 [19.77212] 0.98887 [25.11730] 1.23863 [31.46120] 1.58338 [40.21785] 1.82234 [46.28744] 2.29627 [58.32526] 2.76216 [70.15886] 3.38850 [86.06790] 3.88881 [98.77577] 4.38713 [111.43310] 5.44929 [138.41200] 6.50597 [165.25164] 8.50003 [215.90076] 189 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Outside Diameter, in. [mm] W Length, min., in. [mm] NL Hand Tight Stand-Off (Number of Threads) A 0.563 [14.3] 11⁄16 [27] 3 0.719 [18.3] 15⁄8 [41] 3 0.875 [22.2] 15⁄8 [41] 3 1.063 [27.0] 21⁄8 [54] 3 1.313 [33.4] 21⁄8 [54] 3 1.576 [40.0] 25⁄8 [67] 3 2.054 [52.2] 23⁄4 [70] 3 2.200 [55.9] 23⁄4 [70] 3 2.875 [73.0] 27⁄8 [73] 3 3.375 [85.7] 41⁄8 [105] 2 4.000 [101.6] 41⁄4 [108] 2 4.625 [117.5] 43⁄8 [111] 2 5.200 [132.1] 41⁄2 [114] 2 6.296 [159.9] 45⁄8 [117] 2 7.390 [187.7] 47⁄8 [124] 2 9.625 [244.5] 51⁄4 [133] 2 SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X3.2 BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT (CONT’D) Pipe NPS DN Desig- Designator nator Threads Outside Diameter, in. [mm] D Number per inch 10 250 10.750 [273.0] 8 12 300 12.750 [323.8] 8 14 350 14.000 [355.6] 8 16 400 16.000 [406.4] 8 18 450 18.000 [457] 8 20 500 20.000 [508] 8 Coupling End of Pipe toHand Tight Plane, in. [mm] L1 Effective Length, in. [mm] L2 Total Length, in. [mm] L4 Pitch Diameter at Hand Tight Plane, in. [mm] E1 1.210 [30.734] 1.360 [34.544] 1.562 [39.675] 1.812 [46.025] 2.000 [50.800] 2.125 [53.975] 1.9250 [48.8950] 2.1250 [53.9750] 2.2500 [57.1500] 2.4500 [62.2300] 2.6500 [67.3100] 2.8500 [72.3900] 2.3587 [59.9110] 2.5587 [64.9910] 2.6837 [68.1660] 2.8837 [73.2460] 3.0837 [78.3260] 3.2837 [83.4060] 10.62094 [269.77188] 12.61781 [320.49237] 13.87263 [352.36480] 15.87575 [403.24405] 17.87500 [454.02500] 19.87031 [504.70587] Note 1 — The taper of threads is 3⁄4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter. 190 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Outside Diameter, in. [mm] W Length, min., in. [mm] NL Hand Tight Stand-Off (Number of Threads) A 11.750 [298.4] 53⁄4 [146] 2 14.000 [355.6] 61⁄8 [156] 2 15.000 [381.0] 63⁄8 [162] 2 17.000 [432] 63⁄4 [171] 2 19.000 [483] 71⁄8 [181] 2 21.000 [533] 75⁄8 [194] 2 PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M X4. ELONGATION VALUES X4.1 Tabulated in Table X4.1 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2. TABLE X4.1 ELONGATION VALUES Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 2 in., min, % Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 3 Specified Tensile Strength, psi Area, A, in.2 ⁄4 in. Specimen 1 in. Specimen 11⁄2 in. Specimen 0.75 and greater 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.68 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.994 and greater 0.980–0.993 0.967–0.979 0.954–0.966 0.941–0.953 0.927–0.940 0.914–0.926 0.900–0.913 0.887–0.899 0.874–0.886 0.861–0.873 0.847–0.860 0.834–0.846 0.820–0.833 0.807–0.819 0.794–0.806 0.781–0.793 0.767–0.780 0.754–0.766 0.740–0.753 0.727–0.739 0.714–0.726 0.701–0.713 0.687–0.700 0.674–0.686 0.660–0.673 0.647–0.659 0.634–0.646 0.621–0.633 0.607–0.620 0.594–0.606 0.580–0.593 0.567–0.579 0.554–0.566 0.541–0.553 0.527–0.540 0.514–0.526 0.500–0.513 0.487–0.499 0.746 and greater 0.735–0.745 0.726–0.734 0.715–0.725 0.706–0.714 0.695–0.705 0.686–0.694 0.675–0.685 0.666–0.674 0.655–0.665 0.646–0.654 0.635–0.645 0.626–0.634 0.615–0.625 0.606–0.614 0.595–0.605 0.586–0.594 0.575–0.585 0.566–0.574 0.555–0.565 0.546–0.554 0.535–0.545 0.526–0.534 0.515–0.525 0.506–0.514 0.495–0.505 0.486–0.494 0.475–0.485 0.466–0.474 0.455–0.465 0.446–0.454 0.435–0.445 0.426–0.434 0.415–0.425 0.406–0.414 0.395–0.405 0.386–0.394 0.375–0.385 0.366–0.374 0.497 and greater 0.490–0.496 0.484–0.489 0.477–0.483 0.471–0.476 0.464–0.470 0.457–0.463 0.450–0.456 0.444–0.449 0.437–0.443 0.431–0.436 0.424–0.430 0.417–0.423 0.410–0.416 0.404–0.409 0.397–0.403 0.391–0.396 0.384–0.390 0.377–0.383 0.370–0.376 0.364–0.369 0.357–0.363 0.351–0.356 0.344–0.350 0.337–0.343 0.330–0.336 0.324–0.329 0.317–0.323 0.311–0.316 0.304–0.310 0.297–0.303 0.290–0.296 0.284–0.289 0.277–0.283 0.271–0.276 0.264–0.270 0.257–0.263 0.250–0.256 0.244–0.249 191 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 48 000 60 000 36 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 31 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 SA-53/SA-53M 2004 SECTION II TABLE X4.1 ELONGATION VALUES (CONT’D) Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 2 in., min, % Nominal Wall Thickness, in. Specified Tensile Strength, psi Area, A, in.2 3 ⁄4 in. Specimen 1 in. Specimen 11⁄2 in. Specimen 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.30 0.29 0.28 0.27 0.26 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.20 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 and less 0.474–0.486 0.461–0.473 0.447–0.460 0.434–0.446 0.420–0.433 0.407–0.419 0.394–0.406 0.381–0.393 0.367–0.380 0.354–0.366 0.340–0.353 0.327–0.339 0.314–0.326 0.301–0.313 0.287–0.300 0.274–0.286 0.260–0.273 0.247–0.259 0.234–0.246 0.221–0.233 0.207–0.220 0.194–0.206 0.180–0.193 0.167–0.179 0.154–0.166 0.141–0.153 0.127–0.140 0.114–0.126 0.100–0.113 0.087–0.099 0.074–0.086 0.061–0.073 0.047–0.060 0.034–0.046 0.020–0.033 0.019 and less 0.355–0.365 0.346–0.354 0.335–0.345 0.326–0.334 0.315–0.325 0.306–0.314 0.295–0.305 0.286–0.294 0.275–0.285 0.266–0.274 0.255–0.265 0.246–0.254 0.235–0.245 0.226–0.234 0.215–0.225 0.206–0.214 0.195–0.205 0.186–0.194 0.175–0.185 0.166–0.174 0.155–0.165 0.146–0.154 0.135–0.145 0.126–0.134 0.115–0.125 0.106–0.114 0.095–0.105 0.086–0.094 0.075–0.085 0.066–0.074 0.055–0.065 0.046–0.054 0.035–0.045 0.026–0.034 0.015–0.025 0.014 and less 0.237–0.243 0.231–0.236 0.224–0.230 0.217–0.223 0.210–0.216 0.204–0.209 0.197–0.203 0.191–0.196 0.184–0.190 0.177–0.183 0.170–0.176 0.164–0.169 0.157–0.163 0.151–0.156 0.144–0.150 0.137–0.143 0.130–0.136 0.124–0.129 0.117–0.123 0.111–0.116 0.104–0.110 0.097–0.103 0.091–0.096 0.084–0.090 0.077–0.083 0.071–0.076 0.064–0.070 0.057–0.063 0.050–0.056 0.044–0.049 0.037–0.043 0.031–0.036 0.024–0.030 0.017–0.023 0.010–0.016 0.009 and less 192 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 48 000 60 000 31 31 31 31 30 30 30 30 30 29 29 29 29 29 28 28 28 27 27 27 27 26 26 25 25 25 24 24 23 22 22 21 20 19 17 15 26 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23 23 23 23 22 22 22 22 21 21 21 20 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 16 16 14 12 PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-53/SA-53M X4.2 Tabulated in Table X4.2 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2. TABLE X4.2 ELONGATION VALUES Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 50 mm, min, % Nominal Wall Thickness, mm Specified Tensile Strength, MPa Area, A, mm2 19 mm Specimen 25 mm Specimen 38 mm Specimen 500 and greater 480–499 460–479 440–459 420–439 400–419 380–399 360–379 340–359 320–339 300–319 280–299 260–279 240–259 220–239 200–219 190–199 180–189 170–179 160–169 150–159 140–149 130–139 120–129 110–119 100–109 90–99 80–89 70–79 60–69 50–59 40–49 30–39 26.3 and greater 25.3–26.2 24.2–25.2 23.2–24.1 22.1–23.1 21.1–22.0 20.0–21.0 19.0–19.9 17.9–18.9 16.9–17.8 15.8–16.8 14.8–15.7 13.7–14.7 12.7–13.6 11.6–12.6 10.5–11.5 10.0–10.4 9.5–9.9 9.0–9.4 8.4–8.9 7.9–8.3 7.4–7.8 6.9–7.3 6.3–6.8 5.8–6.2 5.3–5.7 4.8–5.2 4.2–4.7 3.7–4.1 3.2–3.6 2.7–3.1 2.1–2.6 1.6–2.0 20.0 and greater 19.2–19.9 18.4–19.1 17.6–18.3 16.8–17.5 16.0–16.7 15.2–15.9 14.4–15.0 13.6–14.3 12.8–13.5 12.0–12.7 11.2–11.9 10.4–11.1 9.6–10.3 8.8–9.5 8.0–8.7 7.6–7.9 7.2–7.5 6.8–7.1 6.4–6.7 6.0–6.3 5.6–5.9 5.2–5.5 4.8–5.1 4.4–4.7 4.0–4.3 3.6–3.9 3.2–3.5 2.8–3.1 2.4–2.7 2.0–2.3 1.6–1.9 ... 13.2 and greater 12.7–13.1 12.1–12.6 11.6–12.0 11.1–11.5 10.6–11.0 10.0–10.5 9.5–9.9 9.0–9.4 8.5–8.9 7.9–8.4 7.4–7.8 6.9–7.3 6.4–6.8 5.8–6.3 5.3–5.7 5.0–5.2 4.8–4.9 4.5–4.7 4.2–4.4 4.0–4.1 3.7–3.9 3.5–3.6 3.2–3.4 2.9–3.1 2.7–2.8 2.4–2.6 2.1–2.3 1.9–2.0 1.6–1.8 ... ... ... 330 415 36 30 36 36 36 35 35 35 34 34 34 33 33 32 32 31 31 30 30 30 29 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 24 24 23 22 30 29 29 29 29 28 28 28 27 27 27 26 26 26 25 25 24 24 24 24 23 23 23 22 22 21 21 21 20 19 19 18 193 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 194 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR PIPING APPLICATIONS SA-105 /SA-105M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 105 /A 105M-98.) 1. system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. Scope 1.1 This specification covers forged carbon steel piping components for ambient- and higher-temperature service in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings, valves, and similar parts ordered either to dimensions specified by the purchaser or to dimensional standards such as the ANSI and API specifications referenced in Section 2. Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger forgings may be ordered to Specification A 266. Tubesheets and hollow cylindrical forgings for pressure vessel shells are not included within the scope of this specification. Although this specification covers some piping components machined from rolled bar and seamless tubular products, (see 4.4) it does not cover raw material produced in these product forms. NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.” 2. 1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 266 /A 266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 675 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties A 695 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power Applications A 696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Piping Components A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination E 340 Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys 1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each 2.2 MSS Standards: SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions SP-44 Standard for Steel Pipe Line Flanges 1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use when additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order. 1.3 Specification A 266 /A 266M covers other steel forgings and Specifications A 675, A 695, and A 696 cover other steel bars. 195 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-105 /SA-105M 2004 SECTION II 2.3 ASME Standards: Section IX, Welding Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code B16.5 Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B16.9 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded B16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges including NPS 4) not including flanges may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock. 4.5 Except as permitted by 4.4, the finished product shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology Section of Specification A 788. 5. Heat Treatment 5.1 Heat treatment is not a mandatory requirement of this specification except for the following piping components: 2.4 API Standards: API-600 Flanged and Butt-Welding-End Steel Gate Valves API-602 Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for Refinery Use 5.1.1 Flanges above Class 300, 5.1.2 Flanges of special design where the design pressure at the design temperature exceeds the pressure– temperature ratings of Class 300, Group 1.1, 2.5 AWS Standard: AWS A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes 5.1.3 Flanges of special design where the design pressure or design temperature are not known, 5.1.4 Piping components other than flanges which meet both of the following criteria: (1) over NPS 4 and (2) above Class 300, and 3. Ordering Information 3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the purchase order all ordering information as necessary to purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following: 5.1.5 Piping components of Special Class other than flanges which meet both of the following criteria: (1) over NPS 4 and (2) when the working pressure at the operating temperature exceeds the tabulated values for Special Class 300, Group 1.1. 3.1.1 Quantity, 3.1.2 Size and pressure class or dimensions (Tolerances and surface finishes should be included), 5.2 Heat treatment when required by 5.1 shall be annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering or quenching and tempering. 3.1.3 Specification number (The year date should be included), 3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, and 5.2.1 Annealing — The procedure for annealing shall consist of allowing the forgings immediately after forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below 1000°F [538°C]. They shall then be reheated to a temperature between 1550°F [843°C] and 1700°F [927°C] to refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as an “annealing charge”) and allowed to cool uniformly in the furnace. 3.1.5 Additional requirements (See Table 1 footnotes, 12.1, and 16.2). 4. Materials and Manufacture 4.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process and shall be fully killed. 4.3 The material shall be forged as close as practicable to the specified shape and size. 5.2.2 Normalizing — The procedure for normalizing shall consist of allowing the forgings, immediately after forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below 1000°F [538°C]. They shall then be uniformly reheated to a temperature between 1550°F [843°C] and 1700°F [927°C] to refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as a “normalizing charge”) and allowed to cool in air. 4.4 Except for flanges of all types, hollow cylindrically shaped parts may be machined from hot-rolled bar, forged bar, or seamless tubular materials provided that the axial length of the part is approximately parallel to the metal flow lines of the stock. Other parts (up to and 5.2.3 Tempering — The procedure for tempering shall consist of heating the forgings to a temperature between 1100°F [593°C] and the lower transformation temperature for a minimum of 1⁄2 h /in. [1⁄2 h /25.4 mm] of maximum section thickness. 4.2 A sufficient discard shall be made from source material to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation. 196 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-105 /SA-105M 5.2.4 Quenching — The procedure for quenching shall consist of either (1) fully austenitizing the forgings followed by quenching in a suitable liquid medium or (2) using a multiple stage procedure whereby the forging is first fully austenitized and rapidly cooled, then reheated to partially reaustenitize, followed by quenching in a suitable liquid medium. All quenched forgings shall be tempered as prescribed in 5.2.3. of the represented forging. In addition, for quenched and tempered forgings, the midlength of the test specimen shall be at least T from any second heat-treated surface. When section thickness does not permit this positioning, the test specimen shall be positioned as near as possible to the prescribed location. 6. 9.4.2 One tension test shall be made from each heat-treating charge. If more than one heat is included in such a charge, each heat shall be tested. 9.4 Tension Tests: 9.4.1 One tension test shall be made for each heat of as-forged components. Chemical Composition 6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements specified in Table 1. Test Methods, Practices and Terminology A 751 shall apply. 9.4.2.1 When the heat-treating temperatures are the same and the furnaces (either batch or continuous type), are controlled within ±25°F [±14°C] and equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete records of heat treatment are available, then one tension test from each heat is required instead of one test from each heat in each heat-treatment charge. The test specimen material shall be included with a furnace charge. 6.2 Steels to which lead has been added shall not be used. 7. Cast or Heat (Formerly Ladle) Analysis 7.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made from samples taken, preferably during the pouring of the heat, and the results shall conform with Table 1. 9.4.3 Testing shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The largest feasible round specimen as described in Test Methods and Definitions A 370 shall be used except when hollow cylindrically shaped parts are machined from seamless tubulars. The gage length for measuring elongation shall be four times the diameter of the test section. When hollow cylindrically shaped parts are machined from seamless tubular materials, strip tests may be used. 8. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Product Analysis 8.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis on forgings supplied to this specification. Samples for analysis may be taken from midway between center and surface of solid forgings, midway between inner and outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between center and surface of full-size prolongations, or from broken mechanical test specimens. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to Table 1 within the tolerances stated in Table 2. 9.4.4 Forgings too small to permit obtaining a subsize specimen of 0.250 in. [6.35 mm] diameter or larger (see Test Methods and Definitions A 370) parallel to the dimension of maximum working, and produced in equipment unsuitable for the production of a separately forged test bar such as an automatic or semi-automatic press, may be accepted on the basis of hardness only. One percent of the forgings per lot (see Note 2), or ten forgings, whichever is the lesser number, shall be selected at random, prepared, and tested using the standard Brinell test in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The locations of the indentations shall be at the option of the manufacturer but shall be selected to be representative of the forging as a whole. One indentation per forging shall be required but additional indentations may be made to establish the representative hardness. The hardness of all forgings so tested shall be 137 to 187 HB inclusive. 9. Mechanical Properties 9.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical property requirements prescribed in Tables 3 and 4. 9.2 For the purpose of determining conformance with Tables 3 and 4, specimens shall be obtained from production forgings after heat treatment, when heat treatment is required, or from separately forged test blanks prepared from the stock used to make the finished product. Such test blanks shall receive approximately the same working as the finished product. The test blanks shall be heat treated with the finished product. NOTE 2 — A lot is defined as the product from a mill heat or if heat treated, the product of a mill heat per furnace charge. 9.3 For normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered forgings, the central axis of the test specimen shall correspond to the 1⁄4 T plane or deeper position, where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness 9.5 Hardness Tests — Except when only one forging is produced, a minimum of two forgings shall be hardness 197 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-105 /SA-105M 2004 SECTION II --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- tested per batch or continuous run as defined in 9.4.2.1 to ensure that forgings are within the hardness limits given in Table 3. When only one forging is produced, it shall be hardness tested as defined in 9.4.2.1 to ensure it is within the hardness limits given in Table 3. Testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The purchaser may verify that the requirement has been met by testing at any location on the forging, provided such testing does not render the forging useless. 10. 12.3 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified as injurious shall be treated as follows: 12.3.1 Forgings showing seams, laps, tears, or slivers not deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness or 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], whichever is less, need not have these imperfections removed. If the imperfections require removal, they shall be removed by machining or grinding. 12.3.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits shall be acceptable without grinding or machining provided the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth in 12.2 and if not deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm]. If such imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], but do not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the forging, they shall be removed by grinding to sound metal. Hydrostatic Tests 10.1 Forgings manufactured under this specification shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic test compatible with the rating of the finished forging. Such tests shall be conducted by the forging manufacturer only when Supplementary Requirement S7 is specified. 11. 12.3.3 When imperfections have been removed by grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the point of grinding or machining may be reduced by the amount removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a direct measurement, the wall thickness at the point of grinding, or at imperfections not required to be removed, shall be determined by deducting the amount removed by grinding from the nominal finished wall thickness of forging, and the remainder shall not be less than the minimum specified or required wall thickness. Retreatment 11.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not conform to the requirement specified, the manufacturer may heat treat or reheat treat the forgings as applicable and repeat the test specified in Section 9. 12. 13. Repair by Welding 13.1 Repair of defects by the manufacturer is permissible for forgings made to dimensional standards such as those of ANSI or for other parts made for stock by the manufacturer. Prior approval of the purchaser is required to repair-weld special forgings made to the purchaser’s requirements. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 12.1 The forgings shall be free of injurious imperfections, as defined below, and shall have a workmanlike finish. At the discretion of the inspector representing the purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 12.3 are not scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish. Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the fittings shall be cleaned to remove all scale and processing compounds prior to final surface examination. The cleaning process shall not injure the surface finish, material properties, or the metallurgical structure. The cleaned fittings shall be protected to prevent recontamination. Protective coatings on socket weld and butt welding fittings shall be suitable for subsequent welding without removal of the coating. When specified in the purchase order, parts may be furnished in the as-formed or as-forged condition. 13.2 The welding procedure and welders shall be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 13.3 Weld repairs shall be made by a process that does not produce undesirably high levels of hydrogen in the welded areas. 13.4 Defects shall be completely removed by chipping or grinding to sound metal as verified by magnetic particle inspection prior to welding. 13.5 After repair welding, the area welded shall be ground smooth to the original contour and shall be completely free of defects as verified by magnetic-particle or liquid-penetrant inspection. 12.2 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Selected typical linear and other typical surface imperfections shall be explored for depth. When the depth encroaches on the minimum wall thickness of the finished forging, such imperfections shall be considered injurious. 13.6 All forgings repaired by welding shall be postweld heat treated between 1100°F [593°C] and the lower transformation temperature for a minimum of 1⁄2 h /in. 198 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-105 /SA-105M [1⁄2 h /25.4 mm] of maximum section thickness, or alternatively annealed, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered. If the forging was not previously heat treated, the original tempering temperature was exceeded, or the forging was fully heat treated in the post weld cycle, then the forging shall be tested in accordance with Section 9 on completion of the cycle. 16.2 Test Reports — When test reports are required, the manufacturer shall also provide the following, where applicable: 13.7 The mechanical properties of the procedurequalification weldment shall, when tested in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, conform with the requirements listed in Table 3 for the thermal condition of repair-welded forgings. 16.2.3 Chemical analysis results, Section 6 (Table 1). When the amount of an unspecified element is less than 0.02%, then the analysis for that element may be reported as “<0.02%,” 13.8 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10% of the surface area of the forging nor 331⁄3% of the wall thickness of the finished forging or 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] whichever is less, without prior approval of the purchaser. 16.2.5 Any supplementary testing required by the purchase order. 14. 16.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5, 16.2.2 Tensile property results, Section 9 (Table 3), report the yield strength and ultimate strength in ksi [MPa], elongation and reduction in area, in percent, 16.2.4 Hardness results, Section 9 (Table 3), and 17. Product Marking 17.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (see Note 3), the heat number or manufacturer’s heat identificaion, designation of service rating, this specification number, and size shall be forged or legibly stamped on each forging, and in such a position as not to injure the usefullness of the forging. The Standard Marking System of Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions (SP-25-1978) of the Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry may be followed except the word “Steel” shall not be substituted for this specification number. Inspection 14.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the purchase order. Inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture, unless otherwise agreed upon. 15. NOTE 3 — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. Rejection and Rehearing 15.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working or application shall be rejected and the manufacturer notified. 17.1.1 If the forgings have been quenched and tempered, the letters “QT” shall be stamped on the forgings following this specification number. 15.2 Samples representing material rejected by the purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 16. 17.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be marked with the letter “W” following this specification number. 17.2 When test reports are required for larger products, the markings shall consist of the manufacturer’s symbol or name, this specification number, and such other markings as necessary to identify the part with the test report (17.1.1 and 17.1.2 shall apply). The specification number marked on the forgings need not include specification year of issue and revision letter. Certification 16.1 Identification Marking — For forgings made to specified dimensions, when agreed upon by the purchaser, and for forgings made to dimensional standards, application of identification marks as required in 17.1 shall be the certification that the forgings have been furnished in accordance with the requirements of this specification. The specification designation included on test reports shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any. 17.3 Bar Coding— In addition to the requirements in 17.1 and 17.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar 199 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-105 /SA-105M 2004 SECTION II coding system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier, should be consistent with one of the published industry standards for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag. 18. Keywords 18.1 pipe fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure containing parts; steel flanges; steel forgings, carbon; steel valves; temperature service applications, elevated; temperature service applications, high TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Element Composition, % Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur Silicon Copper Nickel Chromium Molybdenum Vanadium Columbium 0.35 max 0.60–1.05 0.035 max 0.040 max 0.10–0.35 0.40 max [Note (1)] 0.40 max [Note (1)] 0.30 max [Notes (1)(2)] 0.12 max [Notes (1)(2)] 0.05 max 0.02 max GENERAL NOTE: For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum (0.35%), an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum (1.05%) will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%. NOTES: (1) The sum of copper, nickel, chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00%. (2) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%. 200 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-105 /SA-105M TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS Permissible Variations over the Maximum Limit or Under the Minimum Limit, % Carbon Manganese: Up to and including 0.90 0.91 and over Phosphorus Sulfur Silicon Copper Nickel Chromium Molybdenum Vanadium Colombium 200 in.2 [1290 cm2] and Under Over 200 to 400 in.2 [1290 to 2580 cm2], incl Over 400 to 800 in.2 [2580 to 5160 cm2], incl Over 800 to 1600 in.2 [5160 to 10 320 cm2] incl Over 1600 in.2 [10 320 cm2] 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.06 0.008 0.010 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.07 0.010 0.010 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.06 0.08 0.010 0.010 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.07 0.08 0.015 0.015 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.08 0.09 0.015 0.015 0.06 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 GENERAL NOTES: Product cross-sectional area (taken at right angles to the axis of the original ingot or billet) is defined as either: (a) maximum cross-sectional area of rough machined forging (excluding boring), (b) maximum cross-sectional area of the unmachined forging, or (c) maximum cross-sectional area of the billet, bloom or slab. TABLE 4 COMPUTED MINIMUM VALUES TABLE 3 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS [NOTE (1)] Tensile strength, min, psi [MPa] Yield strength, min, psi [MPa] [Note (2)] Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %: Basic minimum elongation for walls 5⁄16 in. [7.9 mm] and over in thickness, strip tests. When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage length or smaller proportionally sized specimen with the gage length equal to 4D is used For strip tests, a deduction for each 1⁄32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5 ⁄16 in. [7.9 mm] from the basic minimum elongation of the percentage points of Table 4 Reduction of area, min, % [Note (4)] Hardness, HB, max Wall Thickness 70 000 [485] 36 000 [250] 30 in. mm Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % ⁄16 (0.312) ⁄32 (0.281) 1 ⁄4 (0.250) 7 ⁄32 (0.219) 3 ⁄16 (0.188) 5 ⁄32 (0.156) 1 ⁄8 (0.125) 3 ⁄32 (0.094) 1 ⁄16 (0.062) 7.9 7.1 6.4 5.6 4.8 4.0 3.2 2.4 1.6 30.00 28.50 27.00 25.50 24.00 22.50 21.00 19.50 18.00 5 9 22 1.50 [Note (3)] GENERAL NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum elongation values for each 1⁄32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation: 30 187 NOTES: (1) For small forgings, see 9.4.4. (2) Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension-under-load method. (3) See Table 4 for computed minimum values. (4) For round specimens only. E p 48T + 15.00 where: E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and T p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm]. 201 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-105 /SA-105M 2004 SECTION II SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, and order. S6. Liquid-Penetrant Examination S6.1 All surfaces shall be examined by a liquid-penetrant method. The method shall be in accordance with Practice E 165. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. S1. Macroetch Test S1.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched to show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test shall be conducted in accordance with Test Method E 340. Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S7. Hydrostatic Testing S7.1 A hydrostatic test at a pressure agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser shall be applied by the manufacturer. S2. Product Analysis S2.1 A product analysis shall be made from each heat offered for delivery. The analysis shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 1 with tolerances in Table 2. If the results of any test fail to comply, two additional forgings or representative test pieces from the same heat shall be retested and the results shall comply with the tables listed. If the results of either one of these pieces fail to comply, each forging shall be checked or the heat rejected. All results shall be reported to the purchaser and all forgings which do not comply shall be rejected. S8. Repair Welding S8.1 No repair welding shall be permitted without prior approval of the purchaser. S9. Heat Treatment S9.1 All forgings shall be heat treated as specified by the purchaser. S3. Hardness S3.1 The purchaser may check the hardness of any or all forgings supplied at any location on the forging and the hardness shall be 137 to 187 HB. All forgings not within the specified hardness range shall be rejected. S9.2 When forgings not requiring heat treatment by 5.1 are supplied heat treated by purchaser request, the basis for determining conformance with Table 3 and Table 4 shall be hardness testing per 9.5 and either (1) tensile testing of heat treated forgings per 9.2, or (2) tensile tests from as-forged forgings or separately forged test blanks, as agreed upon between the supplier and purchaser. S4. Tension Tests S4.1 In addition to the requirements of Section 9, the heat identification shall be marked on each forging and one tensile specimen shall be obtained from a representative forging at a location agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The results of the test shall comply with Table 3 and shall be reported to the purchaser. S9.3 When test reports are required, and tensile test results were obtained from as-forged forgings or asforged test blanks, it shall be so indicated on the test report. S9.4 In addition to the marking required by Section 17, this specification shall be followed by the letter: A for annealed, N for normalized, NT for normalized and tempered, or QT for quenched and tempered, as appropriate. S5. Magnetic-Particle Examination S5.1 All accessible surfaces of the finished forging shall be examined by a magnetic-particle method. The method shall be in accordance with Test Method A 275/ A 275M. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. S10. Marking Small Forgings S10.1 For small products where the space for marking is less than 1 in. [25 mm] in any direction, test reports 202 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS are mandatory and marking may be restricted to only such symbols or codes as are necessary to identify the parts with the test reports. S10.2 When the configuration or size does not permit marking directly on the forging, the marking method shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. section thickness of 2 in. or less, and 0.48 for forgings with a maximum section thickness of greater than 2 in. S11.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows: CE p C+ Mn ⁄6 + (Cr + Mo + V) ⁄5 + (Ni + Cu) ⁄15 S11. Carbon Equivalent S11.1 The maximum carbon equivalent, based on heat analysis, shall be 0.47 for forgings with a maximum S11.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser. 203 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-105 /SA-105M Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 204 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE SA-106 (Identical with ASTM A 106-95 except for editorial differences in 8.1, 13.4, and 24.1 and the deletion of ASTM caveat 1.5.) 1. NOTE 3 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.” Scope 1.1 This specification covers seamless carbon steel pipe for high-temperature service (Note 1) in NPS 1⁄8 to NPS 48 inclusive, with nominal (average) wall thickness as given in ANSI B36.10. Pipe having other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe complies with all other requirements of this specification. Pipe ordered under this specification shall be suitable for bending, flanging, and similar forming operations, and for welding. When the steel is to be welded, it is presupposed that a welding procedure suitable to the grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized (Note 2). 1.5 DELETED 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance With Specifications E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation E 381 Method of Macrotech Testing, Inspection, and Rating Steel Products, Comprising Bars, Billets, Blooms, and Forgings E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products NOTE 1 — Consideration should be given to possible graphitization of the material at the higher temperatures at which it may be used. NOTE 2 — Grade A rather than Grade B or Grade C pipe should be used for close coiling, or cold bending. The purpose for which the pipe is to be used should be stated in the order. This note is not intended to prohibit the cold bending of Grade B seamless pipe. 1.2 Supplementary requirements (S1 to S4) of an optional nature are provided for seamless pipe intended for use in applications where a superior grade of pipe is required. These supplementary requirements call for additional tests to be made and when desired shall be so stated in the order. 1.3 When these products are to be used in applications conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 (Mechanical Property Requirements Section) shall supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification. 2.2 ANSI Standard: ANSI B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe 1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as the standard. 2.4 Federal Standard: Fed. Std. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies) 2.3 Military Standards: MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage 205 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-106 2004 SECTION II 4.4 Unless otherwise specified, pipe NPS 2 and over shall be furnished hot finished. When agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, cold-drawn pipe may be furnished. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Fed. Std. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products 2.5 Other Standards: SSPC-SP6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 5. Heat Treatment 5.1 Hot-finished pipe need not be heat treated. Colddrawn pipe shall be heat treated after the final cold draw pass at a temperature of 1200°F (650°C) or higher. 3. Ordering Information 3.1 Orders for materials under this specification should include the following, as required, to describe the desired material adequately: 3.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths), 6. General Requirements 6.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification A 530/A 530M unless otherwise provided herein. 3.1.2 Name of material (seamless carbon steel pipe), 3.1.3 Grade (Table 1), 3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn), 3.1.5 Size (either NPS and weight class or schedule number, or both, or outside diameter and nominal wall thickness, ANSI B36.10), 7. Chemical Composition 7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. 3.1.6 Length (specific or random, Section 20), 3.1.7 Optional requirements (Section 9 and S1 to S4), 8. Heat Analysis 8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the steel manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements specified in Section 7. If the secondary melting processes of 4.1 are employed, the heat analysis shall be obtained from one remelted ingot or the product of one remelted ingot of each primary melt. The chemical composition thus determined, or that determined from a product analysis made by the manufacturer, if the latter has not manufactured the steel, shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 7. 3.1.8 Test report required (Section on Certification of Specification A 530/A 530M), 3.1.9 Specification designation, 3.1.10 End use of material, 3.1.11 Hydrostatic test in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M or 13.3 of this specification, or NDE in accordance with Section 14 of this specification. 3.1.12 Special requirements. 4. Process 4.1 The steel shall be killed steel made by one or more of the following processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace. The primary melting may incorporate separate degassing or refining, and may be followed by secondary melting, using electroslag remelting or vacuum-arc remelting. If secondary melting is employed, the heat shall be defined as all of the ingots remelted from a single primary heat. 9. Product Analysis 9.1 At the request of the purchaser, analyses of two pipes from each lot (Note 4) of 400 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size up to, but not including, NPS 6, and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size NPS 6 and over, shall be made by the manufacturer from the finished pipe. The results of these analyses shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 7. 4.2 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast. When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast, identification of the resultant transition material is required. The producer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates the grades. 9.2 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 9.1 does not conform to the requirements specified in Section 7, analyses shall be made on additional pipes of double the original number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to requirements specified. 4.3 Pipe NPS 11⁄2 and under may be either hot finished or cold drawn. 206 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE 4 — A lot shall consist of the number of lengths specified in Sections 9 and 20 of the same size and wall thickness from any one heat of steel. SA-106 o’clock locations, cracks at these locations shall not be cause for rejection if the D-to-t ratio is less than 10. NOTE 6 — The “H” values have been calculated for sizes from NPS 21⁄2 to 24, inclusive, and are shown in Table X1.1 of this specification. 10. Tensile Requirements 10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Tables 2 and 3. 13. Hydrostatic Test 13.1 Each length of pipe shall withstand without leakage through the pipe wall, a hydrostatic test, except as provided for in 13.2, 13.3, and 13.4. 11. Bending Requirements 11.1 For pipe NPS 2 and under a sufficient length of pipe shall stand being bent cold through 90° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is 12 times the nominal diameter (as shown in ANSI B36.10) of the pipe, without developing cracks. When ordered for close coiling (Note 2), the pipe shall stand being bent cold through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is eight times the outside diameter (as shown in ANSI B36.10) of the pipe, without failure. 13.2 When specified by the purchaser, pipe may be tested by the nondestructive electric test method in lieu of the hydrostatic test as shown in Section 14. 13.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic test and without the NDE in Section 14. In this case, each length so furnished shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NH.” 13.4 When the hydrostatic test and the NDE test are omitted and the lengths marked with the letters “NH,” the certification, when required, shall clearly state “Not Hydrostatically Tested,” the specification number and material grade, as shown on the certification, shall be followed by the letters “NH.” 11.2 For pipe whose diameter equals or exceeds 10 in. (254 mm) a bend test may be conducted instead of the flattening test. The bend test specimens shall be bent at room temperature through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion. The inside diameter of the bend shall be 1 in. (25.4 mm). Substitution of the bend test for the flattening test shall be subject to the approval of the purchaser. 14. Nondestructive Electric Test 14.1 As an alternative to the hydrostatic test, and when specified by the purchaser, each pipe shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice E 213, Practice E 309, or Practice E 570. In this case, each length so furnished shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NDE.” It is the intent of this test to reject pipe with imperfections which produce test signals equal to or greater than that of the calibration standard. 11.3 For pipe whose diameter exceeds 25 in. (635 mm) and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less, the bend test described in 11.2 shall be conducted instead of the flattening test. NOTE 5 — Diameter to wall thickness ratio p specified outside diameter/nominal wall thickness. Example: For 28 in. diameter 5.000 in. thick pipe the diameter to wall thickness ratio p 28/5 p 5.6. 14.2 When the nondestructive electric test is performed, the lengths shall be marked with the letters “NDE.” The certification, when required, shall state “Nondestructive Electric Tested” and shall indicate which of the tests was applied. Also the letters “NDE” shall be appended to the product specification number and material grade shown on the certification. 12. Flattening Tests 12.1 For pipe over NPS 2 a section of pipe not less than 21⁄2 in. (63.5 mm) in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates until the opposite walls of the pipe meet. Flattening tests shall be in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M, except that in the formula used to calculate the “H” value, the following “e” constants shall be used: 14.3 The following information is for the benefit of the user of this specification: 0.08 for Grade A 0.07 for Grades B and C 14.3.1 The reference standards defined in 14.4 through 14.6 are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of these standards should not be construed as the minimum size imperfection detectable by such equipment. 12.2 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high on the inside surface at the six and twelve 207 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-106 2004 SECTION II 14.3.2 The ultrasonic testing can be performed to detect both longitudinally and circumferentially oriented defects. It should be recognized that different techniques should be employed to detect differently oriented imperfections. The examination may not detect short, deep defects. 14.5.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using a round tool or file with a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a notch shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding 121⁄2% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. 14.3.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this specification has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt type. 14.5.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in. (0.787 mm) or less in width shall be machined in a radial place parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of the pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 121⁄2% of the specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. The length of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method. 14.3.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in this specification is capable of detecting the presence and location of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented discontinuities. It should be recognized that different techniques should be employed to detect differently oriented imperfections. 14.5.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the calibration pipe shall be compatible with the testing equipment and the method being used. 14.3.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section 13 has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure. This test may not detect very tight, through-the-wall defects or defects that extend an appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration. 14.6 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal calibration reference notches shall be straight-sided notches machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis. For wall thickness under 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), outside and inside notches shall be used; for wall thickness equal and above 1 ⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), only an outside notch shall be used. Notch depth shall not exceed 121⁄2% of the specified wall thickness, or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm), and the width shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and inside diameter notches shall be located sufficiently apart to allow separation and identification of the signals. 14.3.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities that can be detected in the specific application of these examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular product. 14.4 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference notches shall be, at the option of the producer, any one of the three common notch shapes shown in Practice E 213. The depth of notch shall not exceed 121⁄2% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. 14.7 Pipe producing a signal equal to or greater than the signal produced by the calibration standard shall be subject to rejection. The area producing the signal may be reexamined. 14.5 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one of the following discontinuities to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection: 14.7.1 Test signals produced by imperfections which cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections shall result in rejection of the pipe, unless it is repaired and retested. To be accepted, the pipe must pass the same specification test to which it was originally subjected, provided that the remaining wall thickness is not decreased below that permitted by this specification. The OD at the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so reduced. 14.5.1 Drilled Hole — The calibration pipe shall contain depending upon the pipe diameter three holes spaced 120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and sufficiently separated longitudinally to ensure separately distinguishable responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the pipe wall, care being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling. Depending upon the pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain the following hole: ≤ 1⁄2 in. > 1⁄2 ≤ 11⁄4 in. > 11⁄4 ≤ 2 in. > 2 in. ≤ 5 in. > 5 in. 0.039 0.055 0.071 0.087 0.106 in. in. in. in. in. 14.7.2 Test signals produced by visual imperfections such as those listed below may be evaluated in accordance with the provisions of Section 18: 14.7.2.1 Dinges, (1 mm) (1.4 mm) (1.8 mm) (2.2 mm) (2.7 mm) 14.7.2.2 Straightener marks, 14.7.2.3 Cutting chips, 14.7.2.4 Scratches, 208 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 14.7.2.5 Steel die stamps, with respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections is not required but may be necessary to assure compliance with 18.2. 14.7.2.6 Stop marks, or 14.7.2.7 Pipe reducer ripple. 18.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than 121⁄2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe with such defects shall be given one of the following dispositions: 14.8 The test methods described in this section may not be capable of inspecting the end portion of pipes. This condition is referred to as “end effect.” The length of the end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer and, when specified in the purchase order, reported to the purchaser. 18.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits. 15. Nipples 15.1 Nipples shall be cut from pipe of the same dimensions and quality described in this specification. 18.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding provisions of 18.6. 18.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may be cut off within the limits of requirements on length. 16. Dimensions, Weight, and Permissible Variations 16.1 Weight — The weight of any length of pipe shall not vary more than 10% over and 3.5% under that specified. Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, pipe in NPS 4 and smaller may be weighed in convenient lots; pipe larger than NPS 4 shall be weighed separately. 18.2.4 Rejected. 18.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for evaluating conformance with 18.2 the pipe manufacturer shall remove by grinding the following noninjurious imperfections: 18.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (Note 8) and pits, any of which imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. (1.58 mm). 16.2 Diameter — Variations in outside diameter shall not exceed those specified in Table 4. 18.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to as scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration in accordance with 18.1 to be deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness. 16.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be more than 12.5% under the nominal wall thickness specified. 18.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 18.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of such a pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. NOTE 7 — The minimum wall thicknesses on inspection of some of the available sizes are shown in Table X2.1. 17. Lengths 17.1 Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the following regular practice: 17.1.1 The lengths required shall be specified in the order, and 17.1.2 No jointers are permitted unless otherwise specified. 17.1.3 If definite lengths are not required, pipe may be ordered in single random lengths of 16 to 22 ft (4.8 to 6.7 m) with 5% 12 to 16 ft (3.7 to 4.8 m), or in double random lengths with a minimum average of 35 ft (10.7 m) and a minimum length of 22 ft with 5% 16 to 22 ft. 18.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained, and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so removed. 18.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In case of dispute, the measurement determined by use of the mechanical caliper shall govern. 18.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M. 18. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance 18.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance that they have been properly evaluated 18.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight. 209 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-106 Not for Resale SA-106 2004 SECTION II NOTE 8 — Marks and abrasions are defined as cable marks, dinges, guide marks, roll marks, ball scratches, scores, die marks, etc. specimen as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed. If a specimen breaks in an inside or outside surface flaw, a retest shall be allowed. 19. End Finish 19.1 The pipe shall be furnished to the following practice, unless otherwise specified. 21.2 Should a crop end of a finished pipe fail in the flattening test, one retest may be made from the failed end. Pipe may be normalized either before or after the first test, but pipe shall be subjected to only two normalizing treatments. 19.1.1 NPS 11⁄2 and Smaller — All walls shall be either plain-end square cut, or plain-end beveled at the option of the manufacturer. 19.1.2 NPS 2 and Larger — Walls through extra strong weights, shall be plain end-beveled. 22. Test Specimens and Test Methods 22.1 On NPS 8 and larger, specimens cut either longitudinally or transversely shall be acceptable for the tension test. On sizes smaller than NPS 8, the longitudinal test only shall be used. 19.1.3 NPS 2 and Larger — Walls over extra strong weights, shall be plain-end square cut. NOTE 9 —Plain-end beveled is defined as plain-end pipe having a bevel angle of 30°, +5° or −0°, as measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe with a root face of 1⁄16 in. ± 1⁄32 in. (1.5875 ± 0.7938 mm). Other bevel angles may be specified by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 22.2 Test specimens for the bend test specified in Section 11 and for the flattening tests shall consist of sections cut from a pipe. Specimens for flattening tests shall be smooth on the ends and free form burrs, except when made on crop ends. 20. Number of Tests 20.1 The tensile requirements specified in Section 7 shall be determined on one length of pipe from each lot (Note 4) of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size under NPS 6, and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size NPS 6 and over. 22.3 Test specimens for the bend test specified in 11.2 and 11.3 shall be cut from one end of the pipe and, unless otherwise specified, shall be taken in a transverse direction. One test specimen shall be taken as close to the outer surface as possible and another from as close to the inner surface as possible. The specimens shall be either 1⁄2 by 1⁄2 in. (12.7 by 12.7 mm) in section or 1 by 1 ⁄2 in. (25.4 by 12.7 mm) in section with the corners rounded to a radius not over 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) and need not exceed 6 in. (152 mm) in length. The side of the samples placed in tension during the bend shall be the side closest to the inner and outer surface of the pipe respectively. 20.2 For pipe NPS 2 and under, the bend test specified in 11.1 shall be made on one pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size. The bend test, where used as permitted by 11.2 or required by 11.3, shall be made on one end of 5% of the pipe from each lot. For small lots, at least one pipe shall be tested. 20.3 The flattening test specified in Section 12 shall be made on one length of pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over NPS 2, up to but not including NPS 6, and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size NPS 6 and over. 22.4 All routine check tests shall be made at room temperature. 23. Certification 23.1 When test reports are requested, in addition to the requirements of Specification A 530/A 530M, the producer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical analysis report for the elements specified in Table 1. 20.4 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 13. 20.5 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted. 24. Product Marking 24.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M, the marking shall include heat number, the information as per Table 5, an additional symbol “S” if the pipe conforms in any case to the supplementary requirements specified in S1 to S5, the length 21. Retests 21.1 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that prescribed in Table 1 and any part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in (19.0 mm) from the center of the gage length of a 2 in., or 50 mm, 210 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- and schedule number, and on pipe sizes larger than NPS 4 the weight shall be given. Length shall be marked in feet and tenths of a foot, or metres to two decimal places, depending on the units to which the material was ordered, or other marking subject to agreement. For sizes NPS 11⁄2, 11⁄4, 1, and 3⁄4, each length shall be marked as prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M. These sizes shall be bundled in accordance with standard mill practice and the total bundle footage marked on the bundle tag; individual lengths of pipe need not be marked with footage. For sizes less than NPS 3⁄4, all required markings may be on the bundle tag and shall include the total footage; individual lengths of pipe need not be marked with footage. If not marked on the bundle tag, all required marking shall be on each length. identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. 25. Government Procurement 25.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for the shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Fed. Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required for military agencies. 25.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the producer is responsible for the performance of all inspection and test requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the producer may use his own, or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless disapproved by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that the material conforms to the prescribed requirements. 24.2 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths by a subsequent processor for resale as material, the processor shall transfer complete identifying information, including the name or brand of the manufacturer to each unmarked cut length, or to metal tags securely attached to bundles of unmarked small diameter pipe. The same material designation shall be included with the information transferred, and the processor’s name, trademark, or brand shall be added. 26. Keywords 26.1 carbon steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe 24.3 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 24.1 and 24.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Composition, % Carbon, max A Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon, min Chrome, max B Copper, max B Molybdenum, max B Nickel, max B Vanadium, max B Grade A Grade B Grade C 0.25 0.27–0.93 0.035 0.035 0.10 0.40 0.40 0.30 0.29–1.06 0.035 0.035 0.10 0.40 0.40 0.35 0.29–1.06 0.035 0.035 0.10 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.40 0.08 0.15 0.40 0.08 0.15 0.40 0.08 A For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%. B These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%. 211 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-106 Not for Resale SA-106 2004 SECTION II TABLE 2 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS Tensile strength, min, psi (MPa) Yield strength, min, psi (MPa) Grade A (Explanatory Note 2) Grade B Grade C 48 000 (330) 30 000 (205) 60 000 (415) 35 000 (240) 70 000 (485) 40 000 (275) LongituLongituLongitudinal Transverse dinal Transverse dinal Transverse Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %: Basic minimum elongation transverse strip tests, and for all small sizes tested in full section When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage length test specimen is used For longitudinal strip tests For transverse strip tests, a deduction for each 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) decrease in wall thickness below 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm) from the basic minimum elongation of the following percentage shall be made A 35 25 30 16.5 30 16.5 28 20 22 12 20 12 A,B A,B 1.25 C A,B 1.00 C 1.00 C The minimum elongation in 2 in. (50.8 mm) shall be determined by the following equation: e p 625 000 A0.2/U0.9 where: e p minimum elongation in 2 in. (50.8 mm), %, rounded to the nearest 0.5%. A p cross-sectional area of the tension test specimen, in.2, based on specified outside diameter or nominal specimen width and specified wall thickness rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.2 If the area thus calculated is greater than 0.75 in.2 shall be used, and U p specified tensile strength, psi. B C See Table 3 for minimum elongation values for various size tension specimens and grades. The following table gives the computed minimum values: Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % in. mm Grade A, Transverse Grades B and C, Transverse ⁄16 (0.312) ⁄32 (0.281) 1 ⁄4 (0.250) 7 ⁄32 (0.219) 3 ⁄16 (0.188) 5 ⁄32 (0.156) 1 ⁄8 (0.125) 3 ⁄32 (0.094) 1 ⁄16 (0.062) 7.9 7.1 6.4 5.6 4.8 4.0 3.2 2.4 1.6 25.00 23.75 22.50 ... ... ... ... ... ... 16.50 15.50 14.50 ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 9 NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum elongation values for each 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation: Grade Direction of Test Equation A B and C Transverse Transverse E p 40 t + 12.50 E p 32 t + 6.40 where: E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and t p actual thickness of specimen, in. 212 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-106 TABLE 3 ELONGATION VALUES Elongation in 2 in. min., Specified Tensile Strength, psi Tension Test Specimen Wall Thickness, in. [Note (2)] Area, in.2 [Note (1)] 1 ⁄2 in. Specimen 3 1 Grade A Grade B Grade C ⁄4 in. Specimen 1 in. Specimen 1 ⁄2 in. Specimen 48 000 60 000 70 000 ≥0.75 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.71 ≥1.491 1.470–1.490 1.451–1.469 1.430–1.450 1.411–1.429 ≥0.994 0.988–0.993 0.967–0.979 0.954–0.966 0.941–0.953 ≥0.746 0.735–0.745 0.726–0.734 0.715–0.725 0.706–0.714 ≥0.497 0.490–0.496 0.484–0.489 0.477–0.483 0.471–0.476 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 35.5 29.5 29.5 29.5 29.5 29.0 25.5 25.5 25.5 25.5 25.5 0.70 0.69 0.68 0.67 0.66 1.390–1.410 1.371–1.389 1.350–1.370 1.331–1.349 1.310–1.330 0.927–0.940 0.914–0.926 0.900–0.913 0.887–0.899 0.874–0.886 0.695–0.705 0.686–0.694 0.675–0.685 0.666–0.674 0.655–0.665 0.464–0.470 0.457–0.463 0.450–0.456 0.444–0.449 0.437–0.443 35.5 35.5 35.5 35.5 35.0 29.0 29.0 29.0 29.0 29.0 25.5 25.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 1.291–1.309 1.270–1.290 1.251–1.269 1.230–1.250 1.211–1.229 0.861–0.873 0.847–0.860 0.834–0.846 0.820–0.833 0.807–0.819 0.646–0.654 0.635–0.645 0.626–0.634 0.615–0.625 0.606–0.614 0.431–0.436 0.424–0.430 0.417–0.423 0.410–0.416 0.404–0.409 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 34.5 28.5 28.5 28.5 28.5 28.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.5 0.60 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 1.190–1.210 1.171–1.189 1.150–1.170 1.131–1.149 1.110–1.130 0.794–0.806 0.781–0.793 0.767–0.780 0.754–0.766 0.740–0.753 0.595–0.605 0.586–0.594 0.575–0.585 0.566–0.574 0.555–0.565 0.397–0.403 0.391–0.396 0.384–0.390 0.377–0.383 0.370–0.376 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.0 34.0 28.5 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.52 0.51 1.091–1.109 1.070–1.090 1.051–1.069 1.030–1.050 1.011–1.029 0.727–0.739 0.714–0.726 0.701–0.713 0.687–0.700 0.674–0.686 0.546–0.554 0.535–0.545 0.526–0.534 0.515–0.525 0.506–0.514 0.364–0.369 0.357–0.363 0.351–0.356 0.344–0.350 0.337–0.343 34.0 34.0 33.5 33.5 33.5 28.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 24.9 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.990–1.010 0.971–0.989 0.950–0.970 0.931–0.949 0.910–0.930 0.660–0.673 0.647–0.659 0.634–0.646 0.621–0.633 0.607–0.620 0.495–0.505 0.486–0.494 0.475–0.485 0.466–0.474 0.455–0.465 0.330–0.336 0.324–0.329 0.317–0.323 0.311–0.316 0.304–0.310 33.5 33.0 33.0 33.0 33.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.891–0.909 0.870–0.890 0.851–0.869 0.830–0.850 0.811–0.829 0.594–0.606 0.580–0.593 0.567–0.579 0.554–0.566 0.541–0.553 0.446–0.454 0.435–0.445 0.426–0.434 0.415–0.425 0.406–0.414 0.297–0.303 0.290–0.296 0.284–0.289 0.277–0.283 0.271–0.276 32.5 32.5 32.5 32.0 32.0 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.790–0.810 0.771–0.789 0.750–0.770 0.731–0.749 0.710–0.730 0.527–0.540 0.514–0.526 0.500–0.513 0.487–0.499 0.474–0.486 0.395–0.405 0.386–0.394 0.375–0.385 0.366–0.374 0.355–0.365 0.264–0.270 0.257–0.263 0.250–0.256 0.244–0.249 0.237–0.243 32.0 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.0 26.0 26.0 26.0 25.5 25.5 22.5 22.5 22.5 22.5 22.0 213 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-106 2004 SECTION II TABLE 3 ELONGATION VALUES (CONT’D) Elongation in 2 in. min., Specified Tensile Strength, psi Tension Test Specimen Wall Thickness, in. [Note (2)] Area, in.2 [Note (1)] 1 ⁄2 in. Specimen 3 1 Grade A Grade B Grade C ⁄4 in. Specimen 1 in. Specimen 1 ⁄2 in. Specimen 48 000 60 000 70 000 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 0.35 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.691–0.709 0.670–0.690 0.651–0.669 0.630–0.650 0.611–0.629 0.461–0.473 0.447–0.460 0.434–0.446 0.420–0.433 0.407–0.419 0.346–0.354 0.335–0.345 0.326–0.334 0.315–0.325 0.306–0.314 0.231–0.236 0.224–0.230 0.217–0.223 0.210–0.216 0.204–0.209 31.0 31.0 30.5 30.5 30.5 25.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 21.5 21.5 0.30 0.29 0.28 0.27 0.26 0.590–0.610 0.571–0.589 0.550–0.570 0.531–0.549 0.510–0.530 0.394–0.406 0.381–0.393 0.367–0.380 0.354–0.366 0.340–0.353 0.295–0.305 0.286–0.294 0.275–0.285 0.266–0.274 0.255–0.265 0.197–0.203 0.191–0.196 0.184–0.190 0.177–0.183 0.170–0.176 30.0 30.0 29.5 29.5 29.0 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.0 24.0 21.5 21.5 21.0 21.0 21.0 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.491–0.509 0.470–0.490 0.451–0.469 0.430–0.450 0.411–0.429 0.327–0.339 0.314–0.326 0.301–0.313 0.287–0.300 0.274–0.286 0.246–0.254 0.235–0.245 0.226–0.234 0.215–0.225 0.206–0.214 0.164–0.169 0.157–0.163 0.151–0.156 0.144–0.150 0.137–0.143 29.0 29.0 28.5 28.5 28.0 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.0 23.0 20.5 20.5 20.5 20.0 20.0 0.20 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.390–0.410 0.371–0.389 0.350–0.370 0.331–0.349 0.310–0.330 0.260–0.273 0.247–0.259 0.234–0.246 0.221–0.233 0.207–0.220 0.195–0.205 0.186–0.194 0.175–0.185 0.166–0.174 0.155–0.165 0.130–0.136 0.124–0.129 0.117–0.123 0.111–0.116 0.104–0.110 27.5 27.5 27.0 27.0 26.5 22.5 22.5 22.0 22.0 21.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.0 19.0 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.11 0.291–0.309 0.270–0.290 0.251–0.269 0.230–0.250 0.211–0.229 0.194–0.206 0.180–0.193 0.167–0.179 0.154–0.166 0.141–0.153 0.146–0.154 0.135–0.145 0.126–0.134 0.115–0.125 0.106–0.114 0.097–0.103 0.091–0.096 0.084–0.090 0.077–0.083 0.071–0.076 26.0 26.0 25.5 25.0 24.5 21.5 21.0 21.0 20.5 20.0 18.5 18.5 18.0 18.0 17.5 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.190–0.210 0.171–0.189 0.150–0.170 0.131–0.149 0.110–0.130 0.127–0.140 0.114–0.126 0.100–0.113 0.087–0.099 0.074–0.086 0.095–0.105 0.086–0.094 0.075–0.085 0.066–0.074 0.055–0.065 0.064–0.070 0.057–0.063 0.050–0.056 0.044–0.049 0.037–0.043 24.0 23.5 23.0 22.5 22.0 19.5 19.5 19.0 18.5 18.0 17.0 17.0 16.5 16.0 15.5 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 ≤0.01 0.091–0.109 0.070–0.090 0.051–0.069 0.030–0.050 ≤0.029 0.061–0.073 0.047–0.060 0.034–0.046 0.020–0.033 ≤0.019 0.046–0.054 0.035–0.045 0.026–0.034 0.015–0.025 ≤0.014 0.031–0.036 0.024–0.030 0.017–0.023 0.010–0.016 ≤0.009 21.0 20.0 19.0 17.5 15.0 17.0 16.5 15.5 14.5 12.5 15.0 14.5 13.5 12.5 11.0 NOTES: (1) 1 in.2 p 645.16 mm2. (2) 1 in. p 25.4 mm. 214 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 4 VARIATIONS IN OUTSIDE DIAMETER TABLE 5 MARKING Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter Over NPS Designator 1 ⁄8 to 11⁄2, incl Over 11⁄2 to 4, incl Over 4 to 8, incl Over 8 to 18, incl Over 18 to 26, incl Over 26 to 34, incl Over 34 to 48, incl 1 ⁄64 ⁄32 1 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 1 ⁄8 5 ⁄32 3 ⁄16 1 Under in. mm (0.015) (0.031) (0.062) (0.093) (0.125) (0.156) (0.187) 0.40 0.79 1.59 2.38 3.18 3.97 4.76 1 ⁄64 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 ⁄32 1 in. mm (0.015) (0.031) (0.031) (0.031) (0.031) (0.031) (0.031) 0.40 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 Hydro NDE Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes 215 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-106 Not for Resale Marking Test Pressure NDE NH Test Pressure/NDE SA-106 2004 SECTION II SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified. S1. Product Analysis S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of pipe. Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical composition requirements shall be rejected. material free form injurious laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe required shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length shows objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected, subject to removal of the defective end and subsequent retests indicating the remainder of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform material. S2. Transverse Tension Test S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8 and over. If this supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails to meet the required tensile properties (tensile, yield, and elongation), that length shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest. S5. Carbon Equivalent S5.1 The steel shall conform to a carbon equivalent (CE) of 0.50 maximum as determined by the following formula: CE p %C + %Mn %Cr + %Mo + %V %Ni + %Cu + + 6 5 15 S5.2 A lower CE maximum may be agreed upon between the purchaser and the producer. S3. Flattening Test S3.1 The flattening test of Specification A 530/A 530M shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends of each pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails because of lack of ductility prior to satisfactory completion of the first step of the flattening test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest. If a specimen from any length of pipe fails because of a lack of soundness, that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent retesting indicates that the remaining length is sound. S5.3 The CE shall be reported on the test report. S6. Heat Treated Test Specimens S6.1 At the request of the purchaser, one tensile test shall be performed by the manufacturer on a test specimen from each heat of steel furnished which has been either stress relieved at 1250°F or normalized at 1650°F, as specified by the purchaser. Other stress relief or annealing temperatures, as appropriate to the analysis, may be specified by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The results of this test shall meet the requirements of Table 2. S7. Internal Cleanliness — Government Orders S7.1 The internal surface of hot finished ferritic steel pipe and tube shall be manufactured to a free of scale condition equivalent to the visual standard listed in SSPCSP6. Cleaning shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure that has been shown to be effective. This procedure shall be available for audit. S4. Metal Structure and Etching Test S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate sections of Method E 381. Etching tests shall be made on a cross section from one end or both ends of each pipe and shall show sound and reasonable uniform 216 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-106 APPENDIX (Nonmandatory Information) X1. CALCULATED H VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE X1.1 Table XI.1 and X1.2 lists values for H to be used for the test of Section 12. TABLE X1.1 CALCULATED “H” VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE Inch-Pound Units NPS Designator Outside Diameter, in. Wall Thickness, in. Distance, in inches, Between Plates “H” by Equation: (1 + e) t Hp− e + t/D Schedule Number Grade A Grades B&C 21⁄2 2.875 0.203 0.276 0.375 40 80 160 1.456 1.694 1.925 1.545 1.779 2.002 3 3.500 0.216 0.300 0.438 40 80 160 1.646 1.955 2.306 1.755 2.062 2.398 31⁄2 4.000 0.226 0.318 40 80 1.788 2.153 1.912 2.276 4 4.500 0.237 0.337 0.438 0.531 40 80 120 160 1.929 2.350 2.687 2.896 2.067 2.489 2.818 3.022 5 5.563 0.258 0.375 0.500 0.625 40 80 120 160 2.205 2.747 3.179 3.509 2.372 2.920 3.346 3.667 6 6.625 2.80 0.432 0.562 0.719 40 80 120 160 2.473 3.213 3.682 4.116 2.669 3.419 3.884 4.307 0.250 0.277 0.322 0.406 0.500 0.593 0.719 0.812 0.906 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 2.477 2.668 2.964 3.451 3.914 4.305 4.750 5.036 5.288 2.702 2.902 3.210 3.711 4.181 4.573 5.013 5.293 5.538 8 8.625 10 10.750 0.250 0.307 0.365 0.500 0.593 0.719 0.843 1.000 1.125 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 2.615 3.054 3.459 4.268 4.738 5.320 5.747 6.242 6.580 2.868 3.333 3.757 4.592 5.070 5.621 6.077 6.564 6.892 12 12.750 0.250 0.330 0.406 0.562 0.687 0.843 1.000 1.125 1.312 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 2.711 3.366 3.921 4.892 5.542 6.231 6.817 7.222 7.747 2.985 3.683 4.266 5.271 5.934 6.627 7.209 7.607 8.119 Outside Diameter, in. Wall Thickness, in. 14 14.000 16 16.000 18 18.000 20 20.000 24 24.000 0.250 0.312 0.375 0.438 0.593 0.750 0.937 1.093 1.250 1.406 0.250 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.656 0.843 1.031 1.218 1.438 1.593 0.250 0.312 0.438 0.562 0.750 0.937 1.156 1.375 1.562 1.781 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.593 0.812 1.031 1.281 1.500 1.750 1.968 0.250 0.375 0.562 0.687 0.968 1.218 1.531 1.812 2.062 2.343 NPS Designator 217 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Distance, in inches, Between Plates “H” by Equation: (1 + e) t Hp− e + t/D Schedule Number Grade A Grades B&C 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 2.759 3.294 3.792 4.669 5.234 6.064 6.887 7.479 7.974 8.416 2.284 3.387 3.915 4.854 5.855 6.861 7.709 8.426 9.141 9.579 2.876 3.462 4.535 5.457 6.656 7.663 8.657 9.495 10.115 10.665 2.919 4.101 5.143 5.841 7.272 8.464 9.601 10.452 11.284 11.913 2.986 4.236 5.869 6.831 8.690 10.061 11.449 12.585 13.424 14.248 3.045 3.617 4.146 5.125 5.647 6.494 7.322 7.902 8.397 8.827 3.124 3.730 4.294 5.284 6.324 7.352 8.206 8.919 9.625 10.050 3.189 3.823 4.963 5.941 7.185 8.214 9.216 10.043 10.660 11.198 3.242 4.521 5.632 6.367 7.856 9.072 10.221 11.069 11.889 12.504 3.326 4.686 6.437 7.454 9.390 10.793 12.244 13.332 14.150 14.958 SA-106 2004 SECTION II TABLE X1.2 CALCULATED “H” VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE SI Units Distance, in mm, Between Plates “H” by Equation: (1 + e) t Hp− e + t/D Outside Diameter, mm Wall Thickness, mm Schedule Number 21⁄2 73.0 5.16 7.01 9.52 40 80 160 37.0 43.0 48.9 39.2 45.2 50.8 3 88.9 5.49 7.62 11.13 40 80 160 41.8 49.6 58.6 44.6 52.4 60.9 31⁄2 101.6 5.74 8.08 40 80 45.4 54.7 48.6 57.8 4 114.3 6.02 8.56 11.13 13.49 40 80 120 160 49.0 59.7 67.0 73.6 52.5 63.2 71.6 76.8 5 141.3 6.55 9.52 12.70 15.88 40 80 120 160 56.0 69.8 80.8 89.1 60.2 74.2 85.0 93.1 6 168.3 7.11 10.97 14.27 18.24 40 80 120 160 62.8 81.6 93.5 104.6 67.8 86.8 98.6 109.4 8 219.1 6.35 7.04 8.18 10.31 12.70 15.06 18.24 20.62 23.01 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 63.0 67.8 75.3 87.7 99.4 109.4 120.6 127.9 134.3 68.6 73.7 81.5 94.3 106.2 116.2 127.3 134.4 140.7 6.35 7.80 9.27 12.70 15.06 18.24 21.41 25.40 28.58 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 66.4 77.6 87.9 108.4 120.4 135.1 146.0 158.6 167.1 72.8 84.7 95.4 116.6 128.8 142.8 154.4 166.7 175.1 6.35 8.38 10.31 14.27 17.35 21.41 25.40 28.58 33.32 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 68.9 85.5 99.6 124.3 140.8 158.3 173.2 183.4 196.8 75.8 93.6 108.4 133.9 150.7 168.3 183.1 193.2 206.2 NPS Designator 10 12 273.0 323.8 Grade A Grades B&C NPS Designator Outside Diameter, mm 14 Distance, in mm Between Plates “H” by Equation: (1 + e) t Hp− e + t/D Wall Thickness, mm Schedule Number Grade A 355.6 6.35 7.92 9.52 11.13 15.06 19.05 23.80 27.76 31.75 35.71 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 70.1 83.7 96.3 118.6 132.9 154.0 174.9 190.0 202.5 213.8 77.3 91.8 105.3 130.2 143.4 165.0 186.0 200.7 213.3 224.2 16 406.4 6.35 7.92 9.52 12.70 16.66 21.41 26.19 30.94 36.53 40.46 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 71.7 89.0 99.4 123.3 148.7 174.3 195.8 214.0 232.2 243.3 79.4 94.7 109.1 143.2 160.6 186.7 208.4 226.6 244.5 255.3 18 457.2 6.35 7.92 11.13 14.27 19.05 23.80 29.36 34.92 39.67 45.24 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 73.0 87.9 115.2 139.5 169.1 194.6 219.9 241.2 256.9 270.9 81.0 97.1 126.1 150.9 182.5 208.6 234.1 255.1 270.7 284.4 20 508.0 6.35 9.52 12.70 15.06 20.62 26.19 32.54 38.10 44.45 49.99 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 74.1 104.2 130.6 148.4 184.7 215.0 243.9 265.5 286.6 302.6 82.4 114.8 143.0 161.7 199.5 230.4 259.6 281.2 302.0 317.6 24 609.6 6.35 9.52 14.27 17.35 24.59 30.94 38.89 46.02 52.37 59.51 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 75.8 107.6 149.1 173.5 220.7 255.6 290.8 319.7 341.0 361.9 84.5 119.0 163.5 189.3 238.5 274.1 311.0 338.6 359.4 379.9 218 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Grades B&C PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-106 X2. MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES X2.1 Table X2.1 lists minimum wall thicknesses for nominal pipe wall thickness. TABLE X2.1 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES ON INSPECTION FOR NOMINAL (AVERAGE) PIPE WALL THICKNESS Nominal (Average) Thickness (tn) Minimum Thickness on Inspection (tm) Nominal (Average) Thickness (tn) Minimum Thickness on Inspection (tm) Nominal (Average) Thickness (tn) Minimum Thickness on Inspection (tm) --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm 0.068 0.083 0.088 0.091 0.095 0.109 0.113 0.119 0.125 0.126 0.133 0.140 0.141 0.145 0.147 0.154 0.156 0.172 0.179 0.188 0.191 0.200 0.203 0.210 0.216 0.218 0.219 0.226 0.237 0.250 0.258 0.276 0.277 0.279 0.280 1.73 2.11 2.24 2.31 2.41 2.77 2.87 3.02 3.18 3.20 3.38 3.56 3.58 3.68 3.73 3.91 3.96 4.37 4.55 4.78 4.85 5.08 5.16 5.33 5.49 5.54 5.56 5.74 6.02 6.35 6.55 7.01 7.04 7.09 7.11 0.060 0.073 0.077 0.080 0.083 0.095 0.099 0.104 0.109 0.110 0.116 0.122 0.123 0.127 0.129 0.135 0.136 0.150 0.157 0.164 0.167 0.175 0.178 0.184 0.189 0.191 0.192 0.198 0.207 0.219 0.226 0.242 0.242 0.244 0.245 1.52 1.85 1.96 2.03 2.11 2.41 2.51 2.64 2.77 2.79 2.95 3.10 3.12 3.23 3.28 3.43 3.45 3.81 3.99 4.17 4.24 4.44 4.52 4.67 4.80 4.85 4.88 5.03 5.26 5.56 5.74 6.15 6.15 6.19 6.22 0.281 0.294 0.300 0.307 0.308 0.312 0.318 0.322 0.330 0.337 0.344 0.358 0.365 0.375 0.382 0.400 0.406 0.432 0.436 0.438 0.469 0.500 0.531 0.552 0.562 0.594 0.600 0.625 0.656 0.674 0.688 0.719 0.750 0.812 0.844 7.14 7.47 7.62 7.80 7.82 7.92 8.07 8.18 8.38 8.56 8.74 9.09 9.27 9.52 9.70 10.16 10.31 10.97 11.07 11.12 11.91 12.70 13.49 14.02 14.27 15.09 15.24 15.88 16.66 17.12 17.48 18.26 19.05 20.62 21.44 0.246 0.257 0.262 0.269 0.270 0.273 0.278 0.282 0.289 0.295 0.301 0.313 0.319 0.328 0.334 0.350 0.355 0.378 0.382 0.383 0.410 0.438 0.465 0.483 0.492 0.520 0.525 0.547 0.574 0.590 0.602 0.629 0.656 0.710 0.739 6.25 6.53 6.65 6.83 6.86 6.93 7.06 7.16 7.34 7.49 7.64 7.95 8.10 8.33 8.48 8.89 9.02 9.60 9.70 9.73 10.41 11.13 11.81 12.27 12.50 13.21 13.34 13.89 14.58 14.99 15.29 15.98 16.66 18.03 18.77 0.864 0.875 0.906 0.938 0.968 1.000 1.031 1.062 1.094 1.125 1.156 1.219 1.250 1.281 1.312 1.375 1.406 1.438 1.500 1.531 1.562 1.594 1.635 1.750 1.781 1.812 1.875 1.969 2.000 2.062 2.125 2.200 2.344 2.500 21.94 22.22 23.01 23.82 24.59 25.40 26.19 26.97 27.79 28.58 29.36 30.96 31.75 32.54 33.32 34.92 35.71 36.53 38.10 38.89 39.67 40.49 41.53 44.45 45.24 46.02 47.62 50.01 50.80 52.37 53.98 55.88 59.54 63.50 0.756 0.766 0.793 0.821 0.847 0.875 0.902 0.929 0.957 0.984 1.012 1.066 1.094 1.121 1.148 1.203 1.230 1.258 1.312 1.340 1.367 1.395 1.431 1.531 1.558 1.586 1.641 1.723 1.750 1.804 1.859 1.925 2.051 2.188 19.20 19.46 20.14 20.85 21.51 22.22 22.91 23.60 24.31 24.99 25.70 27.08 27.79 28.47 29.16 30.56 31.24 31.95 33.32 34.04 34.72 35.43 36.35 38.89 39.57 40.28 41.68 43.76 44.45 45.82 47.22 48.90 52.10 55.58 NOTE 1: The following equation, upon which this table is based, may be applied to calculate minimum wall thickness from nominal (average) wall thickness: tn ⴛ 0.875 p tm where: tn p nominal (average) wall thickness, in. and tm p minimum wall thickness, in. The wall thickness is expressed to three decimal places, the fourth decimal place being carried forward or dropped, in accordance with Practice E 29. NOTE 2: This table covers some wall thicknesses associated with standard pipe sizes but is not meant to imply that these are the only thicknesses obtainable under this specification. 219 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 220 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, ELECTRICFUSION (ARC)-WELDED (SIZES NPS 16 AND OVER) SA-134 [Identical with ASTM Specification A 134-96 (R01) except that the following additional requirement applies.] All products furnished under this SA specification are intended for application under the rules for ASME Section III for Class III piping. Furnishing of such products is limited to manufacturers who hold the appropriate ASME Code Symbol Stamp. Weld procedures, welder, and welding machine operators shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. The product shall meet all applicable requirements of Class III Piping including those requirements pertaining to heat treatment and butt welds. The plate used to fabricate the pipe shall conform to SA-283 or SA-285. Authorized inspection at the point of manufacture, and application of the appropriate Code Symbol Stamp is required. The applicable ASME Partial Data Report Form, signed by an Authorized Inspector, and a certified mill test report shall be furnished for each lot of pipe. The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall thickness which is heat treated in one furnace charge. For pipe which is not heat treated, or which is heat treated in a continuous furnace, a lot shall consist of each 200 ft (61 m) or fraction thereof of all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall thickness, subjected to the same heat treatment. For pipe which is heat treated in a batch-type furnace which is automatically controlled within a 50°F range and equipped with recording pyrometers so that the heating records are available, a lot may be defined the same as for continuous furnaces. Each length of pipe shall be marked in such a manner as to identify each such piece with the lot and the certified mill test report. 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers electric-fusion (arc)welded straight seam or spiral seam steel pipe NPS 16 and over in diameter (inside or outside as specified by purchaser), with wall thicknesses up to 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm), inclusive. Pipe having other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe complies with all other requirements of this specification. 1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains specifically to Section 5 of this specification. This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 36/A 36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel A 283/A 283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates A 285/A 285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 570/A 570M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality NOTE 1 — Acceptability for many services may be controlled by codes or standards such as those published by the American National Standards Institute and American Society of Mechanical Engineers. NOTE 2 — For testing methods not specifically covered in this specification, reference can be made to Test Methods and Definitions A 370, with particular reference to Annex A 2 on Steel Tubular Products. NOTE 3 — A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions is contained in ANSI B 36.10. 1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as the standard. NOTE 4 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal diameter”, “size”, and “nominal size”. 2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX Welding Qualifications 221 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 SA-134 2004 SECTION II 6. Number of Production Weld Tests 6.1 One weld test specimen specified in Section 8 shall be made from each lot of 3000 ft (900 m) of pipe or fraction thereof of each size and wall thickness. 2.3 American National Standards Institute Standard: B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe 6.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws not associated with the welding, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted. 3. Ordering Information 3.1 Orders for material under this specification should include the following, as required, to describe the desired material adequately: 6.3 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 11, unless otherwise specified in 11.3. 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, meters, or number of lengths), 3.1.2 Name of material (electric-fusion-(arc) welded pipe), 7. Retests 7.1 If any specimen tested in accordance with Section 10 fails to meet the requirements, retests of two additional specimens from the same lot of pipe shall be made, each of which shall meet the requirements specified. If any of the retests fail to conform to the requirements, test specimens may be taken from each untested pipe length at the manufacturer’s option. Each specimen shall meet the requirements specified, or that pipe shall be rejected. 3.1.3 Grade (Section 4), 3.1.4 Size (inside or outside diameter and nominal wall thickness), 3.1.5 Length (specified or random), 3.1.6 Specific straightness requirements (see 12.3), 3.1.7 End finish (Section 15), 3.1.8 Hydrostatic test pressure (Section 11), 3.1.9 ASTM designation, and 8. Material 4.1 The steel from which the pipe is made shall conform to Specifications A 283/A 283M, A 285/A 285M, A 570, or A 36/A 36M or to other ASTM specifications for equally suitable weldable material, as specified: For purposes of marking and certification, when required, the pipe grade of material shall be established by the A xxx plate specification designation and plate grade, when applicable. Test Specimens of Production Welds 8.1 The weld-test specimens for the reduced-section tension test shall be taken perpendicularly across the weld and from the end of the pipe or alternatively, from flat test pieces of material conforming to the requirements in the specifications used in the manufacturer of the pipe. The alternative weld-test specimens shall be welded with the same procedure and by the same operator and equipment, and in sequence with the welding of the longitudinal joints in the pipe. The test pieces shall have the weld approximately in the middle of the specimen. The specimens shall be straightened cold, and shall be tested at room temperature. 5. 8.2 Reduced-section tension-test specimens shall be prepared in accordance with Fig. number 21 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 3.1.10 End use of material. 4. Manufacture 5.1 The longitudinal edges of the steel shall be shaped to give the most satisfactory results by the particular welding process employed. The steel shall then be properly formed and may be tacked preparatory to welding. The weld shall be made by automatic means (except tack welds) and shall be of reasonably uniform width and height for the entire length of the pipe. By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, manual welding by qualified procedure and welders may be used as an equal alternate under this specification. 9. Qualification of Welding Procedure 9.1 The welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society Standard Qualification Procedure or ASME Section IX of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser using the tests and test values specified in 9.2 and 9.3. Thicknesses less than 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) shall be qualified for each wall thickness of pipe manufactured. Thicknesses 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. (10 mm to 19.0 mm), inclusive, shall be qualified in 3 ⁄8 -in. (10-mm) thickness. 5.2 All longitudinal seams, spiral seams, and shop girth seams shall be butt-welded. 222 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 9.2 Two reduced-section tension specimens (transverse weld) made in accordance with Fig. number 21 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, with the weld reinforcement removed, shall show a tensile strength not less than 100% of the minimum specified tensile strength of the base material used. SA-134 11.2 Test pressure shall be held for not less than 5 s, or for a longer time as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. NOTE 7 — When agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer and so stated on the order, pipe may be tested to one and one half times the specified working pressure, except that the maximum test pressure shall not exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa) nor shall the maximum fiber stress exceed 85% of specified minimum yield point of steel or to a fiber stress that does not exceed 85% of the specified minimum yield point of the steel or 2800-psi (19-MPa) test pressure. 9.3 Two face-bend test specimens shall be prepared in accordance with Fig. number 2 (a) of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 and shall withstand being bent 180° in a jig substantially in accordance with Fig. 30 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other defects exceeding 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) in any direction be present in the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe metal after bending. Cracks that originate along the edges of the specimens during testing and that are less than 1⁄4 in. (6.3 mm) in any direction, shall not be considered. 11.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic testing and each length so furnished shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NH”. Additionally, the certification, when required, shall state “Not Hydrostatically Tested” and the specification number and material grade, as shown on the certification, shall be followed by the letters “NH”. 12. Permissible Variations in Weights and Dimensions 12.1 Thickness and Weight — The wall thickness and weight for welded pipe under this specification shall be governed by the requirements of the specifications to which the steel was ordered. 10. Tensile Properties of Production Welds 10.1 Reduced-section tension test specimens required in Section 8 taken perpendicularly across the weld with the weld reinforcement removed, shall show a tensile strength not less than 95% of the specified minimum strength of the steel. At the manufacturer’s option, the test may be made without removing the weld reinforcement, in which case the tensile strength shall be not less than the specified minimum tensile strength for the grade of steel used. 12.2 Circumference — The outside circumference of the pipe shall not vary more than ±0.5% from the nominal outside circumference based upon the diameter specified, except that the circumference at ends shall be sized, if necessary, to meet the requirements of Section 14. 12.3 Straightness — Finished pipe shall be commercially straight. When specific straightness requirements are desired, the order should so state, and the tolerances shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 11. Hydrostatic Test (Note 5) 11.1 Each length of pipe shall be tested by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure that will produce in the pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield point of the steel used at room temperature. The pressure shall be determined by the following equation: 12.4 Ovality — Out-of-roundness — The difference between major and minor outside diameter shall not exceed 1%. Closer tolerances may be established by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Where the D/T (outside diameter/wall thickness) is over 120, internal bracing should be utilized to achieve sizing of ends and ovality shall be by agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser. P p 2St/D where: P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (Note 6) (not to exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa)), S p 0.60 times the minimum specified yield point of the steel used, psi (MPa), t p specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and D p specified outside diameter, in. (mm). 13. Lengths 13.1 Pipe lengths shall be supplied in accordance with the following regular practice: 13.1.1 The lengths shall be as specified on the order with a tolerance of ±1⁄2 in. (13 mm), except that the shorter lengths from which test coupons have been cut may also be shipped. NOTE 5 — A hydrostatic sizing operation is not to be considered a hydrostatic test or a substitute for it. NOTE 6 — When the diameter and wall thickness of pipe are such that the capacity limits of testing equipment are exceeded by these requirements, the test pressures may be reduced by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 223 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-134 2004 SECTION II 13.1.2 When random lengths are specified, pipe shall be furnished in lengths having a minimum average of 29 ft (9 m) with a minimum length of 20 ft (6 m), but not more than 5% may be under 25 ft (8 m). 16. Inspection 16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment and unless otherwise specified, shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. If agreed upon, the manufacturer shall notify the purchaser in time so that he may have his inspector present to witness any part of the manufacture or tests that may be desired. The certification shall include reference to this specification and the pipe grade (ASTM plate specification designation and plate grade, when applicable). 13.2 Pipe lengths containing circumferentially welded joints (Note 8) shall be permitted by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Tests of these welded joints shall be made in accordance with the procedure tests specified in Section 9 and the production weld tests specified in Section 10. The number of production weld tests shall be one per each lot of 100 joints or fraction thereof, but not less than one for each welder or welding operator. NOTE 8 — Joints are defined for the purpose of this specification as a circumferential welded seam lying in one plane, used to join lengths of straight pipe. 14. 16.2 Certification — Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order, a manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufactured and tested in accordance with this specification together with a report of the chemical and tensile tests shall be furnished. When hydrostatic test is omitted, the certificate shall include the letters “NH”. Ends 14.1 Pipe shall be furnished with a plain right-angle cut or with bevel ends as specified. All burrs at the ends of pipe shall be removed. 14.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe with beveled ends shall meet the requirements of ANSI B 16.25. 14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the outside circumference of pipe ends for a distance of not less than 4 in. (100 mm) shall not vary more than ±60% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe from the nominal outside circumference based on the diameter specified, except that the tolerance shall not be less than ±3⁄16 in. (5 mm). 17. Rejection 17.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not meet the requirements of this specification based on the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 14.3 By agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser the ends of the pipe may be sized within agreedupon tolerances if necessary to meet the requirements of special installations. 15. 17.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and requirements of this specification, may be set aside and the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Finish 15.1 Repair by Welding — The welding of injurious defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth does not exceed one third the specified wall thickness, will be permitted. Defects in the welds, such as sweats or leaks, shall be repaired or the piece rejected at the option of the manufacturer. Repairs of this nature shall be made by completely removing the defect, cleaning the cavity, and then welding. 18. Certification 18.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order, a manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufactured and tested in accordance with this specification, including year date, together with a report of the chemical and tensile tests shall be furnished. The pipe 15.2 All repaired pipe shall be tested hydrostatically in accordance with Section 11, unless otherwise specified in 11.3. 224 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS grade shall be identified by the plate specification designation (year date not required) and the plate grade (where applicable). 19.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 19.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. 19. Product Marking 19.1 Each section of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer’s distinguishing marking, this specification number and the pipe grade. The marking need not include the year date of the pipe or plate specification. 20. Protective Coating 20.1 If agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer, the pipe shall be given a protective coating of the kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser. 225 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-134 Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 226 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCEWELDED STEEL PIPE SA-135 (Identical with ASTM Specification A 135-01.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers two grades of electricresistance-welded steel pipe in NPS 2 to NPS 30 inclusive, with nominal (average) wall thickness up to 0.500 in. (12.70 mm), inclusive, and in nominal sizes NPS 3/ 4 to NPS 5 inclusive with nominal (average) wall thickness 0.083 in. (2.11 mm) to 0.134 in. (3.40 mm), depending on size. Pipe having other dimensions (Note 1) may be furnished provided such pipe complies with all other requirements of this specification. The pipe is intended for conveying gas, vapor, water or other liquid; only Grade A is adapted for flanging and bending (Note 2). The suitability of pipe for various purposes is somewhat dependent upon its dimensions, properties, and conditions of service, so that the purpose for which the pipe is intended should be stated in the order. The pipe may be furnished either nonexpanded or cold expanded at the option of the manufacturer. When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion shall not exceed 1.5% of the outside diameter pipe size. A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications E 59 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation NOTE 1 — A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions is contained in ASME B36.10. 2.2 ANSI Standard: B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose NOTE 2 — This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending of Grade B pipe. 2.3 Federal Standards: Fed. STD No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies) Fed. STD No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products 1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as the standard. The SI values, given in parentheses, are for information only. 2.4 Military Standards: MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment 2.5 ASME Standard: B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe 227 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 04 SA-135 2004 SECTION II 3. Terminology 3.1 For definitions of terms relating to steel manufacturing and properties, refer to Terminology A 941. required. The producer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates the grades. 3.2 For definitions of terms relating to mechanical testing, refer to Terminology E 6. 5.3 The pipe shall be manufactured from flat rolled steel in individual lengths or in continuous length by electric-resistance or electric-induction welding without the addition of extraneous material. 3.3 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 3.3.1 burr, n — a rough or sharp edge left on pipe ends by cutting or sawing. 5.4 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe to Grade B pipe shall be heat treated after welding to a minimum temperature of 1000 °F (540 °C) or processed in such a manner that no untempered martensite remains. 3.3.2 lot, n — all pipe of the same size, wall thickness and rolled length that is produced from the same heat of steel and subject to the same heat treatment. 3.3.3 black thread, n — a thread crease exhibiting the original pipe surface after machining. 6. Chemical Composition 6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2, based on the heat analysis. When specified in the order, the heat analyses shall be reported to the purchaser or a representative of the purchaser. 4. Ordering Information 4.1 Orders for material under this specification should include the following, as required, to describe the desired material adequately: 7. Product Analysis 7.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser on samples of pipe selected at random and shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 2. Methods and Practices relating to chemical analysis shall be in accordance with Test Method, Practices, and Terminology A 751. 4.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths), 4.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistancewelded pipe), 4.1.3 Specification designation and year of issue, 4.1.4 Grade (see Table 1), 4.1.5 Size (nominal size, or outside diameter; and nominal wall thickness), 8. 4.1.6 Length (specific or random, see 12.4), 4.1.7 End finish (plain or threaded, see 13.2), Mechanical Properties Requirements 8.1 Tensile Properties: 8.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 1. 4.1.7.1 Threaded and coupled, if specified, 4.1.7.2 Threads only, if specified, 8.1.2 The yield strength shall be determined by the offset method utilizing 0.2% of the gage length or by the total extension under load method using 0.5% of the gage length. 4.1.7.3 Plain end, if specified, 4.1.8 Alternative electric test (see Section 11), 4.1.9 Tension test specimen (see Section 15), 8.1.3 Longitudinal test specimens shall be full-size longitudinal test specimens (see Figure A2.1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370) or longitudinal strip test specimens (see Specimen No. 4 in Fig. A2.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370). 4.1.10 Heat analysis, if required (see 6.1), 4.1.11 Certificate of compliance, if required (see Section 19), and 4.1.12 Special requirements. 8.2 The test specimen taken across the weld shall show a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test will not be required for pipe under NPS 8. 5. Manufacture 5.1 The steel shall be made by either or both of the following processes: basic-oxygen or electric-furnace. 9. Flattening Test 9.1 A specimen at least 4 in. (102 mm) in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps 5.2 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast. When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast, identification of the resultant transition material is 228 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- with the weld located either 0° or 90° from the line of direction of force as required in 9.2. During the first step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than two thirds of the original outside diameter of the pipe. As a second step, the flattening shall be continued. During the second step, which is a test for ductility exclusive of the weld, no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than one third of the original outside diameter of the pipe but is not less than five times the wall thickness of the pipe. During the third step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed during the entire flattening test shall be cause for rejection. t p specified wall thickness, in., and D p specified outside diameter, in. Plain end pipe may be tested at the discretion of the manufacturer in single lengths or in multiple lengths. 10.2 The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 s. 10.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic testing, and each length so furnished shall include with the mandatory marking the letters “NH.” NOTE 3 — This provision is not intended to apply to light wall (Schedule 10) pipe listed in Table X1.1. 10.4 When certification is required by the purchaser and the hydrostatic test has been omitted, the certification shall clearly state “Not Hydrostatically Tested.” The specification number and material grade, as shown on the certification, shall be followed by the letters “NH.” 9.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening test specified in 9.1 shall be made on both crop ends cut from each length of pipe. The tests from each end shall be made alternately with the weld at 0° and at 90° from the line of direction of force. For pipe produced in multiple lengths, the flattening test shall be made on crop ends representing the front and back of each coil with the weld at 90° from the line of direction of force, and on two intermediate rings representing each coil with the weld 0° from the line of direction of force. 11. Nondestructive Examination Requirements 11.1 As an alternate to the hydrostatic test for Schedule 10 pipe in sizes NPS 3⁄4 to NPS 5 inclusive, and when accepted by the purchaser, each pipe shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice E 213, Practice E 273, or Practice E 309. It is the intent of this test to reject pipe containing defects. 9.3 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish requirements in Section 13. 11.2 Recognized methods for meeting this test are electromagnetic (eddy current) or ultrasonic. 11.3 The following information is for the benefit of the user of this specification: 9.4 Superficial cracks as a result of surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection. 11.3.1 The ultrasonic examination referred to in this specification is intended to detect longitudinal imperfections having a reflective area similar to or larger than the reference notch. The examination may not detect circumferentially oriented imperfections of short, deep imperfections. 10. Hydrostatic Test 10.1 Except as provided for in 10.3, each length of pipe shall be hydrostatically tested at the mill, without leakage through the wall, to a pressure calculated from the following Eq. 1: P p 2St/D 11.3.2 The eddy-current examination referenced in this specification has the capability of detecting significant imperfections, especially of the short, abrupt type. (1) 11.3.3 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section 10 is a test method provided for in many product specifications. This test has the capability of finding imperfections of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure. This test may not detect very tight, through-the-wall imperfections or imperfections that extend an appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration. where: P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa). The test pressure need not exceed 2500 psi (17.24 MPa), S p allowable fiber stress 18 000 psi (124 MPa) for Grade A and 21 000 psi (144 MPa) for Grade B. This does not prohibit testing at higher pressure at the manufacturer’s option, 229 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-135 Not for Resale SA-135 2004 SECTION II NOTE 5 — The minimum wall thickness on inspection is shown in Table X1.2 of the Appendix. 11.3.4 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections that can be detected in the specific application of these examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular product. 12.4 Lengths: 12.4.1 Except as allowed in 12.4.2, pipe shall be furnished in lengths averaging 38 ft (11.6 m) or over, with a minimum length of 20 ft (6.1 m), but no more than 5% may be under 32 ft (9.8 m). Jointers made by welding are permissible. When threaded pipe is ordered, jointers shall be made by threaded connections and shall not exceed 5% of the order. --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 11.4 In order to accommodate the various types of nondestructive electric testing equipment and techniques in use, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one or more of the following discontinuities to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection: 11.4.1 Drilled Hole — A hole not larger than 0.031in. (0.8-mm) diameter shall be drilled radially and completely through pipe wall, preferably in the weld area, care being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling. 11.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — A notch shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe preferably in the weld area. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater. 11.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) or less in width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis on the outside surface of the pipe preferably in the weld area, to have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater. 12.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, Schedule 10 pipe shall be between 16 and 22 ft (4.9 and 6.7 m) for a minimum of 90% of the footage furnished, with any balance being shorter lengths at least 8 ft (2.4 m) long. 13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 13.1 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and free of defects. Surface imperfections in excess of 12.5% of the nominal wall thickness shall be considered defects. 13.2 End Finish: 13.2.1 Schedule 10 Pipe — Pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall be plain end only. All inside and outside cutting burrs shall be removed. This generally involves breaking the corners. 13.2.2 Ends, Plain End Pipe — Unless otherwise specified, plain end pipe for use with the Dresser or Dayton type coupling shall be reamed both outside and inside sufficiently to remove all burrs. Plain end pipe for welding shall be beveled on the outside to an angle of 30° with a tolerance of + 5° and – 0° and with a width of flat at the end of the pipe of 1⁄16 +/− 1⁄32 in. (1.6 +/− 0.8 mm). When material is ordered beveled to any other than a 30° angle, it should be understood that the angle is to be measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. This means that a greater amount of material is removed with a 60° angle than with a 30° angle. Pipe shall be sufficiently free from indentations, projections, or roll marks for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the end of the pipe to make a tight joint with the rubber gasket type of coupling. All plain end pipe intended for Dresser or Dayton type joints or for welding, sizes NPS 10 and smaller in outside diameter specified, shall be not more than 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller than the outside diameter specified for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the ends of the pipe and shall permit the passing for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) of a ring gage that has a bore 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) larger than the outside diameter specified of the pipe. Sizes larger than NPS 10 shall be not more than 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller than the nominal 11.5 Pipe producing a signal equal to or greater than the calibration imperfection shall be rejected. 12. Dimensions, Weight, and Permissible Variations 12.1 Weight — The weight of any length of pipe other than Schedule 10 shall not vary more than 3.5% under or 10% over that specified, but the carload weight shall be not more than 1.75% under the nominal weight. The weight of pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall not vary more than ±10% from that calculated using the weight (mass) per unit length prescribed in Appendix Table X1.1. The weight of the pipe shall be calculated from the relevant equation in ASME B36.10 and with a constant of 10.69 rather than 10.68. NOTE 4 — A system of standard pipe sizes has been approved by the American National Standards Institute as American National Standard for Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe (ASME B36.10). 12.2 Diameter — The outside diameter shall not vary more than ±1% from the nominal size specified. 12.3 Minimum Wall Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5% under the specified wall thickness. 230 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS outside diameter for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the end of the pipe and shall permit the passing for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) of a ring gage which has a bore 3⁄32 in. (2.4 mm) larger than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. 14. Weld Repair 14.1 Welding Repair: 14.2 Defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth does not exceed one third the specified wall thickness, shall be repaired by electric welding. Defects in the welds such as sweats or leaks, unless otherwise specified, shall be repaired or the piece rejected at the option of the manufacturer. Repairs of this nature shall be made by completely removing the defect, cleaning the cavity, and then electric welding. 13.2.3 Ends, Threaded Pipe — Each end of threaded pipe shall be reamed to remove all burrs. All threads shall be in accordance with the American National Standard Pipe Threads (Note 6) and cut so as to make a tight joint when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified internal hydrostatic pressure. The variation from the standard, when tested with the standard working gage, shall not exceed one and one-half turns either way. Pipe shall not be rounded by hammering in order to get a full thread. There shall be not more than two black threads for 3⁄4in. (19.0-mm) taper among the perfect threads. Black threads should not be confused with imperfect threads, such as those torn, shaven, or broken. 14.3 All repaired pipe shall be retested hydrostatically in accordance with Section 10. 15. Sampling 15.1 Chemical Analysis: 15.1.1 Samples for chemical analysis, except for spectrochemical analysis, shall be taken in accordance with Practice E 59. The number of samples shall be determined as follows: NOTE 6 — A complete description of the American National Standard Pipe Threads applicable to pipe, valves, and fittings is contained in the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1); also “Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, 1942,” National Bureau of Standards Handbook H 28, January, 1942, the pertinent data in both sources being identical. 13.3 Couplings — Each length of threaded pipe shall be provided with one coupling manufactured in accordance with Specification A 865 except that the coupling may be wrought iron (Note 7). Threads shall be cut so as to make a tight joint. Taper-tapped couplings shall be furnished on all weights of threaded pipe NPS 21⁄2 and larger. NPS Numbers of Samples Selected Under 6 6 to 20, incl Over 20 to 30, incl 2 from each lot of 400 pipes or fraction thereof 2 from each lot of 200 pipes or fraction thereof 2 from each lot of 100 pipes or fraction thereof 15.2 Tension Test: 15.2.1 One longitudinal tension test shall be made on length (Note 8) from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size under NPS 8 and one transverse body and one transverse weld tension test on one length from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size NPS 8 to NPS 20 and on one length from each lot of 100 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over NPS 20 to NPS 30. When taken from the skelp, the number of tests shall be determined in the same manner as when taken from the finished pipe. NOTE 7 — For sizes NPS 2 and smaller, it is commercial practice to furnish straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight (Schedule 40) pipe and taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong (Schedule 80) and double-extra-strong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for sizes NPS 2 and smaller on standard weight (Schedule 40) pipe, line pipe in accordance with Specification 5L of the American Petroleum Institute should be ordered, thread lengths to be in accordance with the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1). Tapertapped couplings for sizes NPS 2 and smaller in standard weight may be used on mill-threaded standard weight type of the same size. NOTE 8 — Length is defined as the length as ordered, except that in the case of orders for cut lengths shorter than double random, which is defined as the length as rolled, prior to cutting to the required short lengths. 15.3 Flattening Test: 15.3.1 The flattening test specified in 9.1 shall be made on both crop ends cut from each length of pipe. When pipe is produced in multiple lengths, flattening tests are required on the crop ends from the front and back ends of each coil and on two intermediate rings representing each coil. 13.4 Protective Coating: 13.4.1 After the pipe has been subjected to the hydrostatic test, and if required by the purchaser, it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, grease, loose scale, and rust; then dried, and given a protective coating of the kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser. Pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall be normally shipped with a light coating of processing oil. If so specified, the pipe can be given a mill coating or a special coating. 15.4 Hydrostatic Test: 15.4.1 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 10. 231 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-135 Not for Resale SA-135 2004 SECTION II 80% of its length after the initial cropping; otherwise, the length shall be rejected. For pipe produced in multiple lengths, retests may be cut from each end of each individual length in the multiple; such tests shall be made with the weld alternately 0° and 90° from the line of direction of force. 16. Test, Retest, and Resampling 16.1 Chemical Analysis: 16.1.1 If the results of the analysis of either length of pipe do not conform to the requirements specified in Section 7, analyses of two additional lengths from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 16.4 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature. 16.2 Tension Test: 16.2.1 The test specimens and the tests required by this specification shall conform to those described in Test Methods and Definitions A 370, except that all specimens shall be tested at room temperature. 17. Inspection 17.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except check analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operation. 16.2.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall be taken from the end of the pipe, or by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser may be taken from the skelp, at a point approximately 90° from the weld, and shall not be flattened between gage marks. The sides of each specimen shall be parallel between gage marks. At the manufacturer option, the tension test may be made on full section of pipe. 16.2.3 Transverse weld test specimens shall be taken with the weld at the center of the specimen. Transverse body test specimens shall be taken opposite to the weld. All transverse test specimens shall be approximately 11⁄2 in. (38.1 mm) wide in the gage length and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from which the specimen was cut. 18. Rejection 18.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not meet the requirements of this specification based on the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 16.2.4 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws not associated with the quality of the steel or the welding, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted. 16.2.5 If the results of the tension tests of any lot do not conform to the requirements specified in 9.1, retests of two additional lengths from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 18.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and requirements of this specification, may be set aside and the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for agreement. 16.2.6 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that specified in 8.1, and any part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm) from the center of the gage length as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, the specimen may be discarded and another substituted. 16.3 Flattening Test: 16.3.1 Specimens for flattening tests shall be smooth at the ends and free from burrs. 19. Certificate of Compliance 19.1 When specified in the purchase order, the producer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a certificate of compliance stating that the pipe has been manufactured, sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with this specification (including the year of issue) and has been found to meet the requirements. 16.3.2 If any section of the pipe fails to comply with the requirements of 9.1, for pipe produced in single lengths, other sections may be cut from the same end of the same length until satisfactory tests are obtained, except that the finished pipe shall not be shorter than 232 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 20. Identification of Material 20.1 Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked with appropriate symbols by stenciling, stamping, or rolling to show the manufacturer’s name, the size, the specification designation, the grade, and the hydrostatic test pressure when tested, or the letters “NH” when not tested. 20.2 In addition to the requirements in 20.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. SA-135 21.2 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with MIL-STD 163. The applicable levels shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD 129 or Fed. Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required for military agencies. 21. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment 21.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with Practices A 700. 22. Keywords 22.1 eddy current testing; electric resistance welded pipe; hydrostatic testing; plain end pipe; Schedule 10 pipe; threaded pipe TABLE 1 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS Tensile strength, min, ksi (MPa) Yield strength, min, ksi (MPa) Elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %: For pipe having a specified wall thickness of 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm) or more, if tested using a longitudinal strip test specimen. For pipe having a specified wall thickness of less than 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm), if tested using a longitudinal strip test specimen. For pipe of any size, if tested using a full-size longitudinal test specimen. A Grade A Grade B 48 (331) 30 (207) 60 (414) 35 (241) 35 30 A B 35 30 The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent: E p 56 t + 16.5 where: E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and t p specified wall thickness, in. B The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent: E p 48 t + 14.00 where: E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and t p specified wall thickness, in. TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Composition, max, % Element Grade A Grade B Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur 0.25 0.95 0.035 0.035 0.30 1.20 0.035 0.035 233 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-135 2004 SECTION II APPENDIX (Nonmandatory Information) X1. ADDITIONAL DATA X1.1 Additional data on dimensions nominal weights and test pressures is provided in Table X1.1. X1.2 Additional data on wall thicknesses are provided in Table X1.2. TABLE X1.1 DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR LIGHT WALL STEEL PIPE Test Pressure, psi (MPa) A Schedule 10 Outside Diameter, in. (mm) NPS 3 ⁄4 1 11⁄4 11⁄2 2 21⁄2 3 31⁄2 4 5 A 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563 (26.7) (33.4) (42.2) (48.3) (60.3) (73.0) (88.9) (101.6) (114.3) (141.3) Specified Wall Thickness A in. (mm) 0.083 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.134 Weight (Mass) per Unit Length, lb/ft (kg/m) (2.11) (2.77) (2.77) (2.77) (2.77) (3.05) (3.05) (3.05) (3.05) (3.40) 0.86 1.40 1.81 2.09 2.64 3.53 4.34 4.98 5.62 7.78 Grade A (1.28) (2.09) (2.69) (3.11) (3.93) (5.26) (6.46) (7.41) (8.37) (11.58) 2500 2500 2400 2100 1700 1500 1200 1000 900 850 (17.24) (17.24) (16.55) (14.48) (11.72) (10.34) (8.27) (6.89) (6.21) (5.86) The test pressures are calculated by the following equation (but need not exceed 2500 psi or 17.24 MPa): P p 2St/D where: P S t D p p p p pressure, psi (MPa) fiber stress, 60% of the specified minimum yield strength, psi (MPa), specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and specified outside diameter, in. (mm). 234 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Grade B 2500 2500 2500 2400 1900 1700 1400 1200 1100 1000 (17.24) (17.24) (17.24) (16.55) (13.10) (11.72) (9.65) (8.27) (7.58) (6.89) PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-135 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- TABLE X1.2 MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE WALL THICKNESS ON INSPECTION Specified Wall Thickness (t), in. (mm) 0.068 0.088 0.091 0.095 0.113 0.119 0.125 0.126 0.133 0.140 0.145 0.147 0.154 0.156 0.179 0.187 0.188 0.191 0.200 0.203 0.216 0.218 0.219 0.226 0.237 0.250 0.258 0.276 0.277 0.279 0.280 0.281 Minimum Permissible Wall Thickness (tm), in. (mm) (1.73) (2.24) (2.31) (2.41) (2.87) (3.02) (3.18) (3.20) (3.38) (3.56) (3.68) (3.73) (3.91) (3.96) (4.55) (4.75) (4.78) (4.85) (5.08) (5.16) (5.49) (5.54) (5.56) (5.74) (6.02) (6.35) (6.55) (7.01) (7.04) (7.09) (7.11) (7.14) 0.060 0.077 0.080 0.083 0.099 0.104 0.109 0.110 0.116 0.122 0.127 0.129 0.135 0.136 0.157 0.164 0.164 0.167 0.175 0.178 0.189 0.191 0.192 0.198 0.207 0.219 0.226 0.242 0.242 0.244 0.245 0.246 (1.52) (1.96) (2.03) (2.11) (2.51) (2.64) (2.77) (2.79) (2.95) (3.10) (3.23) (3.28) (3.43) (3.45) (3.99) (4.17) (4.17) (4.24) (4.45) (4.52) (4.80) (4.85) (4.88) (5.03) (5.26) (5.56) (5.74) (6.15) (6.15) (6.20) (6.22) (6.25) Specified Wall Thickness (t), in. (mm) 0.294 0.300 0.307 0.308 0.312 0.318 0.322 0.330 0.337 0.343 0.344 0.358 0.365 0.375 0.382 0.400 0.406 0.432 0.436 0.437 0.438 0.500 0.531 0.552 0.562 0.593 0.600 0.625 0.656 0.674 0.687 0.719 Minimum Permissible Wall Thickness (tm), in. (mm) (7.47) (7.62) (7.80) (7.82) (7.92) (8.08) (8.18) (8.38) (8.56) (8.71) (8.74) (9.09) (9.27) (9.53) (9.70) (10.16) (10.31) (10.97) (11.07) (11.10) (11.13) (12.70) (13.49) (14.02) (14.27) (15.06) (15.24) (15.88) (16.66) (17.12) (17.45) (18.24) 0.257 0.262 0.269 0.270 0.273 0.278 0.282 0.289 0.295 0.300 0.301 0.313 0.319 0.328 0.334 0.350 0.355 0.378 0.382 0.382 0.383 0.438 0.465 0.483 0.492 0.519 0.525 0.547 0.574 0.590 0.601 0.629 (6.53) (6.65) (6.83) (6.86) (6.93) (7.06) (7.16) (7.34) (7.49) (7.62) (7.65) (7.95) (8.10) (8.33) (8.48) (8.89) (9.02) (9.60) (9.70) (9.70) (9.73) (11.13) (11.81) (12.27) (12.50) (13.18) (13.34) (13.89) (14.58) (14.99) (15.27) (15.98) Specified Wall Thickness (t), in. (mm) 0.750 0.812 0.843 0.864 0.875 0.906 0.937 0.968 1.000 1.031 1.062 1.093 1.125 1.156 1.218 1.250 1.281 1.312 1.343 1.375 1.406 1.437 1.500 1.531 1.562 1.593 1.750 1.781 1.812 1.968 2.062 2.343 (19.05) (20.62) (21.41) (21.95) (22.23) (23.01) (23.80) (24.59) (25.40) (26.19) (26.97) (27.76) (28.58) (29.36) (30.94) (31.75) (32.54) (33.33) (34.11) (34.93) (35.71) (36.53) (38.10) (38.89) (39.68) (40.46) (44.45) (45.24) (46.03) (49.99) (52.38) (59.51) Minimum Permissible Wall Thickness (tm), in. (mm) 0.656 0.710 0.738 0.756 0.766 0.793 0.820 0.847 0.875 0.902 0.929 0.956 0.984 1.012 1.066 1.094 1.121 1.148 1.175 1.203 1.230 1.258 1.312 1.340 1.367 1.394 1.531 1.558 1.586 1.722 1.804 2.050 (16.66) (18.03) (18.75) (19.20) (19.46) (20.14) (20.83) (21.51) (22.23) (22.91) (23.60) (24.28) (24.99) (25.70) (27.08) (27.79) (28.47) (29.16) (29.85) (30.56) (31.24) (31.95) (33.33) (34.04) (34.72) (35.41) (38.89) (39.57) (40.28) (43.74) (45.82) (52.07) NOTE 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, is used to derive the minimum permissible wall thickness values from the specified wall thickness values, with the calculated values rounded to three decimal places in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29: tm ⴛ 0.875 p t where: tm p minimum permissible wall thickness, in. t p specified wall thickness, in. NOTE 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification. 235 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 236 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale (Identical with ASTM Specification A 178lA 178M-95.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, electric-resistance-welded tubes made of carbon steel and carbon-manganese steel intended for use as boiler tubes, boiler flues, superheater flues, and safe ends. NOTE 1 - Type C and D tubes are not suitable for safe-ending for forge welding. 1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to this specification are '/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 9.1 mm], inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other dimensions may be furnished, provided such hlbes comply with all other requirements of this specification. 1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than in. 13.2 mm] in inside diameter or 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thiclcness. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Strrnrlrrrcls: A 226lA 226M Specification for Electric-ResistanceWelded Carbon Steel Boiler and S~lperheaterTubes for High-Pressure Service A 450IA 450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Fenitic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes A 520 Specification for S~lpplementaryRequirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Confo~~ning to I S 0 Reconmendations for Boiler Construction. E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing 3. 1.4 When these products are to be used in applications confosming to I S 0 Recomlnendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 shall supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification. 1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the ST units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining val~lesfrom the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified in the order. Ordering Information 3.1 Orders for material under this specification should include the following, as required, to describe the desired material adequately: 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths), 3.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded tubes), 3.1.3 Grade (A, C, or D, Table I), 3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and ~ninimumwall thickness), 3.1.5 Length (specific or random), 3.1.6 Optional requirenlents (product analysis, Section 7; crush test, Section 10; hydrostatic or nondestructive electric test, 11.6), §A-178lSA-178M 2004 SECTION I1 3.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of Specification A 450lA 450M), 3.1.8 Specification, and designation, 3.1.9 Individual supplementary requirements, if required, and 3.1.10 Special requirements. 4. Manufacture 4.1 The steel for Grade D shall be killed. 4.2 Tubes shall be made by electric-resistance welding. 5. eat Treatment 5.1 After welding, all tubes shall be heat treated at a temperature of 1650°F [900°C] or higher and followed by cooling in air or in the cooling chamber of a controlledatmosphere f ~ ~ r n a cCold-drawn e. tubes shall be heat treated after the final cold-draw pass at a temperature of 1200" [650°C] or higher. emical Composition 6.1 The steel shall confonn to the requirements as to chemical composition prescribed in Tabie i. 6.2 When a grade is ordered under this specification, supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the addition of any element other than those listed in Table 1 is not permitted. 7.1 When requested on the p~lrchaseorder, a product analysis shall be made by the manufacturer or supplier from one tube per 100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm] and one tube per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. C76.2 mm] and under; or when hlbes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined shall confo~mto the requirements specified. 7.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of two additional lengths of flat-rolled stoclc or tubes shall be made. Both retests, for the elements in question, shall meet the req~~irements of the specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each length of flat-rolled stock or tube may be individually tested for acceptance. Lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes which do not meet the requirements of the specifications shall be rejected. NOTE 2 - A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. 176.2 mm], prior to cutting to length. 8. General Requirements 8.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification A 450lA 450M unless otherwise provided herein. 9. Tensile Requirements 9.1 Grade C and D tubes shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2. NOTE 3: E.~p/nr~nto~y Note - For purposes of design the following lensile properties may be assumed for Grade A tubes: Tensile strength, min, ltsi [MPa] Yield Strength, min, ltsi [MPa] Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 10. Crush Test 10.1 When required by the purchaser, crushing tests shall be made on sections of tube 2'/2 in. [63 mm] in length which shall stand crushing longitudinally without cracking, splitting, or opening at the weld, as follows: Wall Thicltness of Tubes, in. Lmm] 0.135 [3.43] and under Over 0.135 [3.43] Height of Crushed Section, in. [mm] Grade A Tubes % [I91 or until outside folds are in contact 1!/J 1321 Grade C and D Tubes Crush tests not required ... 10.2 Table 3 gives the computed minimum elongation in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickvalues for each ness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the minim~lmelongation value shall be determined by the following equation: where: E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and, t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [rnm]. 10.3 For tubing less than 1 in. 125.4 mm] in outside diameter, the length of the specimen shall be 21/2 times the outside diameter of the tube. Slight surface checks shall not be cause for rejection. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-178lSA-178M 11. Mechanical Tests Required 11.1 Flattening Test: of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace. at the same temperature, time at heat, and f~irnacespeed. 11.1.1 For Grade A, one flattening test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or fraction thereof of safe-end material. 11.5 Reverse Flattening Test - One reverse flattening test shall be made on each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing. 11-1-2 For Chdes C and D, one flattening test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof. 11.2 Flange Test: 11.2.1 For Grade A, one flange test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 ~ n or ] fraction thereof of safe-end material. 11.2-2 Grades and D, One flange test be lnade On s ~ e c i m e ~ l s each tubes froin lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof. The width of the flange shall not be less than 75% of that specified in Specification 11.3 Clvslz Test - For Grade A, when required by the purchaser, one crush test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or fraction thereof of safe-end material. 11.4 Tensior7 Test - For Grades C and D, one tension test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot. The term lot for tension test requirements applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness, which ase produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size and the same heat which ase heat treated in the same furnace charge. m e n the find heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all tubes 11.6 Hydrostatic or N o i ~ d e s t ~ ~ ~ ~Electric c t i v e Test Each tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or the nondestructive electric test. The p~lrchasermay specify which test is to be used. 12. Forming Operatioils 12.1 When inserted in the boiler, t~tbesshall withstand expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws, or opening at the weld. When properly manipulated, superheater tubes shall withstand all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for application without developing defects. 13.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 450lA 450M, the letters "ERW" shall be legibly stenciled on each tube, or marked on a tag attached to the bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped. 13.2 The manufacturer's name or symbol may be placed permanently on each tube by rolling or light stamping before norn~alizing.If a single stamp is placed on the tube by hand, this mark should not be less than 8 in. [200 mm] from one end of the tube. 14. Keywords 141 boiler tube; resistance welded steel tnbe; steel tube, carbon; welded steel tube 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Composition, % Grade A, Low-Carbon Steel Element Carbon 0.06-0.18 Manganese 0.27-0.63 0.035 Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max 0.035 ... Silicon Grade C, MediumCarbon Steel Grade D, Carbon-Manganese Steel 0.35 max 0.80 max 0.035 0.035 0.27 max 1.00-1.50 0.030 0.015 0.10 lnin ... TABLE 2 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS Tensile strength, min, ltsi CM Pal Yield strength, min, ltsi CMPal Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % For longitudinal strip tests a deduction for each in. C0.8 m m l decrease in wall thickness below 5/1b in. C8 m m l from the basic minimum elongation of the following percentage points shall be made. A Grade C Grade D 60 C4151 37 C2551 30 1.50~ 70 C4851 40 C2751 30 1.50~ See Table 3 for the computed minimum values: TABLE 3 MINIMUM ELONGATION VALUES Wail Thiclmss in. A mm Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-178lSA-178M The fc)1lowing supplementasy req~iirenlentsmay become a part of the specification when specified in the inquiry or invitation to bid, and production order or contract. These requirements shall not be considered, unless specified in the order and the necessary tests shall be made at the 1ni11. S1. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for ASME Requirements S1.1 The weld seam of each tube shall be subjected to an ~lltrasonicinspection employing Practices E 273 or E 213 with the rejection criteria referenced in Specification A 4501A 450M. permitted by Specification A 450lA 450M. S1.2 If Practice E 273 is employed, a 100% volumetric inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be perfor~nedusing one of the nondestructive electric tests S1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 4501A 450M, "S 1" shall be added after the grade designation. S1.3 The test methods described in the supplement may not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as determined by the manufacturer, shall be removed and discarded. Slandilrd~Worldwide (Identical with ASTM Specification A 179lA 179M-90a.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers minimum-wallthickness, seamless cold-drawn low-carbon steel tubes for tubular heat exchangers, condensers, and similar heat transfer apparatus. 4. Ordering Information 4.1 Orders for material under this specification should include the following, as required, to describe the desired material adequately: 4.1.1 Quality (feet, metres, or number of lengths), 1.2 This specification covers tubes '/8 to 3 in. [3.2 to 76.2 mm], inclusive, in outside diameter. NOTE 1 - Tubing smaller in outside diameter and having a thinner wall than indicated in this specification is available. Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in outside diameter or with a wall thickness under 0.015 in. [0.4 mm]. 1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regasded separately as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified in the order. 4.1.2 Name of nlaterial (seamless tubes), 4.1.3 Manufacture (cold-drawn), 4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall thickness), 4.1.5 Length (specific or random), 4.1.6 Optional requirements (product analysis, Section 9, flange test, 11.3), 4.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of Specification A 450lA 450M), 4.1.8 Specification number, and 4.1.9 Special requirements. 5. 2. Referenced Document 2.1 ASTM Stnnclnl-d: A 450lA 450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Fersitic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes General Requirements 3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification A 450lA 450M, unless otherwise provided herein. Manufacture 5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seanlless process and shall be cold drawn. 6. Neat Treatment 6.1 Tubes shall be heat treated after the final cold draw pass at a temperature of 1200°F [65O0C] or higher. 3. 7. Surface Condition 7.1 Finished tubes shall be free of scale. A slight amount of oxidation will not be considered as scale. 2004 SECTION I1 8. Chemical Corn 8.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition: Carbon, % IvIanganese, % Phosphorus, max, % Sulfur, max, 70 0.06-0.18 0.27-0.63 0.035 0.035 8.2 Supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the addition of any element other than those listed in 8.1 is not permitted. 9.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per 250 pieces or when tubes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined shall confom to the requirements specified. 9.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests, for the elements in question shall meet the requirements of this specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be rejected or, at the option of t!?e rn r o d l ~ r ~Pr S ~ billet ~ I or @ ~ bmay e be individually tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which do not meet the requirements of the specification shall be rejected. -- ---9 ---- NOTE 2 - A lot consists of 250 tubes. 10. Hardness Requirements 10.1 The tube shall have a hardness number not exceeding 72 HRB. 11. Mechanical Tests Required 11.1 Flattening Test - One flattening test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof. 11.2 Flaring Test - One flaring test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof. 11.3 Flange Test - When specified as a substitute for the flaring test, for tubes having a wall thickness (actual mean wall) less than 10% of the outside diameter, one test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereo1. For tubes other than specified above, the flange test shall not be required. 11.4 Hardness Test - Rockwell llardness tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot. The term lot applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness which are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those h ~ b e of s the same size and the same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all htbes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace speed. 11.5 Hydl-ostntic Test - Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test, or instead of this test, a nondestructive electric test may be used when specified by the purchaser. 12. Product Marking 12.1 In addition to the marlung prescribed in Specification A 45WA 4501~1,the marking shail inciude the name and order number of the purchaser. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE - For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed: Tensile strength, min, ltsi [MPa] Yield strength, min, ltsi [MPa] Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mrn, min, % §A-179lSA-B79M SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS, FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE PIPING SA-181 /SA-181M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 181 /A 181M-95b except for editorial differences in paras. 7.3.2 and 12.6.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers nonstandard as-forged fittings, valve components, and parts for general service. Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger forgings may be ordered to Specification A 266. A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements E 165 Test Methods for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination 1.2 Two grades of material are covered, designated as Classes 60 and 70, respectively, and are classified in accordance with their chemical composition and mechanical properties as specified in 5.1 and 6.1. 2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, Welding Qualifications Section VIII, Pressure Vessels, Div. 1 1.3 Class 60 was formerly designated Grade I and Class 70 was formerly designated Grade II. 2.3 Military Standard: MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage 1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 2.4 AIAG Standard: AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag Application Standard 1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 3. Ordering Information 3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the purchase order all ordering information necessary to purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following: 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 266 Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Pressure Vessel Components A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment 3.1.1 3.1.2 Dimensions (Tolerances and surface finishes should be included), 3.1.3 Specification number (The year date should be included) and class, 3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, and 3.1.5 Additional requirements (See 4.6, 12.2, 10, 12.7, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2, and 11.1). 247 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Quantity, Not for Resale SA-181 /SA-181M 2004 SECTION II 4. Materials and Manufacture 4.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process and shall be fully killed. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to Table 1 within the permissible variations of Table 2. 5.2.2 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall apply. 4.2 A sufficient discard shall be made from source material to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation. 6. Mechanical Properties 6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3. 4.3 The material shall be forged as close as practicable to the specified shape and size. 6.2 Testing shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. 4.4 Except for flanges of all types, hollow, cylindrically shaped parts may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar, provided that the axial length of the part is approximately parallel to the metal flow lines of the stock. Other parts, excluding flanges of all types, up to and including NPS 4 may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock. 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 7.1 The forgings shall be free of injurious imperfections as defined below and shall have a workmanlike finish. At the discretion of the inspector representing the purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 7.3 are not scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish. 4.5 Except as permitted in 4.4, the finished product shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology section (exclusively) of Specification A 788. 7.2 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Selected typical linear and other typical surface imperfections shall be explored for depth. When the depth encroaches on the minimum wall thickness of the finished forging, such imperfections shall be considered injurious. 4.6 When specified in the order, the manufacturer shall submit for approval of the purchaser a sketch showing the shape of the rough forging before machining. 4.7 Forgings shall be protected against sudden or too rapid cooling from the rolling or forging while passing through the critical range. 7.3 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified as injurious shall be treated as follows: 4.8 Heat treatment is neither required nor prohibited, but when applied, heat treatment shall consist of tempering, annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering. 7.3.1 Forgings showing seams, laps, tears, or slivers not deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness or 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], whichever is less, need not have these imperfections removed. If the imperfections require removal, they shall be removed by machining or grinding. 5. Chemical Composition 5.1 Cast or Heat Analysis — An analysis of each cast or heat shall be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements specified in Table 1. The analysis shall be made from a test sample taken preferably during the pouring of the cast or heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements in Table 1. 7.3.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits shall be acceptable without grinding or machining provided the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth in 7.2 and if not deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm]. If such imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm] but do not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the forging they shall be removed by grinding to sound metal. 7.3.3 When imperfections have been removed by grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the point of grinding or machining may be reduced by the amount removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a direct measurement, the wall thickness at the point of grinding, or at imperfections not required to be removed, shall be determined by deducting the amount removed by grinding, from the nominal finished wall thickness of the forging, and the remainder shall not be less than the minimum specified or required wall thickness. 5.2 Product Analysis: 5.2.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis on forgings supplied to this specification by any of the commonly accepted methods that will positively identify the material. Samples for analysis may be taken from midway between center and surface of solid forgings, midway between inner and outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between center and surface of full-size prolongations, or from broken mechanical test specimens. 248 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 8. Number of Tests 8.1 One tension test shall be made from each heat. 12.2 Prior approval of the purchaser shall be required to weld repair special parts made to the purchaser’s requirements. 8.2 If any test specimen is defectively machined, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted. 12.3 The welding procedure and welders shall be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 9. Retests 9.1 When one or more representative test specimens do not conform to specification requirements for the tested characteristic, only a single retest for each nonconforming characteristic may be performed to establish product acceptability. Retests shall be performed on twice the number of representative specimens that were originally nonconforming. When any retest specimen does not conform to specification requirements for the characteristic in question, the lot represented by that specimen shall be rejected, heat-treated or reheat-treated in accordance with 4.8, and tested in accordance with Sections 6, 8, and 10. 12.4 The composition of the weld deposits shall be similar to the base metal and in accordance with the procedure qualification for the applicable material. Welding shall be accomplished with a weld procedure designed to produce low hydrogen in the weldment. Short-circuit gas metal arc welding is permissible only with the approval of the purchaser. 12.5 Unacceptable imperfections shall be removed by mechanical means or thermal cutting or gouging methods. Cavities prepared for welding shall be examined by one of the following methods to verify removal of the imperfection: 10. Test Specimens 10.1 The tension test specimens shall be machined to the form and dimensions of the standard 2 in. [50 mm] gage length tension test specimen shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, except as specified in 10.2. 12.5.1 Magnetic particle examination in accordance with Test Method A 275 or Guide E 709. 12.5.2 Liquid penetrant examination in accordance with Test Method E 165. 12.6 Weld repaired area(s) shall be blended uniformly to the base metal and shall be examined by the same method used for 12.5. 10.2 In the case of small sections which will not permit the taking of standard test specimen specified in 10.1, the tension test specimen shall be as large as feasible and its dimensions shall be proportional to those shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The gage length for measuring elongation shall be four times the diameter of the specimen. 12.7 Repair by welding shall neither exceed 10% of the surface area of the part, nor 331⁄3% of the wall thickness of the finished product at the location of repair, without prior approval of the purchaser. 10.3 For the purpose of determining conformance to Table 3, specimens shall be obtained from the production forgings, or from separately forged test blanks prepared from the stock used to make the finished product. Such test blanks shall receive approximately the same working as the finished product. 13. Marking of Forgings 13.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (Note), designation of service rating, Specification number, grade, and size shall be legibly forged or stamped on each forging, and in such a position as not to injure the usefulness of the forgings. The specification number marked on the forgings need not include specification year of issue and revision letter. 11. Reports of Testing 11.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order, a report of the test results and chemical analyses shall be furnished. The specification designation included on reports of testing shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any. NOTE — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. 13.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 13.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar coding system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier, 12. Repair by Welding 12.1 Repair welding, by the manufacturer, is permissible for parts made to dimensional standards such as those of ANSI or equivalent standards. 249 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-181 /SA-181M Not for Resale SA-181 /SA-181M 2004 SECTION II should be consistent with one of the published industry standards for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag. 17. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment 17.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with Practices A 700. 17.2 When specified in the contract or order, and for direct procurement by or direct shipment to the government, when level A is specified, preservation, packaging, and packing shall be in accordance with the Level A requirements of MIL-STD-163. 14. Inspection 14.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him that the material is being produced and furnished in accordance with this specification. Mill inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture, unless otherwise agreed to. 18. Certificate of Compliance 18.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and has been found to meet the requirements. The specification designation included on certificates of compliance shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any. 15. Rejection 15.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working or application shall be rejected and the manufacturer notified. 18.2 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be furnished. 16. Rehearing 16.1 Samples representing material rejected by the purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 19. Keywords 19.1 pipe fittings; steel; piping applications; pressure containing parts; steel forgings; carbon; steel valves 250 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-181 /SA-181M TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS Element Composition, % Classes 60 and 70 Carbon, max Manganese, max Phosphorus, max Silicon, max Sulfur, max 0.35 1.10 A 0.05 0.10–0.35 0.05 A Manganese may be increased to 1.35% max provided the carbon is reduced 0.01% for each 0.06% increase in manganese over the limit shown in the table. TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Permissible Variations over the Maximum Limit or Under the Minimum Limit, % Manganese Up to and including 0.90 0.91 and over Phosphorus Sulfur Silicon 200 in.2 [1290 cm2] and under Over 200 to 400 in.2 [1290 to 2580 cm2] incl Over 400 to 800 in.2 [2580 to 5160 cm2] incl Over 800 to 1600 in.2 [5160 to 10 320 cm2] Over 1600 in.2 [10 320 cm2] 0.04 0.06 0.008 0.010 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.010 0.010 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.010 0.010 0.04 0.07 0.08 0.015 0.015 0.05 0.08 0.09 0.015 0.015 0.06 NOTE 1 — Product cross-sectional area (taken at right angles to the axis of the original ingot or billet) is defined as either: (a) maximum cross-sectional area of rough machined forging (excluding boring), (b) maximum cross-sectional area of the unmachined forging, or (c) maximum cross-sectional area of the billet, bloom or slab. TABLE 3 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] Yield strength, A min, ksi [MPa] Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, % Reduction of area, min, % Class 60 Class 70 60 [415] 30 [205] 22 35 70 [485] 36 [250] 18 24 A Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension-under-load method. 251 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-181 /SA-181M 2004 SECTION II SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS S1. Carbon Equivalent S1.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows: S1.1 The maximum carbon equivalent based on heat analysis shall be as follows: Class 60 70 CE p Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15 S1.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser. Maximum Carbon Equivalent Value Maximum Section Thickness Maximum Section Thickness Less Than or Equal to 2 in. Greater Than 2 in. 0.45 0.47 S1.4 When this Supplementary Requirement is invoked, all elements in the carbon equivalent formula shall be analyzed and the amounts reported. 0.46 0.48 252 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FLANGES, FORGED FITTINGS, AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE SA-182/SA-182M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 182/A 182M-99 except for the inclusion of Grades S33228 and S30815 in the parenthetical section of para. 5.3.1 disallowing direct heat treatment. Editorial changes have been made in paras. 1.2 and 2.1 and in Table 2.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers forged low alloy and stainless steel piping components for use in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings, valves, and similar parts to specified dimensions or to dimensional standards such as the ASME specifications that are referenced in Section 2. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 234 / A 234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures A 262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings A 336 /A 336M Specification for Steel Forgings, Alloy, for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 403 /A 403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings A 479 /A 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels A 484 /A 484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and Forgings A 739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts, or Both 1.2 For bars and products machined directly from bar, refer to Specifications A 479 /A 479M and A 739 for the similar grades available in those specifications. Products made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10, 000 lb [4540 kg]. For larger products and products for other applications, refer to Specification A 336 / A 336M and A 965 / A 965M for the similar grades available in these specifications. 1.3 Several grades of low alloy steels and ferritic, martensitic, austenitic, and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels are included in this specification. Selection will depend upon design and service requirements. 1.4 Supplementary requirements are provided for use when additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order. 1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 1.6 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded separately as the standard. 253 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 763 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements A 965 /A 965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain Size E 165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method E 340 Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys rough forging before machining and the exact location of test specimen material (see 7.3.1). 4. Manufacture 4.1 The low-alloy ferritic steels may be made by the open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen process with separate degassing and refining optional. The basicoxygen process shall be limited to steels containing not over 6% chromium. 4.2 The stainless steels shall be melted by one of the following processes: (a) electric-furnace (with separate degassing and refining optional); (b) vacuum-furnace; or (c) one of the former followed by vacuum or electroslagconsumable remelting. Grade F XM-27Cb may be produced by electron-beam melting. Because of difficulties that may be met in retaining nitrogen, vacuum melting or remelting processes should not be specified for Grades F XM-11, F 304LN, F 316LN, F 304N, F 316N, F XM19, F 44, F 45, F 48, F 49, F 50, F 51, F 52, F 53, F 54, F 55, F 58, F 59, or F 60. 2.2 MSS Standard: SP 25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions 2.3 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes: Section IX Welding Qualifications SFA-5.4 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes SFA-5.5 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered ArcWelding Electrodes SFA-5.9 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes SFA-5.11 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes 4.3 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation. 4.4 The material shall be forged as close as practicable to the specified shape and size. Except for flanges of any type, forged or rolled bar may be used without additional hot working for small cylindrically shaped parts within the limits defined by Specification A 234 /A 234M for low alloy steels and martensitic stainless steels and Specification A 403 /A 403M for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock. 2.4 ANSI Standards: B16.5 Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded 4.5 Except as provided for in 4.4, the finished product shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology section of Specification A 788. 3. Ordering Information 3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the purchase order all ordering information necessary to purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following: 3.1.1 5. Heat Treatment 5.1 After hot working, forgings shall be cooled to a temperature below 1000°F [538°C] prior to heat treating in accordance with the requirements of Table 1. Quantity, 3.1.2 Size and pressure class or dimensions (tolerances and surface finishes should be included), 5.2 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steels — The low alloy steels and ferritic and martensitic stainless steels shall be heat treated in accordance with the requirements of 5.1 and Table 1. 3.1.3 Specification number, grade, and class if applicable (the year date should be included), 3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, 5.2.1 Grade F 22V shall be furnished in the normalized and tempered, or liquid quenched and tempered condition. The minimum austenitizing temperature shall be 1650°F [900°C], and the minimum tempering temperature shall be 1250°F [677°C]. 3.1.5 Additional requirements (see 5.2.2, Table 2 footnotes, 7.3, 15.1, and 18.2), and 3.1.6 Requirement, if any, that manufacturer shall submit drawings for approval showing the shape of the 254 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 5.2.2 Liquid Quenching — When agreed to by the purchaser, liquid quenching followed by tempering shall be permitted provided the temperatures in Table 1 for each grade are utilized. 6.3 Starting material produced to a specification that specifically requires the addition of any element beyond those listed in Table 2 for the applicable grade of material, is not permitted. 5.2.2.1 Marking — Parts that are liquid quenched and tempered shall be marked “QT.” 7. Mechanical Properties 7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to mechanical properties for the grade ordered as listed in Table 3. 5.2.3 Alternatively, Grades F 1, F 2, and F 12, Classes 1 and 2 may be given a heat treatment of 1200°F [650°C] minimum after final hot or cold forming. 5.3 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels — The austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels shall be heat treated in accordance with the requirements of 5.1 and Table 1. 7.2 Mechanical test specimens shall be obtained from production forgings, or from separately forged test blanks prepared from the stock used to make the finished product. In either case, mechanical test specimens shall not be removed until after all heat treatment is complete. If repair welding is required, test specimens shall not be removed until after post-weld heat treatment is complete, except for ferritic grades when the post-weld heat treatment is conducted at least 50°F [30°C] below the actual tempering temperature. When test blanks are used, they shall receive approximately the same working as the finished product. The test blanks shall be heat treated with the finished product and shall approximate the maximum cross-section of the forgings they represent. 5.3.1 Alternatively, immediately following hot working, while the temperature of the forging is not less than the minimum solutioning temperature specified in Table 1, forgings made from austenitic grades (except grades S33228, S30815, F 304H, F 316H, F 321, F 321H, F 347, F 347H, F 348, and F 348H) may be individually rapidly quenched in accordance with the requirements of Table 1. 5.3.2 See Supplementary Requirement S14 if a particular heat treatment method is to be employed. 5.4 Time of Heat Treatment — Heat treatment of forgings may be performed before machining. 7.3 For normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered forgings, the central axis of the test specimen shall correspond to the 1⁄4 T plane or deeper position where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness of the represented forging. In addition, for quenched and tempered forgings, the midlength of the test specimen shall be at least T from any second heat-treated surface. When the section thickness does not permit this positioning, the test specimen shall be positioned as near as possible to the prescribed location, as agreed to by the purchaser and the supplier. 5.5 Forged or Rolled Bar — Forged or rolled austenitic stainless bar from which small cylindrically shaped parts are to be machined, as permitted by 4.4, and the parts machined from such bar, without heat treatment after machining, shall be furnished to the annealing requirements of Specification A 479 or this specification, with subsequent light cold drawing and straightening permitted (see Supplementary Requirement S9 if annealing must be the final operation). 7.3.1 With prior purchase approval, the test specimen for ferritic steel forgings may be taken at a depth (t) corresponding to the distance from the area of significant stress to the nearest heat-treated surface and at least twice this distance (2t) from any second surface. However, the test depth shall not be nearer to one treated surface than 3 ⁄4 in. [19 mm] and to the second treated surface than 11⁄2 in. [38 mm]. This method of test specimen location would normally apply to contour-forged parts, or parts with thick cross-sectional areas where 1⁄4 T ⴛ T testing (7.3) is not practical. Sketches showing the exact test locations shall be approved by the purchaser when this method is used. NOTE 1 — A solution annealing temperature above 1950°F [1065°C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in F 321, F 321H, F 347, F 347H, F 348, F 348H. When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature stabilization or resolution annealing shall be used subsequent to the initial high temperature solution anneal (see Supplementary Requirement S16). 6. Chemical Composition 6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to chemical composition for the grade ordered as listed in Table 2. Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall apply. 7.4 For annealed low alloy steel, ferritic stainless steels, and martensitic stainless steels, and also for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, the test specimen may be taken from any convenient location. 6.2 Grades to which lead, selenium, or other elements are added for the purpose of rendering the material freemachining shall not be used. 255 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-182/SA-182M Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II 7.5 Tension Tests: 7.5.1 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steels — One tension test shall be made for each heat in each heat treatment charge. NOTE 3 — The tension test required in 7.5.1 is used to determine material capability and conformance in addition to verifying the adequacy of the heat-treatment cycle. Additional hardness tests in accordance with 7.6.2 are required when 7.5.1.1 is applied to enssure the prescribed heat-treating cycle and uniformity throughout the load. 7.5.1.1 When the heat-treating cycles are the same and the furnaces (either batch or continuous type) are controlled within ±25°F [±14°C] and equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete records of heat treatment are available, then only one tension test from each heat of each forging type (Note 1) and section size is required instead of one test from each heat in each heat-treatment charge. 7.7 Notch Toughness Requirements — Grades F 3V, F 3VCb, and F 22V. 7.7.1 Impact test specimens shall be Charpy Vnotch type, as shown in Fig. 11a of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The usage of subsize specimens due to material limitations must have prior purchaser approval. 7.7.2 The Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be obtained as required for tension tests in 7.2, 7.3, and 7.5. One set of three Charpy V-notch specimens shall be taken from each tensile specimen location. NOTE 2 — “Type” in this case is used to describe the forging shape such as a flange, ell, tee, etc. 7.5.2 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel Grades — One tension test shall be made for each heat. 7.7.3 The longitudinal axis and mid-length of impact specimen shall be located similarly to the longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens. The axis of the notch shall be normal to the nearest heat-treated surface of the forging. 7.5.2.1 When heat treated in accordance with 5.1, the test blank or forging used to provide the test specimen shall be heat treated with a finished forged product. 7.7.4 The Charpy V-notch tests shall meet a minimum energy absorption value of 40 ft-lbf [54 J] average of three specimens. One specimen only in one set may be below 40 ft-lbf [54 J], and it shall meet a minimum value of 35 ft-lbf [48 J]. 7.5.2.2 When the alternative method in 5.3.1 is used, the test blank or forging used to provide the test specimen shall be forged and quenched under the same processing conditions as the forgings they represent. 7.7.5 The impact test temperature shall be 0°F [−18°C]. 7.5.3 Testing shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370 using the largest feasible of the round specimens. The gage length for measuring elongation shall be four times the diameter of the test section. 8. Grain Size for Austenitic Grades 8.1 All H grades shall be tested for average grain size by Test Methods E 112. 7.6 Hardness Tests: 7.6.1 Except when only one forging is produced, a minimum of two pieces per batch or continuous run as defined in 7.6.2 shall be hardness tested in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370 to ensure that the forgings are within the hardness limits given for each grade in Table 3. The purchaser may verify that the requirement has been met by testing at any location on the forging provided such testing does not render the forging useless. 8.1.1 Grades F 304H, F 309H, F 310H, and F 316H shall have a grain size of ASTM No. 6 or coarser. 8.1.2 Grades F 321H, F 347H, and F 348H shall have a grain size of ASTM No. 7 or coarser. 9. Corrosion Testing for Austenitic Grades 9.1 Corrosion testing is not required by this specification. 7.6.2 When the reduced number of tension tests permitted by 7.5.1.1 is applied, additional hardness tests shall be made on forgings or samples as defined in 7.2 scattered throughout the load (Note 2). At least eight samples shall be checked from each batch load and at least one check per hour shall be made from a continuous run. When the furnace batch is less than eight forgings, each forging shall be checked. If any check falls outside the prescribed limits, the entire lot of forgings shall be reheat treated and the requirements of 7.5.1 shall apply. 9.2 Austenitic grades shall be capable of meeting the intergranular corrosion test requirements described in Supplementary Requirement S10. 10. Cast or Heat (Formerly Ladle) Analysis 10.1 Each heat or furnace ladle of steel shall be analyzed by the manufacturer to determine the percentage of elements prescribed in Table 2. This analysis shall be 256 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS made from a test specimen preferably taken during the pouring of the steel. For multiple-heat ingots, either individual heat analyses or a weighted average analysis may be reported. The steel shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 2. SA-182/SA-182M 13.3 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Linear imperfections shall be explored for depth. When the depth encroaches on the minimum wall thickness of the finished forging, such imperfections shall be considered injurious. 13.4 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified as injurious shall be treated as follows: 10.1.1 If the test sample is lost or declared inadequate for chemical determinations, the manufacturer may take alternative samples from appropriate locations near the surface of the ingot or forging as necessary to establish the analysis of the heat in question. 13.4.1 Seams, laps, tears, or slivers not deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness or 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], whichever is less, need not be removed. If these imperfections are removed, they shall be removed by machining or grinding. 10.1.2 If consumable remelting processes are employed, a chemical analysis made on one remelted ingot (or the product of one remelted ingot) per heat shall be taken as the heat analysis, and shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 2. For this purpose, a heat is defined as all of the ingots remelted from a single primary melt. 13.4.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits shall be acceptable without grinding or machining provided the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth in 13.4.1. Imperfections that are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], but which do not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the forging shall be removed by grinding to sound metal. 11. Product Analysis 11.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis on forgings supplied to this specification. Samples for analysis shall be taken from midway between the center and surface of solid forgings, midway between the inner and outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between the center and surface of full-size prolongations, or from broken mechanical test specimens. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to Table 2 with the tolerances as stated in Table 4 or Table 5. 13.4.3 When imperfections have been removed by grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the point of grinding or machining may be reduced by the amount removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a direct measurement, the wall thickness at the point of grinding, or at an imperfection not required to be removed, shall be determined by deducting the amount removed by grinding from the nominal finished wall thickness of the forging, and the remainder shall be not less than the minimum specified or required wall thickness. 12. Retreatment 12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may reheat treat the forgings and repeat the tests specified in Section 7. 14. Repair by Welding 14.1 Weld repairs shall be permitted (see Supplementary Requirement S7) at the discretion of the manufacturer with the following limitations and requirements: 14.1.1 The welding procedure and welders shall be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 13.1 The forgings shall be free of scale, machining burrs which might hinder fit-up, and other injurious imperfections as defined herein. The forgings shall have a workmanlike finish and machined surfaces (other than surfaces having special requirements) shall have a surface finish not to exceed 250 AA (arithmetic average) roughness height. 14.1.2 The weld metal shall be deposited using the electrodes specified in Table 6 except as otherwise provided in Supplementary Requirement S11. The electrodes shall be purchased in accordance with ASME Specification SFA-5.4, SFA-5.5, SFA-5.9, or SFA-5.11. The submerged arc process with neutral flux, the gas metalarc process, the gas tungsten-arc process, and gas shielded processes using flux-core consumables, may be used. 13.2 At the discretion of the inspector representing the purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 13.4 are not scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what is considered to be a workmanlike finish. 14.1.3 Defects shall be completely removed prior to welding by chipping or grinding to sound metal as verified by magnetic particle inspection in accordance with Test Method A 275 /A 275M for the low alloy steels and ferritic, martensitic, or ferritic-austenitic stainless 257 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II steels, or by liquid penetrant inspection in accordance with Practice E 165 for all grades. been met. The specification designation included on test reports shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any. The manufacturer shall provide the following where applicable: 14.1.4 After repair welding, the welded area shall be ground smooth to the original contour and shall be completely free of defects as verified by magnetic-particle or liquid-penetrant inspection, as applicable. 17.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5; 17.2.2 Product analysis results, Section 11 (Tables 2, 4, and 5); 14.1.5 The preheat, interpass temperature and postweld heat treatment requirements given in Table 6 shall be met. Austenitic stainless steel forgings may be repairwelded without the post-weld heat treatment of Table 6, provided purchaser approval is obtained prior to repair. 17.2.3 Tensile property results, Section 7 (Table 3), report the yield strength and ultimate strength, in ksi [MPa], elongation and reduction in area, in percent; 17.2.4 Chemical analysis results, Section 6 (Table 2); 14.1.6 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10% of the surface area of the forging nor 331⁄3% of the wall thickness of the finished forging or 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm], whichever is less, without prior approval of the purchaser. 17.2.5 Hardness results, Section 7 (Table 3); 17.2.6 Grain size results, Section 8, and 14.1.7 When approval of the purchaser is obtained, the limitations set forth in 14.1.6 may be exceeded, but all other requirements of Section 14 shall apply. 17.2.7 Any supplementary testing required by the purchase order. 14.1.8 No weld repairs are permitted for F 6a Classes 3 and 4. 18. Product Marking 18.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (Note 3), the heat number or manufacturer’s heat identification, designation of service rating, the specification number, the designation, F 1, F 2, etc., showing the grade of material, and the size shall be legibly stamped on each forging or the forgings may be marked in accordance with Standard SP 25 of the Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, and in such position so as not to injure the usefulness of the forging. The specification number marked on the forgings need not include specification year of issue and revision letter. 15. Inspection 15.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the purchase order. Inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon. 16. Rejection 16.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working operations or in service shall be rejected and the manufacturer notified. NOTE 4 — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. 16.2 Samples representing material rejected by the purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 18.1.1 Quenched and tempered low alloy or martensitic stainless forgings shall be stamped with the letters “QT” following the specification designation. 17. Certification 17.1 For forgings made to specified dimensions, when agreed upon by the purchaser, and for forgings made to dimensional standards, the application of identification marks as required in 18.1 shall be the certification that the forgings have been furnished in accordance with the requirements of this specification. 18.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be marked with the letter “W” following the Specification designation. When repair-welded austenitic stainless steel forgings have not been postweld heat treated in accordance with Table 6, the letters “WNS” shall be marked following the specification designation. 18.1.3 When test reports are required, the markings shall consist of the manufacturer’s symbol or name, the grade symbol, and such other markings as necessary to 17.2 Test reports, when required, shall include certification that all requirements of this specification have 258 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS identify the part with the test report (18.1.1 and 18.1.2 shall apply). for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag. 18.1.4 Parts meeting all requirements for more than one class or grade may be marked with more than one class or grade designation such as F 304/F 304H, F 304/ F 304L, etc. 19. Keywords 19.1 austenitic stainless steel; chromium alloy steel; chromium-molybdenum steel; ferritic/austenitic stainless steel; ferritic stainless steel; martensitic stainless steel; nickel alloy steel; notch toughness requirements; pipe fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure containing parts; stainless steel fittings; stainless steel forgings; steel flanges; steel forgings, alloy; steel valves; temperature service applications, elevated; temperature service application, high; wrought material 18.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 18.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar coding system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier, should be consistent with one of the published industry standards 259 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-182/SA-182M Not for Resale SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 1 HEAT TREATING REQUIREMENTS Grade Heat Treat Type Austenitizing/Solutioning Temperature, Min. °F (°C) A Cooling Media Quenching Cool Below °F (°C) Tempering Temperature, Min. °F (°C) Low Alloy Steels F1 F 91 anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize normalize F 92 F 911 normalize and temper normalize and temper F 11, Classes 1, 2, and 3 anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize normalize F2 F 5, F 5a F9 F 12, Classes 1 and 2 F 21, F 3V, and F 3VCb F 22, Classes 1 and 3 FR and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1900–2000 [1040–1095] 1900 [1040] 1900–2000 [1040–1095] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1650 [900] 1650 [900] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1750 [955] furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool air cool B B B 1150 [620] air cool air cool or liquid B furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool air cool B B B 1150 [620] B B B 1150 [620] B B B 1250 [675] B B B 1250 [675] 1350 [730] B B 1350 [730] 1350 [730] B B B 1150 [620] B B B 1250 [675] B B B 1250 [675] B B B B B 1250 [675] furnace cool air cool B B 400 [205] B B 1325 [725] 1325 [725] furnace cool air cool B B 400 [205] B B 1250 [675] 1250 [675] furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool furnace cool air cool air cool B B furnace cool furnace cool furnace cool Martensitic Stainless Steels F 6a Class 1 F 6a Class 2 F 6a Class 3 F 6a Class 4 F 6b F 6NM anneal normalize temper anneal normalize temper anneal normalize anneal normalize anneal normalize normalize and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper and temper not specified not specified not required not specified not specified not required not specified not specified not specified not specified 1750 [955] 1750 [955] 1850 [1010] 400 [205] 1100 [595] B B 400 [205] 1000 [540] B B 400 [205] 200 [95] 1150 [620] 1040–1120 [560–600] B B B B B B Ferritic Stainless Steels F XM-27Cb F 429 F 430 anneal anneal anneal 1850 [1010] 1850 [1010] not specified 260 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M TABLE 1 HEAT TREATING REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) Grade Heat Treat Type Austenitizing/Solutioning Temperature, Min. °F (°C) A Cooling Media Quenching Cool Below °F (°C) Tempering Temperature, Min. °F (°C) Austenitic Stainless Steels F F F F F F F F F 304 304H 304L 304N 304LN 309H 310 310H 310MoLn solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat and and and and and and and and and quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F 316 316H 316L 316N 316LN 317 317L 347 347H 348 348H 321 321H XM-11 XM-19 10 20 solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution solution treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat treat and and and and and and and and and and and and and and and and and quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench quench --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- F 44 F 45 F 46 solution treat and quench solution treat and quench solution treat and quench F F F F solution solution solution solution 47 48 49 56 F 58 treat treat treat treat and and and and quench quench quench quench solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900–2010 [1050–1100] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 2000 [1095] 1900 [1040] 2000 [1095] 1900 [1040] 2000 [1095] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 1700–1850 [925–1010] 2100 [1150] 1900 [1040] 2010–2140 [1100–1140] 1900 [1040] 1900 [1040] 2050 [1120] 2050–2160 [1120–1180] 2025 [1105] liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] B liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] B liquid liquid liquid 500 [260] 500 [260] 500 [260] B liquid liquid liquid liquid 500 500 500 500 [260] [260] [260] [260] B liquid 500 [260] B liquid liquid liquid liquid liquid 500 500 500 500 500 [260] [260] [260] [260] [260] B liquid 500 [260] B liquid liquid 175 [80] 500 [260] B liquid liquid 500 [260] 500 [260] B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels F F F F F 50 51 52 53 54 C solution treat and solution treat and ... solution treat and solution treat and quench quench quench quench F 55 solution treat and quench F 57 F 59 solution treat and quench solution treat and quench F 60 F 61 solution treat and quench solution treat and quench 1925 [1050] 1870 [1020] ... 1880 [1025] 1920–2060 [1050–1125] 2010–2085 [1100–1140] 1940 [1060] 1975–2050 [1080–1120] 1870 [1020] 1920–2060 [1050–1125] A B B B B B B Minimum unless temperature range is listed. Not applicable. C Grade F 52 shall be solution treated at 1825 to 1875°F [995 to 1025°C] 30 min/in. of thickness and water quenched. B 261 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS ... K11597 K11572 K11572 K11562 K11564 K31545 K31830 F 11 Class 1 F 11 Class 2 F 11 Class 3 F 12 Class 1 F 12 Class 2 F 21 F 3V ... F 911 F 92 K41545 K42544 K90941 ... F1 F 2A 5B 5aB 9 91 K12822 K12122 Identification Symbol F F F F UNS Designation 262 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale 1.25% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 1.25% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 1.25% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 1% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 1% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum chromium-molybdenum 3% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.25% vanadium plus boron and titanium 9% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.2% vanadium plus columbium and nitrogen 9% chromium, 1.8% tungsten, 0.2% vanadium plus columbium carbon-molybdenum 0.5% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 4 to 6% chromium 4 to 6% chromium 9% chromium 9% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.2% vanadium plus columbium and nitrogen Grade 0.040 0.020 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.18 0.040 0.30–0.80 0.10–0.20 0.045 0.040 0.040 0.030 0.040 0.020 0.040 0.045 0.040 0.040 0.030 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.045 0.040 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.010 0.020 Silicon 0.50 max. 0.10 max. 0.10–0.60 0.80–1.06 0.90–1.10 2.7–3.3 2.8–3.2 ... ... 0.44–0.65 0.80–1.25 ... 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.90–1.10 ... 0.015– 0.035 ... ... ... ... Other elements V 0.20–0.30 B 0.001–0.003 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Titanium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Other elements W 0.90–1.10 Cb 0.060–0.01 Al 0.04 max. N 0.04–0.09 V 0.18–0.25 B 0.0003–0.006 Other elements Cb 0.04–0.09 V 0.15–0.25 N 0.030–0.070 Al 0.04 max. W 1.50–2.00 B 0.001–0.006 0.30–0.60 ... ... Tantalum, Max. ... ... ... ... ... ... Other elements Cb 0.06–0.10 N 0.03–0.07 Al 0.04 max. V 0.18–0.25 ... ... Columbium 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.90–1.10 0.85–1.05 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.80–1.25 1.00–1.50 1.00–1.50 1.00–1.50 8.5–10.5 8.50–9.50 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 8.0–10.0 8.0–9.5 ... 0.50–0.81 Chromium Molybdenum ... ... 0.50–1.00 0.50 max. ... ... 0.40 max. 0.40 max. 0.50 max. 0.50 max. ... 0.40 max. ... ... Nickel Composition, % 0.50–1.00 0.50–1.00 0.10–0.50 0.50 max. 0.50 max. 0.50 max. 0.50–1.00 0.20–0.50 0.15–0.35 0.10–0.60 Low Alloy Steels Sulfur, Max. 0.030 0.040 0.030 0.020 0.045 0.040 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.60 max. 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.60–0.90 0.30–0.80 0.05–0.15 0.10–0.20 0.10–0.20 0.05–0.15 0.09–0.13 0.07–0.13 0.15 max. 0.25 max. 0.15 max. 0.08–0.12 0.28 max. 0.05–0.21 Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, Max. TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale S41500 S44627 F 6NM F XM-27CbD 263 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- S30451 F 304NF F 309H S30909 S30453 S30400 S30409 S30403 F 304E F 304H F 304LE F 304LN S42900 S43000 F 429 F 430 F S41000 S41026 F 22 Class 1 F 22 Class 3 F 22V F 6a F 6b K21590 K21590 K31835 F 3VCb K22035 ... Identification Symbol FR UNS Designation 18 chromium, 8 nickel 18 chromium, 8 nickel 18 chromium, 8 nickel, low carbon 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with nitrogen 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with nitrogen 23 chromium, 13.5 nickel 15 chromium 17 chromium 27 chromium, 1 molybdenum 13% chromium 13% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum 13% chromium, 4% nickel 2% nickel, 1% copper chromium-molybdenum chromium-molybdenum 2.25% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.25% vanadium ... Grade 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.10–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.11–0.15 0.04–0.10 0.030 max. 0.08 max. 0.08 max. 0.04–0.10 0.030 max. 0.12 max. 0.12 max. 0.010 max. 0.05 max. 0.15 max. 0.15 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.40 max. 0.50–1.00 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.40–1.06 0.30–0.60 Carbon 0.20 max. Manganese Sulfur, Max. Silicon 0.050 0.040 0.040 0.010 0.010 ... 0.50 max. 0.50 max. 0.10 max. 0.10 max. 0.030 0.030 0.020 0.60 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.030 0.030 0.020 0.75 max. 0.75 max. 0.40 max. 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 1.00 max. 1.0 max. 1.0 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. Austenitic Stainless Steels 0.040 0.040 0.020 Ferritic Stainless Steels 0.030 0.040 0.020 Martensitic Stainless Steels 0.045 0.040 0.040 0.015 0.020 Low Alloy Steels (Cont’d) Phosphorus, Max. 12.0–15.0 8.0–10.5 8.0–10.5 8.0–11.0 8.0–11.0 8.0–13.0 0.50 max. 0.50 max. 0.50 max. 3.5–5.5 0.50 max. 1.00–2.00 1.60–2.24 ... ... 0.25 max. 0.25 max. Nickel 22.0–24.0 18.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 14.0–16.0 16.0–18.0 25.0–27.5 11.5–14.0 11.5–13.5 11.5–13.5 ... 2.00–2.50 2.00–2.50 2.00–2.50 2.7–3.3 Chromium Composition, % TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.75–1.50 0.50–1.00 ... 0.40–0.60 ... 0.87–1.13 0.87–1.13 0.90–1.10 0.90–1.10 Molybdenum Tantalum, Max. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Other elements N 0.015 max. Cu 0.20 max. Cb 0.05–0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... Other elements Cu 0.50 max. ... ... Other elements Cu 0.75–1.25 ... ... ... ... Other elements Cu 0.20 max. V 0.25–0.35 Cb 0.07 max. B 0.002 max. Ca 0.015 max.C Other elements V 0.20–0.30 Cb 0.015–0.070 Cu 0.25 max. Ca 0.0005–0.0150 Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.030 max. 0.015 max. Titanium PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS S31000 S31009 S31050 Identification Symbol F 310 F 310HF F 310MoLN S31600 S31609 S31603 S31651 S31653 S31700 S31703 S32100 S32109 S34700 S34709 S34800 S34809 S21904 F 316E F 316H F 316LE F 316NF F316LNF F 317 F 317L F 321 F 321H F 347 F 347H F 348 F 348H F XM-11 F UNS Designation 264 Not for Resale 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with columbium 20 chromium, 6 nickel, 9 manganese 25 chromium, 20 nickel 25 chromium, 20 nickel 25 chromium, 22 nickel, modified with molybdenum and nitrogen, low carbon 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with molybdenum 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with molybdenum 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with molybdenum, low carbon 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with molybdenum and nitrogen 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with molybdenum and nitrogen 19 chromium, 13 nickel, 3.5 molybdenum 19 chromium, 13 nickel, 3.5 molybdenum 18 chromium, 8 nickel modified with titanium 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with titanium 18 chromium, 8 nickel modified with columbium 18 chromium, 8 nickel, modified with columbium 18 chromium, 8 nickel modified with columbium Grade 8.0–10.0 2.00 max. 0.04–0.10 0.040 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 0.04–0.10 0.08 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 0.08 max. 0.04–0.10 0.08 max. 0.030 max. 0.08 max. 0.030 max. 0.08 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 0.04–0.10 0.030 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 0.08 max. 0.25 max. 0.04–0.10 0.020 max. Carbon Manganese Sulfur, Max. Silicon 0.060 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.010 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 5.5–7.5 9.0–13.0 9.0–13.0 9.0–13.0 9.0–13.0 9.0–12.0 9.0–12.0 11.0–15.0 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 11.0–15.0 11.0–14.0 11.0–14.0 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 10.0–15.0 10.0–14.0 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 10.0–14.0 19.0–22.0 19.0–22.0 20.5–23.5 Nickel 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.50 max. Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d) Phosphorus, Max. Chromium 19.0–21.5 17.0–20.0 17.0–20.0 17.0–20.0 17.0–20.0 17.0–19.0 17.0–19.0 18.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 16.0–18.0 16.0–18.0 16.0–18.0 16.0–18.0 16.0–18.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 Composition, % TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3.0–4.0 3.0–4.0 2.00–3.00 2.00–3.00 2.00–3.00 2.00–3.00 2.00–3.00 ... ... 1.60–2.60 Molybdenum ... J I J I ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Columbium Titanium ... ... H G ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.10 Other elements Co 0.20 max. Other Elements N 0.15–0.40 0.10 ... Other elements Co 0.20 max. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Other elements N 0.09–0.15 Tantalum, Max. SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS S33100 N08020 S31254 S30815 S30600 F 10 F 20 F 44 F 45 F 46 S31726 S34565 S33228 N08367 S31200 S31803 S32950 S32750 F 48 F 49 F 56 F 58 F 50 F 51 F 52 F 53 S31725 S20910 F XM-19 F 47 UNS Designation Identification Symbol 265 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Not for Resale 25 chromium, 6 nickel, modified with nitrogen 22 chromium, 5.5 nickel, modified with nitrogen 26 chromium, 3.5 nickel, 1.0 molybdenum 25 chromium, 7 nickel, 4 molybdenum, modified with nitrogen 21 chromium, 25 nickel, 6.5 molybdenum 19 chromium, 15 nickel, 4 molybdenum 24 chromium, 17 nickel, 6 manganese, 5 molybdenum 32 nickel, 27 chromium, with columbium 19 chromium, 15 nickel, 4 molybdenum 20 nickel, 8 chromium 35 nickel, 20 chromium, 3.5 copper, 2.5 molybdenum 20 chromium, 18 nickel, 6 molybdenum, low carbon 21 chromium, 11 nickel modified with nitrogen and cerium 18 chromium, 15 nickel, 4 silicon 22 chromium, 13 nickel, 5 manganese Grade 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.04–0.08 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.018 max. 0.05–0.10 0.020 max. 0.10–0.20 0.07 max. 0.06 max. Carbon 0.040 0.80 max. 1.20 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 2.00 max. Silicon 0.030 0.015 0.010 0.030 0.030 0.020 0.030 0.010 0.030 0.035 0.030 1.00 max. 0.30 max. 1.00 max. 0.75 max. 0.75 max. 3.7–4.3 1.40–2.00 0.80 max. 1.00–1.40 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.035 0.035 0.030 0.045 0.020 0.010 0.020 0.030 0.80 max. 0.60 max. 1.00 max. 1.00 max. Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels 0.040 0.020 1.00 max. 2.0 max. 0.030 0.045 0.045 5.0–7.0 2.00 max. 2.00 max. 0.020 0.030 0.040 0.045 0.50–0.80 2.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.040 2.00 max. Sulfur, Max. Nickel 6.0–8.0 3.5–5.2 4.5–6.5 5.5–6.5 23.50–25.50 31.0–33.0 16.0–18.0 13.5–17.5 13.0–17.5 14.0–15.5 10.0–12.0 17.5–18.5 19.0–22.0 32.0–38.0 11.5–13.5 Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d) 4.0–6.0 Manganese Phosphorus, Max. 24.0–26.0 26.0–29.0 21.0–23.0 24.0–26.0 3.0–5.0 1.00–2.50 2.5–3.5 1.2–2.0 6.00–7.00 ... 26.0–28.0 20.00–22.00 4.0–5.0 4.0–5.0 4.0–5.0 23.0–25.0 17.0–20.0 18.0–20.0 0.20 max. ... 20.0–22.0 17.0–18.5 6.0–6.5 ... 2.00–3.00 1.50–3.00 Molybdenum 19.5–20.5 7.0–9.0 19.0–21.0 20.5–23.5 Chromium Composition, % TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) ... ... ... ... ... 0.6–1.0 0.10 ... ... ... ... ... 8 x C min. −1.00 max. ... 0.10–0.30 Columbium Titanium Other elements N 0.15–0.35 Other elements N 0.24–0.32 Cu 0.50 max. Other elements N 0.14–0.20 Other elements N 0.08–0.20 Other elements Ce 0.05–0.10 Al 0.025 Other elements N 0.18–0.25 Cu 0.75 max. Other elements N 0.10–0.20 Other elements N 0.40–0.60 Other elements N 0.10 max. Other elements Cu 0.50–1.00 N 0.18–0.22 Other elements N 0.14–0.20 Ce 0.03–0.08 Other elements Cu 0.50 max. Other elements N 0.20–0.40 V 0.10–0.30 ... ... Other elements Cu 3.0–4.0 Tantalum, Max. PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS F 57 266 Not for Resale S32550 25 chromium, 6.5 nickel, 4 molybdenum with nitrogen 22 chromium, 5.5 nickel, 3 molybdenum, modified with nitrogen 26 chromium, 6 nickel, 3.5 molybdenum with nitrogen and copper 25 chromium, 7 nickel, 3.5 molybdenum, modified with nitrogen and tungsten 26 chromium, 7 nickel, 3.7 molybdenum 25 chromium, 7 nickel, modified with nitrogen and tungsten Grade 0.04 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. 0.025 max. 0.030 max. 0.030 max. Carbon 1.50 max. 0.80 max. 1.00 max. 1.5 max. 2.00 Sulfur, Max. Silicon 0.040 0.030 0.035 0.025 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.020 0.020 0.002 0.010 0.020 1.00 max. 1.00 max. 0.80 max. 0.80 max. 1.00 max. 0.80 max. Nickel 4.5–6.5 4.5–6.5 5.5–8.0 6.5–8.0 6.0–8.0 6.0–8.0 Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d) 1.00 max. Manganese Phosphorus, Max. 24.0–27.0 22.0–23.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 Chromium 2.9–3.9 3.0–3.5 3.0–5.0 3.0–4.0 3.0–4.0 2.5–3.5 Molybdenum ... ... ... ... ... ... Columbium Titanium Other elements Cu 1.50–2.50 N 0.10–0.25 Other elements N 0.20–0.30 Cu 0.50–1.00 W 0.50–1.00 K Other elements Cu 1.20–2.00 W 0.80–1.20 N 0.23–0.33 Other elements N 0.20–0.35 Cu 0.50–3.00 Other elements N 0.14–0.20 Other elements N 0.24–0.32 Cu 0.20–0.80 W 1.50–2.50 Tantalum, Max. B Grade F 2 was formerly assigned to the 1% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum grade which is now Grade F 12. The present grade F 5a (0.25 max. carbon) previous to 1955 was assigned the identification symbol F 5. Identification symbol F 5 in 1955 was assigned to the 0.15 max. carbon grade to be consistent with ASTM specifications for other products such as pipe, tubing, bolting, welding fittings, etc. C For Grade F 22V, rare earth metals (REM) may be added in place of calcium, subject to agreement between the producer and the purchaser. In that case the total amount of REM shall be determined and reported. D Grade F XM-27Cb shall have a nickel plus copper content of 0.50 max %. Product analysis tolerance over the maximum specified limit for carbon and nitrogen shall be 0.002%. E Grades F 304, F 304L, F 316, and F 316L shall have a maximum nitrogen content of 0.10%. F Grades F 304N, F 316N, F 304LN, and F 316LN shall have a nitrogen content of 0.10 to 0.16%. G Grade F 321 shall have a titanium content of not less than five times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%. H Grade F 321H shall have a titanium content of not less than 4 times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%. I Grades F 347 and F 348 shall have a columbium content of not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%. J Grades F 347H and F 348H shall have a columbium content of not less than 8 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%. K %Cr + 3.3 ⴛ %Mo + 16 ⴛ %N p 40 min. A F 61 S32205 S39277 F 55 F 60 S32760 F 54 S32520 S39274 Identification Symbol F 59 UNS Designation Composition, % TABLE 2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M TABLE 3 TENSILE AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS Tensile Strength, Min., ksi [MPa] Grade Symbol Yield Strength, Min., ksi [MPa]A Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] or 4D, Min., % Reduction of Area, Min., % Brinell Hardness Number Low Alloy Steels F1 F2 F5 F 5a F9 F 91 F 92 F 911 F 11 Class 1 F 11 Class 2 F 11 Class 3 F 12 Class 1 F 12 Class 2 F 21 F 3V and F 3VCb F 22 Class 1 F 22 Class 3 F 22V FR 70 [485] 70 [485] 70 [485] 90 [620] 85 [585] 85 [585] 90 [620] 90 [620] 60 [415] 70 [485] 75 [515] 60 [415] 70 [485] 75 [515] 85–110 [585–760] 60 [415] 75 [515] 85–110 [585–780] 63 [435] 40 40 40 65 55 60 64 64 30 40 45 32 40 45 60 30 45 60 46 70 [485] 85 [585] 110 [760] 130 [895] 110–135 [760–930] 115 [790] 40 55 85 110 90 90 [275] [275] [275] [450] [380] [415] [440] [440] [205] [275] [310] [220] [275] [310] [415] [205] [310] [415] [315] 20.0 20.0 20.0 22.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 18.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 18.0 20.0 20.0 18.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 35.0 50.0 40.0 40.0 45.0 40.0 45.0 30.0 30.0 45.0 30.0 30.0 45.0 35.0 30.0 45.0 38.0 143–192 143–192 143–217 187–248 179–217 248 max. 269 max. 187–248 121–174 143–207 156–207 121–174 143–207 156–207 174–237 170 max. 156–207 174–237 197 max. 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 45.0 45.0 143–207 167–229 235–302 263–321 235–285 295 max. 45.0 45.0 45.0 190 max. 190 max. 190 max. 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Martensitic Stainless Steels F F F F F F 6a Class 6a Class 6a Class 6a Class 6b 6NM 1 2 3 4 [275] [380] [585] [760] [620] [620] 18.0 18.0 15.0 12.0 16.0 15.0 Ferritic Stainless Steels F XM-27Cb F 429 F 430 60 [415] 60 [415] 60 [415] 35 [240] 35 [240] 35 [240] 20.0 20.0 20.0 Austenitic Stainless Steels F F F F F F F F F F F F F F 304 304H 304L 304N 304LN 309H 310 310MoLN 310H 316 316H 316L 316N 316LN 75 75 70 80 75 75 75 78 75 75 75 70 80 75 [515] [515] [485] [550] [515] [515] [515] [540] [515] [515] [515] [485] [550] [515] B B C B B B B B B C B 30 30 25 35 30 30 30 37 30 30 30 25 35 30 [205] [205] [170] [240] [205] [205] [205] [255] [205] [205] [205] [170] [240] [205] 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 D D 267 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale E E SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 3 TENSILE AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) Grade Symbol Tensile Strength, Min., ksi [MPa] Yield Strength, Min., ksi [MPa]A Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] or 4D, Min., % Reduction of Area, Min., % Brinell Hardness Number Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d) F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F 317 317L 347 347H 348 348H 321 321H XM-11 XM-19 10 20 44 45 46 47 48 49 56 58 B 75 [515] 70 [485] C 75 [515] B 75 [515] B 75 [515] B 75 [515] B 75 [515] B 75 [515] B 90 [620] 100 [690] 80 [550] 80 [550] 94 [650] 87 [600] 78 [540] 75 [525] 80 [550] 115 [795] 73 [500] 95 [655] 30 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 55 30 35 44 45 35 30 35 60 27 45 [205] [170] [205] [205] [205] [205] [205] [205] [345] [380] [205] [240] [300] [310] [240] [205] [240] [415] [185] [310] 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 45.0 35.0 30.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 35.0 30.0 30.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 55.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 40.0 35.0 50.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 50.0 45.0 ... ... 30.0 45.0 50.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 ... ... ... 310 max. 310 max. ... ... ... ... ... Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels F F F F F F F F F F 50 51 52 53 54 55 57 59 60 61 100–130 [690–900] 90 [620] 100 [690] 116 [800] F 116 [800] 109–130 [750–895] 118 [820] 112 [770] 90 [620] 109 [750] 65 65 70 80 80 80 85 80 65 80 [450] [450] [485] [550] [550] [550] [585] [550] [450] [550] 25.0 25.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 F A Determined by the 0.2% offset method. For ferritic steels only, the 0.5% extension-under-load method may also be used. For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 70 ksi [485 MPa]. C For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 65 ksi [450 MPa]. D Longitudinal. The transverse elongation shall be 25% in 2 in. or 50 mm, min. E Longitudinal. The transverse reduction of area shall be 45% min. F For sections over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 106 ksi [730 MPa]; the minimum yield strength shall be 75 ksi [515 MPa]. B 268 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 4 PRODUCT ANALYSIS TOLERANCES FOR LOW ALLOY STEELS WITH A MAXIMUM CHROMIUM LIMIT OF 4% OR MORE AND STAINLESS STEELSA Elements Limit or Maximum of Specified Range, % Tolerance Over the Maximum Limit or Under the Minimum Limit --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Carbon 0.030, incl. over 0.030 to 0.20, incl. 0.005 0.01 Manganese to 1.00, incl. over 1.00 to 3.00, incl. over 3.00 to 6.00 over 6.00 to 10.00 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 Phosphorus to 0.040, incl. 0.005 Sulfur to 0.030, incl. 0.005 Silicon to 1.00, incl. over 1.00 to 5.00, incl. 0.05 0.10 Chromium over over over over 4.00 to 10.00, incl. 10.00 to 15.00, incl. 15.00 to 20.00, incl. 20.00 to 27.50, incl. 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 Nickel to 1.00, incl. over 1.00 to 5.00, incl. over 5.00 to 10.00, incl. over 10.00 to 20.00, incl. over 20.00 to 22.00, incl. 0.03 0.07 0.10 0.15 0.20 Molybdenum to 0.20, incl. over 0.20 to 0.60, incl. over 0.60 to 2.00, incl. over 2.00 to 7.00, incl. all ranges all ranges 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.05 0.05 Cerium to 0.10, incl. 0.05 to 0.20, incl. to 0.19, incl. over 0.19 to 0.25 over 0.25 to 0.35 over 0.35 to 0.45 over 0.45 to 0.60 0.05 to 0.20, incl. to 0.05, incl. to 0.10, incl. over 0.10 to 0.25, incl. 0.03 to 0.08 Tungsten Copper to 1.00, incl. to 1.00, incl. 0.02 0.01B 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 −0.005 +0.01 0.04 0.03 Titanium Columbiumtantalum Tantalum Cobalt Nitrogen Columbium Aluminum Vanadium A This table does not apply to heat analysis. Product analysis limits for cobalt under 0.05% have not been established and the producer should be consulted for those limits. B 269 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-182/SA-182M SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 5 PRODUCT ANALYSIS TOLERANCES FOR LOW-ALLOY STEELS WITH MAXIMUM CHROMIUM LIMIT LESS THAN 4% Tolerance Over Maximum Limit or Under Minimum Limit for Size Ranges Shown, %B Limit or Maximum of Specified Range, % 100 in.2 (6.45 ⴛ 104 mm2), or Less Over 100 to 200 in.2 (1.290 ⴛ 105 mm2), Incl. Over 200 to 400 in.2 (2.581 ⴛ 105 mm2), Incl. Manganese to 0.90, incl. over 0.90 to 1.00, incl. 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.07 Phosphorus to 0.045, incl. 0.005 0.010 0.010 0.010 Sulfur to 0.045, incl. 0.005 0.010 0.010 0.010 Silicon to 0.40, incl. over 0.40 to 1.00, incl. 0.02 0.05 0.02 0.06 0.03 0.06 0.04 0.07 Nickel to 0.50 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 Chromium to 0.90, incl. over 0.90 to 2.10, incl. over 2.10 to 3.99, incl. 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.04 0.06 0.12 0.05 0.07 0.14 Molybdenum to 0.20, incl. over 0.20 to 0.40, incl. over 0.40 to 1.15, incl. 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.06 Copper to 1.00, incl. over 1.00 to 2.00, incl. 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.05 Titanium to 0.10 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Vanadium to 0.10, incl. 0.11 to 0.25, incl. 0.26 to 0.50, incl. 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03 ElementA --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- A B Product analysis for carbon, boron, columbium, and calcium shall conform to Table 2. Cross-sectional area. 270 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale Over 400 in.2 PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M TABLE 6 REPAIR WELDING REQUIREMENTS Grade Symbol Recommended Preheat and Interpass Temperature Range, °F [°C] ElectrodesA Minimum Post-Weld HeatTreatment Temperature °F [°C] Low Alloy Steels F F F F F F F 1 2 5 5a 9 91 92 F F F F F F F F 911 11, Classes 1, 2, and 3 12, Classes 1 and 2 21 3V and F 3VCb 22 Class 1 22 Class 3 22V E7018-A1 E8018-B1 E502-15 or 16 E502-15 or 16 E505-15 or 16 9% Cr, 1% Mo, VCbN 9% Cr, 0.5% Mo, 1.5% W, VCbNiN 9% Cr, 1% Mo, 1% W, VCbN E8018-B2 E8018-B2 E9018-B3 3% Cr, 1% Mo, 1⁄4% V-Ti E9018-B3 E9018-B3 2.25% Cr, 1% Mo, 0.25% V-Cb F F F F 6a, Class 1 6a, Class 2 6b 6NM E410-15 or 16 E410-15 or 16 13% Cr, 11⁄2% Ni, 1⁄2% Mo 13% Cr, 4% Ni 200–400 300–600 400–700 400–700 400–700 400–700 [95–205] [150–315] [205–370] [205–370] [205–370] [205–370] 1150 1150 1250 1250 1250 1300 [620] [620] [675] [675] [675] [705] 400–700 400–700 300–600 300–600 300–600 300–600 300–600 300–600 300–600 [205–370] [205–370] [150–315] [150–315] [150–315] [150–315] [150–315] [150–315] [150–315] 1300 1300 1150 1150 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 [705] [705] [620] [620] [675] [675] [675] [675] [675] [205–370] [205–370] [205–370] [150–370] 1250 1250 1150 1050 [675] [675] [620] [565] Martensitic Stainless Steels 400–700 400–700 400–700 300–700 Ferritic Stainless Steels F XM-27Cb F 429 F 430 FR NRB 400–700 [205–370] NR NR 26% Cr, 1% Mo E430-16 E430-16 E8018-C2 NR 1400 [760] 1400 [760] NR Austenitic Stainless Steels F F F F F F F F F 304 304L 304H 304N 304LN 309H 310 310H 310MoLN E308-15 or 16 E308L-15 to 16 E308-15 or 16 E308-15 or 16 E308L-15 or 16 E309-15 or 16D E310-15 or 16 E310-15 or 16 E310Mo-15 or 16 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F 316 316L 316H 316N 316LN 317 317L 321E 321HE 347 347H 348 348H XM-11 XM-19 E316-15 or 16 E316L-15 or 16 E316-15 or 16 E316-15 or 16 E316L-15 or 16 E317-15 or 16 E317L-15 or 16 E347-15 or 16 E347-15 or 16 E347-15 or 16 E347-15 or 16 E347-15 or 16 E 347-15 or 16 XM-10W XM-19W NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR 271 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 1900 [1040] + WQC 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1920–2010 [1050– 1100] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1925 [1050] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1925 [1050] + WQ 1900 [1040] + WQ 1925 [1050] + WQ NR NR SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II TABLE 6 REPAIR WELDING REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D) Recommended Preheat and Interpass Temperature Range, °F [°C] ElectrodesA Grade Symbol Minimum Post-Weld HeatTreatment Temperature °F [°C] Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d) F 10 E ... ... NR NR ... ... ... ... ... NR F F F F F F F F 20 44 45E 46 47 48 49 58 E/ER-320, 320LR ENiCrMo-3 ... ... . . .F . . .F . . .F ENiCrMo-3 F F F F F F F 50 51 52 53 54 55 57 25% Cr, 6% Ni, 1.7% Mo 22% Cr, 5.5% Ni, 3% Mo 26% Cr, 8% Ni, 2% Mo 25% Cr, 7% Ni, 4% Mo 25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3% Mo, W 25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3.5% Mo 25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3% Mo, 1.5% Cu, 1% W ENi CrMo-10 22% Cr, 5.5% Ni, 3% Mo 26% Cr, 9% Ni, 3.5% Mo ... 1700–1850 [925– 1010] + WQ 2100 [1150] + WQ ... ... 2100 [1150] + WQ 2100 [1150] + WQ 2100 [1150] + WQ 2025 [1105] + WQ Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels F 59 F 60 F 61 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR A Electrodes shall comply with ASME SFA-5.4, SFA-5.5, and corresponding ER grades of SFA-5.9 or SFA-5.11. NR p not required. C WQ p water quench. D Filler metal shall additionally have 0.04% minimum carbon. E Purchaser approval required. F Match filler metal is available. Fabricators have also used AWS A5.14, Class ER, NiCrMo-3, and AWS A5.11, Class E, NiCrMo-3 filler metals. B 272 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-182/SA-182M SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, and order. S6. Hydrostatic Testing S6.1 A hydrostatic test at a pressure agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser shall be applied by the manufacturer. S1. Macroetch Test S1.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched to show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test shall be conducted according to Test Method E 340. Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S7. Repair Welding S7.1 No repair welding shall be permitted without prior approval of the purchaser. If permitted, the restrictions of Section 14 shall apply. S2. Product Analysis S2.1 A product analysis shall be made from each heat offered for delivery. The analysis shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 2 with tolerances in Table 4 or Table 5. If the results of any test fail to comply, two additional forgings or representative test pieces from the same heat shall be retested and the results shall comply with the tables listed. If the results of either one of these pieces fail to comply, each forging shall be checked or the heat rejected. All results shall be reported to the purchaser and all forgings which do not comply shall be rejected. S8. Heat Treatment Details S8.1 The manufacturer shall furnish a detailed test report containing the information required in 17.2 and shall include all pertinent details of the heat-treating cycle given the forgings. S9. Material for Optimum Resistance to StressCorrosion Cracking S9.1 Austenitic stainless steel shall be furnished in the solution-annealed condition as a final operation with no subsequent cold working permitted, except, unless specifically prohibited by the purchaser, straightening of bars from which parts are machined is permitted to meet the requirements of Specification A 484 /A 484M. S3. Tension Test S3.1 In addition to the requirements of Section 7, one tension specimen shall be obtained from a representative forging from each heat at a location agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The results of the test shall comply with Table 3 and shall be reported to the purchaser. S10. Corrosion Tests S10.1 All austenitic stainless steel shall pass intergranular corrosion tests performed in accordance with Practice E of Practices A 262. S4. Magnetic Particle Examination S4.1 All accessible surfaces of the finished forging shall be examined by a magnetic-particle method. The method shall be in accordance with Test Method A 275 /A 275M. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S10.2 Intergranular corrosion tests shall be performed on specimens of ferritic stainless steels as described in Practices A 763. S10.3 For both the austenitic and ferritic stainless steels, details concerning the number of specimens and their source and location are to be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S5. Liquid-Penetrant Examination S5.1 All accessible surfaces shall be examined by a liquid-penetrant method in accordance with Practice E 165. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S11. Special Filler Metal S11.1 In repair welded F 316, F 316L, F 316H, and F 316N forgings, the deposited weld metal shall conform 273 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-182/SA-182M 2004 SECTION II to E 308 composition wire. Forgings repair welded with E 308 weld metal shall be marked F___W 308. S14.2 The manufacturer shall provide a test report containing the information required in 17.2 and shall include a statement of the heat treatment method employed. S12. Hardness Test S12.1 Each forging shall be hardness tested and shall meet the requirements of Table 3. S15. S13. Alternate Heat Treatment (Grades F 91 and F 92) S13.1 Grade F 91 shall be normalized in accordance with Section 5 and tempered at a temperature, to be specified by the purchaser, less than 1350°F [730°C]. It shall be the purchaser’s responsibility to subsequently temper at 1350°F [730°C] minimum to conform to the requirements of the specification. All mechanical tests shall be made on material heat treated in accordance with Section 5. The certification shall reference this supplementary requirement indicating the tempering temperature applied. The notation “S13” shall be included with the required marking of the forging. Grain Size for Austenitic Grades S15.1 Forgings made from austenitic grades other than H grades shall be tested for average grain size by Test Method E 112. Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. S16. Stabilization Treatment S16.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal for Grades F 321, F 321H, F 347, F 347H, F 348, and F 348H, these grades shall be given a stabilization heat treatment at 1500 to 1600°F [815 to 870°C] for a minimum of 2 h/ in. [4.7 min/mm] of thickness and then cooling in the furnace or in air. In addition to the marking required in Section 18, the grade designation symbol shall be followed by the symbol “S16.” S14. Heat Treatment of Austenitic Forgings S14.1 The purchaser shall specify the heat treatment method (in 5.1 or in 5.3.1) that shall be employed. 274 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL BOILER TUBES FOR HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE SA-192/SA-192M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 192/A 192M-91.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall thickness, seamless carbon steel boiler and superheater tubes for high-pressure service. A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction 1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to this specification are 1⁄2 in. to 7 in. [12.7 to 177.8 mm] outside diameter and 0.085 to 1.000 in. [2.2 to 25.4 mm], inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes comply with all other requirements of this specification. 3. General Requirements 3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise provided herein. 1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1⁄8 in [3.2 mm] inside diameter or 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] thickness. 4. Ordering Information 4.1 Orders for material under this specification should include the following, as required, to described the desired material adequately: 1.4 When these products are to be used in applications conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 shall supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification. 4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths), 4.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes), 1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified in the order. 4.1.3 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn), 4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall thickness), 4.1.5 Length (specific or random), 4.1.6 Optional Requirements (Section 8), 4.1.7 Test report required (see section on Certification of Specification A 450/A 450M), 4.1.8 Specification designation, and 4.1.9 Special requirements. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes 5. Manufacture 5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seamless process and shall be either hot-finished or cold-finished, as specified. 275 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-192/SA-192M 2004 SECTION II Brinell Hardness Number (Tubes 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness) 137 HB 6. Heat Treatment 6.1 Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Coldfinished tubes shall be heat treated after the final coldfinished at a temperature of 1200°F [650°C] or higher. 7. Chemical Composition 7.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition: Carbon, % Manganese, % Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max, % Silicon, max, % 10. Mechanical Tests Required 10.1 Flattening Test — One flattening test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes selected from each lot (see Note) or fraction thereof. 0.06–0.18 0.27–0.63 0.035 0.035 0.25 10.2 Flaring Test — One flaring test shall be made on specimens from each end of two tubes selected from each lot (see Note) or fraction thereof. These tubes shall be selected apart from those used for the flattening test. 7.2 Supplying an alloy grade of steel that specifically requires the addition of any element other than those listed in 7.1 is not permitted. 10.3 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot. The term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness which are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size and the same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace speed. 8. Product Analysis 8.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per 100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm] and one tube per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under; or when tubes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified. 10.4 Hydrostatic Test — Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic pressure test, or instead of this test, a nondestructive test may be used when specified by the purchaser. 8.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests, for the elements in question shall meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot (see Note) shall be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each billet or tube may be individually tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which do not meet the requirements of the specification shall be rejected. 11. Forming Operations 11.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws. Superheater tubes when properly manipulated shall stand all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for application without developing defects. NOTE — A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm], prior to cutting to length. 12. Product Marking 12.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 450/A 450M, the marking shall indicate whether the tube is hot finished or cold finished. 9. Hardness Requirements 9.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not exceeding the following: 276 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Rockwell Hardness Number (Tubes less than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall thickness) 77 HRB Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-192/SA-192M EXPLANATORY NOTE NOTE — For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed: Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 47 [325] 26 [180] 35 277 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale 278 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale (Identical with ASTM Specification A 193/A 193M-98a except for differences in paras. 3.1.1 and 19.4, Note 6 of Table 1, and editorial differences in Table 2.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers alloy and stainless steel bolting material for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and fittings for high-temperature service. The term "bolting material" as used in this specification covers bass, bolts, screws, studs, stud bolts and wire. Bass and wire shall be hot-wrought. The material may be further processed by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic stainless steel may be carbide solution treated or carbide solution treated and strain-hardened. When strain hardened austenitic steel is ordered, the purchaser should take special care to ensme that Appendix X1 is thoroughly understood. 1.2 Several grades are covered, including ferritic steels and a~~stenitic stainless steels designated B5, B8, etc. Selection will depend upon design, service conditions, mechanical propesties, and high-temperature characteristics. NOTE 1 -The committee formulating this specification has included fifteen steel types that have been rather extensively used for the present purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by the committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent. NOTE 2 - For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use at lower range of high-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 354. NOTE 3 - For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use in low-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 320/A 320M. 1.3 Nuts for use with this bolting material are covered in Section 14. 1.4 Supplementary Requirements S1 through S8 are provided for use when additional tests or inspection ase desired. These shall apply only when specified in the purchase order. 1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable " M specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Stnrzclnrds: A 29lA 29M Specification for General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and ColdFinished A 194lA 194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperaiure Service A 320lA 320M Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 479lA 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels A 4841484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and Forgings A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements §A-193lSA-193M 2004 SECTION I1 E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials E 21 Practice for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of Metallic Materials E 139 Practice for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture, and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials E 150 Practice for Conducting Creep and Creep-Rupture Tension Tests of Metallic Materials Under Conditions of Rapid Heating and Short Times E 151 Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic Materials at Elevated Temperatures with Rapid Heating and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates E 292 Practice for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch Tension Tests of Materials E 328 Methods for Stress-Relaxation Tests for Materials and Structures E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Products, Inspection, and Rating Comprising Steel Bars, Billets, Blooms and Forgings E 566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination F 606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets 2.2 ANSI StiiiziEniiZ~: B 1.1 Screw Threads B 1.13M Metric Screw Threads B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws B18.2.3.1M Metric Hex Cap Screws B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws B18.3.1M Metric Soclcet Head Cap Screws stainless steels; Class 1D applies to material carbide solution treated by cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature), 3.1.3 Quantity (that is, number of pieces or weight), 3.1.4 Description of items required (that is, bars, bolts, screws, or studs), 3.1.5 Dimensions (that is, diameter, length of point, overall length, finish, shape, and threads), 3.1.6 Nuts, if required by purchaser, in accordance with 14.1, 3.1.7 Supplementary requirements, if any, and 3.1.8 Special requirements, in accordance with 6.3, 6.6, 11.3, 15.1, 16.1, 17.1, and 18.1. . Manufacture ( 4.1 The steel shall be produced by any of the following processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace or vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The primary melting method may incorporate separate degassing or refining. The molten steel may be vacuum-treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot or strand casting. The basic-oxygen process shall be limited to steels containing not over 6% chromium. Ordering Information 3.1 The inquiry and order for material under this specification shall include the following as required to describe the material adequately: 4.2 Qunli~l- To ensure soundness, fenitic steel bars and wire shall be tested in accordance with Method E 381, or other suitable method as agreed upon between the purchaser and the producer. When bar or wire is supplied, the bar or wire producer shall perform the test. When fasteners are supplied, either the bar or wire producer or the fastener producer, as agreed upon between them, shall perfo~mthe test. Quality control procedures shall be s-dficient to demonstrate that tkhe tcsting was pei-foimed and that the resulis were acceptable. A bar lot consisting of one heat or 10 000 lbs whichever is smaller, shall be represented by a minimum of one macroetch. Visual examination of transverse sections shall show no imperfections worse than the macrographs of Method E 381 S4-R4-C4 or equivalent as agreed upon. Distinct zones of solidification shall not be present. 3.1.1 Specification, designation, year date, and grade. 5. 2.3 AIAG Standard: AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag Application Standard 3. 3.1.2 Heat-treated condition (that is, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered, for the femtic materials, and carbide solution treated (Class I), carbide solution treated after finishing (Class IA), and carbide solution treated and strain hardened (Classes 2, 2B, and 2C), for the austenitic stainless steels; Classes 1B and 1C apply to the carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing Discard 5.1 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation. Heat Treatment 6.1 Ferritic steels shall be properly heat treated as best suits the high-temperature characteristics of each 6. PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS grade. Immediately after rolling or forging, the bolting material shall be allowed to cool to a temperature below the cooling transformation range. The materials which ase to be furnished in the liquid-quenched condition shall then be unifortnly reheated to the proper temperahire to refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as a "quenching charge") and quenched in a liquid medium under substantially uniform conditions for each quenching charge. Use of water quenching is prohibited for any femtic grade when heat treatment is part of the fastener manufacturing process. This prohibition does not apply to heat treated bar or to fasteners machined therefrom. Material Grade B16 shall be heated to a temperahise range of 1700°F to 1750°F [925"C to 954"CI and oil quenched. The materials that ase to be furnished in the normalized or air-quenched condition shall be reheated to the proper temperature to refine the grain and cooled uniformly in air to a temperature below the transformation tempei-ature range. The material, whether liquidquenched or normalized, shall then be unifo~mlyreheated for tempering. The minimum tempering temperature shall be as specified in Table 2 and Table 3. 6.1.1 Quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered fenitic material that is suibsequently cold drawn for dimensional control shall be stress-relieved after cold drawing. The minimum stress-relief temperature shall be 100°F [55"C] below the tempering temperature. Tests for mechanical properties shall be peffosmed after stress relieving. 6.2 Both B6 and B6X materials shall be held, at the tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1 11. Identification Symbol B6X material may be furnished in the as-rolled-and-tempered condition. Cold worlcing is pennitted with the hardness limitation (26 HRC maximum) of Table 2 for the B6X grade. 6.3 ~ l austenitic l stainless steels shall receive a casbide solution treatment (see 6.3.1, 6.3.4 for specific requirements for each class). Classes 1, lB, 1C (Grades B8R and B8S only), 2, 2B, and 2C can apply to bar, wire, and finished fasteners. Class 1A (all grades) and Class 1C (Grades B8RA and B8SA only) can apply to finished fasteners. Class 1D applies only to bas and wire and finished fasteners that ase machined directly from Class 1D bas or wire without any subsequent hot or cold worlcing. 6.3.1 Classes I a17d IB, and Class IC Glades BSR and BSS - After rolling of the bas, forging, or heading, whether done hot or cold, the material shall be heated from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium casbide will go into solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the casbide. SA-193lSA-193M 6.3.2 Class I D - Rolled or forged Grades B8, B8M, B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, B8N, B8MN, B8R, and B8S bas shall be cooled rapidly immediately following hot worlcing while the temperature is above 1750°F [955"C], so that grain boundary carbides are in solution (see A 479-88b and subsequent revisions). Class 1D shall be restricted to applications at temperahues less than 850°F [455"C]. 6.3.3 Class 1A and Class I C Glndes BSRA and B8SA - Finished fasteners shall be carbide solution treated after all rolling, forging, heading, and threading operations are complete. This designation does not apply to starting material such as bas. Fasteners shall be heated from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into solution and then shall be cooled at a rate s~ifficientto prevent the precipitation of the casbide. 6.3.4 Classes 2, 2B, and 2C - Material shall be carbide solution treated by heating from ambient temnperature and holding a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chro~ni~lm carbide will go into solution and then cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the casbide. Following this treatment the material shall then be strain hardened to achieve the required properties. NOTE 4 -Heat treatment followilig operations perromed on a limited portion of the product, such as heading, may result in non-uniform grain size and mechanical properlies through the section arrected. 6.4 If scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be specified in the purchase order. 6.5 B7 and B7M bolting shall be heat treated by quenching in a liquid medium and tempering. For B7M bolting, the final heat treatment, which may be the tempering operation if conducted at 1150°F [62O0C]minim~im, shall be done after all machining and forming operations, including thread rolling, ase complete. 6.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, material for Grade B7 may be heat treated by the Fusnace, the Induction or the Electrical Resistance method. NOTE 5 -It should be taken into consideration that stress-relaxation properties may vary from heat lot to heat lot or these properties may vary from one heat treating method to another. The purchaser may specify Requirement S8, if stress-relaxation testing is desired. 7. Chemical Composition 7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 1. Steels with added lead shall not be used. 7.2 The steel shall not contain an unspecified element for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel confonns SA-193JSA-193M 2004 SECTION I1 to the requirelnents of another grade for which that element is a specified element. Furthermore, elements present in concentrations greater than 0.75 weight/% shall be reported. Chemical analysis shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods A 75 1. 8. Heat Analysis 8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the manufachlrer to determine the percentages of the elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be made from a test specimen taken dusing the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus detennined shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser's representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 7. For strand cast materials, the requirements of 8.2 and 8.3 of Specification A 788 shall be met. Should the purchaser deem it necessary to have the transition zone of two heats sequentially cast discarded, the purchaser shall invoke Supplementary Requirement S3 of Specification A 788. 9.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser from samples representing the bolting material. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements of Section 7. 10. Mechanical 10.1 Teizsile Pi-opel-ties: 10.1.1 Requil-enzents - The material as represented by the tension specimens shall conform to the requireinents prescribed in Table 2 at room temperature after heat treatment. 10.1.2 Metlzod of Test -Tension test shall be made in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370, including the parts of Annex A3 "Steel Fasteners" applicable to machined test specimens. The speed of testing shall not exceed the limits specified in 7.4.1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The yield strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2% of the gage length of the specimen shall be determined. 10.1.3 Full Size Fnsteizeia, Wedge Teizsile Testi i ~ g-When applicable, see 13.1.4, headed fasteners shall be wedge tested full size in accordance with Annex A3 of A 370 and shall conform to the tensile strength shown in Table 2. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf) for individual sizes shall be as follows: where: Ts = wedge tensile strength UTS = tensile strength specified in Table 2, and As = stress area, square inches, as shown in ANSI B 1.1 or calculated as follows: where: O = nominal thread size, and iz = the number of threads per inch 10.2.1 The hardness shall confonn to the requirements prescribed in Table 2. Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with either Test Methods and Definitions A 370 or with Test Methods F 606. In the event a controversy exists relative to minimum strength, tension tests shall prevail over hardness readings. 10.2.2 Grade B7M - The maximum hardness of the grade shall be 235 HB or 99 HRB (conversion in accordance with Table 2B of Test Methods and Definitions A 370). The minimum hardness shall not be less than 200 HB or 93 HRB. Conformance to this hardness shall be insured by testing the hardness of each stud or bolt by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance with 10.2.1. The use of 100% electromagnetic testing for hardness as an alternative to 100% indentation hardness testing is pennissible when qualified by sampling using indentation hardness testing. Each lot tested for hardness electromagnetically shall be 100% examined in accordance with Practice E 566. Following electromagnetic testing for hardness a random sample of a minimum of 100 pieces of each heat of steel in each lot (as defined in 13.1.2) shall be tested by indentation hardness methods. All samples must meet hardness requirements to permit acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the specified lnaxilnum or minimum hardness, the lot shall be rejected and either reprocessed and resampled or tested 100% by indentation hardness methods. Product which has been 100% tested and found acceptable shall have a line under the grade symbol. 10.2.2.1 Surface preparation for indentation hardness testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods E 18. Hardness tests shall be performed on the end of the bolt or stud. When this is impractical, the hardness test shall be performed elsewhere. ip, Finish, and Appearance 11.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be pointed and shall have a workmanlike finish. Points shall PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIHCATIONS be flat and chamfered or rounded at option of the manufacturer. Length of points on studs and stud bolts shall be not less than one nor more than two complete threads as measured from the extreme end parallel to the axis. Length of studs and stud bolts shall be measured from first thread to first thread. 11.2 Standard permissible variations for dimensions of bars shall be as prescribed in Specification A 29lA 29M and Specification A 484/A 484M, latest revisions. 11.3 Bolt heads shall be in accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M. Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the Heavy Hex Screws Series should be used, except the maximum body diameter and radius of fillet may be the same as for the Heavy Hex Bolt Series. The body diameter and head fillet radius for sizes of Heavy Hex Cap Screws and Bolts that are not shown in their respective tables in ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M may be that shown in the corresponding Hex Cap Screw and Bolt Tables respectively. Socket head fasteners shall be in accordance with ANSI B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M. Diameter, in. [mml 1% [30] and under Over 1% [30] to 1% [42], incl Over 1?4[42] to 2% [64], incl Over 2% [64] SA-193lSA-193M Lot Size 1500 Ib [780 kg] or fraction thereof 4500 Ib [2000 kg] or fraction thereof 6000 Ib [2700 kg] or fraction thereof 100 pieces or fraction thereof 13.1.3 Tension tests are not required to be made on bolts, screws, st~tds,or stud bolts that are fabricated from heat-treated bars furnished in accordance with the requirements of this specification and tested in accordance with 13.1.1, provided they are not given a subsequent heat tzeatment. 13.1.4 Full Size Specimeizs, Headed Fasteners Headed fasteners 1% in. in body diameter and smaller, with body length three times the diameter or longer, and which are produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold) shall be subjected to full size testing in accordance with 10.1.3. This testing shall be in addition to tensile testing as specified in 10.1.1 and 10.I .2. The lot size shall be as shown in 13.1.2. Failure shall occur in the body or threaded section with no failure, or indications of failure, such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank. 12. Retests 12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test lot do not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may retreat such lot not more than twice, in which case two additional tension tests shall be made from such lot, all of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 14. Nuts 14.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts shall be furnished with nuts, when specified in the purchase order. Nuts shall conform to Specification A 194lA 194M. 13. Test Specimens 13.1 Tension test specimens taken from finished bolts, screws, studs, or stud bolts shall be machined to the fosm and dimensions and shall be taken from positions shown in A3.2.1.7 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Tension test specimens from bar stock are covered by Annex A1.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, Annex A l . 15. Threads 15.1 When inch series product is ordered, all bolts, studs, stud bolts, and accompanying nuts, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order shall be threaded in accordance with ANSI B1.l Class 2A fit, sizes 1 in. and smaller in diameter with the coarse-thread series, and 1'/* in. and larger in diameter with the 8-pitch-thread series. When metric product is ordered, threads shall be metric coarse thread series as specified in ANSI B1.13M, and shall have Grade 6G tolerances. 13.1.1 Number of Tests -For heat-treated bars, one tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat represented in each tempering charge. When heat treated without interruption in continuous furnaces, the material in a lot shall be the same heat, same prior condition, same size and subjected to the same heat treatment. Not fewer than two tension tests are required for each lot containing 20 000 lb [9000 kg] or less. Every additional 10 000 lb 14.500 kg] or fraction thereof requires one additional test. 13.1.2 For studs, bolts, screws, etc., one tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat involved in the lot. Each lot shall consist of the following: 15.2 Where practical, all threads shall be formed after heat treatment. Class lA, Grades B8A, B K A , B8MA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, BsMLNA, B8NA, B8MNA, and B~MLCUNA, and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA are to be solution treated in the finished condition. 16. Inspection 66.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have entry, at all time while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the place of SA-193lSA-193M 2004 SECTION I1 manufacture that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. 17. Rejection and Rehearing 17.1 Unless otherwise specified in the basis of purchase, any rejection based on tests made in accordance with Section 9 shall be reported to the manufacturer within 30 days from the receipt of samples by the purchaser. 17.2 Material that shows defects subsequent to its acceptance at the place of manufacture shall be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified. 17.3 Samples tested in accordance with Section 9 that represent rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the date of the test report. In the case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manufacturer may make claim f x a rehearing within hat time. 18. Certification 18.1 The producer of the raw material or finished fasteners shall furnish a certification to the purchaser or his representative showing the results of the chemical analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon and Alloy Steels Only), and mechanical tests, and state the method of heat treatment employed. supplementary requirements or other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract and was found to meet those requirements. 18.2.2 The specification number, year date, and identification symbol. 19.1 Gradelclass and manufacturer's identification symbols shall be applied to one end of studs 3/8 in. [I0 mm] in diameter and larger and to the heads of bolts '/4 in. [6 mm] in diameter and larger. (If the available area is inadequate, the grade symbol may be marked on one end and the manufacturer's identification symbol marked on the other end.) The identification symbol shall be as shown in Table 4 and 5. Grade B7M which has been 100% evaluated in conformance with the specification, shall have a line under the grade symbol to distinguish it from B7M produced to previous specification revisions not requiring 100% hardness testing. 19.2 For bolting materials, including threaded bars, that are furnished bundled and tagged or boxed, the tags and boxes shall carry the grade symbol for the material identification and the manufacturer's identification mark or name. 19.3 For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the fastener was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with the specification and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. 18.2 Certification shall also include at least the following: 19.4 Bar Coding - In addition to the requirements in 19.1, 19.2, and 19.3, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B-5 02.00. If used on small items, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag. 18.2.1 A statement that the material or the fasteners, or both, were manufactured, sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with the specification and any 20. Keywords 20.1 hardness; heat treatment PART A -FERROUS MATEFUAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE ( 1 ) l Type Ferritic Steels B5 B6 and B6X 5% Chromium 12% Chromium Grade Description A I S I Type 410 Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l Range Carbon Manganese, max Pliospliorus, niax Sulfur, max Silicon Cliromiu~n Molybden~~m 0.10 min 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 niax 4.0-6.0 0.40-0.65 0.01 under 0.03 over 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.10 0.05 Type 0.15 max 1.00 0.040 0.03 1.00 niax 11.5-13.5 0.01 over 0.03 over 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.15 ... ... Ferritic Steels B7, B 7 M B16 Chromium-Molybdenum [Note ( 3 ) l Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium Grade Description Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max S ~ ~ l f u max r, Silicon Chromiuni Molybdenum Vanadium Aluminum, max % CNote ( 5 ) l Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l 0.37-0.49 [Note (411 0.65-1.10 0.035 0.040 0.15-0.35 0.75-1.20 0.15-0.25 0.02 0.04 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.02 0.05 0.02 Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 Range 0.02 0.03 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.02 0.05 0.03 0.03 Austenitic Steels, [Note ( 6 ) l Classes 1, lA, ID, and 2 TYpe Grade Description Carbon, max Manganese, max Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon, max Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Columbium + tantalum Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 68, B8A BDC, BBCA BDM, BBMA, 68M2, 68M3 68P, GSPA AISI Type 304 AISI Type 347 AISI Type 316 AISI Type 305 with restricted carbon Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 8.0-11.0 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0-19.0 9.0-12.0 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 ... ... ... ... ... 1 0 x carbon content, min; 1.10 max Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l ... 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0-18.0 10.0-14.0 2.00-3.00 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 under ... ... Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l 0.12 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0-19.0 11.0-13.0 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 ... ... ... ... TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (111 (CONT'D) Austenitic Steels, [Note (611 Classes lA, l B , l D , and 2 Type Grade Description B8N, B8NA B8MN, B8MNA BBMLCuN, B8MLCuNA A I S I Type 304N AISI Type 316N Unstabilized, 2 0 Chromium, 1 8 Nickel, 6 Molybdenum with restricted carbon Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note ( 2 ) l Carbon, niax Manganese, rnax Phosphorus, rnax Sulfur, rnax Silicon, rnax Chromium Nicltel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 Range 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.01 Austenitic Steels [Note (611, Classes 1, l A , and 2 TYpe Grade B8T, B8TA Description AISI Type 3 2 1 Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 Range -- Carbon, max Manganese, max Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon, max Nickel Chromium Titanium Austenitic Steels [Note (611, Classes 1C and 1D Type Grade Description B8R, B8RA B8S, B8SA 22 Chromium-13 Nickel-5 Manganese 1 8 Chromium-8 Nickel-4 Silicon + Nitrogen Range Carbon, rnax Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon Chromium Nicltel Molybdenum Nitrogen Columbium + tantalum Vanadium 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.15 0.20 0.05 under 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0-12.0 17.0-19.0 5 X ( C + N ) min, 0.70 max 0.06 4.0-6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 20.5-23.5 11.5-13.5 1.50-3.00 0.20-0.40 Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 0.01 over 0.05 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.25 0.15 0.10 0.02 Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 0.01 over 0.06 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.15 0.20 0.10 PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (111 (CONT'D) Austenitic Steels [Note (6)1, Classes 1, 1A and 1 D Type Grade Description B8LN, B 8 L N A B8MLN, B 8 M L N A A I S I Type 3 0 4 N w i t h restricted carbon A I S I Type 3 1 6 N with restricted carbon Range Carbon, niax Manganese Phosphorus, niax Sulfur, max Silicon Chromium Nicltel Molybdenum Nitrogen Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (211 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 8.0-11.0 0.005 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 0.10-0.16 0.01 ... .. . Range 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0-18.0 10.0-13.0 2.00-3.00 0.10-0.16 Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)l 0.005 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.01 NOTES: ( 1 ) The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted. ( 2 ) Product analysis - Individual determinations sometimes vary from the specified limits on ranges as shown in the tables. The several determinations of any individual element in a heat may not vary both above and below the specified range. ( 3 ) Typical steel compositions used for this grade include 4140, 4142, 4145, 4140H, 4142H, and 4145H. ( 4 ) For bar sizes over 3'/2 in. C9O mml, inclusive, the carbon content may be 0.50%, max. For the B 7 M grade, a minimum carbon content of 0.28% is permitted, provided that the required tensile properties are met in the section sizes involved; the use of A I S I 4130 or 4130H is allowed. ( 5 ) Total of soluble and insoluble. n material. Class ( 6 ) Classes 1and 1 D are solution treated. Classes 1, 1 0 and some 1C (BBR and 0 8 s ) products are made from s o l ~ ~ t i otreated 1 A (B8A, BBCA, BBMA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA and BBMNA) and some Class 1C ( B R A and BBSA) products are solution treated i n the finished condition. Class 2 products are solution treated and strain hardened. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 2 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Grade Diameter, in. Minimum Tempering Temperature, "F Tensile Strength, Min., ltsi Yield Strength, Min., 0.2% offset, ltsi Elongation in 4D, Min., % Reduction of Area, Min., % Hardness, Max. Ferritic Steels B5 4 to 6% cliromium B6 1 3 % chromium B6X 13% cliro~i~ium 87 Chromium-molybdenum LIP to 4, i~icl. up to 4, incl. up to 4, incl. 26 HRC 2'/, and under 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 0 2 HB or 3 3 HRC 277 HB or 2 9 HRC 235 HB or 9 9 HRB 2 3 5 BHN or 9 9 RIB 235 BHN or 9 9 RIB over 2/', to 4 over 4 to 7 B7M [Note (111 2'/, and under Cliromi~~m-molytrde~ium over 2 5 ; to 4 over 4 to 7 B16 Chromium-molybdenulnvanadium 2',$ and under over 21/2 to 4 over 4 to 7 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 0 2 H B or 3 3 HRC 277 HB or 2 9 HRC PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 2 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D) Grade, Diameter, in. Heat Treatment [Note (211 Tensile Strength, min, ltsi Yield Strength, mint 0.2 % offset, ltsi Elongation in 40, min, % Reduction of Area, min % Hardness, max Austenitic Steels Classes 1 and 1D: 68, 68M, B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, all diameters Class 1: B8C, B8T, all diameters Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA, BBTA, B8LNA, BBMLNA, B8NA, B8MNA, B ~ M L C U N A all , diameters Classes 1 B and 1D: B8N, BBMN, and BBMLCuN, a1 diameters Classes 1C and 1D: B8R, all diameters Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters Classes 1C and 1D: 885, all diameters Class 1C: B8SA, all diameters Class 2: 88, B8C, B8P, B8T, and B8N CNote (411 3/4 and under over 3/4 t o 1, incl over 1t o 11/, incl over 11/, t o 11/, incl Class 2: B8M, BBMN, B8MLCuN [Note ( 4 ) l 3/, and under over 3/4 t o 1 incl over 1t o 11/4incl over 11/, t o 11/, incl Class 28: 88, B 8 M 2 CNote (411 2 and under over 2 t o 2l/, incl over 2% t o 3 incl Class 2C: B 8 M 3 CNote ( 4 ) l 2 and under over 2 carbide solution treated 223 HB or 9 6 HRB CNote ( 3 ) l carbide solution treated 223 HB or 9 6 HRB [Note ( 3 ) l 192 HB or 9 0 HRB carbide solution treated in the finished condition carbide solution treated 223 HB or 9 6 HRB CNote (311 carbide solution treated 2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC carbide solution treated in the finished condition carbide solution treated 2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC carbide solution treated in the finished condition carbide solution treated and strain hardened carbide solution treated and strain hardened carbide solution treated and strain hardened carbide solution treated and strain hardened 2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC 2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 321 321 321 321 HB HB HB HB or or or or 35 35 35 35 HRC HRC HRC HRC 321 321 321 321 HB HB HB HB or or or or 35 35 35 35 HRC HRC HRC HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC NOTES: (1) To meet the tensile requirements, the Brinell hardness shall be over 200 HB (93 HRB). (2) Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1 A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due t o physical property requirement. Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in sizes over 3/, in. in diameter. (3) For sizes 3/, in. in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 2 4 1 HB (100 HRB) is permitted. (4) For diameters 1%and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined at I/, radius. 2004 SECTION I1 TABLE 3 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS - METRIC PRODUCTS Class Diameter, mm Minimum Tensile Yield Strength, Tempering Strength, min, 0.2% Elongation Reduction of Area, Temperature, min, offset, in 40, "C M Pa M Pa min, % min, % Hardness, max Ferritic Steels 85 4 to 6% chromium B6 13% chromium B6X 13% chromium 87 Chromium-molybdenum up to M100, incl up to M100, incl 26 HRC up to M100, incl M64 and under over M64 to MlOO over MlOO to M I 8 0 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC 302 HB or 33 HRC 277 H B or 29 H RC M64 and under MlOO and under over MlOO to M180 235 HB or 99 HRB 235 BHN or 99 RIB 235 BHN or 99 RIB 816 Chromium-molybdenum-vanadium M64 and under over M64 to MlOO over MlOO to M180 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC 302 HB or 33 HRC 277 HB or 29 HRC B ~ M ~ Chromium-molybdenum Class Diameter, mm Tensile Strength, rnin, M Pa Heat TreatmentB Yield Strength, rnin, 0.2% offset, MPa Elongation Reduction of Area, in 40, min, % min, % Hardness, max Austenitic Steels Classes 1 and 1D: 88, B8M, carbide solution treated B8P, a8LN, B8MLN, all diameters Class 1: BBC, BBT, all diame- carbide solution treated ters Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, BBMA, carbide solution treated in the finished BBPA, BBTA, B8LNA, condition B8MLNA, BBNA, BBMNA, BBMLCuNA, all diameters Classes 1 B and I D : BBN, carbide solution treated BBMN, and BBMLCuN, all diameters carbide solution treated Classes 1C and 1D: BBR, all diameters Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished condition carbide solution treated Classes 1C and 1D: 885, all diameters Class 1C: B8SA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished condition 515 205 30 50 223 HE' or 96 HRB 515 205 30 50 223 HE' or 96 HRB 515 205 30 50 192HBor90HRB 550 240 30 40 2 2 3 ~ ~ ~ o r 9 6 H R B 690 380 35 55 2 7 1 HB' or 28 HRC 690 380 35 55 271HBor28HRC 655 345 35 55 271HBor28HRC 655 345 35 55 271HBor28HRC PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 3 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS - METRIC PRODUCTS (CONT'D) Class Diameter, m m Tensile Strength, min, M Pa Heat TreatmentB Yield Strength, min, 0.2% offset, MPa Elongation Reduction of Area, i n 40, min, % min, % Hardness, max Austenitic Steels Class 2: B8, B8C, B8P, B8T, and 6 8 N D M 2 0 and under over M 2 0 t o M24, incl over M 2 4 t o M30, incl over M 3 0 t o M36, incl carbide solutioli treated and strain hardened Class 2: B8M, BBMN, B~MLCUN~ M20 and under over M 2 0 to M24, incl over M 2 4 to M30, incl over M 3 0 t o M36, incl 8 ~ Class 28: B8, ~ M48 and under over M 4 8 t o M64, incl over M 6 4 t o M72, incl 8 ~ 3 Class 2C: ~ M48 and under over M 4 8 carbide solution treated and strain hardened 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 321 321 321 321 2 ~solution treated and strain harcarbide dened HB HB HB HB or or or or 35 35 35 35 HRC HRC HRC HRC 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC 3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC carbide solution treated and strain hat= ~ dened 3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC To meet the tensile requirements, the Brillell Iiardness shall be over 200 HB (93 HRB). 'Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1 A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due t o physical property requirement. Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in sizes over M20 mm in diameter. For sizes M 2 0 mni in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 2 4 1 HB (100 HRB) is permitted. For diameters M38 and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined at '4 radius. A TABLE 4 MARI<ING OF FERRITIC STEELS Grade B5 B6 B6X 87 B 7 M [Note ( 1 ) l NOTE: (1) For explanations, see 10.2.2 and 19.1. Marking 2004 SECTION 11 TABLE 5 MARKING OF AUSTENITIC STEELS [NOTE (111 Class Grade Marltincl Class 1 Class 1 A Class 1 B Class 1C Class 1D Class 2 Class 2 8 Class 2C B8M3 B9H NOTE: (1) Classes 1, l A , l B , lC, 2, 2B, and 2C may be marked with either grade or marking listed. Class 1 D may only be marked with marking listed. PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECFICATIONS SA-193lSA-193M N These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order and in the Ordering Information, in which event the specified tests shall be made before shipment of the product. S1. High-Temperatiire Tests S1.1 Tests to determine high temperahire properties shall be made in accordance with Practice E 21, and Practices E 139, E 292, E 150, and E 151. S2. Charpy Impact Tests S2.1 Charpy impact tests based on the requirements of Specification A 320lA 320M, Section 6 and 7 shall be made as agreed between the manufachlrer and the purchaser. When testing temperatures are as low as those specified in Specification A 320lA 320M, bolting should be ordered to that specification in preference to this specification. ardness Testing of Gra S3.1 Each Grade B7M bolt or stud shall be tested for hardness by indentation method and shall meet the requirements specified in Table 2. ardness Testing of Grade S4.1 For bolts or studs 2% in. [65 mm] or smaller, the hasdness for Grade B 16 shall be measured on or near the end of each bolt or stud using one of the methods prescribed in 10.2.1 for the Brine11 or Rockwell C test. The hasdness shall be in the range 253-319 HB or 2534 HRC. S5.1 Grade and manufacturer's identification symbols shall be applied to one end of studs and to the heads of bolts of all sizes. (If the available area is inadequate, the grade symbol may be marked on one end and the manufactuser's identification symbol marked on the other end.) For bolts smaller than l/J in. [6 mm] in diamctcr and shids smaller than 3/8 in. [10 mm] in diameter and for '/4 in. [6 mm] in diameter studs requiring more than a total of three symbols, the maslcing shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and the manufachxer. S6. Stress Relieving S6.1 A stress-relieving operation shall follow straightening after heat treatment. S6.2 The minimum stress-relieving temperature shall be 100°F [55"C] below the tempering temperature. Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed after stress relieving. article Inspection S7.1 Bass shall be magnetic particle examined in accordance with Guide E 709. Bars with indications of craclcs or seams are subject to rejection if the indications extend more than 3% of the diameter into the bar. S8. Stress-Relaxation Testing S8.1 Stress-Relaxation Testing, when required, shall be done in accordance with Practice E 328. The test shall be pesfonned at 850°F [454"C] for a period of 100 h. The initial stress shall be 50 M psi (345 MPa). The residual stress at 100 h shall be 17 M psi (1 17 MPa) minimum. SA-193/SA-193M 2004 SECTION I1 G OF AUSTENITHC STEELS X1.1 Strain hardening is the increase in strength and hardness that results from plastic deformation below the recrystallization temperature (cold work). This effect is produced in austenitic stainless steel by reducing oversized bars or wire to the desired final size by cold drawing or other process. The degree of stsain hardening achievable in any alloy is limited by its strain hardening characteristics. In addition, the amount of strain hardening that can be produced is further limited by the variables of the process, such as the total amount of cross-section reduction, die angle and bar size. In large diameter bars, for example, plastic deformation will occm principally in the outer regions of the bar, so that the increased strength and hardness due to strain hardening is achieved predominantly near the surface of the bas. That is, the smaller the bas, the greater the penetration of stsain hardening. X1.2 Thus, the mechanical properties of a given strain hardened fastener are dependent not just on the alloy, but also on the size of bar from which ii is machiiled. The minimum bar size that can be used, however, is established by the configuration of the fastener, so that the configuration can affect the strength of the fastener. X1.3 For example, a stud of a particular alloy and size may be machined from a smaller diameter bas than a bolt of the same alloy and size because a larger diameter bar is required to accommodate the head of the bolt. The stud, therefore, is likely to be stronger than the same size bolt in a given alloy. X2. A 193M X3.1 See Table X2.1 fer Mzking Cress References: PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE X2.1 MARKING SYMBOL CROSS REFERENCE Grade Class Designation Marlting Symbol Used Prior to A 1931A 193M-89 Marlting Symbol Used in A 193lA 193M8 9 through A 193lA 193M-91a Marlting Symbol Used in A 193lA 193M-92 and Later Versions 88 B8C B8M B8 P B8T B8F or B8LN B8G or B8MLN B8A B8B or B8CA B8D or B8MA B8H or B8PA B8J or B8TA B8L or B8LNA B81< or BBMLNA B8V or B8NA B8W or BBMNA ~91<' or B8MLCuNA B8N B8Y or B8MN B B9JB or B8MLCuN B9A or B8R B9B or B8RA B9D or B8S B9F or B8SA 894 B95 896 897 898 899 0100 BlOl 8102 88 B8C B8 P B8T B8N BRM Option to mark with grade symbol added when A 193lA 193M-91a was published. 'Class designation corrected when A 1931A 193M-93a was published. Class or Grade added when A 193lA 193M-91a was published. A ' SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING MATERIALS FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE SA-193 /SA-193M (Identical with ASTM Specification A 193 /A 193M-98a except for differences in paras. 3.1.1 and 19.4, Note 6 of Table 1, and editorial differences in Table 2.) 1. Scope 1.1 This specification covers alloy and stainless steel bolting material for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and fittings for high-temperature service. The term “bolting material” as used in this specification covers bars, bolts, screws, studs, stud bolts and wire. Bars and wire shall be hot-wrought. The material may be further processed by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic stainless steel may be carbide solution treated or carbide solution treated and strain-hardened. When strain hardened austenitic steel is ordered, the purchaser should take special care to ensure that Appendix X1 is thoroughly understood. desired. These shall apply only when specified in the purchase order. 1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units. 2. Referenced Documents 2.1 ASTM Standards: A 29 /A 29M Specification for General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and ColdFinished A 194 /A 194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service A 320 /A 320M Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products A 479/A 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels A 484 /484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and Forgings A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements 1.2 Several grades are covered, including ferritic steels and austenitic stainless steels designated B5, B8, etc. Selection will depend upon design, service conditions, mechanical properties, and high-temperature characteristics. NOTE 1 — The committee formulating this specification has included fifteen steel types that have been rather extensively used for the present purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by the committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent. NOTE 2 — For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use at lower range of high-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 354. NOTE 3 — For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use in low-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 320 /A 320M. 1.3 Nuts for use with this bolting material are covered in Section 14. 1.4 Supplementary Requirements S1 through S8 are provided for use when additional tests or inspection are 279 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-193 /SA-193M 2004 SECTION II stainless steels; Class 1D applies to material carbide solution treated by cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature), E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials E 21 Practice for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of Metallic Materials E 139 Practice for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture, and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials E 150 Practice for Conducting Creep and Creep-Rupture Tension Tests of Metallic Materials Under Conditions of Rapid Heating and Short Times E 151 Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic Materials at Elevated Temperatures with Rapid Heating and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates E 292 Practice for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch Tension Tests of Materials E 328 Methods for Stress-Relaxation Tests for Materials and Structures E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Products, Inspection, and Rating Comprising Steel Bars, Billets, Blooms and Forgings E 566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination F 606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets 3.1.3 Quantity (that is, number of pieces or weight), 3.1.4 Description of items required (that is, bars, bolts, screws, or studs), 3.1.5 Dimensions (that is, diameter, length of point, overall length, finish, shape, and threads), 3.1.6 Nuts, if required by purchaser, in accordance with 14.1, 3.1.7 Supplementary requirements, if any, and 3.1.8 Special requirements, in accordance with 6.3, 6.6, 11.3, 15.1, 16.1, 17.1, and 18.1. 4. Manufacture (Process) 4.1 The steel shall be produced by any of the following processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace or vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The primary melting method may incorporate separate degassing or refining. The molten steel may be vacuum-treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot or strand casting. The basic-oxygen process shall be limited to steels containing not over 6% chromium. 2.2 ANSI Standards: B1.1 Screw Threads B1.13M Metric Screw Threads B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws B18.2.3.1M Metric Hex Cap Screws B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws B18.3.1M Metric Socket Head Cap Screws 4.2 Quality — To ensure soundness, ferritic steel bars and wire shall be tested in accordance with Method E 381, or other suitable method as agreed upon between the purchaser and the producer. When bar or wire is supplied, the bar or wire producer shall perform the test. When fasteners are supplied, either the bar or wire producer or the fastener producer, as agreed upon between them, shall perform the test. Quality control procedures shall be sufficient to demonstrate that the testing was performed and that the results were acceptable. A bar lot consisting of one heat or 10 000 lbs whichever is smaller, shall be represented by a minimum of one macroetch. Visual examination of transverse sections shall show no imperfections worse than the macrographs of Method E 381 S4-R4-C4 or equivalent as agreed upon. Distinct zones of solidification shall not be present. 2.3 AIAG Standard: AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag Application Standard 3. Ordering Information 3.1 The inquiry and order for material under this specification shall include the following as required to describe the material adequately: 3.1.1 Specification, designation, year date, and grade. 5. Discard 5.1 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation. 3.1.2 Heat-treated condition (that is, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered, for the ferritic materials, and carbide solution treated (Class 1), carbide solution treated after finishing (Class 1A), and carbide solution treated and strain hardened (Classes 2, 2B, and 2C), for the austenitic stainless steels; Classes 1B and 1C apply to the carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing 6. Heat Treatment 6.1 Ferritic steels shall be properly heat treated as best suits the high-temperature characteristics of each 280 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS grade. Immediately after rolling or forging, the bolting material shall be allowed to cool to a temperature below the cooling transformation range. The materials which are to be furnished in the liquid-quenched condition shall then be uniformly reheated to the proper temperature to refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as a “quenching charge”) and quenched in a liquid medium under substantially uniform conditions for each quenching charge. Use of water quenching is prohibited for any ferritic grade when heat treatment is part of the fastener manufacturing process. This prohibition does not apply to heat treated bar or to fasteners machined therefrom. Material Grade B16 shall be heated to a temperature range of 1700°F to 1750°F [925°C to 954°C] and oil quenched. The materials that are to be furnished in the normalized or air-quenched condition shall be reheated to the proper temperature to refine the grain and cooled uniformly in air to a temperature below the transformation temperature range. The material, whether liquidquenched or normalized, shall then be uniformly reheated for tempering. The minimum tempering temperature shall be as specified in Table 2 and Table 3. 6.1.1 Quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered ferritic material that is subsequently cold drawn for dimensional control shall be stress-relieved after cold drawing. The minimum stress-relief temperature shall be 100°F [55°C] below the tempering temperature. Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed after stress relieving. 6.3.2 Class 1D — Rolled or forged Grades B8, B8M, B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, B8N, B8MN, B8R, and B8S bar shall be cooled rapidly immediately following hot working while the temperature is above 1750°F [955°C], so that grain boundary carbides are in solution (see A 479-88b and subsequent revisions). Class 1D shall be restricted to applications at temperatures less than 850°F [455°C]. 6.3.3 Class 1A and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA — Finished fasteners shall be carbide solution treated after all rolling, forging, heading, and threading operations are complete. This designation does not apply to starting material such as bar. Fasteners shall be heated from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide. 6.3.4 Classes 2, 2B, and 2C — Material shall be carbide solution treated by heating from ambient temperature and holding a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into solution and then cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide. Following this treatment the material shall then be strain hardened to achieve the required properties. NOTE 4 — Heat treatment following operations performed on a limited portion of the product, such as heading, may result in non-uniform grain size and mechanical properties through the section affected. 6.4 If scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be specified in the purchase order. 6.2 Both B6 and B6X materials shall be held, at the tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1 h. Identification Symbol B6X material may be furnished in the as-rolled-and-tempered condition. Cold working is permitted with the hardness limitation (26 HRC maximum) of Table 2 for the B6X grade. 6.5 B7 and B7M bolting shall be heat treated by quenching in a liquid medium and tempering. For B7M bolting, the final heat treatment, which may be the tempering operation if conducted at 1150°F [620°C] minimum, shall be done after all machining and forming operations, including thread rolling, are complete. 6.3 All austenitic stainless steels shall receive a carbide solution treatment (see 6.3.1, 6.3.4 for specific requirements for each class). Classes 1, 1B, 1C (Grades B8R and B8S only), 2, 2B, and 2C can apply to bar, wire, and finished fasteners. Class 1A (all grades) and Class 1C (Grades B8RA and B8SA only) can apply to finished fasteners. Class 1D applies only to bar and wire and finished fasteners that are machined directly from Class 1D bar or wire without any subsequent hot or cold working. 6.3.1 Classes 1 and 1B, and Class 1C Grades B8R and B8S — After rolling of the bar, forging, or heading, whether done hot or cold, the material shall be heated from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide. 6.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, material for Grade B7 may be heat treated by the Furnace, the Induction or the Electrical Resistance method. NOTE 5 — It should be taken into consideration that stress-relaxation properties may vary from heat lot to heat lot or these properties may vary from one heat treating method to another. The purchaser may specify Requirement S8, if stress-relaxation testing is desired. 7. Chemical Composition 7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 1. Steels with added lead shall not be used. 7.2 The steel shall not contain an unspecified element for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel conforms 281 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS SA-193 /SA-193M Not for Resale SA-193 /SA-193M 2004 SECTION II to the requirements of another grade for which that element is a specified element. Furthermore, elements present in concentrations greater than 0.75 weight/% shall be reported. Chemical analysis shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods A 751. where: Ts p wedge tensile strength UTS p tensile strength specified in Table 2, and As p stress area, square inches, as shown in ANSI B1.1 or calculated as follows: As p 0.785 (D − (0.974/n))2 8. Heat Analysis 8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be made from a test specimen taken during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 7. For strand cast materials, the requirements of 8.2 and 8.3 of Specification A 788 shall be met. Should the purchaser deem it necessary to have the transition zone of two heats sequentially cast discarded, the purchaser shall invoke Supplementary Requirement S3 of Specification A 788. where: D p nominal thread size, and n p the number of threads per inch 10.2 Hardness Requirements: 10.2.1 The hardness shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2. Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with either Test Methods and Definitions A 370 or with Test Methods F 606. In the event a controversy exists relative to minimum strength, tension tests shall prevail over hardness readings. 10.2.2 Grade B7M — The maximum hardness of the grade shall be 235 HB or 99 HRB (conversion in accordance with Table 2B of Test Methods and Definitions A 370). The minimum hardness shall not be less than 200 HB or 93 HRB. Conformance to this hardness shall be insured by testing the hardness of each stud or bolt by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance with 10.2.1. The use of 100% electromagnetic testing for hardness as an alternative to 100% indentation hardness testing is permissible when qualified by sampling using indentation hardness testing. Each lot tested for hardness electromagnetically shall be 100% examined in accordance with Practice E 566. Following electromagnetic testing for hardness a random sample of a minimum of 100 pieces of each heat of steel in each lot (as defined in 13.1.2) shall be tested by indentation hardness methods. All samples must meet hardness requirements to permit acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the specified maximum or minimum hardness, the lot shall be rejected and either reprocessed and resampled or tested 100% by indentation hardness methods. Product which has been 100% tested and found acceptable shall have a line under the grade symbol. 9. Product Analysis 9.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser from samples representing the bolting material. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements of Section 7. 10. Mechanical Properties 10.1 Tensile Properties: 10.1.1 Requirements — The material as represented by the tension specimens shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2 at room temperature after heat treatment. 10.1.2 Method of Test — Tension test shall be made in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370, including the parts of Annex A3 “Steel Fasteners” applicable to machined test specimens. The speed of testing shall not exceed the limits specified in 7.4.1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The yield strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2% of the gage length of the specimen shall be determined. 10.2.2.1 Surface preparation for indentation hardness testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods E 18. Hardness tests shall be performed on the end of the bolt or stud. When this is impractical, the hardness test shall be performed elsewhere. 10.1.3 Full Size Fasteners, Wedge Tensile Testing — When applicable, see 13.1.4, headed fasteners shall be wedge tested full size in accordance with Annex A3 of A 370 and shall conform to the tensile strength shown in Table 2. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf) for individual sizes shall be as follows: Ts p UTS ⴛ As 11. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 11.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be pointed and shall have a workmanlike finish. Points shall (1) 282 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS (2) Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Diameter, in. [mm] be flat and chamfered or rounded at option of the manufacturer. Length of points on studs and stud bolts shall be not less than one nor more than two complete threads as measured from the extreme end parallel to the axis. Length of studs and stud bolts shall be measured from first thread to first thread. 1 1 ⁄8 [30] and under Over 11⁄8 [30] to 13⁄4 [42], incl Over 13⁄4 [42] to 21⁄2 [64], incl Over 21⁄2 [64] 11.2 Standard permissible variations for dimensions of bars shall be as prescribed in Specification A 29 /A 29M and Specification A 484/A 484M, latest revisions. SA-193 /SA-193M Lot Size 1500 lb [780 kg] or fraction thereof 4500 lb [2000 kg] or fraction thereof 6000 lb [2700 kg] or fraction thereof 100 pieces or fraction thereof 13.1.3 Tension tests are not required to be made on bolts, screws, studs, or stud bolts that are fabricated from heat-treated bars furnished in accordance with the requirements of this specification and tested in accordance with 13.1.1, provided they are not given a subsequent heat treatment. 11.3 Bolt heads shall be in accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M. Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the Heavy Hex Screws Series should be used, except the maximum body diameter and radius of fillet may be the same as for the Heavy Hex Bolt Series. The body diameter and head fillet radius for sizes of Heavy Hex Cap Screws and Bolts that are not shown in their respective tables in ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M may be that shown in the corresponding Hex Cap Screw and Bolt Tables respectively. Socket head fasteners shall be in accordance with ANSI B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M. 13.1.4 Full Size Specimens, Headed Fasteners — Headed fasteners 11⁄2 in. in body diameter and smaller, with body length three times the diameter or longer, and which are produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold) shall be subjected to full size testing in accordance with 10.1.3. This testing shall be in addition to tensile testing as specified in 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. The lot size shall be as shown in 13.1.2. Failure shall occur in the body or threaded section with no failure, or indications of failure, such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank. 12. Retests 12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test lot do not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may retreat such lot not more than twice, in which case two additional tension tests shall be made from such lot, all of which shall conform to the requirements specified. 14. Nuts 14.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts shall be furnished with nuts, when specified in the purchase order. Nuts shall conform to Specification A 194 /A 194M. 13. Test Specimens 13.1 Tension test specimens taken from finished bolts, screws, studs, or stud bolts shall be machined to the form and dimensions and shall be taken from positions shown in A3.2.1.7 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Tension test specimens from bar stock are covered by Annex A1.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, Annex A1. 15. Threads 15.1 When inch series product is ordered, all bolts, studs, stud bolts, and accompanying nuts, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order shall be threaded in accordance with ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit, sizes 1 in. and smaller in diameter with the coarse-thread series, and 11⁄8 in. and larger in diameter with the 8-pitch-thread series. When metric product is ordered, threads shall be metric coarse thread series as specified in ANSI B1.13M, and shall have Grade 6G tolerances. 13.1.1 Number of Tests — For heat-treated bars, one tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat represented in each tempering charge. When heat treated without interruption in continuous furnaces, the material in a lot shall be the same heat, same prior condition, same size and subjected to the same heat treatment. Not fewer than two tension tests are required for each lot containing 20 000 lb [9000 kg] or less. Every additional 10 000 lb [4500 kg] or fraction thereof requires one additional test. 15.2 Where practical, all threads shall be formed after heat treatment. Class 1A, Grades B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA, B8MNA, and B8MLCuNA, and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA are to be solution treated in the finished condition. 16. Inspection 16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have entry, at all time while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the place of 13.1.2 For studs, bolts, screws, etc., one tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat involved in the lot. Each lot shall consist of the following: 283 --`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale SA-193 /SA-193M 2004 SECTION II manufacture that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. supplementary requirements or other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract and was found to meet those requirements. 18.2.2 The specification number, year date, and identification symbol. 19. Product Marking 19.1 Grade/class and manufacturer’s identification symbols shall be applied to one end of studs 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] in diameter and larger and to the heads of bolts 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] in diameter and larger. (If the available area is inadequate, the grade symbol may be marked on one end and the manufacturer’s identification symbol marked on the other end.) The identification symbol shall be as shown in Table 4 and 5. Grade B7M which has been 100% evaluated in conformance with the specification, shall have a line under the grade symbol to distinguish it from B7M produced to previous specification revisions not requiring 100% hardness testing. 17. Rejection and Rehearing 17.1 Unless otherwise specified in the basis of purchase, any rejection based on tests made in accordance with Section 9 shall be reported to the manufacturer within 30 days from the receipt of samples by the purchaser. 17.2 Material that shows defects subsequent to its acceptance at the place of manufacture shall be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified. 19.2 For bolting materials, including threaded bars, that are furnished bundled and tagged or boxed, the tags and boxes shall carry the grade symbol for the material identification and the manufacturer’s identification mark or name. 17.3 Samples tested in accordance with Section 9 that represent rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the date of the test report. In the case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manufacturer may make claim for a rehearing within that time. 19.3 For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the fastener was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with the specification and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this specification. 18. Certification 18.1 The producer of the raw material or finished fasteners shall furnish a certification to the purchaser or his representative showing the results of the chemical analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon and Alloy Steels Only), and mechanical tests, and state the method of heat treatment employed. 18.2 Certification shall also include at least the following: 19.4 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in 19.1, 19.2, and 19.3, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B-5 02.00. If used on small items, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag. 18.2.1 A statement that the material or the fasteners, or both, were manufactured, sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with the specification and any 20. Keywords 20.1 hardness; heat treatment 284 Copyright ASME International Provided by IHS under license with ASME No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS SA-193 /SA-193M TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (1)] Type Ferritic Steels Grade Description B5 B6 and B6X 5% Chromium 12% Chromium AISI Type 410 Range Carbon Manganese, max Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon Chromium Molybdenum Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)] Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)] 0.01 under 0.03 over 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.10 0.05 0.15 max 1.00 0.040 0.03 1.00 max 11.5–13.5 ... 0.01 over 0.03 over 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.15 ... 0.10 min 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 max 4.0–6.0 0.40–0.65 Type Ferritic Steels Grade Description Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon Chromium Molybdenum Vanadium Aluminum, max % [Note (5)] B7, B7M B16 Chromium-Molybdenum [Note (3)] Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)] Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)] 0.37–0.49 [Note (4)] 0.65–1.10 0.035 0.040 0.15–0.35 0.75–1.20 0.15–0.25 ... ... 0.02 0.04 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.02 0.05 0.02 ... ... 0.36–0.47 0.45–0.70 0.035 0.040 0.15–0.35 0.80–1.15 0.50–0.65 0.25–0.35 0.015 0.02 0.03 0.005 over 0.005 over 0.02 0.05 0.03 0.03 ... Type Austenitic Steels, [Note (6)] Classes 1, 1A, 1D, and 2 Grade B8, B8A Description Carbon, max Manganese, max Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max Silicon, max Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Columbium + tantalum AISI Type 304 Range Product Variation, Over or Under [Note (2)] 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 ... ... 0.01 over 0.04 over 0.010 over 0.005 over 0.05 over 0.20 0.15 ... ... B8C, B8CA B8M, B8MA, B8M2, B8M3 B8P, B8PA AISI Type 316 AISI Type 305 with restricted carbon AISI Type 347 Range 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0
0
Anuncio
Descargar
Anuncio
Añadir este documento a la recogida (s)
Puede agregar este documento a su colección de estudio (s)
Iniciar sesión Disponible sólo para usuarios autorizadosAñadir a este documento guardado
Puede agregar este documento a su lista guardada
Iniciar sesión Disponible sólo para usuarios autorizados